1. LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
1.1. COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
1.2. CONDITIONS OF USE
The user accepts all responsibility for the use of this information & accepts all liability associated with such use.
 
2. Site Information - About the Knowledge Base, Ticket System etc
2.1. Site Information - How To

 

2.1.1. Priority Response - Help & "How To"
2.1.1.1. New User - Registration for Priority Response
If you HAVE NOT registered previously to use our Priority Response system please do this:
  • Visit www.richmondrc.com,
    • > Enter the Site,
    • > Support Services,
    • > Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You,
    • Priority Response Register Now for Priority Treatment [New Window]
      • Enter all of your contact information into the template
        • Capitalize the first letters of your Name, City, State, Country as you would normally
        • Use your formal first name not a contraction or nick name. i.e. Robert... not Bob, Rebecca... not Becky
      • We strongly suggest the following approach to creating login's and passwords:
        • For your password and login use all lower case as in xxx not XXX or XxX
        • For your login (sometimes referred to as user name), use your email address (all lower case)
        • For your password... use your formal first name (all lower case) followed immedately by a string of 4+ digits that mean something to you. i.e. robert23456 or rebecca78923
        • Write down your login and password now! Exactly as you created it! Keep it safe and private.
      • > Save
        • You will see a screen message saying you are successfully registered.
        • If the system reports an error and will not accept your login and password it is likely because you have a login and/or password that is already in the system.
      • > Close
      • Close your browser
        • Hint: Use the browser menu bar > File (top left) > Close), or
        • Hint: > The X in the top right corner of the browser window frame.
      • This completes the one time registration process.
        • Hint: You will not normally have to do this again unless you lose your login and password information.
      • We suggest logging out and then logging back in.  
        • Hint: This ensures a clean exit and restart after the registration process.

 

2.1.1.2. Priority Response Tickets - Help & "How To"
2.1.1.2.1. Priority Response Tickets - Add a New Ticket - How To

Question: How do I Add a Ticket using the Priority Response system?

Answer: 

To Add (open, create) a (new) Ticket using the Priority Response system please read the following information carefully.   

A. Introduction

B. The Procedure - Step by Step

Step 1: Access the Priority Response system

Step 2: Identify Yourself

Step 3: Add a Ticket

C. Troubleshooting

Please review all information from beginning to end before proceeding. Look over the Troubleshooting section  as well. This will point out pitfalls and questions that have arisen in the past to help you stay clear of common problems and/or resolve them quickly.


 

A. Introduction

Work with TIckets using the Prioirity Response system. Our Response Center receives IMMEDIATE notification whenever you Add a Ticket. Please do NOT NOT NOT use eMail to add a ticket, reply to, edit, respond to notifications about or otherwise work with Tickets.  The Priority Response system provides the "tools" to add and manage Tickets and ensures that your Ticket issue is resolved as quickly as possible.

  • These instructions assume that you have a basic knowledge of how to work with a computer equipped with a graphical user interface (GUI) such as Windows and that you are familiar with an internet browser such as Internet Explorer (IE). If you do not have these prerequisites you may wish to get someone to assist you.
    • In cases where we give hints to the operation of the computer, the operating system or the browser, these hints are based on the assumption that you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) as your browser on an Intel based PC running Windows XP. Windows 2000 and versions of Windows later than XP, generally are similar in operation but details may vary slightly from version to version.  
  • It may be helpful to have these instructions in a printed form. For novice users we strongly suggest printing these instructions. To print, look for the three icons in the top right of this article, they are near the Logout and Help buttons. If you cannot see these icons or buttons use your mouse to scroll the screen view further to the right. Mouse over the icons and you will see what they do. Click on the middle icon to print out this information. Then respond to the prompts and printing instructions provided by your computer.
  • Within this document
    • The ">" symbol means "click on".
    • Information tagged as Hints may be unnessary for experienced users.
  • These instructions should be followed EXACTLY. If something does not appear to work for you, back up a step or two and review the instructions again carefully. Do NOT skip steps.


B: The Procedure - Step by Step

Please Do Step 1 ... then Step 2 ...  then Step 3.
  • Step 1:  Access the Priority Response system.
  • Step 2:  Identify Yourself
  • Step 3:  Add a Ticket using the Priority Response system.


 

Step 1:  Access the Priority Response System.

  • > www.richmondrc.com
    • Hint: > means "Click On"
    • Hint: Or type www.richmondrc.com into the address bar of your web browser and press the Enter key.
  • > Welcome
  • > Support Services
    • Hint: See the middle of the menu bar near the top.
  • > Priority Response - VERY FAST - We respond within 1 Business Day [New Window]
    • Hint: Look about 3-4 lines down from the top 
    • Recommendation > [New Window] to open in a New Window


Step 2: Identify Yourself

The next steps depend on if you HAVE or HAVE NOT registered previously to use our Priority Response system. Normally Step 2.2 is only done once... i.e. when first using the Priority Response system.

  • If you HAVE registered previously please follow the instructions in 2.1
  • If you HAVE NOT registered previously please follow the instructions in 2.2

2.1) If you HAVE registered previously to use our Priority Response system continue here:

  • Login for PRIORITY RESPONSE
    • Hint: Move your cursor to the blank Login box about 1-2 inches down near the left edge below the Login for PRIORITY RESPONSE title.
    • Hint: If you followed our recommendation your Login will be your email address that you supplied the first time when you registered to use the Priority Response system.  
    • Hint: Type your login. (usually all lower case)
    • Hint: If you do not have a login and password, follow the New User? First Time? Takes 1 Minute! Immediate Setup! link
  • Password
    • Hint: Move your cursor to the blank Password box
    • Hint: Look about an inch to the right.
    • Hint: Type your password
    • Hint: If you followed our recommendations, your password will be all lower case text followed by some numbers
  • > Go
    • Hint: You may get a prompt from Windows at this point asking you if want Windows to remember this password. > Yes or > No.
      • Hint: Choosing Yes will avoid having to re-enter the password in the future
  • > Priority Response (Tickets)
    • Hint: See the middle area of the menu bar near the top
  • See Section 3 below

2.2) If you HAVE NOT registered previously to use our Priority Response system please do this:

  • Consult the related document (see below) entitled "New User - Registration for Priority Response" and follow the instructions there.
  • After Registering if you have not logged out and logged back in we recommend that you do so.
  • Then Go back to Step 1 and then go to step 2.1 and Step 3.
    • Hint: This ensures a clean exit and restart after the registration process.


 

Step 3:  Add a Ticket. 

  • > Add a Ticket
    • Hint: look near left side of screen about 1-2 inches from the top
  • Provide a brief Summary of Feedback, Problem or Question
    • Hint: Move your cursor the blank box below the title Summary of Feedback, Problem or Question
    • Hint: Type the Summary information
    • Hint: i.e. Shipping Damage, How do I do such and such etc
    • Hint: If you put the product name (i.e. Apache) or part number (i.e. VMA-A140X) in your Summary or can describe the problem relative to common modelling terms (i.e. CG)  or components (i.e. covering), you may be able to get the answer you are looking for by then clicking on Search in Articles which will search our Knowledge Base for articles that may be able to help you.  
  • Select the Product from the product pop down menu
    • Hint: Click the down arrow and scroll the slider bar to see the products.
    • Hint: Choosing the product will help speed up processing of your Ticket. If your product is not shown, choose from one of the generic (i.e ...OTHER) or choose Not Selected.
  • Select the Category by scrolling the slider bar.
    • Hint: Choosing the category will help speed up processing of your Ticket. If no category is suitable for your purposes choose Not Selected.
    • Hint: i.e. PROBLEM - Shipment - - , Question after Purchase etc.
  • Provide a Description of your problem, issue or question.
    • Hint: Move your cursor to the blank box below the title Description
    • Hint: Type the Description.
    • Hint: Include information about where you made your purchase.
    • Hint: Include your customer number if known. It helps identify you
    • Hint: Include your invoice number if known. It helps identify your purchase.
    • Hint: i.e. My customer number (top center of my invoice) is #####. The invoice number (top right of my invoice) is #####. My whatchmacallit has arrived and I have inspected it and found that suchandsuch is broken.  I have read over all of the Read Me First documents that came with my invoice and the product manuals etc and would like to know what to do next
  • > Send
    • Hint: > Send & Attach if you can attach pictures of the problem or pictures that help illustrate your issue using your digital camera  
  • > Logout
    • Hint: The Logout button is located in the menu bar near the top of the Priority Response Window. Look for the menu bar below the Graphic labelled KNOWLEDGE BASE... the first entry (leftmost) in the menu bar is Articles, then Most Popular Articles... keep going towards the right looking for Logout.
    • Hint: You may need to scroll the screen view further to the right in order to see the Logout button in the Priority Response menu bar.


 

C: Troubleshooting

1. These instructions should be followed EXACTLY. If something does not appear to work for you, back up a step or two and review the instructions again carefully. Do NOT skip steps.

2. Write down your login and password information exactly as you entered it and as you are entering it. Safeguard this carefully. The vast majority of inquiries we get are from people who have lost or forgotten their login and password.

We strongly recommend:

  • Use the KISS (Keep It Simple Stupid) method but something that is unique to you.
  • Use all lower case letters as in xxx not XXX. Do not mix case like AbCe. You will forget if you mix case.
  • For your login (sometimes referred to as username)... use your email address
  • For your password... use your formal first name followed immediately by a string of 4+ digits that mean something to you.
    • Some examples of passwords appear below:
      • david1963  as in david not dave and as in 1963 for year of birth
      • robert19581126 as in robert not bob and 19581126 as in YYYY (year) MM (month) DD (day) i.e. in this case 1958 Nov 26th.
      • rebecca94302 as in rebecca not becky and as in 94302 your zipcode
      • richard1969 as in richard not rick and as in 1969 the year man first landed on the moon

3. Reboot from COLD COLD COLD: Sometimes computers, web browsers and web browser "cookies" get muddled up. This is particularly the case with older computer systems having limited memory and/or older versions of operating systems such as Windows 98. You can spend a great deal of time mucking around trying to solve problems and never actually figure it out.

Before you drive yourself crazy, start tearing boards out of your computer or reloading software...

  • Save all your unsaved computer files.
  • Close your browser and all other software applications.
  • Shut all hardware down. Everything... computer, monitor, router, modem, power... the whole works.
  • Wait til the computer is making no noise at all and then:
    • Power up your modem and/or router
    • Power up network switch, hub etc
    • Power up your monitor
    • Power up your computer
  • Fire up your internet browser before doing anything else with your computer.
  • Try to access Priority Response.  

4. I Added a Ticket. The Response Center received my Ticket and asked me for some information. I sent the information back to them by email but never heard anything more. What's going on?

    • Well, you used email to manage a Ticket. It likely got mixed in with the several hundred general sales emails, spam, come-ons for get rich quick schemes, cheap drugs and other nefarious drivel. Our sales staff may or may not see it and forward it to our Response Center. It could take days or it may never happen at all.
    • If this happens to you, we suggest going back to the Ticket system and adding your information again within the Ticket system.
    • Please remember the following:
      • Work with TIckets using the Prioirity Response system. Our Response Center receives IMMEDIATE notification whenever you Add a Ticket. Please do NOT NOT NOT use eMail to add a ticket, reply to, edit, respond to notifications about or otherwise work with Tickets.  The Priority Response system provides the "tools" to add and manage Tickets and ensures that your Ticket issue is resolved as quickly as possible.
2.1.1.2.2. Priority Response Tickets - Work with an Existing Ticket - How To

Please do not reply to, add to, edit or otherwise work with Tickets by eMail or send an eMail in response to any eMail notification about a Ticket.

  • It may be helpful when working with Tickets to have these instructions in a printed form. To print, look for the three icons in the top right of this article, just below the Logout button. Mouse over the icons and you will see what they do. Click on the middle icon to print out this information.
  • See below for how to work with a Ticket.
  • Working within the Priority Response Ticket System helps to ensure that your issue continues to be expedited.
  • Within this document the ">" symbol means "click on".

To Edit, View or add a Note (such as a reply or information) or Attach a file such as a picture to a Ticket please:

  • Go To: www.richmondrc.com
  • > Enter the Site
  • > Support Services (see the middle of the menu bar near the top)
  • > Priority Response - VERY FAST
    • Hint: Look about 3-4 lines down from the top
    • Recommendation: > [New Window] to open in a New Window
  • Login for Priority Response (usually your email address)
  • Enter your password that you set up when you registered.
  • Click on Priority Response (Tickets) near the center of the top menu bar

You will then see a list of your Tickets. If not then look at (but don't click) the Add a Ticket button. Directly below it is a Status control. Use the down arrow and change Status to All. Then go all the way to the right and click on the button marked Apply. This will reveal all of your Tickets regardless of their Status.

 

The Ticket cue is stacked with the most recent Ticket at the top. Look near the left margin and you will find the column header labels “View”,  “Attach”, “Notes” and “#” and icons related to these labels. (Hint: The icons will confirm their actions if you mouse over them and pause briefly.)

 

Locate the Ticket # that you want to work with.  

To View the Ticket click the View Icon associated with this Ticket

 

To Attach a file (such as a picture) click the Attach Icon. Then browse to your file (one file at a time), click Upload. Repeat if you have another file to Attach.

 

To add a Note (such as an answer to a question we may have or to add additional info) click the Notes Icon. Type your Note, click Save. Repeat if another Note.

 

After you have Viewed, Attached file(s) and/or added Note(s), if you need to do more, simply repeat this process.

 

When you are finished for now, Logout via the Logout button at the right end of the top menu bar.

 

Please note that we receive immediate notification of any input you provide to a Ticket. This ensures that your issue continues to get Priority treatment.

Please do not reply to, add to, edit or otherwise work with Tickets by eMail or send an eMail in response to any eMail notification about a Ticket.  Working within the Ticket System helps to ensure that your issue continues to be expedited.  eMails end up in our general eMail cue mixed with reams of junk mail and spam.

2.1.1.3. Notification Service - Subscribe Now
For automated update notifications please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service
 
2.1.1.3.1. Priority Response Notification Service - Help & "How To"
The Priority Response Notification Service within our Knowledge Base provides registered Priority Response members with the option to automatically be informed about changes or additions to articles and/or sub-articles in our Knowledge Base.

When changes or additions are detected to subscribed articles, the Priority Response Notification Service checks an internal list of registered Priority Response members who have subscribed to these Articles and automatically sends an email to the subscribers who have indicated they wish to be notified. 

The Notification Service is an extremely powerful feature available to our registered Priority Response members.

Here are some typical examples of use:

  • You've just bought one of our products and want to watch for updates to the Read Me First documents to ensure you are always up to date.
  • A user of one of our products offers up a suggestion for making assembly easier or enhancing the performance. We create a sub-Article and append this sub-Article under the existing main Article for the product. All Priority Response members who have subscribed to the product Article and its sub-Articles will automatically be emailed a link to the new information.
  • Any Article and/or sub-Article can be subscribed to. If you want to keep up to date without having to periodically poke thru the information on your own, register for Priority Response now and you'll be ready to subscribe to the information of your choice!

 

2.1.1.3.1.1. Priority Response Notification Service - How To Subscribe

Question: How do I Subscribe to the Notification Service using the Priority Response system?

Answer: 

To subscribe to the our Priority Response Notification Service please read the following information carefully.   

A. Introduction

B. The Procedure - Step by Step

Step 1: Access the Priority Response Notification Service

Step 2: Identify Yourself

Step 3: Subscribe to an Article &/or sub-Article

C. Troubleshooting

Please review all information from beginning to end before proceeding. Look over the Troubleshooting section  as well. This will point out pitfalls and questions that have arisen in the past to help you stay clear of common problems and/or resolve them quickly.


 

A. Introduction

  • These instructions assume that you have a basic knowledge of how to work with a computer equipped with a graphical user interface (GUI) such as Windows and that you are familiar with an internet browser such as Internet Explorer (IE). If you do not have these prerequisites you may wish to get someone to assist you.
    • In cases where we give hints to the operation of the computer, the operating system or the browser, these hints are based on the assumption that you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) as your browser on an Intel based PC running Windows XP. Windows 2000 and versions of Windows later than XP, generally are similar in operation but details may vary slightly from version to version.  
  • It may be helpful to have these instructions in a printed form. For novice users we strongly suggest printing these instructions. To print, look for the three icons in the top right of this article, they are near the Logout and Help buttons. If you cannot see these icons or buttons use your mouse to scroll the screen view further to the right. Mouse over the icons and you will see what they do. Click on the middle icon to print out this information. Then respond to the prompts and printing instructions provided by your computer.
  • Within this document
    • The ">" symbol means "click on".
    • Information tagged as Hints may be unnessary for experienced users.
  • These instructions should be followed EXACTLY. If something does not appear to work for you, back up a step or two and review the instructions again carefully. Do NOT skip steps.


B: The Procedure - Step by Step

Please Do Step 1 ... then Step 2 ...  then Step 3.
  • Step 1:  Access the Priority Response Notificaition Service.
  • Step 2:  Identify Yourself
  • Step 3:  Subscribe to an Article &/or sub-Article.


 

Step 1:  Access the Priority Response Notification Service.

  • > www.richmondrc.com
    • Hint: > means "Click On"
    • Hint: Or type www.richmondrc.com into the address bar of your web browser and press the Enter key.
  • > Welcome
  • > Support Services
    • Hint: See the middle of the menu bar near the top.
  • > Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You [New Window]
    • Hint: Look about 3-4 lines down from the top 
    • Recommendation > [New Window] to open in a New Window


Step 2: Identify Yourself

The next steps depend on if you HAVE or HAVE NOT registered previously to use our Priority Response system. Normally Step 2.2 is only done once... i.e. when first using the Priority Response system.

  • If you HAVE registered previously please follow the instructions in 2.1
  • If you HAVE NOT registered previously please follow the instructions in 2.2

2.1) If you HAVE registered previously to use our Priority Response system continue here:

  • Login for PRIORITY RESPONSE
    • Hint: Move your cursor to the blank Login box about 1-2 inches down near the left edge below the Login for PRIORITY RESPONSE title.
    • Hint: If you followed our recommendation your Login will be your email address that you supplied the first time when you registered to use the Priority Response system.  
    • Hint: Type your login. (usually all lower case)
    • Hint: If you do not have a login and password, follow the New User? First Time? Takes 1 Minute! Immediate Setup! link
  • Password
    • Hint: Move your cursor to the blank Password box
    • Hint: Look about an inch to the right.
    • Hint: Type your password
    • Hint: If you followed our recommendations, your password will be all lower case text followed by some numbers
  • > Go
    • Hint: You may get a prompt from Windows at this point asking you if want Windows to remember this password. > Yes or > No.
      • Hint: Choosing Yes will avoid having to re-enter the password in the future

2.2) If you HAVE NOT registered previously to use our Priority Response system please do this:

  • Consult the related document (see below) entitled "New User - Registration for Priority Response" and follow the instructions there.
  • After Registering if you have not logged out and logged back in we recommend that you do so.
  • Then Go back to Step 1 and then go to step 2.1 and Step 3.
    • Hint: This ensures a clean exit and restart after the registration process.


 

Step 3:  Subscribe to an Article &/or sub-Article.  

  • > Articles
    • Hint: look near the top left corner of the page. Look under the K in Knowledge Base. 
  • Browse the Table of Contents (TOC): Find the article or sub-article that you are interested in subscribing to.
    • Hint: The left margin TOC is a great navigation tool 
    • Hint: Most users will be interested in the Technical Info articles &/or sub articles.
  • Drill down into the TOC to find articles &/or sub-articles that interest you. 
    • When you have found the article and/or sub-articles that you want to subscribe to:
      • Look near the top right of the Knowledge Base window just below the "Logout" and "Logged as:" text.
      • You will see a small envelope with a red tick mark. This is the Subscribe icon.
        • Roll over it and it will echo back "Subscribe"
    • > the Subscribe Icon (small envelope with red tick mark)
      • If you want the article you are currently in plus all sub-articles "below" that article, put a check mark in the box to the left of Article/SubArticle in the pop-up window.
      • If you want the article you are currently in but not its sub-articles, then leave the Article/SubArticle box unchecked.
    • Leave the Category check box unchecked. 
    • To select the Notification Type click the down arrow and scroll the slider bar to see the various notification types.
      • Choose from: (we recommend Daily email notification)
        • Instant email notification.
          • The Priority Response system will email you shortly after any changes or additions to articles/sub-articles you have subscribed to. This can become a bit of a nuisance when we are making a lot of edits over an extended period of time during a day. This is likely not the best choice overall for most users. If we are doing a lot of edits to an article or adding a lot of sub-articles and make 15 discrete edits to the article or additions of sub-articles over a period of a few hours in a day, you will get 15 separate notifications during the day.
        • Daily email notification.
          • The Priority Response system will email the results of all changes or additions to articles/sub-articles you have subscribed to at one time once per day. This is likely the best choice. If we are doing a lot of edits to an article and make 15 discrete edits to the article over a period of a few hours in a day, you will get only the final version, not every single edit along the way. Same thing for additions, you will get them all in one notification.
        • Weekly email notification.
          • Works like Daily email notification in that the Priority Response system rounds up all changes to articles/sub-articles that you have subscribed to and then sends the final version only. May result in you waiting up to 7 days for changes made.
        • > Submit
        • > Close 

 

C: Troubleshooting

1. These instructions should be followed EXACTLY. If something does not appear to work for you, back up a step or two and review the instructions again carefully. Do NOT skip steps.

2. Write down your login and password information exactly as you entered it and as you are entering it. Safeguard this carefully. The vast majority of inquiries we get are from people who have lost or forgotten their login and password.

We strongly recommend:

  • Use the KISS (Keep It Simple Stupid) method but something that is unique to you.
  • Use all lower case letters as in xxx not XXX. Do not mix case like AbCe. You will forget if you mix case.
  • For your login (sometimes referred to as username)... use your email address
  • For your password... use your formal first name followed immediately by a string of 4+ digits that mean something to you.
    • Some examples of passwords appear below:
      • david1963  as in david not dave and as in 1963 for year of birth
      • robert19581126 as in robert not bob and 19581126 as in YYYY (year) MM (month) DD (day) i.e. in this case 1958 Nov 26th.
      • rebecca94302 as in rebecca not becky and as in 94302 your zipcode
      • richard1969 as in richard not rick and as in 1969 the year man first landed on the moon

3. Reboot from COLD COLD COLD: Sometimes computers, web browsers and web browser "cookies" get muddled up. This is particularly the case with older computer systems having limited memory and/or older versions of operating systems such as Windows 98. You can spend a great deal of time mucking around trying to solve problems and never actually figure it out.

Before you drive yourself crazy, start tearing boards out of your computer or reloading software...

  • Save all your unsaved computer files.
  • Close your browser and all other software applications.
  • Shut all hardware down. Everything... computer, monitor, router, modem, power... the whole works.
  • Wait til the computer is making no noise at all and then:
    • Power up your modem and/or router
    • Power up network switch, hub etc
    • Power up your monitor
    • Power up your computer
  • Fire up your internet browser before doing anything else with your computer.
  • Try to access Priority Response.  
4. Question. I subscribed to an article but have never received an email notification of changes or additions to the article. What's going on?

Answer:
  • Well, if could be that no changes or additions to the article have taken place since you subscribed. You might want to print out the article and then check again in a few days to see if any changes have occured. If you find that the article has changed but you were not informed by email see below.
  • Assuming that changes have indeed occurred, if you were not notified by email it is possible that your email address was entered incorrectly when you registered. Make sure the email that you registered with is in fact a working email. Send yourself an email from another system and confirm that the email arrives at the destination address OK.
  • You might also want to carry out our Test Procedure. Consult the related document (see below) entitled "Notification Service - Test Procedure" and follow the instructions there.

 

 
2.1.1.3.1.2. Priority Response Notification Service - How it Works - Some Examples
Question: How does the Notification Service inform me about changes or additions to articles that I have subscribed to?
 
Answer: Here are some typical scenarios.
  • Example 1: Assuming that there is an Article "1" and two sub-Articles "1a" and "1b"
    • i.e. Article 1
      • sub-Article 1a
      • sub-Article 1b
    • Subscribers to Article 1 who did NOT check the Article/subArticle box during the selection process will receive email notifications of changes to Article 1 only
    • Subscribers to Article 1 who checked the Article/subArticle box during the selection process will receive email notifications of changes to 1 and/or 1a and/or 1b and/or if a new sub-Article 1c is added.
    • Subscribers to a particular sub-Article (i.e. 1b) only will receive email notifications of changes to that particular sub-Article (i.e. 1b) only.
    • Subscribers who have elected Instant Notification will be emailed immediately after the administrator of the Article or sub-Article acts to Save & Close after making changes or additions.
    • Subscribers who have elected Daily or Weekly Notification will be emailed at the time of the daily or weekly notification run.
  • Notes:
      • Changes to the metadata associated with an article such as its short Title or long Title are considered changes and result in Notifications. 
      • Registered users can subscribe to any number of Articles or sub-Articles and elect Instant Notification on some while electing Daily Notification on others.  
2.1.1.3.1.3. Priority Response Notification Service - Test Procedure
Question: Is there a procedure for testing the Notification Service once I have subscribed to an Article or sub-Article?
 
Answer: Yes. Here is a test procedure that should do the trick. Please see below:
  • See How to Subscribe and action accordingly.
  • Subscribe to this Article
    • Choose Instant Notification or
    • Choose Daily Notification
      • We do not recommend Weekly Notification for testing the system.
  • Email this article to sales@richmondrc.com
      • Hint: Roll over the small icons at the top right, they will echo back their purpose. Click on the email icon.
    • Leave the Subject defaulted to: Test Procedure
    • Uncheck the Include Article Content box.
    • Enter into the body of the message something like:
      • I want to test the Notification Service. Please amend this article as soon as possible.
    • > Send
  • When we receive the email message we will make a small edit to this message by adding "YYYYMMDD_HHMM Test Requested" to the bottom of the message. We will then Save & Send it.
    • YYYYMMDD is the current Year, Month, Day and HHMM is the current Hour and Minute
  • This will trigger the Notification Service to send an email to all subscribers who have subscribed to this article notifiying them of the change and providing a link back to this article.
  • If your subscription is working properly, you will receive the email as soon as we Save & Send the change if you have selected Instant Notification or later the following evening if you have elected Daily Notification.
  • You may wish to then unsubscribe from this Article so that you won't receive any further notifications to this test procedure document.
  • Once you've proven out the system with this test and know that your email is working OK, go ahead and subscribe to other "real" Articles or sub-Articles that you are interested in.
 
20070224_1727_Test Requested
20070224_1732_Test Requested
2.1.1.3.1.4. Priority Response Notification Service - How To un-Subscribe

Question: How do I un-Subscribe from the Notification Service using the Priority Response system?

Answer: 

To un-Subscribe from the Notification Service using the Priority Response system please read the following information carefully.   

A. Introduction

B. The Procedure - Step by Step

Step 1: Access the Priority Response system

Step 2: Identify Yourself

Step 3: un-Subscribe from an Article &/or sub-Article

C. Troubleshooting

Please review all information from beginning to end before proceeding. Look over the Troubleshooting section  as well. This will point out pitfalls and questions that have arisen in the past to help you stay clear of common problems and/or resolve them quickly.


 

A. Introduction

  • These instructions assume that you have a basic knowledge of how to work with a computer equipped with a graphical user interface (GUI) such as Windows and that you are familiar with an internet browser such as Internet Explorer (IE). If you do not have these prerequisites you may wish to get someone to assist you.
    • In cases where we give hints to the operation of the computer, the operating system or the browser, these hints are based on the assumption that you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) as your browser on an Intel based PC running Windows XP. Windows 2000 and versions of Windows later than XP, generally are similar in operation but details may vary slightly from version to version.  
  • It may be helpful to have these instructions in a printed form. For novice users we strongly suggest printing these instructions. To print, look for the three icons in the top right of this article, they are near the Logout and Help buttons. If you cannot see these icons or buttons use your mouse to scroll the screen view further to the right. Mouse over the icons and you will see what they do. Click on the middle icon to print out this information. Then respond to the prompts and printing instructions provided by your computer.
  • Within this document
    • The ">" symbol means "click on".
    • Information tagged as Hints may be unnessary for experienced users.
  • These instructions should be followed EXACTLY. If something does not appear to work for you, back up a step or two and review the instructions again carefully. Do NOT skip steps.


B: The Procedure - Step by Step

Please Do Step 1 ... then Step 2 ...  then Step 3.
  • Step 1:  Access the Priority Response system.
  • Step 2:  Identify Yourself
  • Step 3:  un-Subscribe to an Article &/or sub-Article.


 

Step 1:  Access the Priority Response System.

  • > www.richmondrc.com
    • Hint: > means "Click On"
    • Hint: Or type www.richmondrc.com into the address bar of your web browser and press the Enter key.
  • > Welcome
  • > Support Services
    • Hint: See the middle of the menu bar near the top.
  • > Priority Response - VERY FAST - We respond within 1 Business Day [New Window]
    • Hint: Look about 3-4 lines down from the top 
    • Recommendation > [New Window] to open in a New Window


Step 2: Identify Yourself

  • Login for PRIORITY RESPONSE
    • Hint: Move your cursor to the blank Login box about 1-2 inches down near the left edge below the Login for PRIORITY RESPONSE title.
    • Hint: If you followed our recommendation your Login will be your email address that you supplied the first time when you registered to use the Priority Response system.  
    • Hint: Type your login. (usually all lower case)
    • Hint: If you do not have a login and password, follow the New User? First Time? Takes 1 Minute! Immediate Setup! link
  • Password
    • Hint: Move your cursor to the blank Password box
    • Hint: Look about an inch to the right.
    • Hint: Type your password
    • Hint: If you followed our recommendations, your password will be all lower case text followed by some numbers
  • > Go
    • Hint: You may get a prompt from Windows at this point asking you if want Windows to remember this password. > Yes or > No.
      • Hint: Choosing Yes will avoid having to re-enter the password in the future
  • > Priority Response (Tickets)
    • Hint: See the middle area of the menu bar near the top
  • See Section 3 below


 

Step 3:  un-Subscribe from an Article &/or sub-Article.  

  • > Articles
    • Hint: look near the top left side of screen about 1-2 inches from the top
  • Browse the Table of Contents (TOC): Find the article or sub-article that you are interested in un-subscribing from.
    • Hint: The left margin TOC is a great navigation tool 
    • Hint: Sort of obvious but remember you can only un-subscribe from articles that you subscribed to earlier.
  • Drill down into the TOC to find articles &/or sub-articles that you want to un-subscribe from. 
    • When you have found the article and/or sub-articles that you want to un-subscribe from:
      • Look near the top right of the Knowledge Base window just below the "Logout" and "Logged as:" text.
      • You will see a small envelope with a red tick mark.
        • Roll over it and it will echo back "Subscribe"
    • > the Subscribe Icon
      • If you want to just un-subscribe from the current article leave the Article/SubArticle box unchecked.
      • If you want to un-subscribe from the current article and any sub-articles below it, check the Article/SubArticle box.
    • Leave the Category check box unchecked. 
    • Select the Notification Type by clicking the down arrow and scroll the slider bar to see the various notification types.
      • Choose Unsubscribe
    • > Submit
    • > Close 

 

C: Troubleshooting

1. These instructions should be followed EXACTLY. If something does not appear to work for you, back up a step or two and review the instructions again carefully. Do NOT skip steps.

2. Write down your login and password information exactly as you entered it and as you are entering it. Safeguard this carefully. The vast majority of inquiries we get are from people who have lost or forgotten their login and password.

We strongly recommend:

  • Use the KISS (Keep It Simple Stupid) method but something that is unique to you.
  • Use all lower case letters as in xxx not XXX. Do not mix case like AbCe. You will forget if you mix case.
  • For your login (sometimes referred to as username)... use your email address
  • For your password... use your formal first name followed immediately by a string of 4+ digits that mean something to you.
    • Some examples of passwords appear below:
      • david1963  as in david not dave and as in 1963 for year of birth
      • robert19581126 as in robert not bob and 19581126 as in YYYY (year) MM (month) DD (day) i.e. in this case 1958 Nov 26th.
      • rebecca94302 as in rebecca not becky and as in 94302 your zipcode
      • richard1969 as in richard not rick and as in 1969 the year man first landed on the moon

3. Reboot from COLD COLD COLD: Sometimes computers, web browsers and web browser "cookies" get muddled up. This is particularly the case with older computer systems having limited memory and/or older versions of operating systems such as Windows 98. You can spend a great deal of time mucking around trying to solve problems and never actually figure it out.

Before you drive yourself crazy, start tearing boards out of your computer or reloading software...

  • Save all your unsaved computer files.
  • Close your browser and all other software applications.
  • Shut all hardware down. Everything... computer, monitor, router, modem, power... the whole works.
  • Wait til the computer is making no noise at all and then:
    • Power up your modem and/or router
    • Power up network switch, hub etc
    • Power up your monitor
    • Power up your computer
  • Fire up your internet browser before doing anything else with your computer.
  • Try to access Priority Response.  
4. Question. I un-subscribed from an article but I am still getting notifications about changes to sub-articles associated with teh article that I have un-subscribed from. I want to un-subscribe from these sub-articles as well. What should I do?

Answer:
  • Well, you have probably overlooked checking the Article/SubArticle box when you un-Subscribed from the Article. So the system will have un-subscribed you from the Article but left you subscribed to the sub-Articles. To fix this, carefully repeat Step 3 above.  
2.2. Site Information - News

20070224 - Our Priority Response suite has been upgraded. Priority Response registered members now have access to Priority Response Tickets and to the Priority Response Notification Service.

  • Priority Response Tickets - for reporting, tracking and resolving customer issues. Full customer interaction.
  • Priority Response Notification Service - At customers option, any article and/or sub-articles can be subscribed to by Priority Response members for automated email Notification of changes. Get in the loop, stay in the loop!

For More Information  < click here to see in this window or click > [New Window]


20070224 - Enabled Article Voting

20070224 - Site How To & News updated to include Site How To information about Priority Response Notification Services. Documentation, Examples and a Test Procedure added.

20060206 -  Site How To & News updated to include Site How To information about Tickets - How to Open (create) and Tickets - How to Edit, View, Attach Files and/or add Notes to. See Site How To links in Table of Contents.

20060203 - Technical Information sections for VMAX Electric Power Systems, Motors & ESC added to Knowledge Base.

20050903 - The VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF has been added to the Knowledge Base. Browse Table of Contents to Technical Information - VMAR - Products then browse for VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF or use the Search Tool to find VMA-S210X or Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF.   

20050827 - The VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF has been added to the Knowledge Base. Browse Table of Contents to Technical Information - VMAR - Products then browse for VMA-B210X Bird Dog or use the Search Tool to find VMA-B210X or Bird Dog.  

3. We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
3.1. Support - Knowledge Base - OnLine Self Help with Indexed Relevancy based Search
Our Knowledge Base is your BEST OPTION for getting IMMEDIATE INFORMATION about our products and services.

For access 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to the most up to date, expanding and accessible source of information we've got, please visit our Knowledge Base at www.kbase.ca
3.2. Support - Submit A Question
After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.
 
To Submit A Question please:
  • Visit www.kbase.ca 
    •  > Support
    • Review Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You,
    • Submit a Question. in the Knowledge Base menu bar       
      • Enter your name, email and phone 
      • Enter your question
      • > Send
    • We will get back to you within 2 Business Days. 

3.3. Support - Printable (PDF) Price Lists & More - Downloads
To download printable (PDF) Price Lists & More please:
  • Visit our web site and then:
    • > Consumers OR
      • > Wholesale
    • Choose Location
      • > Canada OR
      • > USA OR
      • > International
    • At the top of the of the Table of Contents in left margin
    • > * Price Lists (...) & More
      • > Price List [PDF]
3.4. Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
3.5. Support - Join our Mailing List - Sign Up Now
Signing up for our Mailing List is the best way to receive periodic product eMail announcements, news releases, promotions, contest details, sales offers etc related to our products and services. We do NOT release your information to third parties and we have OnLine tools for you to edit your information or opt out at any time.
 
To Join our Mailing List please:
3.6. Support - Replacement Parts & After Market Accessories

To find parts and selected after market upgrades & accessories for our products please:

  • Visit www.richmondrc.com,
    • > Select Consumers or > Wholesale
  • Browse the various Product Lines
    • > Product Line of Interest
  • Browse the categories
    • > Category of Interest

If you are unable to locate a particular part and need further assistance please Submit A Question.

 

3.7. Support - Shipping Information

For information about the estimated arrival time of your shipment and courier tracking numbers please check your email inbox for notifications from the courier.  

UPS, FedEx, Canpar and most other couriers send information to the email address you provided when you ordered. This information is normally sent in the evening of the day that your shipment was picked up at our warehouse.    

If you do not receive a shipping notification from the carrier within two business days of placing our order, please check your Inbox and your Spam, Junk Mail, Clutter and other such folders. If no joy, please Contact Us with your order number.  

4. Technical Information - Adhesives

 

4.1. CA - What is it?

Question: I see the term "CA" mentioned here, what do you mean by CA?

Answer: CA is short for CyanoAcrylate or short for Cyanoacrylate Adhesive depending on who you talk to. Both are correct. CA is the family of adhesives that is often described as "Super Glue".

CA's cure quickly, glue a wide range of materials and provide a very strong bond even in small amounts.

 

4.2. CA's - Should they be stored in a Fridge?

 

Question: Should CA's be stored in a refrigerator?

Short Answer:  Good quality CA's like the Pacer ZAP line do not require refrigeration unless you plan on storing the product for more than a year. Keep the bottle sealed and out of direct sunlight or hot rooms. If you do refrigerate any CA, allow it to stabilize and come to room temperature overnight before using.

Better Answer: There has long been a controversy over the need to refrigerate CA's in order to sustain their shelf life. It is helpful to understand the history of this practise, the original reasons for it and what we recommend today.

1) Background.

Refrigeration slows down the decay of CA's and subsequent hardening caused by contaminants in the glue, evaporation of additives, UV light, water vapour and poor packaging. Prior to 1982, most CA's offered into the hobby market, were in fact industrial products that had failed against some factory criteria. Hobby "packagers" would buy this discarded material and package it for consumer sale. In many cases, the shelf life of the material was 60-90 days and if you wanted to extend the life, refrigeration was required. This practise continues today for adhesives sold at the lower end of the price scale.

2) In 1982...

Pacer Technology introduced the ZAP line of adhesives that were blended and formulated specifically for consistency, quality and long shelf life. Pacer also introduced nitrogen bottle purging and filling, welded bottle nozzles and CA's that were more pure than anything on the market up to that time. Unopened shelf life was guaranteed to the purchaser for 1 year.

3) Today...

Only the low cost cheap grade CA's require refrigeration in order to extend their shelf life longer than 90 days. Good quality CA's such as ZAP (Pacer) products are made from the purest materials, packaged to ensure long shelf life and do not require refrigeration.

4) If refrigeration is undertaken...

There are several issues to concern yourself with. Let the adhesive come to room temperature overnight before using. Cold glue is slower to cure, offers weaker bonds and condenses water from the air as room temperature air is sucked back into the bottle to replace cold glue dispensed. The warmer air condenses over the cold glue remaining in the bottle. This addition of condensed water further contaminates the glue and dramatically shortens the life of the remaining CA in the bottle.

4.3. CA's - Thin, Thick or Very Thick? Which to use for what?

 

Question: What is the difference between the various thicknesses of CA's? Some are thin like water, others are thick like syrup or molasses. Which is to be used for what? 

Short Answer:

- Thin CA offers the fastest cure, can be applied after parts are assembled, parts MUST fit well, and thin CA is reasonably tolerant of different wood types

- Thick CA offers fast cure, must be applied to the parts prior to assembly, some roughness of fit is OK and thick CA is very tolerant of different wood types.

- Very Thick CA offers a slower cure, must be applied to parts prior to assembly, can be applied to parts that fit poorly, can be used like a white or aliphatic glue and very thick CA is tolerant of different wood types.

Better Answer:

1) Thin... almost like water (typical viscosity 5 centipois).

- works well on pure woods and plastics (except Teflon, Delrin or Nylon) that fit very well. There should not be a gap between the parts. The wood should not be pitchy or laminated like plywood. - does not work well on pitchy wood, dirty parts, rough fitting parts or parts that are extremely porous. - cure time is almost instant, in the order of seconds - parts should be assembled first and the adhesive wicked into the joint externally. The adhesive will penetrate many millimetres and up to a centimetre into the joint area. - great for assembling open frameworks like model airplane wings that can be fitted together, pinned into position and then glued together when ready. Just apply a drop to each joint area, wait a few moments and you can remove pins etc and you are done! - do NOT use thin CA with CA accelerators. - typical brand names, ZAP with a Pink Label, VCA with a Red Label.

2) Thick sometimes called Medium... like warm syrup (typical viscosity 100 centipois).

- works well on all woods and plastics (except Teflon, Delrin or Nylon) that fit reasonably well. Parts should fit well but will tolerate some roughness of fit. - Tolerant of pitches, veneers and plywoods. Works well on hardwoods. Tolerates some porosity of substrates. - cure time is related to tightness of fit. Generally cures in 10 seconds when parts fit well. Up to a minute for rough joints. May take even longer to cure in open puddles. In all cases, application of accelerators like Zip Kicker and VCA Velocity speed up cure. - parts should be trial fitted first to ensure a good fit. Parts should then be separated and thick CA applied to one surface like white glue. the parts then can be fitted and secured in place to allow the adhesive to cure.  The adhesive will penetrate slightly into the substrates but not enough to allow for wicking after the parts have been assembled. External application will produce a fillet along the joint that does add strength to the joint but should not be the main adhesive joint. - great for assembling model airplane fuselages, hardwood bearers, plywood components, boats, veneers and most plastics. Probably the best all round choice if you must choose only one adhesive. - recommended for use with CA accelerators. - typical brand names, ZAP-A-GAP with a Green Label, VCA with a Green Label.

3) Very Thick... like white glue or aliphatic glue (typical viscosity 700 centipois).

- works well on all woods and plastics (except Teflon, Delrin or Nylon). Parts should fit but will tolerate considerable roughness of fit and gaps of up to a millimetre. - Tolerant of pitches, veneers and plywoods. Works well on hardwoods. Tolerates considerable porosity of substrates. - cure time is related to tightness of fit. Generally cures in 20 seconds when parts fit well. Up to a couple of minutes for rough joints. Will take longer to cure in open puddles. In all cases, application of accelerators like Zip Kicker and VCA Velocity speed up cure. - parts should be trial fitted first to ensure a good fit. Parts should then be separated and very thick CA applied to one surface like white glue. The parts then can be fitted and secured in place to allow the adhesive to cure. The adhesive will penetrate only slightly into the substrates and not enough to allow for wicking after the parts have been assembled. External application will produce a fillet along the joint that does add strength to the joint but should not be the main adhesive joint. - great for assembling model airplane fuselages, hardwood bearers, plywood components, boats, veneers etc. Great if you want the speed of a CA while using assembly methods applicable to white glue. - strongly recommended for use with accelerators. - typical brand names, SLOW ZAP with a Yellow Label, VCA with a Blue Label. 

4.4. Data Sheets - MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) & PDS (Product Data Sheet)

Question: I require data sheets (MSDS and/or PDS) for your adhesive products. How do I get them?

Answer: Please go to: https://supergluemsds.com and then...

Click the down arrow to the right of "Please Choose Product Brand",

or

Click the down arrow to the right of "Please Choose Product Name",

and then

Click Search MSDS for Material Safety Data Sheets,

or 

Click Search PDS for Product Data Sheets.  
 

 

4.5. Epoxy - Resin Component Hard in Bottle.

Question: When stored for long periods of time (as in years) the Resin component may appear to have gone hard in the bottle. Is it now useless? 

Short Answer: Before throwing it out, try warming it up. If it returns to its usual thick liquid state, test a small sample by mixing Part A and Part B. If the bond strength turns out as expected, you should be good to go.

Better Answer: Try warming up the bottle of hard Resin. The simplest way is to stand the bottle in a large pot of hot water to a depth that covers all but the top of the bottle. Change the water occasionally as it cools down. You will see the resin gradually begin to change to its thick liquid state. When all of the resin is liquid, test a small sample by mixing Part A and Part B. If the bond strength turns out as expected, you should be good to go.

Another technique that works faster but that requires more care and attention is to ensure the bottle cap is tight and sealed. Then lay the bottle on its side on a concrete or metal surface. Using a hair dryer, blow hot air on the side of the bottle and roll it back and forth in the stream of hot air to ensure the heat is evenly applied. DO NOT FOCUS THE HOT AIR ON ONE SPOT or you may melt or deform the bottle. Roll the bottle back and forth constantly using the stream of hot air. When all of the resin is liquid, test a small sample by mixing Part A and Part B. If the bond strength turns out as expected, you should be good to go.

Note that when you mix epoxy that is warmer than room temperature, it will cure more quickly than specified.  

If you have any doubts about the strength of the bond always use Epoxy that is less than 1 year old. Fresh 30 minute cure Epoxy will give you the strongest bond. 

4.6. Epoxy - Slow Cure vs Fast Cure - Which is Best?

Question: Epoxy is available in different cure speeds. Should I use a Slow Cure (30 Minute) or a Fast Cure (5 Minute) Epoxy?

Short Answer: Use 30 Minute Epoxy where strength and structural integrity is important such as when joining wings or mounting stabilizers, engine firewalls etc. Use Fast Cure for quick repairs of small non-critical components or joints. If in doubt, always use 30 Minute Epoxy.

Better Answer: There are two general factors to consider,  Bond Strength and Working Time. 30 Minute Epoxy creates a stronger bond and it gives you more time to work. 5 Minute Epoxy gives a good bond but it is not as strong as 30 Minute Epoxy and it must be used very quickly, particulary in warm conditions.

The Bond Strength is pretty straighforward... 30 Minute simply gives stronger bonds. Use 30 Minute when joining wings, installing stabilizers, engine firewalls or other load bearing critical structural components that you simply cannot afford to have come off or fail. Use 5 Minute Epoxy for quick minor repairs of non-load bearing or light load bearing less critical components.

The Working Time is something that modelers frequently overlook and tend to err a bit in favor of  "fast is good". In some cases, like a quick repair of a simple small component... fast is really nice! But in cases where the amount of adhesive is considerable, the components are large or complex and/or need to be simultaneously mated with other parts.... you need to allow for plenty of time to work in order to get the parts aligned and properly placed. It is very important that the Epoxy is fully "wet" when being used. If Epoxy starts to thicken at all before the parts are joined, the Epoxy will not produce a good bond.

The worst possible scenario is using 5 Minute Epoxy on a complex multi-piece job like joining a wing. We have had too many calls from people who end up with the Epoxy beginning to cure before the wing halves are properly joined. We have also seen wing joints after in flight failures caused by gummy thick half cured Epoxy not penetrating and filling the joint and component substrates properly.

If you have any doubts about the complexity of a job, need for strength, working time etc, always use 30 Minute Epoxy!

5. Technical Information - Master Airscrew Products
5.1. Master AirScrew Products - Propellers - General
The following information is provided from Master Airscrew (Windsor Propellor Company Inc.)
5.2. Master Airscrew Products - GearBox Instructions
The following information is provided from Master Airscrew (Windsor Propellor Company Inc.)
5.3. Master Airscrew Products - Motors (Electric) - Specifications
The following information is provided from Master Airscrew (Windsor Propellor Company Inc.)
5.4. Master Airscrew Products - Drill Guide Balance System - Instructions
The following information is provided from Master Airscrew (Windsor Propellor Company Inc.)
  • Drill Guide (Prop) Balance System Instructions
6. Technical Information - POLYPRO Products
6.1. POLYPRO Products - General
6.1.1. POLYPRO LiPo Packs - Documents - Common to Many Battery Packs
These documents are common to many or all POLYPRO battery packs and are in addition to documentation specific to a particular battery pack.
6.2. POLYPRO - Product by Product
6.2.1. PPR-SC2020 Apache Smart Charger 2020 (12VDC INPUT)
6.2.1.1. PPR-SC2020 Apache Smart Charger 2020 - Documents

Please see the attached PDF documents related to this product. File names indicate the nature of the document.

7. Technical Information - RC Flying - General

 

7.1. Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

7.2. Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

7.3. Engine Prop Shaft Sizes - Cross Reference for Du-Bro Spinner Prop Nuts
Question: Is there a cross reference between Engine Prop Shaft sizes and Du-Bro Spinner Prop Nuts?

Answer: Yes, please see the attached cross reference courtesy of Dubro Products Inc.

Note: For VMAX Engine Prop Shaft sizes please see your VMAX Owners Manual. The VMAX Owners Manual can also be downloaded from within the related article entitled "VMAX Engines - Documents..." as listed below.
7.4. Engine Parts Cross Reference - Magnum-ThunderTiger

Question: Is there a cross reference between Engines such as Magnum and Thunder Tiger?

Answer: Yes, please see the attached cross reference information.

Note: Many different parts are made by a relatively small number of manufacturers and may appear in various brands of engines. The attached cross references are reasonably accurate but there is no guarantee that the parts fit your particular engine. Only a careful purchase followed by a trial installation will tell you for sure that a part fits.

Note 2: ASP, Magnum and GMS engines MAY MAY MAY use some of these parts as well. See caution note above.  

7.5. Flap Deflection - How Much is about right?

Question: How much deflection should I use for my Flaps? Can I overdo it?

Answer: We recommend using no more than 50% of the maximim deflection that the flap is capable of. Any more than that will likely due more harm than good.

Better Answer: If you overdo the flap deflection beyond 50% of the maximum deflection that the flap is capable of, you will get little additional flap effect but will substantially increase the drag and possibly make the model unstable. There is also a reduction in the effectiveness of the vertical stabilizer and the rudder when as flap deflection is increased. This loss of effectiveness can reduce the ability to counteract and control Yaw making it particuarly important to ensure that both flaps are deployed to the same degree at all times. Differential (non-equal) flap deflection can result in a crash due to roll and pitch changes that can be very difficult to overcome and control.

We suggest phasing in the amount of flap deflection, starting with very little and working up to the 50% max noted above. At each step, test your control over Yaw (using the rudder) and Roll (using the ailerons). If you can't maintain control over Yaw and/or Roll or the model is Pitching suddenly up or down, back off on the amount of flap deflection.

7.6. Flaperon Ready - What does it Mean? What are Flaperons anyway?

Question: What are Flaperons and what is meant by the term Flaperon Ready?

Answer: The term Flaperons is used to describe Ailerons that can act as Ailerons AND act as Flaps. When we design Ailerons so that they can or must use two servos the model is Flaperon Ready.

The Flaperons in a Flaperon Ready model are not mandatory but we have designed the model so that the Ailerons can be activated as Flaperons if you use two servos for the ailerons and a computer radio.

Better Answer: Flaps are generally used for take offs and landings only. They hang down from the back edge of the wing and increase the lift of the wing enabling the model to take off and land at slower speeds. Landing at slower speeds can make landing a little easier on the nerves. Flaps go down only.

Ailerons are used all the time in flight. Ailerons go up and down.

By using two servos and a computer radio it is possible to use an Aileron like a Flap while still using it as an Aileron. This is called a Flaperon.

When we manufacture a model we always include Ailerons. When we design Ailerons so that they can or must use two servos the model is Flaperon Ready.

To take advantage of Flaperons in a Flaperon Ready model, you must use two servos for the Ailerons and must have a computer radio.

For information regarding Flaperon Deflection please see the following article,

Flaperon Deflection - How Much is about right?

Question: How much deflection should I use for my Flaperons? Can I overdo it?

Answer: Use 50-65% of the maximim aileron deflection. Any more than that will substantially reduce the effectiveness of your ailerons.

Better Answer: If you overdo the flaperon deflection (i.e. when using the ailerons as Flaps) beyond 50-65% of the maximum aileron deflection you will get little additional flap effect but will substantially reduce the effectiveness of the ailerons (i.e. ability to roll left or roll right).

When over deployed as a flap, the aileron cannot move further down as an aileron. The other aileron can move up so you end up with half the roll effect much like that you would experience with having only one aileron. In addition to the weaker  more sluggish roll effect of a single aileron you will have yaw induced by the differential in deflection between one aileron and the other.

 

7.7. Flaperon Deflection - How Much is about right?

Question: How much deflection should I use for my Flaperons? Can I overdo it?

Answer: Use 50-65% of the maximim aileron deflection. Any more than that will substantially reduce the effectiveness of your ailerons.

Better Answer: If you overdo the flaperon deflection (i.e. when using the ailerons as Flaps) beyond 50-65% of the maximum aileron deflection you will get little additional flap effect but will substantially reduce the effectiveness of the ailerons (i.e. ability to roll left or roll right).

When over deployed as a flap, the aileron cannot move further down as an aileron. The other aileron can move up so you end up with half the roll effect much like that you would experience with having only one aileron. In addition to the weaker  more sluggish roll effect of a single aileron you will have yaw induced by the differential in deflection between one aileron and the other.

 

7.8. Radio Systems - Common Issues & What To Do

 

7.8.1. Servos - Common Issues & What To Do

 

7.8.1.1. Servo - Chatter
Question: I have a servo that "chatters" and twitches, any idea what is causing this?
 
Answer: This can be caused by a variety of different things.
 
1) The servo may be dirty or have had water get into it. In most cases this is fixable by a technician but it is hopelessly uneconomic to pay someone to repair standard servos given their prices today.
 
2) The servo may have been or is being subject to lots of vibration. This is usually related to an out of balance prop, spinner, engine or motor or mounting the servo without the vibration isolating rubber grommets or cinching down the servo mounting screws too tight or failing to install the brass ferrules to prevent grommet compression.  
 
3) Electrical interference being picked up by the wiring between the servo and receiver . If the leads are long (particularly if you are using extensions) they serve as a form of antenna and can pick up signals from sources including sources both internal and external to the model. Internal sources are typically metal on metal control rod connections or other metal to metal couplers. Electric motors (particularly brushed motors) and speed controls (mechanical or electrical) are also common sources of electrical "noise".
 
4) Electrical interference being picked up by the receiver antenna and relayed through the receiver to the servos. Antenna's that are cut or not properly routed around electrical sources (keep your antenna away from a brushed electric motor) are common sources of such interference. Old noisy automobile ignitions in the area of your receiver are another source of such interference.
 
5) Bad information coming from your transmitter and being faithfully passed from your receiver to the servo.
 
6) With the points above, we have probably hit on the 90% of common causes. The final 10% is hard to nail down with a few points. Think dirt, think water, think sources of electrical noise, think vibration.
 
Troubleshooting:
 
Keeping these causes in mind we suggest the following troubleshooting approach:
 
a) Figure out when the servo chatters. Has something changed recently? Has the servo been crashed or dunked? Has it chattered from new or just started recently? Does the servo chatter all the time when it is powered up? Only when the receiver is turned on but the transmitter is turned off? Only when the receiver and transmitter are both turned on? Only when operating your engine or motor? Only when the model is moving? Only when the model is free to move or even when the model is held firmly.
 
b) Is the noisy servo the only servo in your model that chatters? Does the noisy servo chatter regardless of which channel or extension lead you connect it to? If you replace the noisy servo with another servo of the same type and connect this replacement servo to the same lead and channel, does the replacement servo chatter also?
 
c) Remove the servo from the model. Connect it directly to a known good receiver. Does it still chatter?
 
The idea here is to use common sense and some simple trial and error tests to narrow down the cause of the problem. If the noisy servo appears to chatter regardless of where you install it and under all operating conditions then you are probably best off to chuck the servo and go with a replacement. If however, the servo only chatters under some conditions and other similar servos also chatter when exposed to the same conditions, try to locate the source of the interference and eliminate it.
 
 
 
7.8.1.2. Servo - Noises at Idle - Humming, Buzzing, Groaning etc
Question: What causes servos to make a noise when at "idle"?
 
Answer: This is nearly always caused by a stiff or sticking mechanical connection beyond the servo arm. The servo is trying to return to center when at idle and the mechanical linkage is impeding this so the servo keeps trying.
 
This puts a load on your servo, may cause wear and puts a high electrical load on your servo which will drain your flight pack more quickly than normal.
 
In the case of electrical RC systems that use a Battery Elimination Circuit (BEC) special consideration must be given to eliminating unnecessary loads from the servos. Firstly, such loads are depleting your only battery and this will lead to shorter run times and a early low voltage cutoff of power by the BEC monitoring circuit. Secondly, most BEC's are limited in the total amount of current that they can control. Adding more servos adds to the load. So does adding a bunch of servos that are all pushing on sticky mechanical linkages and working harder than they should. Some BEC's will shut down to protect themselves from overload. Other BEC's simply fail. In either event, your receiver will be without power and you will not be able to control the model if the BEC is not working.
 
Bottom line here is that you should make sure that all mechanical linkages move easily. To test for this we suggest that you remove the linkages from the servo arm. If the humming, buzzing or groaning noise goes away, then the mechanical linkage is binding. Straighten the path, make sure clevises, rods and other connectors are free to rotate in the servo arm holes etc. All control linkages should be slop free but move easily with a light touch of your fingers. Once you have the linkage freed up, reconnect the linkage to the servo and move the servo to and fro across the neutral position. Let the servo return to neutral. The noise should have stopped. If the noise is still present and you are sure that the mechanical linkages are not binding, you have another problem with the servo.
 
 
7.9. Snap Rolls - Managing the Risk - What Can I Do?

Question: I've heard some horror stories about snap rolls and seen some spectacular sudden crashes that the pilot stated were caused by a snap roll. What can I do to prevent this happening to me? Is the risk manageable?

Answer: Yes the risk is manageable. Keep your airspeed up and limit the amount of elevator throw at lower air speeds. Be aware that low wing aerobatic models with smaller horizontal stabilizers generally will snap roll more easily than others.

Better Answer: First of all it is important to say what we mean by the term "snap roll". It is frequently misused and it is not always a bad thing. A snap roll is like a roll induced by using the ailerons but it occurs with little or no warning, is usually extreme or violent and usually does not involve using the ailerons. Snap rolls are often messier... they are not a clean aileron induced roll and often look like the rudder is being put into play as well. This scares the dickens out of pilots who have become used to seeing an airplane roll only when it is asked to do so by deflecting the ailerons.

In fact most aerobatic aircraft use snap rolls as part of their repertoire of maneuvers. So one way to reduce but not eliminate the probability of snap rolls is to stay away from aerobatic models! Unfortunately this approach takes a heck of a lot of fun out of one whole category of RC Flying!

Rather than give up on aerobatic models, manage the risk with the following tips:

1) Watch your Altitude: Snap rolls are not dangerous themselves unless they are so violent that they tear the airframe apart. This can happen in lightweight 3D type models but other than that most model airframes are built to withstand a snap roll. It's not the snap roll that wrecks most models... it's impacting the ground that causes the problem! Granite Congestus is hard stuff! Altitude is everything. If you are going to experiment, do so with lots of air between the model and the ground.

2) Watch your Air Speed: Many unexpected snap rolls are caused by insufficient air speed. Keep your flying speed up. If in doubt, a bit too much air speed is better than too little.

3) Watch your Angle of Attack: All wings have an angle of attack beyond which they will not fly. If you force a wing beyond it's critical angle of attack, it stops flying and your model becomes a brick.

4) Watch your Elevator Throw: This is probably the most critical single thing you can do. Too much elevator throw rapidly and often uncontrollably increases the angle of attack and reduces your air speed. High angles of attack and reduced air speeds are precursors for the almost immediate onset of a snap roll.

5) Watch your Landings and Take Offs: Things gang up on you when you are near the ground. Your altitude is low, your air speed is low, your angle of attack is higher (particularly when landing... slowing down, preliminary flair setting up) and you are nervous on the sticks with a tendency to overcompensate on elevator every time the model takes a bit of a lurch downward.

6) If your radio supports dual rates, set up dual rates for the elevator and limit the throws at the low rate to not more than 65% of full aileron deflection and use the low rates during take offs and particularly during landing. You might want to experiment with exponential as well to reduce sensitivity of the servos to movements of the sticks near center.

Remember that Snap Rolls can be fun if you've got altitude and time on your side. Stay out of low altitude situations when one or more of the other contributing factors start to come into play and you will be managing the risk of a snap roll induced crash!.

 

7.10. Speed Brake Deflection - How Much is about right?

Question: How much deflection should I use for my Speed Brakes? Can I overdo it?

Answer: We recommend using no more than 50% of the maximim upward deflection that the flap is capable of. Any more than that may make your model unstable and very difficult to control safely. 

Better Answer:
If you overdo the speed brake deflection beyond 50% of the maximum upward deflection that the flap is capable of, you will get additional braking effect but will substantially increase the drag and possibly make the model unstable. There is also a reduction in the effectiveness of the vertical stabilizer and the rudder when as speed brake deflection is increased. This loss of effectiveness can reduce the ability to counteract and control Yaw making it particuarly important to ensure that both speed brakes are deployed to the same degree at all times. Differential (non-equal) speed brake deflection can result in a crash due to roll and pitch changes that can be very difficult to overcome and control.
We suggest phasing in the amount of speed brake deflection, starting with very little and working up to the 50% max noted above. At each step, test your control over Yaw (using the rudder) and Roll (using the ailerons). If you can't maintain control over Yaw and/or Roll or the model is Pitching suddenly up or down, back off on the amount of speed brake deflection.
 
A more sophisticated setup can allow for speed brake deflection beyond 50% but only when the model is on the ground. This helps to reduce runout length upon landing. This can be done in a model with a high end computer radio that allows for speed brakes to depoly in stages. The flyer then ensures that the max speed brake deflection is limited to 50% until such time as the model is on the ground.
7.11. What is a good second or third model to fly after I have soloed on a Trainer?

Question: What is a good second or third model after I have soloed on a Trainer?

Answer: Probably the best choice would be to move from the high wing flat bottom airfoil type of trainer you learned on to a high wing model with a semi-symmetrical wing.

Better Answer: It really depends on many things and there are lots opinions to listen to on this. We recommend that your second model be a high wing model with a semi-symmetrical wing and trike landing gear. You could go to a high wing semi-symmetrical tail dragger if you are flying from long grass or a rough field.

If you want to make a bit of a leap, move directly from your high wing trainer with a flat bottom wing to a semi-symmetrical low wing model with trike gear. We do not recommend going to a low wing tail dragger when you move to your first low wing model. Too much change all at once. A low wing model requires a different set of flying skills and a tail dragger can be a bit challenging when it comes to ground handling. Best to tackle your challenges one at a time.

Ideally we recommend the following sequence of VMAR models...

  1. First Model - High Wing, Flat Bottom Wing, Trike Gear, at least 60 inch wing span.
    • Apache or Discovery or Challenger
  2. Second Model - High Wing, Semi-Symmetrical Wing, Trike Gear, at least 60 inch wing span.
    • Stinger or Hornet
  3. Third Model - Low Wing, Semi-Symmetrical Wing, Trike Gear, at least 60 inch wing span.
    • Escape or RamRod
    • Subaru (semiscale model of a real aircraft... has all the characteristics of a good low wing trainer along with semiscale appearance of a good looking aircraft)
7.12. Wing - Airfoil Designation - NACA Number

Question: Does the factory provide NACA designations for the wings used in VMAR models?

Answer: VMAR models are known world wide for their great flying characteristics. One of the keys to this is the unique wing design. As such, the factory considers this information proprietary.

General airfoil types are described in our specifications and the following article includes tips on how to determine the airfoil type.

Wing - Airfoil Type - How Can I Tell?

Question: How can I tell what airfoil type is used on my model?

Answer: This is usually listed in the specifications for the model but if you can't locate the specs, not to worry. There is an easy way to determine the general type:

  1. Check the wing root (or wing tip if the root is not accessible).
  2. Draw a line from the leading edge to the trailing edge (or align one edge of low tack masking tape if you don't want to leave any marks later on).
  3. At the Thickest part of the wing, measure the distance above the line to the top skin of the wing and measure the distance below the line to the bottom skin of the wing.
    1. If the line is coincident with the bottom of the wing, the wing is a Flat Bottom Wing (also often referred to as a "Clark Y" wing)
    2. If the distance above the line is greater than the distance below the line, the airfoil is Semi-Symmetrical
    3. If the distance above the line is the same as the distance below the line, the airfoil is Symmetrical
7.13. Wing - Airfoil Type - How Can I Tell?

Question: How can I tell what airfoil type is used on my model?

Answer: This is usually listed in the specifications for the model but if you can't locate the specs, not to worry. There is an easy way to determine the general type:

  1. Check the wing root (or wing tip if the root is not accessible).
  2. Draw a line from the leading edge to the trailing edge (or align one edge of low tack masking tape if you don't want to leave any marks later on).
  3. At the Thickest part of the wing, measure the distance above the line to the top skin of the wing and measure the distance below the line to the bottom skin of the wing.
    1. If the line is coincident with the bottom of the wing, the wing is a Flat Bottom Wing (also often referred to as a "Clark Y" wing)
    2. If the distance above the line is greater than the distance below the line, the airfoil is Semi-Symmetrical
    3. If the distance above the line is the same as the distance below the line, the airfoil is Symmetrical
8. Technical Information - RC Flying Electric - General
Some general information regarding RC Flying - Electric: 
8.1. Electric Power - Flight Performance Estimator

Question: I'm interested in getting into Electric RC Flying. I've checked out a couple of the local hobby shops, thumbed through a bunch of the RC magazines and browsed the web. I'm learning but I find some of the techno talk rather confusing and I'm more than a bit skeptical about some of the advertised claims. I've been around the block over the years and understand that nobody is going to advertise that their model flies "like a sick pig". Fair enough but sheesh... it would sure be nice to get real information instead of a load of bunkercarb! A friend of mine bought one of the low cost "foamies". The box art claimed the moon but the darned thing would hardly stay in the air... never mind actually fly!

I'd like to find a way of sifting BS from fact that does not involve smashing up models in order to find that they fly like a truck. Is there a way to estimate flight performance from some of the specs?  

Answer: Yes. There is an estimating equation that works from basic specifications to calculate the Flight Performance Index for an electric RC model. It's pretty rough and ready but it really helps sort out what is probably real from what is patent nonsense. Here is a simple way to calculate the approximate flight performance of an RC model equipped with a fully charged Lithium Polymer (LiPo) battery in good condition, an Electronic Speed Control (ESC) and a direct drive (no gearbox) Brushless Motor. (We can't attest to this working for other technologies or setups because we have not tried it)

Here is a simple estimating equation:

Performance Index  = Power supplied to the motor [watts] / Flying Weight of the model [ounces]

where:

    • Performance Index is a number ranging from 1 to 6 as calculated above and described below.   
    • Power supplied to the motor [watts]. Use an AstroFlight Whatt Meter or Medusa Flight Power Analyzer.
    • Flying Weight of the model [ounces] complete with motor, ESC, battery etc... everything that goes into the air.

To determine the Power supplied to the motor [watts] you will need to measure the power in [watts] flowing from the LiPo battery to the brushless motor after about 1 minute of full throttle operation. By this time the peak voltage and current associated with a fully charged LiPo have been burned off the battery and you will be able to measure a more stable and typical value for Power [watts]. If you have a volt meter across the battery leads and a good quality medium current DC amp meter in one line between the LiPo and the ESC you can calculate the Power [watts] = Voltage [V] * Current [Amps]. Be careful to avoid the propeller at all times. The easiest way to measure Power [watts] is to use an AstroFlight Whatt Meter or a Medusa Power Analyzer. These are both great tools for the electric flight enthusiast!

Example:

  • Power supplied to the brushless motor  = 100 Watts
  • Flying Weight of the model (complete) = 25 ounces
  • Flight Performance Index = Power[watts] / Weight[ounces] = 100/25 = 4

Interpretation:

The Flight Performance Index is a number between 1 and 6 for most models. In fact the index seldom is valued below 1 or above 6 but both are theoretically possible.

Here's the decode to interpret the Power Index:

  • 1 = Here doggy doggy! Woof woof! This simply won't fly. You'll be able to throw a brick further than you can fly this puppy!
  • 2 = Not an Eagle and not for beginners but in the hands of skilled RC pilot at sea level it will probably fly.  Hand launches pretty well a must. Ground takeoffs very tricky if not impossible. Best to not attempt to fly in the thin air of a high and/or hot location.
  • 3 = Fun to Fly. Ground takeoffs the norm. OK for beginners and up. No ball of fire but it flies well. Seldom induces panic attacks. Reduced flight performance at high altitude locations but it should still fly OK even on a hot day.
  • 4 = Sport Model. Ground takeoffs are a piece of cake. Flies well and does all the basic maneuvers. Seriously good fun and will put a smile on most faces! Relatively tolerant of thinner air found at high altitude locations and hot summer days.
  • 5 = Warbirds and hot Sport flying. Goes like stink. Too hot for beginners. Will provide a nice blend of thrills and chills. You'll be gasping for breath  long before the thin air at high and/or hot locations bogs this fast flyer down.
  • 6 = 3D capable with the right model in the right hands. Bores holes in the sky. Best to inform the Air Force. Lay on the Depends.

Caveats & Comments:

We cannot emphasize enough, the importance of considering the LiPo battery pack, ESC, brushless motor, propeller, wiring and connectors etc as a system. The components that make up your power system must all work together in such a way that current, voltage and RPM does not exceed the operating limit or efficiency threshold on any particular component. If you overload anything, it will heat up, performance will suffer and the life expectancy of the component(s) will drop dramatically. 

We are using Power [watts] measured on the ground to derive the Flight Performance Index. This is a bit counter intuitive. In almost all configurations and in almost all models, the Power [watts] in the air will be less than that measured on the ground during a static test. The Performance Index therefore is being estimated somewhat optimistically here although we have factored some of that into the interpretation of the index number itself.

Ideally, Power [watts] should be measured at the temperature and altitude expected during flight. Temperature and altitude affect air density. Air density decreases (thins) as temperature and altitude increase. Thinner air will affect performance of the propeller and this in turn affects the Power of the motor. Hence try to measure the Power at the temperature and altitude you expect to fly at. Don't worry about small variations in altitude like a few hundred feet, but flying at 5000 feet will produce a different value of the Flight Performance Index than flying at sea level and this should be accounted for when estimating actual performance.

You will notice that battery voltage is not used in the equation. Battery voltage is very important to the correct operation of the motor and ESC and has an effect on RPM and the selection of an efficient propeller but once a voltage has been selected that is compatible with the model and the various power system components, the voltage manifests itself as a contributor to Power [watts].

If your battery is not fully charged or is in bad shape you will get actual performance results that are lower than indicated by the Flight Performance Index.

If the discharge rate approaches or exceeds the battery discharge maximum recommendation you will get significant reductions in actual performance and are heading towards imminent battery failure.

Acknowledgments:

We believe in giving credit where credit is due and would like to thank Don Dombrowski of House of Balsa Inc (www.houseofbalsa.com) for providing much of the information in this article.

8.2. Electric Power - Flight Time Estimator

Question: Is there a quick and dirty way to estimate the approximate flight time in the air for my electric powered RC aircraft? I'm pretty good with a calculator but I don't work for NASA... can you give me some simple tips?

Answer: Sure. Here is a simple way to calculate the approximate flight time in the air for an RC model equipped with a fully charged Lithium Polymer (LiPo) battery in good condition, an Electronic Speed Control (ESC) and a direct drive (no gearbox) Brushless Motor. (We can't attest to this working for other technologies or setups because we have not tried it)

Here is a simple estimating equation:

Flight Time [min] = (.06 * LiPo Capacity [mAh]) / Current Draw [amps]

where:

    • Flight Time is in [minutes]. Remember this is an estimate. See caveats below.
    • LiPo Capacity is in milliAmphours [mAh].  
    • Current Draw is in amperes [Amps]

To determine LiPo Capacity, look at the label on your LiPo battery. Capacity is measured in [mAh] and is usually a number from say 500 to 4000 or more.  

To determine Current Draw you will need to measure the current flowing from the LiPo battery after about 1 minute of full throttle operation. By this time the peak voltage and current associated with a fully charged LiPo have been burned off the battery and you will be able to measure a more stable and typical Current Draw. Use a medium current DC amp meter between the LiPo and the ESC. Be careful to avoid the propeller at all times. The easiest way to do this is to use an AstroFlight Whatt Meter or a Medusa Power Analyzer. These are both great tools for the electric flight enthusiast!

Example:

  • Battery with LiPo Capacity = 1800 mAh
  • Current Draw after 1 minute of full throttle = 11 Amps
  • Flight Time in minutes = .06*1800/11 = 9.8 minutes

Caveats & Comments:

We cannot emphasize enough, the importance of considering the LiPo battery pack, ESC, brushless motor, propeller, wiring and connectors etc as a system. The components that make up your power system must all work together in such a way that current, voltage and RPM does not exceed the operating limit or efficiency threshold on any particular component. If you overload anything, it will heat up, performance will suffer and the life expectancy of the component(s) will drop dramatically. The system as a whole must also be suitable for the model, it makes little sense to deploy a power system intended for a 36 inch span model aircraft weighing 16 ounces into a 72 inch model aircraft weighing 7 pounds. The power system may work just fine in and of itself but it must be suitable for the model it is being installed into, in order to produce satisfactory flight performance.

We are using Current Draw measured on the ground to derive flight times. This is a bit counter intuitive. In almost all configurations and in almost all models, the Current Draw in the air will be less than that measured on the ground during a static test. Flight times therefore are being estimated conservatively here.

Ideally, Current Draw should be measured at the temperature and altitude expected during flight. Temperature and altitude affect air density. Air density decreases (thins) as temperature and altitude increase. Thinner air will affect performance of the propeller and this in turn affects the Current Draw. Hence try to measure the current draw at the temperature and altitude you expect to fly at. Don't worry about small variations in altitude like a few hundred feet, but flying at 5000 feet will produce a different value for Current Draw than flying at sea level and this should be accounted for when estimating flight times.

You will notice that battery voltage is not used in the equation. Battery voltage is very important to the correct operation of the motor and ESC and has an effect on RPM and the selection of an efficient propeller but once a voltage has been selected that is compatible with the model and the various power system components, the voltage thereafter manifests itself in the magnitude of the Current Draw.  

If your battery is not fully charged or is in bad shape you will get significantly shorter flight times.

If the discharge rate approaches or exceeds the battery discharge maximum recommendation you will get significantly shorter flight times and are heading towards imminent battery failure.

Acknowledgments:

We believe in giving credit where credit is due and would like to thank Don Dombrowski of House of Balsa Inc (www.houseofbalsa.com) for providing much of the information in this article.

8.3. Electric Power - Performance at High Altitudes

Question: I live at 5000 feet above sea level. What should I do to get my electric power system to perform at high altitudes as well as it does at sea level?

Answer: It's tough to get the same performance at 5000 or 8000 feet as you do at sea level but we do have a technique that will help you come close.

First of all it's important to understand a few things:

1) Unlike an internal combustion engine (i.e. glow or gas), an electric motor does not consume oxygen and hence could care less about oxygen or anything else that affects combustion.

2) An electric motor system that runs well at sea level will underperform at higher altitudes not because the air has less oxygen but because the air is thinner. Hot weather does the same thing... the air gets thinner. Hot and high together can really gang up and take a chunk out of the performance.

In order to get your electric motor system to perform in thinner air the same way it does at sea level, you may actually have to change the motor, speed control, battery pack and prop but before you go reaching for your credit card here is a technique that attacks the problem from the lowest cost component first.

1) Measure the watts that your power system consumes at sea level or other relatively low altitude location. Use a Medusa Power Analyzer or AstroFlight Whatt meter.

2) Better yet, if possible, use the Medusa Power Analyzer PRO thrust meter to measure the thrust generated and the watts consumed.

3) Now do the same measurements (1 & 2) at the higher altitude location. You will notice that your system consumes less watts and if you are able to measure thrust you will notice that you get less thrust at higher altitude than you do at lower altitude. This is because the air is thinner (less dense) at higher altitudes.

4) In order to get the thrust back up to where it was at lower altitudes you need the prop to move more of the thinner air. To do this, select a higher pitch and/or larger diameter prop for use at higher altitudes. Test again and try to find a prop that gives you the same thrust and/or watt values as you were getting on the original prop at lower altitude. If you can get the same thrust at 5000 feet as you got at sea level for example, you will have similar flight performance. Thrust is really the key here and it's best to work with thrust numbers but watts are a good relative indicator of thrust. Not perfect but still helpful!

Be cautious when testing to ensure that the motor, ESC and battery do not overheat with the new prop. Some compromising may be necessary to get good performance that does not overheat components.

In a perfect world, you would carefully select a specific motor, ESC, battery and prop to get the ideal combination for high altitude performance when installed in a particular model. Yup... perfect is best... but for those of us who can settle for a bit less than ideal and have limited budgets, changing the prop to generate similar thrust in high, hot & thinner air as you get in low, cool & thicker air is a good low cost way to go.    

 

VMA-U160X V-Stik 60 ARF - Electric Power Conversion

For those of you who may be wondering about flying a VMAR V-Stik 60 ARF using Electric Power here is an equipment report from a modeler who has electrified his V-Stik 60 ARF as follows:

  • AXI Outrunner 4120/18
  • 5 Cell LiPo
  • APC 13 x 8.5
  • Reports brisk reliable performance with this power system in the V-Stik 60 ARF

Please note that this report comes from a modeler flying near Durango, CO at approximately 7000 feet above sea level. A lower pitch and/or smaller diameter prop could be used at lower elevations. See the article included below for more information re adjusting for altitude when flying electric.


9. Technical Information - ULTRA POWER Technology - Product by Product
9.1. UPW-4ACPLUS AC Balance Charger
9.1.1. UPW-4ACPLUS AC Balance Charger - Manual
20210124... A .pdf of the factory manual will be attached here. 
9.1.2. UPW-4ACPLUS AC Balance Charger - Product Specifications & Pictures
9.1.3. UPW-4ACPLUS AC Balance Charger - Other
20200124... If there is any other information about UPW-AC4PLUS, it will be added here. 
9.2. UPW-D200 Discharger
9.2.1. UPW-D200 Discharger - Manual
20210124... A .pdf of the factory manual is attached here. 
9.2.2. UPW-D200 Discharger - Product Specifications & Pictures
9.2.3. UPW-D200 Discharger - Other
20200124... If there is any other information about UPW-D200 it will be added here. 
9.3. UPW-UP6+ AC/DC Dual Balance Charger
9.3.1. UPW-UP6+ AC/DC Dual Balance Charger - Manual
20210124... A .pdf of the factory manual is attached here. 
9.3.2. UPW-UP6+ AC/DC Dual Balance Charger - Product Specifications & Pictures
9.3.3. UPW-UP6+ AC/DC Dual Balance Charger - Other
20200124... If there is any other information about UPW-UP6+ it will be added here. 
9.4. UPW-UP616 DC Balance Charger
9.4.1. UPW-UP616 DC Balance Charger - Manual
20210124... A .pdf of the factory manual is attached here. 
9.4.2. UPW-UP616 DC Charger - Product Specifications & Pictures
9.4.3. UPW-UP616 DC Balance Charger - Other
20200124... If there is any other information about UPW-UP616 it will be added here. 
10. Technical Information - VMAR Products - General
10.1. VMAR - Documents - Common to Many Models that do not require anything more specific.
10.1.1. VMA ARF Products - Using POLYCOTE ECS Covering

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

This READ ME FIRST is common to many VMA ARF Models having

POLYCOTE ECS COVERING 

that did not require anything more specifically tailored to this particular model at the time of production.

A specific READ ME FIRST document may have been subsequently published for this particular model following the production of the model. To check for subsequent publication of a READ ME FIRST document for this model please visit www.richmondrc.com, Enter the Site & click on Support Services. Select Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this model. If a READ ME FIRST document exists for this model it takes precedence.

 

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

10.1.1.1. VMA ARF Products - General Information
 
 
 
 
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

10.1.1.2. VMA ARF Products - Supplement to the Manual

 

 

Control Horn Installation - How to

Question: How are VMAR control horns installed? 

Answer: VMAR control horns are unique. They work better and are easier to install. They do not look like most of the control horns you have seen before and you may not recognize them for what they are or you may think they are missing. They are in the control horn parts bag &/or wing parts bag  inside the master bag of hardware and consist of a metal bolt, metal nut, beveled white plastic washer, a white plastic T-nut and the white plastic control horn itself that connects to a clevis or rod.

The iillustration below and to the left shows a control horn set before installation. Note 5 parts make up the set. In Light Duty applications the Metal Nut may not be included and only 4 parts will make up the set. The illustration below and to the right shows a control horn set partially installed. Although illustrations in various manuals show the bevelled washer with the bevel pointing away from the surface we find that we get a cleaner strong installation with the bevel pointing inwards.

We recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP/CA (Pink) into the exposed wood surrounding the hole in the control surface. This helps further strengthen the wood. This is not a requirement but if you are pushing the power limits or planning on extreme aerobatics or speeds, the extra strength could come in handy. Use two applications of thin CA 1 minute apart, BEFORE installing the control horn.

The illustration below shows horn side view of a control horn set fully installed. The illustration to the left is a lighter duty application without the metal nut. The illustration to the right shows a heavier duty application with the metal nut installed. If the metal nuts have been supplied with the horns, we recommend using them.  

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
10.1.1.3. VMA ARF Products - Important Information

 

10.1.1.3.1. VMA ARF Products - Covering POLYCOTE ECS


This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering
POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
10.1.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
10.1.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
10.1.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
10.1.2. VMA ARF Products - Using VCOTE Covering

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 

This READ ME FIRST is common to many VMA ARF Models having

VCOTE COVERING 

that did not require anything more specifically tailored to this particular model at the time of production.

A specific READ ME FIRST document may have been subsequently published for this particular model following the production of the model. To check for subsequent publication of a READ ME FIRST document for this model please visit www.richmondrc.com, Enter the Site & click on Support Services. Select Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this model. If a READ ME FIRST document exists for this model it takes precedence.

 

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

10.1.2.1. VMA ARF Products - General Information

 

 

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

10.1.2.2. VMA ARF Products - Supplement to the Manual
 
 
 
 
 
Control Horn Installation - How to

Question: How are VMAR control horns installed? 

Answer: VMAR control horns are unique. They work better and are easier to install. They do not look like most of the control horns you have seen before and you may not recognize them for what they are or you may think they are missing. They are in the control horn parts bag &/or wing parts bag  inside the master bag of hardware and consist of a metal bolt, metal nut, beveled white plastic washer, a white plastic T-nut and the white plastic control horn itself that connects to a clevis or rod.

The iillustration below and to the left shows a control horn set before installation. Note 5 parts make up the set. In Light Duty applications the Metal Nut may not be included and only 4 parts will make up the set. The illustration below and to the right shows a control horn set partially installed. Although illustrations in various manuals show the bevelled washer with the bevel pointing away from the surface we find that we get a cleaner strong installation with the bevel pointing inwards.

We recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP/CA (Pink) into the exposed wood surrounding the hole in the control surface. This helps further strengthen the wood. This is not a requirement but if you are pushing the power limits or planning on extreme aerobatics or speeds, the extra strength could come in handy. Use two applications of thin CA 1 minute apart, BEFORE installing the control horn.

The illustration below shows horn side view of a control horn set fully installed. The illustration to the left is a lighter duty application without the metal nut. The illustration to the right shows a heavier duty application with the metal nut installed. If the metal nuts have been supplied with the horns, we recommend using them.  

10.1.2.3. VMA ARF Products - Important Information

 

10.1.2.3.1. VMA ARF Products - Covering VCOTE

This model uses VCOTE Covering

VCOTE - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of VCOTE?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips and at www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") we have an expanded explanation for each of these Tips.

VCOTE is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR. Please note that VCOTE is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. As with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering so its important to read the Tips over FIRST. Whatever you want to do with VCOTE, test it on a small out of the way area first.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to VCOTE covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the VCOTE, work outdoors and after testing first on a small out of the way area, use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Alcohol over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Avoid raw fuel with nitro content higher than 15%. Dab away all raw fuel regardless of nitro content. Test a small out of the way area and all plastics first before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing, peal tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm bigger) on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a heat gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use a heat gun and soft cotton cloth or glove and hand pressure to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates. Consult our Knowledge Base for further information.
  • Tools for Working with VCOTE
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.

 

10.1.2.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
10.1.2.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
10.1.2.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
10.1.3. VMA ARF Products - Using VCOTE2 - 3DS Covering

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 

This READ ME FIRST is common to many VMA ARF Models having

VCOTE2-3DS COVERING 

that did not require anything more specifically tailored to this particular model at the time of production.

A specific READ ME FIRST document may have been subsequently published for this particular model following the production of the model. To check for subsequent publication of a READ ME FIRST document for this model please visit www.richmondrc.com, Enter the Site & click on Support Services. Select Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this model. If a READ ME FIRST document exists for this model it takes precedence.

 

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

10.1.3.1. VMA ARF Products - General Information
 
 
 
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

10.1.3.2. VMA ARF Products - Supplement to the Manual

 

 

 
 
Control Horn Installation - How to

Question: How are VMAR control horns installed? 

Answer: VMAR control horns are unique. They work better and are easier to install. They do not look like most of the control horns you have seen before and you may not recognize them for what they are or you may think they are missing. They are in the control horn parts bag &/or wing parts bag  inside the master bag of hardware and consist of a metal bolt, metal nut, beveled white plastic washer, a white plastic T-nut and the white plastic control horn itself that connects to a clevis or rod.

The iillustration below and to the left shows a control horn set before installation. Note 5 parts make up the set. In Light Duty applications the Metal Nut may not be included and only 4 parts will make up the set. The illustration below and to the right shows a control horn set partially installed. Although illustrations in various manuals show the bevelled washer with the bevel pointing away from the surface we find that we get a cleaner strong installation with the bevel pointing inwards.

We recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP/CA (Pink) into the exposed wood surrounding the hole in the control surface. This helps further strengthen the wood. This is not a requirement but if you are pushing the power limits or planning on extreme aerobatics or speeds, the extra strength could come in handy. Use two applications of thin CA 1 minute apart, BEFORE installing the control horn.

The illustration below shows horn side view of a control horn set fully installed. The illustration to the left is a lighter duty application without the metal nut. The illustration to the right shows a heavier duty application with the metal nut installed. If the metal nuts have been supplied with the horns, we recommend using them.  

10.1.3.3. VMA ARF Products - Important Information

 

10.1.3.3.1. VMA ARF Products - Covering VCOTE2-3DS

This model uses VCOTE2-3DS Covering

VCOTE2-3DS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of VCOTE2 - 3DS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips and at www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") we have an expanded explanation for each of these Tips.

VCOTE2 - 3DS is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR. Please note that VCOTE2 - 3DS is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. As with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering so its important to read the Tips over FIRST. Whatever you want to do with VCOTE2 - 3DS, test it on a small out of the way area first.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to VCOTE2 - 3DS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the VCOTE2 - 3DS, work outdoors and after testing first on a small out of the way area, use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Alcohol over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Avoid raw fuel with nitro content higher than 15%. Dab away all raw fuel regardless of nitro content. Test a small out of the way area and all plastics first before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing, peal tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13 bigger) on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a heat gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use a heat gun and soft cotton cloth or glove and hand pressure to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates. Consult our Knowledge Base for further information.
  • Tools for Working with VCOTE2 - 3DS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.  

 

10.1.3.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
10.1.3.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
10.1.3.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
10.2. VMAR - Adhesives Related
10.2.1. VMAR - Adhesive Types Used in Production

Question: What adhesives are used in the production of VMAR ARF products? Do you use hot melt glue?

Answer: VMAR ARFS do NOT use hot melt glue... never have. There is some mis-information and some rumours to this effect but they are simply incorrect.

We use PVA, Epoxy and CA adhesives to build VMAR ARF's. We also have a proprietary hinge glue and a proprietary canopy glue that are not unlike some of the aftermarket adhesives designed for the unique challenges of glueing hinges and canopies. 

 

10.2.2. VMAR - Adhesives - Should I add more of my own?

Question: Some of my friends tell me that I should goop up all the pre-assembled joints of every ARF with EPOXY or other heavy duty adhesive because ARF manufacturers skimp on adhesives and if I can't see the adhesive it can't be there. Should I do this?

Answer: This is not necessary with VMAR ARFS. We use primarily PVA and CA which dry pretty well clear. We also know how to use these adhesives in an industrial setting so that they don't run all over the place. We also use Epoxy for major structural areas like firewalls and this is easier to see. Frankly, when you add more adhesive on your own,  you are adding weight, spending money on adhesives and likely accomplishing precious little else.

We have built and flown literally hundreds of VMAR ARF's since 1998. We have never supplemented a joint with extra adhesive and we have never had a structural failure. That gives us quite a bit of confidence in saying that the adhesives we use and the way we use them give good results.  

To make everyone a bit more comfortable and to cater somewhat to those who advise to get out your trowel and ladle on the 30 minute epoxy... here is what we would recommend if you want to add a little adhesive on your own.

First of all, this does not apply to the wing joint. Follow the assembly instructions re the wing joint... use only 30 minute epoxy for joining wings.

Aside from the wing joint:

  • Work with adequate ventilation when using adhesives. Avoid skin and eye contact. Do not breath vapors. Read the directions and warnings that came with the adhesive. Be attentive to possible alergic responses such as rashes, breathing difficulties etc. Again, read the instructions and pay attention to any warnings that come with the adhesive.
  • Use Pacer ZAP/CA (pink bottle) which is a super thin fast drying CA. Nothing wicks into joints like ZAP/CA. Just lightly touch up inside the radio bay formers. Wick the CA into the triangle or square stock joints around the formers.
  • For plywood joints or where you want a small fillet of adhesive, use Pacer ZAP-A-GAP CA+ which is a medium thickness CA+. ZAP-A-GAP CA+ loves plywoods and tolerates acidic PH, dirt, oil, pitch, resin, other adhesives, surface roughness and gap joint better than any CA we have ever used. It does not wick as well as ZAP/CA but it is better for the rougher joints, plywoods, laminates, hardwoods and wherever a small fillet is desired after a primary bond has formed. 
  • After applying the ZAP/CA and ZAP-A-GAP CA+, give a the fuselage radio bay a fine mist blast of ZIP KICKER from about 12" away. Use the hand pump spritzer with a vigorous 1 or two pumps or a brief shot from the new ZIP KICKER aerosol dispenser. Set the fuselage aside for a minute and you are done.

This method adds very very little weight, gives you that extra reassurance you were looking for and is clean, neat and effective.

 

10.3. VMAR - Canopy (Window) Cleaning - How to Tips

Question: What is the best way to go about cleaning a canopy or formed clear plastic window on a VMAR model?

Answer: First things first... regardless of what cleaner or solvent or method you use, TEST TEST TEST on a small out of the way area of the plastic before proceeding further. It is almost impossible to guarantee how any particular solution will work with any particular plastic without testing first.
 
Second, please review the related article (see below) re cleaning a model in general. There are some relatively common but very scary cleaners out there that can really make a mess out of your model.
 
Third, please review the related article (see below) re cleaning POLYCOTE ECS. This method has been found to work well on most canopies and clear plastic formed parts as well. Remember TEST TEST TEST.
 
Lastly, if the blemish will not go away, you may want to consider replacing the part. Please review the related article (see below) about replacing canopies and formed clear plastic windows. Before launching into a replacement operation we suggest considering if it is worthwhile. Blemishes in clear plastic are common and you may replace a canopy today only to have a new scuff mark or blemish again tomorrow. Enjoy your ARF model and your RC hobby and confine the replacement effort to when it is really necessary like when you have a hole or crack.
10.4. VMAR - Canopy (Window) Replacement - How to Tips

Question: What is the best way to go about replacing a Canopy or formed clear plastic windshield or window on a VMAR model?

Answer: Actually it is not difficult if you go about it the right way. Please review the entire process listed below before actually doing anything.  

The key to this process is to NOT remove the entire old canopy off the model. If you take the old canopy entirely off the model you run the risk of damaging the covering AND will have a more difficult time aligning the new canopy into position.

1) First of all do NOT totally remove the old canopy!  We don't want to take a chance on spoiling the covering so we are going to leave the portion of the old canopy in place that currently is bonded to the covering.

2) Instead of removing the old canopy, carefully clean it all off with Fantastic and paper towels. This will remove all oil, dirt and grime. Clean the canopy and surrounding fuselage area twice.

3) Use Pacer (the ZAP people) RC56 Canopy Glue or Pacer DAP-A-GOO to carefully bond any loose spots of the bird cage back into place on the fuselage. If you've had a crash carefully retrieve and reuse as must of the bird cage "bottom edge" as possible. Ideally you want the bird cage contact area firmly bonded to the fuselage. Will CA work... yes but be careful to avoid "clorosis" which leaves a white powder like residue... use Pacer Poly Zap or Plasti Zap to reduce clorosis effects. Best of all is the Canopy Glue.  

3) Now take a new SHARP #11 Xacto blade and carefully cut the canopy just above the surrounding "bird cage" or frame material. We want to leave the bird cage in place.  If you have a model that has a canopy without a bird cage or frame, cut the canopy just above where it is bonded to the fuselage.

4) Now inspect the remaining bird cage or canopy and make sure that it is bonded to the fuselage... you can work from "inside" the canopy area now if you have to.

5) Carefully trial fit the new canopy on top of the remains of the old bird cage or remainder of the old canopy if no bird cage was present. You should get a nearly perfect fit, particularly when using the old bird cage. The simulated rivets will key exactly into the new canopy rivets.

6) After trial fitting the new bird cage, use Pacer RC56 Canopy glue to carefully bond it into place. Clean up any excess adhesive before it cures. Check several times in case adhesive oozes out. Use low tack masking tape to hold the new canopy into place until the RC56 has thoroughly dried.

That's it!

10.5. VMAR - CG Location - General Guidelines

Question: How do I know where the CG (Center of Gravity) is to be located on my model?

Answer: Always refer to the instruction manual and documentation that came with your model. There is usually a diagram and/or explanation of where the CG lies in each manual. Any changes after the manual is printed are reflected in documents included with the kit. If the documentation has been misplaced and/or you want to double check, use our Knowledge Base and search on CG or look for your specific model in the listing of products.

Information: In the event that you cannot obtain any documentation related to your model and wish to locate the CG here is a procedure that you may wish to try. The CG is generally located just forward of the thickest part of the wing. Setting the CG slightly further forward will not hurt, it will limit the aerobatic capabilities of the model if the CG is too far forward but it will not cause loss of control. the CG too far back makes the model unstable, difficult to control and will often result in a crash. If you are stuck with no solid information at all we suggest setting the CG  3/4" forward of the thickest part of a non-swept wing for initial flights and then gradually moving it back to about 1/4-1/2" forward of the thickest part of the wing but only if the model remains stable in flight.

This procedure works reasonably well for non-swept wings. For swept wings, the thickest part of the wing also tends to sweep back with distance out from the fuselage. To roughly set the CG on a swept wing model we suggest going with a location that represents 25% of the area of the wing. This is the location from which a line running at right angles (perpendicular) from the fuselage will disect the wing such that 25% of the wing area is forward of this line and 75% of the wing area is aft of this line. After initial flights you may wish to move the CG back towards about the 30% mark but only if the model remains stable in flight.
 
Use of "CG Machine": Unfortunately, our comments in this regard are not very positive. Over many years we have noticed that when we get questions from modelers about CG, that 99% of the time they are using a "CG Machine" of some sort and get totally confused about how to use it and in many cases have erroneous information about the CG location of their model.
 
In our opinion, for the vast majority of RC Aircraft applications, such "CG Machines" are tools looking for a purpose. Yes, if you have a swept wing biplane with non-symmetric mass in all three axis and you are entering the Tournament of Champions and know little about CG in model airplanes, you might get some use out of a "CG Machine" IF IF IF you took a few hours to study the device carefully and read the instructions thoroughly.
 
However, if you are not in this rather august group, there are more practical, faster, easier and cheaper ways to set up the CG on your RC model airplane without spending money, getting yourself confused or frustrated.
 
1) Check the documentation that came with your model and any support information that may be on the suppliers web site or knowledge base. From this determine "where" the CG is supposed to be. We will call where the CG is supposed to be, the "CG Datum Point".
 
2) Mark the CG Datum Point on the model.
 
3) For a high wing model extend the CG Datum Point out to the wing tips. If the leading edge (LE) of the wing is straight, use that as your reference point. If, for example, the CG Datum Point is 3" back from the LE of  the wing then mark this on the wing tips. In any event the CG Datum Point should be extended out to the wing tips at right angles (90 degrees) to the thrust line running from the spinner to the tail.
 
4) Put your fingers on or under the wing tips where the CG Datum points are. Lift the model. If it is balanced, you are good to go. If the tail drops, move your battery forward or add small amounts of weight to the nose until it balances. If the nose drops you can leave it slightly nose heavy for training and first flights and then shift your battery back or add a bit of weight to the tail to balance it later on. If the nose drops a great deal, you are very nose heavy and should fix this before flying by shifting weight aft until the model is balanced.
 
5) For a low wing model, you can extend the CG Datum Point out to the wing tips in the same manner as for a high wing model OR better yet, invert the model and screw a cup hook ($.05 cents at the hardware store) into the wing center joint at the CG Datum Point. Hang the model from the cup hook using a piece of string. If it is balanced, you are good to go. If the tail drops, move your battery forward or add small amounts of weight to the nose until it balances. If the nose drops you can leave it slightly nose heavy for training and first flights and then shift your battery back or add a bit of weight to the tail to balance it later on. If the nose drops a great deal, you are very nose heavy and should fix this before flying by shifting weight aft until the model is balanced.
 
The "cup hook" method can also be used for high wing models if you can put a cup hook into top of the fuselage at the CG Datum Point. The cup hook method offers the advantage of also being able to balance the model across the wing span. The wings should also be level when hanging. If not, add weight to the high wing tip by pushing nails or lead pellets into the bottom of the high wing tip and using CA or Epoxy to retain them. You can also use stick on weights.
 
This is not intended to be a treatise on CG Datum Points or adjusting CG locations but it is a good practical simple approach that works for most trainers, fun-fly, sport, scale and pattern airplanes. If you are into something more exotic there are additional considerations.
 
 
10.6. VMAR - Cleaning Model Aircraft

Question: I have a VMAR ARF model aircraft. What should I be aware of when cleaning it after flying?

Answer: Couple of general suggestions here and a few DO NOT DO caveats. See the additional information below for more details. We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and you can dilute it 50/50 with water. Always test any cleaner on a small out of view area first. Avoid overspray on plastics. Spray cleaner lightly (do NOT flood) and wipe away cleaner and dirt/oil with disposable towels as soon as possible after spraying. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane.

Additional Information: VMAR models are covered in V-Cote, POLYCOTE ECS and VCOTE-2 3DS. All of these materials are heat shrink film. V-Cote is flatter in gloss and tolerates up to 15% nitro fuel well. Higher nitro fuel can soften V-Cote graphics if allowed to sit on the surface for extended periods of time. POLYCOTE ECS is higher in gloss. VCOTE-2 3DS has a medium gloss and has 3D indentations for some panel lines and rivets. POLYCOTE and VCOTE-2 3DS can tolerate high nitro fuels and other fuel types. Always wipe away raw fuel quickly in any event.

All of these covering materials clean well with Fantastic and many other household cleaners. We recommend Fantastic diluted 50/50 with water. Always test on a small out of view area first when working with any cleaner. Do NOT flood or over spray. Avoid spraying directly on plastic components and canopies. Wipe away cleaner and residue immediately after spraying with cleaner using disposable paper towels. 

Do NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane. Simple Green and 409 are good products for cutting grease and other industrial/commercial type applications but they are intended for use on non-porous materials and contain powerful chemicals that are not compatible with adhesives, balsa wood and other material found in a model aircraft. Use a web search engine to search on Simple Green and/or 409 and note the warnings and chemicals appliable to these and similar products. Do NOT NOT NOT use other cleaners having similar chemicals to those found in Simple Green or 409.

Here is a link to information related to 409: http://www.biosci.ohio-state.edu/~jsmith/MSDS/FORMULA%20409%20CLEANER.htm

What can SIMPLE GREEN, 409 and similar cleaners do to your model? Well... it depends. If you are not concerned about the safety aspects of these products and spray these materials on a paper towel and then use the damp towel to wipe down your model (avoid plastics) these products seem to do a good job of cutting grease and cleaning the model and many modelers like these cleaners. However, if you spray the material on to the model rather than the towel, you run the risk of the cleaner running into seams, cavities, hinge slots, covering joints and onto plastic components etc. These type of cleaners are intended for non-porous materials and if they wick or run into adhesive joints, hinge slots or under covering they can loosen the covering (this has been going on for years and modelers sometimes fight back with CA on the joint) AND react with some adhesives to soften and weaken the bond. We have also seen these type of cleaners react with adhesive commonly used to glue hinges and canopies into place and leave an ugly looking dark green stain under the covering where it has wicked further into the wooden substrate. This cannot be repaired and will continue to spread if more Simple Green, 409 or similar cleaner finds its way into the same area. We have also seen these type of cleaners attack plastic... generally the plastic does not dissolve or soften, instead it gets dry, hard, brittle and will over time crack and flake off.

In summary it would be best to use the cleaner and the techniques we recommend. If you are fond of your particular cleaner then at least make sure you follow the techniques we have outlined above. Test first. Do not flood or overspray. Wipe away quickly. Best to spray on the towel rather than the model. Make sure no cleaner can get into the model substrate such as the balsa or plywood materials... stay away from hinge slots, seams, cavities, joints, adhesive bonds etc. Protect plastics from direct contact with cleaners and/or long term exposure to cleaners.

Related Articles:

For each type of covering we use, there may be additional articles related to cleaning that particular covering. To check for Related Articles please use the Search tool near the top left of the Knowledge Base window and search on the word "Clean". Type just the letters Clean (clean) into the search box and then click on the button marked Search. The search tool will return a list of articles having "Clean" in the header or body. We suggest reviewing the articles related to the covering on your particular model.

 

10.7. VMAR - Construction
10.7.1. Construction - Triangle Stock - Where is it Used?

Question: Do VMAR ARFs make use of triangle stock to expand the bonding area of right angle joints?

Answer: Yes. We use triangle stock whereever a right angle joint is under stress and needs an expanded bonding area. In some cases the stock is square and in other cases it is triangle shaped but the intent and the result is the same.

Primary areas where you will see this are on the formers fore and aft of the radio bay, behind the firewall and under the wing mounting blocks.

In some cases the triangle or square stock may not be visible upon casual inspection... look carefully on both sides of the formers. In response to user inquiries we have tended to put the extra stock where it is more visible since 2003.

10.8. VMAR - Control Surfaces
VMAR control surfaces are built up rather than solid stock. This makes them lighter, faster to deploy and greatly reduces the chances of a warp occuring.  
 
With very few exceptions, VMAR control surfaces are pre-hinged and installed at the factory. Always check control surfaces when building and before every flight to ensure that they are firmly attached to the aircraft.
10.8.1. VMAR - Control Surfaces - Fixing Warps
VMAR control surfaces seldom warp due to their unique construction method. Occasionally a control surface will warp. This is nearly always found immediately following shipping and is due to the control surface being subject to loads and bending forces during transit.
 
Here are some hints that will help you resolve warps in control surfaces:
1) Always inspect components before attaching them with glue to anything else. Once a component is glued, you are pretty much on your own to resolve problems that may occur or be found later. Do a careful check out before gluing anything.
 
2) Most warps are small. Although everyone strives for perfection, a small warp will have minimal impact on the flying characteristics of a model aircraft once you trim the model in flight. Yes, trimming to counter a warp will induce minor drag but we are not flying the space shuttle... it's a model!
 
3) For larger warps or warps that you just feel you must try to fix, use a #11 blade to cut the hinges. Leave the stubs in the leading and trailing edges, just trim them down. Take the warped surface and bend it opposite to the warp and hold it under tension for a minute or so. Let go and see of the warp is still present or comes back over a 10 minute period. If it does not, rehinge and reattach the control surface being careful to align it properly.
 
If the quick de-warping procedure outlined above does not solve your problem, use an iron and heat gun to warm the warped area on both sides without damaging the covering. You want to get the wood warm but not muck up the covering. Once the wood around the warp is warm on both sides, take the warped surface and bend it opposite to the warp so that you have over-corrected the warp by a degree or so. Hold the control surface securely and let it cool completely. Don't relax the dewarping pressure until the control surface is cool. Rehinge and reattach the control surface being careful to align it properly.
 
4) If neither of these two de-warping procedures works for you, please contact Richmond RC Supply Ltd (see our contact info) and open a Priorty Response Ticket or request a return authorisation number by email. Upon receipt we will review the component and follow up with you shortly thereafter.
 
  
 
 
10.9. VMAR - Covering - General Information
10.9.1. VMAR - Covering - How to Identify What Type of Covering is on My Model.

Question: How can I identify what type of covering is on my VMAR model?

Answer: It's not hard. Just look for these tell-tale signs.

  • POLYCOTE ECS - The finish is glossy with a deep pearl like finish as if you are looking through a layer of clear plastic (cause you are!). Nothing else looks like POLYCOTE ECS!
  • VCOTE - Except for white, the colors are generally flat. Used on older models AND on some warbirds where a flat camoflage finish is desired.
  • VCOTE2-3DSVC - Used on higher end models where more scale like 3D detailing is required. It has a a glossy or semi-glossy finish but most importantly some of the rivets and panel lines are indented into the surface to give a true 3D look and feel to the detailing. Run your finger nail across a variety of panel lines, if any of the lines are indented... you've got VCOTE2-3DS on your model.

If you need a bit more help with this, check out the descriptions and key features of each covering type as shown below.

POLYCOTE ECS - What is it?

POLYCOTE ECS is a proprietary Enhanced Covering System engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR.

  • With POLYCOTE ECS the graphics are inside the covering... not stuck on top. No Decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes!
  • POLYCOTE ECS utilizes ULTRA TOUGH polyester and our SURE SEAL system to ensure that the seams stay down!
  • Best of all POLYCOTE is totally fuel proof!

Quite simply... POLYCOTE ECS leads the pack in ARF covering systems! By putting the graphics where they belong... inside the POLYESTER covering... we've eliminated the need for decals and overlays and reduced  maintenance to a minimum. No overlays edges to pick up, very few seams, extraordinary fuel proofing etc. With POLYCOTE ECS you will spend more time flying and less time applying and reworking the covering!

POLYCOTE ECS offers the best in covering performance!

VCOTE2-3DS - What is it?

VCOTE2-3DS is a proprietary 3D Detailing System engineered in Canada and used on our premium VMAR ARF models where scale detailing and a tough long lasting covering is essential! Rivets and some of the hatches and panel lines are actually 3D. They stand up on the surface skin like the real thing!

VCOTE2-3DS is totally different and simply the best covering and detailing system available. VCOTE2-3DS builds on our VCOTE technology and goes a lot farther. All the detailing is inside the covering... no decals, no strips, no stripes and totally fuel proof.

Best of all... VCOTE2-3DS is very very sag resistant. Extensively tested in direct sunlight and heated air up to 130F!

  • With VCOTE2-3DS the graphics are pre-applied to the covering... not stuck on top. No Decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes!
  • VCOTE2-3DS utilizes a tough heat shrinkable film and our SURE SEAL system to ensure that the seams stay down!
  • VCOTE2-3DS is fuel proof. We recommend dabing up any raw unburned high nitro fuel as a precaution.

By pre-applying the the graphics... we've eliminated the need for decals or overlays completely and reduced the need for maintenance to a minimum. No decal or overlay edges to pick up, and very few seams. With VCOTE2-3DS you will have a great model that looks terrific right out of the box and spend more time flying and less time applying and reworking the covering!

VCOTE2-3DS 3D Detailing System - Only from VMAR!

 

10.9.2. VMAR - Covering - Color Changes
Question: Does covering change color over time?
 
Answer: Yes.
 
To varying degree's nearly all colors and types of heat shrink plastic covering will change color over time when exposed to light and/or heat. Bright sunlight and hot temperatures tend to accelerate the process.
 
Flourescent colors and most shades of blue and purple will show the most change when exposed to light and will tend to fade or appear more muted when exposed to light.
 
VCOTE and VCOTE2-3DS may also change color when exposed to raw high nitro fuel and/or non-approved cleaning solvents.
 
 
10.9.3. VMAR - Covering - Custom Graphics
Question: Are VMAR models available with Custom Graphics?
 
Answer: Yes.
 
There is a set up a charge and a minimum run quantity. Custom Graphics are viable for hobby shops and clubs who wish to promote their organization. Please email sales@richmondrc.com for more information.
 
Please note that Custom Graphics will be very expensive if the run size is small hence this service is not recommended for run sizes of less than 25.  
10.9.4. VMAR - Covering - Not Factory Applied
Question: Are VMAR models available without the factory applied covering? I'd like to get just the bare wood model and cover it myself.  
 
Answer: Yes.
 
This is a special order requiring 50% payment at time of order and 50% when we are ready to ship. Lead time is 120 days. To order OnLine please add a note to your order (in the notes or comments section) specifying WITHOUT COVERING.
 
Please note that due to the need for additional packaging and handling to protect the bare non-covered framework, shipping charges are double the normal rates and that there is NO product warranty and NO insurance available for shipping damage. These products are sold as FINAL SALE items and subject to the same terms & conditions as our Final Sale items. Please see the following link for further information on the Terms and Conditions associated with FINAL SALE items:

 

POLYCOTE ECS - Tools - For working with POLYCOTE ECS

 

10.9.5. VMAR - Covering - Patch Material - Availability

Question: The documentation that was included with my model, refers to patch sheets. I did not get these. What's the story here?

Answer: Due to continual upgrading of the covering material, since early 2005 patch sheets are NOT shipped with the model. Please see the Knowledge Base article related to the covering on your model and then consult the Care & Maintenance > Repairing Punctures article for further information on patching punctures.

Covering Patch Material and Covering Sets are available as after market items. Please see the VMAR OnLine Store at www.richmondrc.com

Covering Patch Material is sold as a generic set suitable for most models. This is available as part# VMA-PATCHPAK. You may also wish to consider the appropriate covering set for your particular model.

If you wish to jump straight to the parts section of the VMAR OnLine Store please go to:  http://www.richmondrc.com/shop2/VMA_USA_Retail.html.  To locate the generic set of Covering Patch Material use the search engine and search on Patch. To find the covering set for your particular model, we suggest searching on the part number of the model itself or the name of the model. Searching on SUB-COVERSET may also prove helpful.

10.9.6. VMAR - Covering - Patches vs Sets - What's the Difference?
Question: What is the difference between Covering Patches and Covering Sets?

Answer:
Covering Sets contain all the covering applicable to the set type. For example a Covering Set for a Wing contains all the covering for that wing.
 
Covering Patch Material is available in two forms.
a) A generic patch set suitable for many models that is available as part# VMA-PATCHPAK. This contains a variety of color swatches that work on many models but no attempt is made to try to provide a perfect color match to any particular model.
 
b) A patch set made from the particular covering for a specific model. Basically a complete set of actual covering is cut up into small swatches and pieces. Each patch set contains about 1/12 of the covering set for that model.
 If you wish to jump straight to the parts section of the VMAR OnLine Store please go to:  http://www.richmondrc.com/shop2/VMA_USA_Retail.html.  To locate the generic set of Covering Patch Material use the search engine and search on Patch. To find the covering set or patches for your particular model, we suggest searching on the part number of the model itself or the name of the model. Searching on SUB-COVERSET may also prove helpful.
10.9.7. VMAR - Covering - POLYCOTE ECS - Information & Tips
10.9.7.1. POLYCOTE ECS - What is it?

POLYCOTE ECS is a proprietary Enhanced Covering System engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR.

  • With POLYCOTE ECS the graphics are inside the covering... not stuck on top. No Decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes!
  • POLYCOTE ECS utilizes ULTRA TOUGH polyester and our SURE SEAL system to ensure that the seams stay down!
  • Best of all POLYCOTE is totally fuel proof!

Quite simply... POLYCOTE ECS leads the pack in ARF covering systems! By putting the graphics where they belong... inside the POLYESTER covering... we've eliminated the need for decals and overlays and reduced  maintenance to a minimum. No overlays edges to pick up, very few seams, extraordinary fuel proofing etc. With POLYCOTE ECS you will spend more time flying and less time applying and reworking the covering!

POLYCOTE ECS offers the best in covering performance!

10.9.7.2. POLYCOTE ECS - Can I see the difference?

Question: With POLYCOTE ECS can I actually see the difference?

Answer: You Bet! Nothing beats having the real thing to look at but even on the web you can see the difference. Check out the image below of the VMAR Edge 540T 45-60 ARF ECS using POLYCOTE ECS. Zoom it out by clicking on the image. Now look carefully at the yellow on blue star field and the stylized US Flag and you will see gradient composite colors... possible ONLY with POLYCOTE ECS from VMAR!.

 

Check out the tail detailing (second image shown below) on the VMAR Edge 540T 45-60 ARF ECS using POLYCOTE ECS. With any other covering system this type of detail would be done using decals, overlays and stripes. Worse yet, the factory would leave it "blank" and you would have to do the tedious hours long task yourself. With POLYCOTE ECS all the graphics are inside the covering where they belong. The graphics are totally fuel proof beneath a factory applied rich deep lustre clear layer of POLYCOTE  ECS! No decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes! No work! Nothing to peal up, flak off or snag when you clean your model. ONLY with POLYCOTE ECS from VMAR!.

10.9.7.3. POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance Tips

 

10.9.7.3.1. POLYCOTE ECS - Introduction - Care & Maintenance

 

10.9.7.3.2. POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
10.9.7.3.3. POLYCOTE ECS - Avoid Hot Vehicles parked in the Sun

Question: I inadvertently left my model locked in my closed van all afternoon in the hot desert sun? Will this have any effect on the POLYCOTE ECS covering?

Answer: Nothing permanent but you will likely have some sagging at least the first and second time you do this. At the risk of sounding facetious... cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions and if your model is stuck in this environment with no circulation for hours and hours, sagging is often the result.

We recommend avoiding this type of problem. Keep the model out of situations where the temperature is extreme with little or no circulation.

If it has occurred, there is no point in crying over spilt milk...  if you see sagging, don't panic! BEFORE you do anything at all, please review the Tip on Tightening Sags in POLYCOTE ECS.  Sagging is fixable (a whole model can be done in less than an hour) but only if you go about it properly. If you jump into this with your heat iron and heat gun assuming you know how to do this because you've fixed Monokote sags and bubbles for years, you have a high probabilty of making a botch of this and you will be stuck with a rather unpleasant result.

 

10.9.7.3.4. POLYCOTE ECS - Cleaning After Flying

Question: I have been flying my model using a glow or gasoline engine. I have some oil residue on the model along with some bug guts and a bit of dirt from a less than perfect landing. How do I clean it up?

Answer:  To clean POLYCOTE ECS after flying we recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Wipe along seams, not across. To really show off your POLYCOTE ECS covering, after cleaning wtih Fantastic... use a bit of Armorall and buff dry & shiny.

Please carefully review the following information and take particular note if you are planning on using Simple Green, 409 or similar non-approved cleaners.

VMAR - Cleaning Model Aircraft

Question: I have a VMAR ARF model aircraft. What should I be aware of when cleaning it after flying?

Answer: Couple of general suggestions here and a few DO NOT DO caveats. See the additional information below for more details. We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and you can dilute it 50/50 with water. Always test any cleaner on a small out of view area first. Avoid overspray on plastics. Spray cleaner lightly (do NOT flood) and wipe away cleaner and dirt/oil with disposable towels as soon as possible after spraying. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane.

Additional Information: VMAR models are covered in V-Cote, POLYCOTE ECS and VCOTE-2 3DS. All of these materials are heat shrink film. V-Cote is flatter in gloss and tolerates up to 15% nitro fuel well. Higher nitro fuel can soften V-Cote graphics if allowed to sit on the surface for extended periods of time. POLYCOTE ECS is higher in gloss. VCOTE-2 3DS has a medium gloss and has 3D indentations for some panel lines and rivets. POLYCOTE and VCOTE-2 3DS can tolerate high nitro fuels and other fuel types. Always wipe away raw fuel quickly in any event.

All of these covering materials clean well with Fantastic and many other household cleaners. We recommend Fantastic diluted 50/50 with water. Always test on a small out of view area first when working with any cleaner. Do NOT flood or over spray. Avoid spraying directly on plastic components and canopies. Wipe away cleaner and residue immediately after spraying with cleaner using disposable paper towels. 

Do NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane. Simple Green and 409 are good products for cutting grease and other industrial/commercial type applications but they are intended for use on non-porous materials and contain powerful chemicals that are not compatible with adhesives, balsa wood and other material found in a model aircraft. Use a web search engine to search on Simple Green and/or 409 and note the warnings and chemicals appliable to these and similar products. Do NOT NOT NOT use other cleaners having similar chemicals to those found in Simple Green or 409.

Here is a link to information related to 409: http://www.biosci.ohio-state.edu/~jsmith/MSDS/FORMULA%20409%20CLEANER.htm

What can SIMPLE GREEN, 409 and similar cleaners do to your model? Well... it depends. If you are not concerned about the safety aspects of these products and spray these materials on a paper towel and then use the damp towel to wipe down your model (avoid plastics) these products seem to do a good job of cutting grease and cleaning the model and many modelers like these cleaners. However, if you spray the material on to the model rather than the towel, you run the risk of the cleaner running into seams, cavities, hinge slots, covering joints and onto plastic components etc. These type of cleaners are intended for non-porous materials and if they wick or run into adhesive joints, hinge slots or under covering they can loosen the covering (this has been going on for years and modelers sometimes fight back with CA on the joint) AND react with some adhesives to soften and weaken the bond. We have also seen these type of cleaners react with adhesive commonly used to glue hinges and canopies into place and leave an ugly looking dark green stain under the covering where it has wicked further into the wooden substrate. This cannot be repaired and will continue to spread if more Simple Green, 409 or similar cleaner finds its way into the same area. We have also seen these type of cleaners attack plastic... generally the plastic does not dissolve or soften, instead it gets dry, hard, brittle and will over time crack and flake off.

In summary it would be best to use the cleaner and the techniques we recommend. If you are fond of your particular cleaner then at least make sure you follow the techniques we have outlined above. Test first. Do not flood or overspray. Wipe away quickly. Best to spray on the towel rather than the model. Make sure no cleaner can get into the model substrate such as the balsa or plywood materials... stay away from hinge slots, seams, cavities, joints, adhesive bonds etc. Protect plastics from direct contact with cleaners and/or long term exposure to cleaners.

Related Articles:

For each type of covering we use, there may be additional articles related to cleaning that particular covering. To check for Related Articles please use the Search tool near the top left of the Knowledge Base window and search on the word "Clean". Type just the letters Clean (clean) into the search box and then click on the button marked Search. The search tool will return a list of articles having "Clean" in the header or body. We suggest reviewing the articles related to the covering on your particular model.

 

10.9.7.3.5. POLYCOTE ECS - Cleaning Initially

Question: I have my model all assembled and have a few streaks or other residue on the POLYCOTE ECS covering. How do I clean these off.

Answer:  POLYCOTE ECS has very few seams and we use our SURE SEAL system to really lock the seams down. Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS when looked at under bright light this is a light residue from the SURE SEAL process. It is easily removed using Minerial Spirits (Paint Thinner, Varsol). If you've ever painted with oil base paints you probably have Mineral Spirits on hand already, if not, it is readily available at a paint or hardware store. It is recommended that you work with Mineral Spirits outdoors and follow the directions on the container. Use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Use a clean towel to buff dry. If you want to accentuate the deep "clear cote" gloss of POLYCOTE ECS even more, use a bit of Armorall and buff shiny with a clean paper towel. Discard all soiled paper towels into a metal garbage can stored outdoors.

 

10.9.7.3.6. POLYCOTE ECS - How to Cut.

Question: POLYCOTE ECS is tough stuff! How do I cut it?

Answer: POLYCOTE ECS is made from Ultra Tough Polyester. Where possible, use scissors to cut POLYCOTE. Scissors work well. Otherwise use a new sharp #11 Blade. The blade must be SHARP.

 

10.9.7.3.7. POLYCOTE ECS - Pealing - What should I do?

Question: I've been flying my VMAR model for a while and notice that a small area of covering appears to have lifted at an edge and looks like it is pealing back. What should I do?

Answer: Don't panic! This is generally repairable. This can occur in two ways.

a) If the color layer is still bonded to the underside of the clear polyester layer, use a heat iron and soft heat iron sock to iron the loose layer back into place. If the seam is on a curve such as a leading or trailing edge or at the edge of a cutout like a servo cavity, you might want to wick thin CA along the exposed seam after you have reseated the covering to ensure the edge does not pick up again.

b) If the color layer has remained on the model and only the clear polyester layer has pulled away, you can try the same method as outlined in a) above but you will need more heat to rebond the clear layer to the model. If this does not work, you can either remove the clear layer where it is loose and recover the exposed section with clear UltraCote (UltraCote is made also made from Polyester) or you can apply a thin coat of latex contact cement (spray on works well) to the exposed area and the underside of the clear loose film and after the contact cement has dried to tacky, firmly press the loose film back into place working towards the edge. Work slowly and wipe back and forth as you press downwards. If you do do not have access to contact cement you might want to try a product called Balsarite from Coverite products which is specifically made to help increase the bond strenght between most coverings and balsa wood. . Seal the edge with CA as outlined in a) above.

 

10.9.7.3.8. POLYCOTE ECS - Protecting the Finish - What should I do?

Question: I've been flying my VMAR model for a while and it looks great. Is there anything that I need to do protect the finish to ensure it lasts.

Answer: POLYCOTE ECS is pretty tough stuff and does not need kid glove handling. If you do the following you should get good durability for the life of the model.

  • Most Importantly - Follow the Cleaning instructions. Use the recommended Cleaners and Method.
  • Secondly, remove raw fuel from the canopy, plastic parts and around seams as soon as possible. Dab it off gently and then clean with Fantastic.
  • Test anything you apply to any covering, plastic or component. It's a good idea to assume that whatever is made there is something that can attack it. Test any glue, paint, cleaner, sealer, wax or anything else you may feel inclined to try on your model by applying the material to a small out of the way area first. If you get a reaction, a small blemish is better than having your canopy curl up or the covering turn black overnight. We've run into some very strang situations over the years... 99.9% of these would have been avoided by testing first.
  • Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun. UV light can play hell with pigments especially dark colors and flourescents. This does not mean you need to go around covering your model every 15 minutes but if you can get it out of the sun after a few hours we would suggest that's a good way to go.
  • Patch holes and tack down any loose seams as soon as possible after the problem is noticed.

That's about it. Nothing to really sweat over... basically common sense.

 

10.9.7.3.9. POLYCOTE ECS - Removing & Using Tape

Question: Some of my control surfaces have arrived from the factory with tape holding them in place during shipment. Is there a correct method for removing the tape.

Answer: When removing tape from POLYCOTE ECS (or any covering for that matter), peal the tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering. If the tape is near or across a seam or an edge, peal towards the edge or seam. Do NOT pull the tape up at right angles to the covering or away from a seam or edge.

If you use your own tape during the assembly process, use a low tack masking tape and remove it using the procedure noted above.

 

10.9.7.3.10. POLYCOTE ECS - Repairing Punctures - How to Patch.

Question: I have a puncture in my POLYCOTE ECS.  How do I patch this?

Answer:  If you puncture POLYCOTE ECS, clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. We clean using Fantastic and then a paper towel moistened with Pacer De-Bonder or alcohol or water to remove any remaining residue from the surface. The patch should be 1/2" (13 mm) bigger than the hole on all sides.

It may be difficult to match colors or patterns. When you run into this challenge, you might want to take a different approach. Rather than try to match the color or pattern, deliberately use a black white or silver patch and cut it into the shape of a panel hatch. Detail this with lettering and a perimeter line and it will look like the hatch is supposed to be there. Another trick is to cut the patch into a shape of a letter, flag or aircraft marking.

We recommend using after market POLYCOTE patching material or polyester covering such as POLYCOTE, ULTRACOTE or ORACOVER and the use of a heat iron and soft cloth. Monokote, SolarFilm or V-COTE covering material will also work. Cut the patch with rounded corners. Seal the patch in place with a heat iron set at 250F first and then tighten the patch and the original covering around the patch as outlined in the tightening tip. You may need to experiment a bit with the temperature of your iron depending on the patch material you are using.

To repair larger more extensive damage areas, you may wish to obtain the appropriate POLYCOTE ECS covering set for your model

 

10.9.7.3.11. POLYCOTE ECS - Seam Loose - How to Reseal.

Question: One of the seams on my model has come loose. What have I done wrong? What should I do to reseal it?

Answer: Although we are very careful to tack all seams down and then to seal them as well, we are not perfect (although we're trying!) so the loosening of a seam may not be due to anything you are doing. Once a seam is in place properly we advise being very careful when cleaning the model to avoid wiping across the seam... wipe parallel to it. There are very few seams on VMAR models.

Generally seams are located at:

  • The trailing edge of the wing (hidden by the aileron),
  • The leading edge of the wing if swept or tapered,
  • The leading and trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer,
  • 1 or more seams on the bottom of the fuselage,
  • Some models with shaped turtle decks may have a seam at the top of the fuselage running more or less along the spine.

If you do have a loose edge, clean any oil residue from the area and the edge and reseal with thin CA.

 

10.9.7.3.12. POLYCOTE ECS - How to Tighten Sags

Question: My model is covered with POLYCOTE ECS and I have noticed that there are some sags in the covering. What is causing this? Can I fix it? What should I do?

Answer: It helps to understand how the sags develop before we get into tightening things up to get rid of the sags.

In low humidity air such as is found in the hot desert areas or in continental winter conditions where cold outside air is brought inside and heated to 22C ( 70F), the underlying structure is drying and shrinking. Many modelers feel that the sags are caused by heat and to a point they are correct because hot conditions are often dry and most definitely heat is the key to solving the problem. However, the real underlying cause is low humidity air drying the structure out and as the structure drys it gets lighter and smaller. POLYCOTE ECS will not shrink at normal room temperatures and you end up with,  in effect,  more covering on your model than you need!

The way to get rid of the sags is to shrink the POLYCOTE ECS with a heat gun and rub it down into the substrate with a soft cloth once it has shrunk. Before you start firing up your flame thrower, please note the following procedure... if you get the method down pat, you will get a good result and not have to do this more than 1-2 times... 3 times at most. However if you assume that POLYCOTE ECS is like Monokote or SolarFilm, you will make a hash of it and you will not be happy with the outcome. POLYCOTE ECS is polyester and the technique for shinking it is similar to that used for ORACOVER (ULTRACOTE).

Remember SSB! As in 

SECURE the perimeter.

SHRINK to fit

BOND to the structure.

First, SECURE the perimeter by sealing and bonding the seams, edges and around perimeters. Use a heat iron with sock set at around 250F and a soft cotton glove or sock. Heat the perimeter edge in stages, just warm up a small area and then  press the warm covering down firmly with the iron sock or a soft cotton cloth to bond the perimeter of the covering to the underlying substrate. Do not overheat or the edge will pull back as the material shrinks. Always rub along seams, not across the seam. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. Avoid using more heat than required to prevent bubbles from forming beneath the covering or edges pulling back as the material shrinks. Remember you are just SECUREing the perimeter at this point. Be patient and work systematically starting with a small out of the way area first to gain experience.

AFTER SECURING the perimeter, SHRINK the interior areas to fit, using a heat gun set at around 250K. Heat about 1 square foot of area at a time, shrink the covering to fit and then rub the warm covering down firmly with a soft cotton cloth to BOND the covering to the underlying substrate. Over open bays the POLYCOTE ECS will appear to first sag and then begin to tighten as you apply heat. Do this in stages and try repeatedly until the covering over the open bay is tight when cool. Don't overdo it... like may things, there is a technique to this that requies a bit of experience to develop. Go slowly one step at a time. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. DO NOT APPLY EXTENSIVE HEAT NEAR EDGES & SEAMS. Always practise on the bottom of a less noticable section first. Be patient and work systematically. You will likely only have to tighten POLYCOTE once or twice to accomodate any shrinkage of the airframe in dry hot conditions.

To prevent or at least minimize the occurence of sags do not leave your model in a closed car parked in the sun. Here is some information that may help you avoid this problem.

10.9.7.3.13. POLYCOTE ECS - Tools - For working with POLYCOTE ECS

 

VMAR - Covering - Tools - Recommended

Question: What would you recommend in the way of tools for working with Covering materials?

Answer: Here's a list of what we would suggest:

  • A pair of sharp scissors
  • An Xacto Knife with a SHARP #11 Blade
  • A Heat Iron with controllable temperature (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Iron Sock (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Gun with controllable consistent output temperature
  • A soft cotton cloth or glove.

Please note that the heat gun is particularly important. Unfortunately the standard RC covering heat gun has been driven down in price so that it is selling at times for usa$14.95-19.95. We say unfortunately because at that price we are getting exactly what we are paying for... a pretty crude unregulated heat producer. Even a decent hair dryer costs more!

Most of these low end RC covering heat guns do not monitor the heat coming out of the nozzle. They have a heating element that heats the air sucked into the back of the gun and a fan that blasts it out the front. The vanes at the back of the gun have a very limited effect on the output temperature. So... if you take a 1000 watt gun for example, and heat air that is at 50F flowing into the back of gun you get a fixed amount of temperature increase... lets say 350F and the outflowing air is at 50+350=400F. Now run the same gun with ambient air of 75F flowing into the back of the gun and the same 1000W of energy will increase this 75F air by 350 degrees to 425F. So depending on the ambient air temperature you get a different output temperature. To add to the confusion somewhat, adding a fixed amount of energy to dry air (low humidity) will change the temperature of the air more than if you add if you add the same amount of energy to moist (high humidity) air. This variation in output temperature due to changes in the ambient air and ambient humidity makes it very difficult to work out a reliable consistent technique when you are working with heat shrink covering. One day you get a "feel" for the right amount of heat, time and distance and everything goes great. The next day or a month later you try this with a different ambient air temperature and/or different humidity and your technique does not work... why? Because the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun has changed without you being aware of it.

What can you do about this to make your covering technique more consistent? Well sadly to say you either have to live with this problem or you have to dump the cheapy RC covering heat gun and get a heat gun that measures and controls the consistency of the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun.

There are a number of heat guns for shrinking heat shrink tubing that work well. They can be rather expensive but give you good control over the temperature you want AND hold that temperature consistently regardless of ambient temperature and humidity. It's nice to be able to select the temperature if you've got the cash to buy such a gun. If you need to watch your pennies a bit more carefully, we suggest opting for less control and go for consistency. Some of the lower priced heat guns intended for stripping paint do this. You will need to work out the distance and time technique that works for your covering but at least you will be doing so with a gun that is producing a reliable temperature output. We have used the Black & Decker #9756 with good results. This has two temperature settings, 500F and 1000F. Read the safety instructions that comes with the unit. Work with the 500F setting at a good distance at first (say 15") and move the gun frequently until you get a feel for it. Generally the closer you get and/or the hotter the air coming out of the gun, the quicker you have to move the gun (less exposure time) to avoid overheating the covering.

 

10.9.8. VMAR - Covering - VCOTE Information & Tips
10.9.8.1. VCOTE - What is it?

VCOTE is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada available only from VMAR.

  • With VCOTE the graphics are pre-applied to the covering... not stuck on top. No Decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes!
  • VCOTE utilizes a tough heat shrinkable film and our SURE SEAL system to ensure that the seams stay down!
  • VCOTE is fuel proof to 15% nitro fuels and fuel resistant to higher nitro fuels provided that any raw unburned fuel is removed quickly. We recommend dabbing up any raw unburned high nitro fuel as a precaution.

By pre-applying the the graphics... we've eliminated the need for decals or overlays completely and reduced the need for maintenance to a minimum. No decal or overlay edges to pick up, and very few seams. With VCOTE you will have a great model that looks terrific right out of the box and spend more time flying and less time applying and reworking the covering!

VCOTE from VMAR!

 

 

10.9.8.2. VCOTE - Care & Maintenance Tips

VCOTE FROM VMAR

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
10.9.8.2.1. VCOTE - Introduction - Care & Maintenance

 

VCOTE - What is it?

VCOTE is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada available only from VMAR.

  • With VCOTE the graphics are pre-applied to the covering... not stuck on top. No Decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes!
  • VCOTE utilizes a tough heat shrinkable film and our SURE SEAL system to ensure that the seams stay down!
  • VCOTE is fuel proof to 15% nitro fuels and fuel resistant to higher nitro fuels provided that any raw unburned fuel is removed quickly. We recommend dabbing up any raw unburned high nitro fuel as a precaution.

By pre-applying the the graphics... we've eliminated the need for decals or overlays completely and reduced the need for maintenance to a minimum. No decal or overlay edges to pick up, and very few seams. With VCOTE you will have a great model that looks terrific right out of the box and spend more time flying and less time applying and reworking the covering!

VCOTE from VMAR!

 

 

10.9.8.2.2. VCOTE - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of VCOTE?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips and at www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") we have an expanded explanation for each of these Tips.

VCOTE is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR. Please note that VCOTE is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. As with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering so its important to read the Tips over FIRST. Whatever you want to do with VCOTE, test it on a small out of the way area first.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to VCOTE covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the VCOTE, work outdoors and after testing first on a small out of the way area, use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Alcohol over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Avoid raw fuel with nitro content higher than 15%. Dab away all raw fuel regardless of nitro content. Test a small out of the way area and all plastics first before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing, peal tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm bigger) on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a heat gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use a heat gun and soft cotton cloth or glove and hand pressure to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates. Consult our Knowledge Base for further information.
  • Tools for Working with VCOTE
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.

 

10.9.8.2.3. VCOTE - Avoid Hot Vehicles parked in the Sun

Question: I inadvertently left my model locked in my closed van all afternoon in the hot desert sun? Will this have any effect on the VCOTE covering?

Answer: Nothing permanent but you will likely have some sagging at least the first and second time you do this. Generally not a good idea. Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions and if your model is stuck in this environment with no circulation for hours and hours, sagging is often the result.

We recommend avoiding this type of problem. Keep the model out of situations where the temperature is extreme with little or no circulation.

If it has occurred, there is no point in crying over spilt milk...  if you see sagging, don't panic! BEFORE you do anything at all, please review the Tip on Tightening VCOTE.  Sagging is fixable (a whole model can be done in less than an hour) but only if you go about it properly. If you jump into this with your heat iron and heat gun assuming you know how to do this because you've fixed Monokote sags and bubbles for years, you have a high probabilty of making a botch of this and you will be stuck with a rather unpleasant result.

 

10.9.8.2.4. VCOTE - Cleaning After Flying

Question: I have been flying my model using a glow or gasoline engine. I have some oil residue on the model along with some bug guts and a bit of dirt from a less than perfect landing. How do I clean it up?

Answer:  To clean VCOTE after flying we recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. You can use other similar cleaners but avoid cleaners with solvents or abrasives. It is a good idea to always test a small out of the way spot first. Wipe along seams, not across. To really show off your VCOTE covering, after cleaning wtih Fantastic... use a bit of Armorall and buff dry & shiny.

Please carefully review the following information and take particular note if you are planning on using Simple Green, 409 or similar non-approved cleaners.

VMAR - Cleaning Model Aircraft

Question: I have a VMAR ARF model aircraft. What should I be aware of when cleaning it after flying?

Answer: Couple of general suggestions here and a few DO NOT DO caveats. See the additional information below for more details. We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and you can dilute it 50/50 with water. Always test any cleaner on a small out of view area first. Avoid overspray on plastics. Spray cleaner lightly (do NOT flood) and wipe away cleaner and dirt/oil with disposable towels as soon as possible after spraying. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane.

Additional Information: VMAR models are covered in V-Cote, POLYCOTE ECS and VCOTE-2 3DS. All of these materials are heat shrink film. V-Cote is flatter in gloss and tolerates up to 15% nitro fuel well. Higher nitro fuel can soften V-Cote graphics if allowed to sit on the surface for extended periods of time. POLYCOTE ECS is higher in gloss. VCOTE-2 3DS has a medium gloss and has 3D indentations for some panel lines and rivets. POLYCOTE and VCOTE-2 3DS can tolerate high nitro fuels and other fuel types. Always wipe away raw fuel quickly in any event.

All of these covering materials clean well with Fantastic and many other household cleaners. We recommend Fantastic diluted 50/50 with water. Always test on a small out of view area first when working with any cleaner. Do NOT flood or over spray. Avoid spraying directly on plastic components and canopies. Wipe away cleaner and residue immediately after spraying with cleaner using disposable paper towels. 

Do NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane. Simple Green and 409 are good products for cutting grease and other industrial/commercial type applications but they are intended for use on non-porous materials and contain powerful chemicals that are not compatible with adhesives, balsa wood and other material found in a model aircraft. Use a web search engine to search on Simple Green and/or 409 and note the warnings and chemicals appliable to these and similar products. Do NOT NOT NOT use other cleaners having similar chemicals to those found in Simple Green or 409.

Here is a link to information related to 409: http://www.biosci.ohio-state.edu/~jsmith/MSDS/FORMULA%20409%20CLEANER.htm

What can SIMPLE GREEN, 409 and similar cleaners do to your model? Well... it depends. If you are not concerned about the safety aspects of these products and spray these materials on a paper towel and then use the damp towel to wipe down your model (avoid plastics) these products seem to do a good job of cutting grease and cleaning the model and many modelers like these cleaners. However, if you spray the material on to the model rather than the towel, you run the risk of the cleaner running into seams, cavities, hinge slots, covering joints and onto plastic components etc. These type of cleaners are intended for non-porous materials and if they wick or run into adhesive joints, hinge slots or under covering they can loosen the covering (this has been going on for years and modelers sometimes fight back with CA on the joint) AND react with some adhesives to soften and weaken the bond. We have also seen these type of cleaners react with adhesive commonly used to glue hinges and canopies into place and leave an ugly looking dark green stain under the covering where it has wicked further into the wooden substrate. This cannot be repaired and will continue to spread if more Simple Green, 409 or similar cleaner finds its way into the same area. We have also seen these type of cleaners attack plastic... generally the plastic does not dissolve or soften, instead it gets dry, hard, brittle and will over time crack and flake off.

In summary it would be best to use the cleaner and the techniques we recommend. If you are fond of your particular cleaner then at least make sure you follow the techniques we have outlined above. Test first. Do not flood or overspray. Wipe away quickly. Best to spray on the towel rather than the model. Make sure no cleaner can get into the model substrate such as the balsa or plywood materials... stay away from hinge slots, seams, cavities, joints, adhesive bonds etc. Protect plastics from direct contact with cleaners and/or long term exposure to cleaners.

Related Articles:

For each type of covering we use, there may be additional articles related to cleaning that particular covering. To check for Related Articles please use the Search tool near the top left of the Knowledge Base window and search on the word "Clean". Type just the letters Clean (clean) into the search box and then click on the button marked Search. The search tool will return a list of articles having "Clean" in the header or body. We suggest reviewing the articles related to the covering on your particular model.

 

10.9.8.2.5. VCOTE - Cleaning Initially

Question: I have my model all assembled and have a few streaks or other residue on the VCOTE covering. How do I clean these off.

Answer:  VCOTE has very few seams and we use our SURE SEAL system to really lock the seams down. Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the covering when looked at under bright light this is a residue from the SURE SEAL process. Use alcohol with a paper towel and wipe the residue away. VCOTE and the graphics detailing are resistant to alcohol but it is always a good idea to test alcohol or any other cleaner or solvent you are using on a small out of the way area first! Change towels frequently. If you want to accentuate the gloss of VCOTE even more, use a bit of Armorall and buff shiny with a clean paper towel. Test the Armoral on a small out of the way area first! Discard all soiled paper towels into a metal garbage can stored outdoors.

 

10.9.8.2.6. VCOTE - How to Cut.

Question: VCOTE is tough stuff! How do I cut it?

Answer: VCOTE is made from a thermally reactive film. Where possible, use scissors to cut VCOTE. Scissors work well. Otherwise use a new sharp #11 Blade. The blade must be SHARP.

 

10.9.8.2.7. VCOTE - Protecting the Finish - What should I do?

Question: I've been flying my VMAR model for a while and it looks great. Is there anything that I need to do protect the finish to ensure it lasts.

Answer: VCOTE is pretty tough stuff and does not need kid glove handling. If you do the following you should get good durability for the life of the model.

  • Most Importantly - Follow the Cleaning instructions. Use the recommended Cleaners and Method.
  • Secondly, Avoid getting raw fuel higher than 15% on the model. Remove any raw fuel from the finish as soon as possible. Dab it off gently and then clean with Fantastic.
  • Test anything you apply to any covering, plastic or component. It's a good idea to assume that whatever is made there is something that can attack it. Test any glue, paint, cleaner, sealer, wax or anything else you may feel inclined to try on your model by applying the material to a small out of the way area first. If you get a reaction, a small blemish is better than having your canopy curl up or the covering turn black overnight. We've run into some very strang situations over the years... 99.9% of these would have been avoided by testing first.
  • Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun. UV light can play hell with pigments especially dark colors and flourescents. This does not mean you need to go around covering your model every 15 minutes but if you can get it out of the sun after a few hours we would suggest that's a good way to go.
  • Patch holes and tack down any loose seams as soon as possible after the problem is noticed.

That's about it. Nothing to really sweat over... basically common sense.

 

10.9.8.2.8. VCOTE - Removing & Using Tape

Question: Some of my control surfaces have arrived from the factory with tape holding them in place during shipment. Is there a correct method for removing the tape.

Answer: When removing tape from VCOTE (or any covering for that matter), peal the tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering. If the tape is near or across a seam or an edge, peal towards the edge or seam. Do NOT pull the tape up at right angles to the covering or away from a seam or edge.

If you use your own tape during the assembly process, use a low tack masking tape and remove it using the procedure noted above.

 

10.9.8.2.9. VCOTE - Repairing Punctures - How to Patch.

Question: I have a puncture in my VCOTE.  How do I patch this?

Answer:  If you puncture VCOTE, thoroughly clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. We clean using Fantastic and a paper towel. Once you have all the oil residue removed, wipe the area again with a fresh clean towel moistened with water or plain alcohol. The patch should be 1/2" (13 mm) bigger than the hole on all sides.

It may be difficult to match colors or patterns. When you run into this challenge, you might want to take a different approach. Rather than try to match the color or pattern, deliberately use a black white or silver patch and cut it into the shape of a panel hatch. Detail this with lettering and a perimeter line and it will look like the hatch is supposed to be there. Another trick is to cut the patch into a shape of a letter, flag or aircraft marking.

We recommend using after market VCOTE patch material. You can also use polyester covering such as POLYCOTE, ULTRACOTE or ORACOVER. Monokote or SolarFilm covering material will also work. Cut the patch with rounded corners. Seal the patch in place with a heat iron with sock set at 225F first and then tighten the patch and the original covering around the patch using a heat gun as outlined in the tightening section above. To repair larger more extensive damage areas, you may wish to obtain the appropriate VCOTE covering set for this model.

 

10.9.8.2.10. VCOTE - Seam Loose - How to Reseal.

Question: One of the seams on my model has come loose. What have I done wrong? What should I do to reseal it?

Answer: Although we are very careful to tack all seams down and then to seal them as well, we are not perfect (although we're trying!) so the loosening of a seam may not be due to anything you are doing. Once a seam is in place properly we advise being very careful when cleaning the model to avoid wiping across the seam... wipe parallel to it. There are very few seams on VMAR models.

Generally seams are located at:

  • The trailing edge of the wing (hidden by the aileron),
  • The leading edge of the wing if swept or tapered,
  • The leading and trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer,
  • 1 or more seams on the bottom of the fuselage,
  • Some models with shaped turtle decks may have a seam at the top of the fuselage running more or less along the spine.

If you do have a loose edge, clean any oil residue from the area and the edge and reseal with thin CA.

 

10.9.8.2.11. VCOTE - How to Tighten Sags

Question: My model is covered with VCOTE and I have noticed that there are some sags in the covering. What is causing this? Can I fix it? What should I do?

Answer: It helps to understand how the sags develop before we get into tightening things up to get rid of the sags.

In low humidity air such as is found in the hot desert areas or in continental winter conditions where cold outside air is brought inside and heated to 22C ( 70F), the underlying structure is drying and shrinking. Many modelers feel that the sags are caused by heat and to a point they are correct because hot conditions are often dry and most definitely heat is the key to solving the problem. However, the real underlying cause is low humidity air drying the structure out and as the structure drys it gets lighter and smaller. VCOTE will not shrink at normal room temperatures and you end up with,  in effect,  more covering on your model than you need!

The way to get rid of the sags is to shrink the VCOTE with a heat gun and rub it down into the substrate with a soft cloth once it has shrunk. Before you start firing up your flame thrower, please note the following procedure... if you get the method down pat, you will get a good result and not have to do this more than 1-2 times... 3 times at most. However if you assume that VCOTE is like Monokote or SolarFilm, you will make a hash of it and you will not be happy with the outcome. VCOTE is a thermal shrink film  and the technique for shinking it is similar to that used for ORACOVER (ULTRACOTE) without the use of a heat iron.

Remember SSB! As in 

SECURE the perimeter.

SHRINK to fit

BOND to the structure.

To tighten VCOTE, use a heat gun only. Do not use a heat iron. First, SECURE the perimeter by sealing and bonding the seams, edges and around perimeters. Use a heat gun set at around 225F and a soft cotton cloth or glove. Heat the perimeter edge in stages, just warm up a small area and then  press the warm covering down firmly with a soft cotton cloth to bond the perimeter of the covering to the underlying substrate. Do not overheat or the edge will pull back as the material shrinks. Always rub along seams, not across the seam. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. Avoid using more heat than required to prevent bubbles from forming beneath the covering or edges pulling back as the material shrinks. Remember you are just SECUREing the perimeter at this point. Be patient and work systematically starting with a small out of the way area first to gain experience.

AFTER SECURING the perimeter, SHRINK the interior areas to fit, using a heat gun set at around 225K. Heat about 1 square foot of area at a time, shrink the covering to fit and then rub the warm covering down firmly with a soft cotton cloth to BOND the covering to the underlying substrate. Over open bays heat the VCOTE until it is warm and sags slightly then remove the heat and the VCOTE will shrink tight over the open bay. Try this repeatedly until the covering over the open bay is tight. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. DO NOT APPLY EXTENSIVE HEAT NEAR EDGES & SEAMS. Always practise on the bottom of a less noticable section first. Be patient and work systematically. You will likely only have to tighten VCOTE once or twice to accomodate any shrinkage of the airframe in dry hot conditions.

To prevent or at least minimize the occurence of sags do not leave your model in a closed car parked in the sun. Here is some information that may help you avoid this problem.

10.9.8.2.12. VCOTE - Tools - For working with VCOTE

 

VMAR - Covering - Tools - Recommended

Question: What would you recommend in the way of tools for working with Covering materials?

Answer: Here's a list of what we would suggest:

  • A pair of sharp scissors
  • An Xacto Knife with a SHARP #11 Blade
  • A Heat Iron with controllable temperature (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Iron Sock (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Gun with controllable consistent output temperature
  • A soft cotton cloth or glove.

Please note that the heat gun is particularly important. Unfortunately the standard RC covering heat gun has been driven down in price so that it is selling at times for usa$14.95-19.95. We say unfortunately because at that price we are getting exactly what we are paying for... a pretty crude unregulated heat producer. Even a decent hair dryer costs more!

Most of these low end RC covering heat guns do not monitor the heat coming out of the nozzle. They have a heating element that heats the air sucked into the back of the gun and a fan that blasts it out the front. The vanes at the back of the gun have a very limited effect on the output temperature. So... if you take a 1000 watt gun for example, and heat air that is at 50F flowing into the back of gun you get a fixed amount of temperature increase... lets say 350F and the outflowing air is at 50+350=400F. Now run the same gun with ambient air of 75F flowing into the back of the gun and the same 1000W of energy will increase this 75F air by 350 degrees to 425F. So depending on the ambient air temperature you get a different output temperature. To add to the confusion somewhat, adding a fixed amount of energy to dry air (low humidity) will change the temperature of the air more than if you add if you add the same amount of energy to moist (high humidity) air. This variation in output temperature due to changes in the ambient air and ambient humidity makes it very difficult to work out a reliable consistent technique when you are working with heat shrink covering. One day you get a "feel" for the right amount of heat, time and distance and everything goes great. The next day or a month later you try this with a different ambient air temperature and/or different humidity and your technique does not work... why? Because the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun has changed without you being aware of it.

What can you do about this to make your covering technique more consistent? Well sadly to say you either have to live with this problem or you have to dump the cheapy RC covering heat gun and get a heat gun that measures and controls the consistency of the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun.

There are a number of heat guns for shrinking heat shrink tubing that work well. They can be rather expensive but give you good control over the temperature you want AND hold that temperature consistently regardless of ambient temperature and humidity. It's nice to be able to select the temperature if you've got the cash to buy such a gun. If you need to watch your pennies a bit more carefully, we suggest opting for less control and go for consistency. Some of the lower priced heat guns intended for stripping paint do this. You will need to work out the distance and time technique that works for your covering but at least you will be doing so with a gun that is producing a reliable temperature output. We have used the Black & Decker #9756 with good results. This has two temperature settings, 500F and 1000F. Read the safety instructions that comes with the unit. Work with the 500F setting at a good distance at first (say 15") and move the gun frequently until you get a feel for it. Generally the closer you get and/or the hotter the air coming out of the gun, the quicker you have to move the gun (less exposure time) to avoid overheating the covering.

 

10.9.9. VMAR - Covering - VCOTE2-3DS Information & Tips
10.9.9.1. VCOTE2-3DS - What is it?

VCOTE2-3DS is a proprietary 3D Detailing System engineered in Canada and used on our premium VMAR ARF models where scale detailing and a tough long lasting covering is essential! Rivets and some of the hatches and panel lines are actually 3D. They stand up on the surface skin like the real thing!

VCOTE2-3DS is totally different and simply the best covering and detailing system available. VCOTE2-3DS builds on our VCOTE technology and goes a lot farther. All the detailing is inside the covering... no decals, no strips, no stripes and totally fuel proof.

Best of all... VCOTE2-3DS is very very sag resistant. Extensively tested in direct sunlight and heated air up to 130F!

  • With VCOTE2-3DS the graphics are pre-applied to the covering... not stuck on top. No Decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes!
  • VCOTE2-3DS utilizes a tough heat shrinkable film and our SURE SEAL system to ensure that the seams stay down!
  • VCOTE2-3DS is fuel proof. We recommend dabing up any raw unburned high nitro fuel as a precaution.

By pre-applying the the graphics... we've eliminated the need for decals or overlays completely and reduced the need for maintenance to a minimum. No decal or overlay edges to pick up, and very few seams. With VCOTE2-3DS you will have a great model that looks terrific right out of the box and spend more time flying and less time applying and reworking the covering!

VCOTE2-3DS 3D Detailing System - Only from VMAR!

 

10.9.9.2. VCOTE2-3DS - Care & Maintenance Tips

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
10.9.9.2.1. VCOTE2-3DS - Introduction - Care & Maintenance

 

VCOTE2-3DS - What is it?

VCOTE2-3DS is a proprietary 3D Detailing System engineered in Canada and used on our premium VMAR ARF models where scale detailing and a tough long lasting covering is essential! Rivets and some of the hatches and panel lines are actually 3D. They stand up on the surface skin like the real thing!

VCOTE2-3DS is totally different and simply the best covering and detailing system available. VCOTE2-3DS builds on our VCOTE technology and goes a lot farther. All the detailing is inside the covering... no decals, no strips, no stripes and totally fuel proof.

Best of all... VCOTE2-3DS is very very sag resistant. Extensively tested in direct sunlight and heated air up to 130F!

  • With VCOTE2-3DS the graphics are pre-applied to the covering... not stuck on top. No Decals! No Layers! No Strips! No Stripes!
  • VCOTE2-3DS utilizes a tough heat shrinkable film and our SURE SEAL system to ensure that the seams stay down!
  • VCOTE2-3DS is fuel proof. We recommend dabing up any raw unburned high nitro fuel as a precaution.

By pre-applying the the graphics... we've eliminated the need for decals or overlays completely and reduced the need for maintenance to a minimum. No decal or overlay edges to pick up, and very few seams. With VCOTE2-3DS you will have a great model that looks terrific right out of the box and spend more time flying and less time applying and reworking the covering!

VCOTE2-3DS 3D Detailing System - Only from VMAR!

 

10.9.9.2.2. VCOTE2-3DS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of VCOTE2 - 3DS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips and at www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") we have an expanded explanation for each of these Tips.

VCOTE2 - 3DS is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR. Please note that VCOTE2 - 3DS is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. As with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering so its important to read the Tips over FIRST. Whatever you want to do with VCOTE2 - 3DS, test it on a small out of the way area first.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to VCOTE2 - 3DS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the VCOTE2 - 3DS, work outdoors and after testing first on a small out of the way area, use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Alcohol over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Avoid raw fuel with nitro content higher than 15%. Dab away all raw fuel regardless of nitro content. Test a small out of the way area and all plastics first before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing, peal tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13 bigger) on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a heat gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use a heat gun and soft cotton cloth or glove and hand pressure to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates. Consult our Knowledge Base for further information.
  • Tools for Working with VCOTE2 - 3DS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.  

 

10.9.9.2.3. VCOTE2-3DS - Avoid Hot Vehicles parked in the Sun

Question: I inadvertently left my model locked in my closed van all afternoon in the hot desert sun? Will this have any effect on the VCOTE2-3DS covering?

Answer: Nothing permanent but you will likely have some sagging at least the first and second time you do this. Generally not a good idea. Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions and if your model is stuck in this environment with no circulation for hours and hours, sagging is often the result.

We recommend avoiding this type of problem. Keep the model out of situations where the temperature is extreme with little or no circulation.

If it has occurred, there is no point in crying over spilt milk...  if you see sagging, don't panic! BEFORE you do anything at all, please review the Tip on Tightening VCOTE2-3DS.  Sagging is fixable (a whole model can be done in less than an hour) but only if you go about it properly. If you jump into this with your heat iron and heat gun assuming you know how to do this because you've fixed Monokote sags and bubbles for years, you have a high probabilty of making a botch of this and you will be stuck with a rather unpleasant result.

 

VCOTE - How to Tighten Sags

Question: My model is covered with VCOTE and I have noticed that there are some sags in the covering. What is causing this? Can I fix it? What should I do?

Answer: It helps to understand how the sags develop before we get into tightening things up to get rid of the sags.

In low humidity air such as is found in the hot desert areas or in continental winter conditions where cold outside air is brought inside and heated to 22C ( 70F), the underlying structure is drying and shrinking. Many modelers feel that the sags are caused by heat and to a point they are correct because hot conditions are often dry and most definitely heat is the key to solving the problem. However, the real underlying cause is low humidity air drying the structure out and as the structure drys it gets lighter and smaller. VCOTE will not shrink at normal room temperatures and you end up with,  in effect,  more covering on your model than you need!

The way to get rid of the sags is to shrink the VCOTE with a heat gun and rub it down into the substrate with a soft cloth once it has shrunk. Before you start firing up your flame thrower, please note the following procedure... if you get the method down pat, you will get a good result and not have to do this more than 1-2 times... 3 times at most. However if you assume that VCOTE is like Monokote or SolarFilm, you will make a hash of it and you will not be happy with the outcome. VCOTE is a thermal shrink film  and the technique for shinking it is similar to that used for ORACOVER (ULTRACOTE) without the use of a heat iron.

Remember SSB! As in 

SECURE the perimeter.

SHRINK to fit

BOND to the structure.

To tighten VCOTE, use a heat gun only. Do not use a heat iron. First, SECURE the perimeter by sealing and bonding the seams, edges and around perimeters. Use a heat gun set at around 225F and a soft cotton cloth or glove. Heat the perimeter edge in stages, just warm up a small area and then  press the warm covering down firmly with a soft cotton cloth to bond the perimeter of the covering to the underlying substrate. Do not overheat or the edge will pull back as the material shrinks. Always rub along seams, not across the seam. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. Avoid using more heat than required to prevent bubbles from forming beneath the covering or edges pulling back as the material shrinks. Remember you are just SECUREing the perimeter at this point. Be patient and work systematically starting with a small out of the way area first to gain experience.

AFTER SECURING the perimeter, SHRINK the interior areas to fit, using a heat gun set at around 225K. Heat about 1 square foot of area at a time, shrink the covering to fit and then rub the warm covering down firmly with a soft cotton cloth to BOND the covering to the underlying substrate. Over open bays heat the VCOTE until it is warm and sags slightly then remove the heat and the VCOTE will shrink tight over the open bay. Try this repeatedly until the covering over the open bay is tight. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. DO NOT APPLY EXTENSIVE HEAT NEAR EDGES & SEAMS. Always practise on the bottom of a less noticable section first. Be patient and work systematically. You will likely only have to tighten VCOTE once or twice to accomodate any shrinkage of the airframe in dry hot conditions.

To prevent or at least minimize the occurence of sags do not leave your model in a closed car parked in the sun. Here is some information that may help you avoid this problem.

10.9.9.2.4. VCOTE2-3DS - Cleaning After Flying

Question: I have been flying my model using a glow or gasoline engine. I have some oil residue on the model along with some bug guts and a bit of dirt from a less than perfect landing. How do I clean it up?

Answer:  To clean VCOTE2-3DS after flying we recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. You can use other similar cleaners but avoid cleaners with solvents or abrasives. It is a good idea to always test a small out of the way spot first. Wipe along seams, not across. To really show off your VCOTE2-3DS covering, after cleaning wtih Fantastic... use a bit of Armorall and buff dry & shiny.

Please carefully review the following information and take particular note if you are planning on using Simple Green, 409 or similar non-approved cleaners.

VMAR - Cleaning Model Aircraft

Question: I have a VMAR ARF model aircraft. What should I be aware of when cleaning it after flying?

Answer: Couple of general suggestions here and a few DO NOT DO caveats. See the additional information below for more details. We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and you can dilute it 50/50 with water. Always test any cleaner on a small out of view area first. Avoid overspray on plastics. Spray cleaner lightly (do NOT flood) and wipe away cleaner and dirt/oil with disposable towels as soon as possible after spraying. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane.

Additional Information: VMAR models are covered in V-Cote, POLYCOTE ECS and VCOTE-2 3DS. All of these materials are heat shrink film. V-Cote is flatter in gloss and tolerates up to 15% nitro fuel well. Higher nitro fuel can soften V-Cote graphics if allowed to sit on the surface for extended periods of time. POLYCOTE ECS is higher in gloss. VCOTE-2 3DS has a medium gloss and has 3D indentations for some panel lines and rivets. POLYCOTE and VCOTE-2 3DS can tolerate high nitro fuels and other fuel types. Always wipe away raw fuel quickly in any event.

All of these covering materials clean well with Fantastic and many other household cleaners. We recommend Fantastic diluted 50/50 with water. Always test on a small out of view area first when working with any cleaner. Do NOT flood or over spray. Avoid spraying directly on plastic components and canopies. Wipe away cleaner and residue immediately after spraying with cleaner using disposable paper towels. 

Do NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials to clean a model airplane. Simple Green and 409 are good products for cutting grease and other industrial/commercial type applications but they are intended for use on non-porous materials and contain powerful chemicals that are not compatible with adhesives, balsa wood and other material found in a model aircraft. Use a web search engine to search on Simple Green and/or 409 and note the warnings and chemicals appliable to these and similar products. Do NOT NOT NOT use other cleaners having similar chemicals to those found in Simple Green or 409.

Here is a link to information related to 409: http://www.biosci.ohio-state.edu/~jsmith/MSDS/FORMULA%20409%20CLEANER.htm

What can SIMPLE GREEN, 409 and similar cleaners do to your model? Well... it depends. If you are not concerned about the safety aspects of these products and spray these materials on a paper towel and then use the damp towel to wipe down your model (avoid plastics) these products seem to do a good job of cutting grease and cleaning the model and many modelers like these cleaners. However, if you spray the material on to the model rather than the towel, you run the risk of the cleaner running into seams, cavities, hinge slots, covering joints and onto plastic components etc. These type of cleaners are intended for non-porous materials and if they wick or run into adhesive joints, hinge slots or under covering they can loosen the covering (this has been going on for years and modelers sometimes fight back with CA on the joint) AND react with some adhesives to soften and weaken the bond. We have also seen these type of cleaners react with adhesive commonly used to glue hinges and canopies into place and leave an ugly looking dark green stain under the covering where it has wicked further into the wooden substrate. This cannot be repaired and will continue to spread if more Simple Green, 409 or similar cleaner finds its way into the same area. We have also seen these type of cleaners attack plastic... generally the plastic does not dissolve or soften, instead it gets dry, hard, brittle and will over time crack and flake off.

In summary it would be best to use the cleaner and the techniques we recommend. If you are fond of your particular cleaner then at least make sure you follow the techniques we have outlined above. Test first. Do not flood or overspray. Wipe away quickly. Best to spray on the towel rather than the model. Make sure no cleaner can get into the model substrate such as the balsa or plywood materials... stay away from hinge slots, seams, cavities, joints, adhesive bonds etc. Protect plastics from direct contact with cleaners and/or long term exposure to cleaners.

Related Articles:

For each type of covering we use, there may be additional articles related to cleaning that particular covering. To check for Related Articles please use the Search tool near the top left of the Knowledge Base window and search on the word "Clean". Type just the letters Clean (clean) into the search box and then click on the button marked Search. The search tool will return a list of articles having "Clean" in the header or body. We suggest reviewing the articles related to the covering on your particular model.

 

10.9.9.2.5. VCOTE2-3DS - Cleaning Initially

Question: I have my model all assembled and have a few streaks or other residue on the VCOTE2-3DS covering. How do I clean these off.

Answer:  VCOTE2-3DS has very few seams and we use our SURE SEAL system to really lock the seams down. Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the covering when looked at under bright light this is a residue from the SURE SEAL process. Use alcohol with a paper towel and wipe the residue away. VCOTE2-3DS and the graphics detailing are resistant to alcohol but it is always a good idea to test alcohol or any other cleaner or solvent you are using on a small out of the way area first! Change towels frequently. If you want to accentuate the gloss of VCOTE2-3DS even more, use a bit of Armorall and buff shiny with a clean paper towel. Test the Armoral on a small out of the way area first! Discard all soiled paper towels into a metal garbage can stored outdoors.

 

10.9.9.2.6. VCOTE2-3DS - How to Cut.

Question: VCOTE203DS is tough stuff! How do I cut it?

Answer: VCOTE2-3DS is made from a thermally reactive film. Where possible, use scissors to cut VCOTE2-3DS. Scissors work well. Otherwise use a new sharp #11 Blade. The blade must be SHARP.

 

10.9.9.2.7. VCOTE2-3DS - Protecting the Finish - What should I do?

Question: I've been flying my VMAR model for a while and it looks great. Is there anything that I need to do protect the finish to ensure it lasts.

Answer: VCOTE2-3DS is pretty tough stuff and does not need kid glove handling. If you do the following you should get good durability for the life of the model.

  • Most Importantly - Follow the Cleaning instructions. Use the recommended Cleaners and Method.
  • Secondly, remove raw fuel from the finish as soon as possible. Dab it off gently and then clean with Fantastic.
  • Test anything you apply to any covering, plastic or component. It's a good idea to assume that whatever is made there is something that can attack it. Test any glue, paint, cleaner, sealer, wax or anything else you may feel inclined to try on your model by applying the material to a small out of the way area first. If you get a reaction, a small blemish is better than having your canopy curl up or the covering turn black overnight. We've run into some very strange situations over the years... 99.9% of these would have been avoided by testing first.
  • Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun. UV light can play hell with pigments especially dark colors and flourescents. This does not mean you need to go around covering your model every 15 minutes but if you can get it out of the sun after a few hours we would suggest that's a good way to go.
  • Patch holes and tack down any loose seams as soon as possible after the problem is noticed.

That's about it. Nothing to really sweat over... basically common sense.

 

10.9.9.2.8. VCOTE2-3DS - Removing & Using Tape

Question: Some of my control surfaces have arrived from the factory with tape holding them in place during shipment. Is there a correct method for removing the tape.

Answer: When removing tape from VCOTE2-3DS (or any covering for that matter), peal the tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering. If the tape is near or across a seam or an edge, peal towards the edge or seam. Do NOT pull the tape up at right angles to the covering or away from a seam or edge.

If you use your own tape during the assembly process, use a low tack masking tape and remove it using the procedure noted above.

 

10.9.9.2.9. VCOTE2-3DS - Repairing Punctures - How to Patch.

Question: I have a puncture in my VCOTE2-3DS.  How do I patch this?

Answer:  If you puncture VCOTE2-3DS, thoroughly clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. We clean using Fantastic and a paper towel. Once you have all the oil residue removed, wipe the area again with a fresh clean towel moistened with water or plain alcohol. The patch should be 1/2" (13 mm) bigger than the hole on all sides.

It may be difficult to match colors or patterns. When you run into this challenge, you might want to take a different approach. Rather than try to match the color or pattern, deliberately use a black white or silver patch and cut it into the shape of a panel hatch. Detail this with lettering and a perimeter line and it will look like the hatch is supposed to be there. Another trick is to cut the patch into a shape of a letter, flag or aircraft marking.

We recommend using after market VCOTE2-3DS patch material.You can also use polyester covering such as POLYCOTE, ULTRACOTE or ORACOVER. Monokote or SolarFilm covering material will also work. Cut the patch with rounded corners. Seal the patch in place with a heat iron and sock set at 225F first and then tighten the patch and the original covering around the patch using a heat gun as outlined in the tightening section above. To repair larger more extensive damage areas, you may wish to obtain the appropriate VCOTE2-3DS covering set for this model.

 

10.9.9.2.10. VCOTE2-3DS - Repairing Splits - How to.

Question: I appear to have a split in my VCOTE2-3DS covering.  What should I do?

Answer: VCOTE2-3DS is first painted by hand and the a final overcoat of polyurethane is applied to seal the covering and paint. 
 
If a small split has occurred in the covering substrate layer during production it will have been painted and sealed with polyurethane. No further work is required unless you can see bare wood through the split in the covering.
 
If bare wood is visible through the split in the covering, the split occurred after production, likely in shipping or thereafter. Thoroughly clean any oil residue from the area of the split. We clean using Fantastic and a paper towel. Once you have all the oil residue removed, wipe the area again with a fresh clean towel moistened with plain alcohol. Using a clean towel, press down gently on either side of the split to ensure the covering is well bonded to the wood beneath.
 
Seal the exposed wood with ZAP/CA (pink bottle, thin). Use a small amount only and allow it to wick into the wood and under the edges of the covering on either side of the split. Let the ZAP/CA cure. DO NOT ACCELERATE.
A small split that is not overly noticeable to the eye is probably not worth further effort beyond sealing the wood. If you wish to try to "hide" the split, it may be difficult to match colors or patterns. When you run into this challenge, you might want to take a different approach. Rather than try to match the color or pattern, deliberately use a black, white or silver patch and cut it into the shape of a panel hatch. Detail this with lettering and a perimeter line and it will look like the hatch is supposed to be there. Another trick is to cut the patch into a shape such as a letter, flag or aircraft marking.

We recommend using after market VCOTE2-3DS patch material.You can also use polyester covering such as POLYCOTE, ULTRACOTE or ORACOVER. Monokote or SolarFilm covering material will also work. Cut the patch about 1/2 inch (12 mm) larger than the minimum necessary and cut it with rounded corners. Seal the patch in place with a heat iron and sock set at 225F first, and then only if necessary, tighten the patch and the original covering around the patch using a heat gun as outlined in a related article about tightening. Be cautious with the amount of heat that you apply, you do not want to end up turning a small problem into a larger one! To repair larger more extensive damage areas, you may wish to obtain the appropriate VCOTE2-3DS covering set for your model.

 

10.9.9.2.11. VCOTE2-3DS - Seam Loose - How to Reseal.

Question: One of the seams on my model has come loose. What have I done wrong? What should I do to reseal it?

Answer: Although we are very careful to tack all seams down and then to seal them as well, we are not perfect (although we're trying!) so the loosening of a seam may not be due to anything you are doing. Once a seam is in place properly we advise being very careful when cleaning the model to avoid wiping across the seam... wipe parallel to it. There are very few seams on VMAR models.

Generally seams are located at:

  • The trailing edge of the wing (hidden by the aileron),
  • The leading edge of the wing if swept or tapered,
  • The leading and trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer,
  • 1 or more seams on the bottom of the fuselage,
  • Some models with shaped turtle decks may have a seam at the top of the fuselage running more or less along the spine.

If you do have a loose edge, clean any oil residue from the area and the edge and reseal with thin CA.

 

10.9.9.2.12. VCOTE2-3DS - How to Tighten Sags

Question: My model is covered with VCOTE2-3DS and I have noticed that there are some sags in the covering. What is causing this? Can I fix it? What should I do?

Answer: It helps to understand how the sags develop before we get into tightening things up to get rid of the sags.

In low humidity air such as is found in the hot desert areas or in continental winter conditions where cold outside air is brought inside and heated to 22C ( 70F), the underlying structure is drying and shrinking. Many modelers feel that the sags are caused by heat and to a point they are correct because hot conditions are often dry and most definitely heat is the key to solving the problem. However, the real underlying cause is low humidity air drying the structure out and as the structure drys it gets lighter and smaller. VCOTE2-3DS will not shrink at normal room temperatures and you end up with,  in effect,  more covering on your model than you need!

The way to get rid of the sags is to shrink the VCOTE2-3DS with a heat gun and rub it down into the substrate with a soft cloth once it has shrunk. Before you start firing up your flame thrower, please note the following procedure... if you get the method down pat, you will get a good result and not have to do this more than 1-2 times... 3 times at most. However if you assume that VCOTE2-3DS is like Monokote or SolarFilm, you will make a hash of it and you will not be happy with the outcome. VCOTE2-3DS is a thermal shrink film  and the technique for shinking it is similar to that used for ORACOVER (ULTRACOTE) without the use of a heat iron.

Remember SSB! As in 

SECURE the perimeter.

SHRINK to fit

BOND to the structure.

To tighten VCOTE2-3DS, use a heat gun only. Do not use a heat iron. First, SECURE the perimeter by sealing and bonding the seams, edges and around perimeters. Use a heat gun set at around 225F and a soft cotton cloth or glove. Heat the perimeter edge in stages, just warm up a small area and then  press the warm covering down firmly with a soft cotton cloth to bond the perimeter of the covering to the underlying substrate. Do not overheat or the edge will pull back as the material shrinks. Always rub along seams, not across the seam. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. Avoid using more heat than required to prevent bubbles from forming beneath the covering or edges pulling back as the material shrinks. Remember you are just SECUREing the perimeter at this point. Be patient and work systematically starting with a small out of the way area first to gain experience.

AFTER SECURING the perimeter, SHRINK the interior areas to fit, using a heat gun set at around 225K. Heat about 1 square foot of area at a time, shrink the covering to fit and then rub the warm covering down firmly with a soft cotton cloth to BOND the covering to the underlying substrate. Over open bays heat the VCOTE2-3DS until it is warm and sags slightly then remove the heat and the VCOTE2-3DS will shrink tight over the open bay. Try this repeatedly until the covering over the open bay is tight. Higher temperatures may assist with complex curved surfaces. DO NOT APPLY EXTENSIVE HEAT NEAR EDGES & SEAMS. Always practise on the bottom of a less noticable section first. Be patient and work systematically. You will likely only have to tighten VCOTE2-3DS once or twice to accomodate any shrinkage of the airframe in dry hot conditions.

To prevent or at least minimize the occurence of sags do not leave your model in a closed car parked in the sun. Here is some information that may help you avoid this problem.

VCOTE2-3DS - Avoid Hot Vehicles parked in the Sun

Question: I inadvertently left my model locked in my closed van all afternoon in the hot desert sun? Will this have any effect on the VCOTE2-3DS covering?

Answer: Nothing permanent but you will likely have some sagging at least the first and second time you do this. Generally not a good idea. Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions and if your model is stuck in this environment with no circulation for hours and hours, sagging is often the result.

We recommend avoiding this type of problem. Keep the model out of situations where the temperature is extreme with little or no circulation.

If it has occurred, there is no point in crying over spilt milk...  if you see sagging, don't panic! BEFORE you do anything at all, please review the Tip on Tightening VCOTE2-3DS.  Sagging is fixable (a whole model can be done in less than an hour) but only if you go about it properly. If you jump into this with your heat iron and heat gun assuming you know how to do this because you've fixed Monokote sags and bubbles for years, you have a high probabilty of making a botch of this and you will be stuck with a rather unpleasant result.

 

10.9.9.2.13. VCOTE2-3DS - Tools - For working with VCOTE2-3DS

 

VMAR - Covering - Tools - Recommended

Question: What would you recommend in the way of tools for working with Covering materials?

Answer: Here's a list of what we would suggest:

  • A pair of sharp scissors
  • An Xacto Knife with a SHARP #11 Blade
  • A Heat Iron with controllable temperature (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Iron Sock (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Gun with controllable consistent output temperature
  • A soft cotton cloth or glove.

Please note that the heat gun is particularly important. Unfortunately the standard RC covering heat gun has been driven down in price so that it is selling at times for usa$14.95-19.95. We say unfortunately because at that price we are getting exactly what we are paying for... a pretty crude unregulated heat producer. Even a decent hair dryer costs more!

Most of these low end RC covering heat guns do not monitor the heat coming out of the nozzle. They have a heating element that heats the air sucked into the back of the gun and a fan that blasts it out the front. The vanes at the back of the gun have a very limited effect on the output temperature. So... if you take a 1000 watt gun for example, and heat air that is at 50F flowing into the back of gun you get a fixed amount of temperature increase... lets say 350F and the outflowing air is at 50+350=400F. Now run the same gun with ambient air of 75F flowing into the back of the gun and the same 1000W of energy will increase this 75F air by 350 degrees to 425F. So depending on the ambient air temperature you get a different output temperature. To add to the confusion somewhat, adding a fixed amount of energy to dry air (low humidity) will change the temperature of the air more than if you add if you add the same amount of energy to moist (high humidity) air. This variation in output temperature due to changes in the ambient air and ambient humidity makes it very difficult to work out a reliable consistent technique when you are working with heat shrink covering. One day you get a "feel" for the right amount of heat, time and distance and everything goes great. The next day or a month later you try this with a different ambient air temperature and/or different humidity and your technique does not work... why? Because the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun has changed without you being aware of it.

What can you do about this to make your covering technique more consistent? Well sadly to say you either have to live with this problem or you have to dump the cheapy RC covering heat gun and get a heat gun that measures and controls the consistency of the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun.

There are a number of heat guns for shrinking heat shrink tubing that work well. They can be rather expensive but give you good control over the temperature you want AND hold that temperature consistently regardless of ambient temperature and humidity. It's nice to be able to select the temperature if you've got the cash to buy such a gun. If you need to watch your pennies a bit more carefully, we suggest opting for less control and go for consistency. Some of the lower priced heat guns intended for stripping paint do this. You will need to work out the distance and time technique that works for your covering but at least you will be doing so with a gun that is producing a reliable temperature output. We have used the Black & Decker #9756 with good results. This has two temperature settings, 500F and 1000F. Read the safety instructions that comes with the unit. Work with the 500F setting at a good distance at first (say 15") and move the gun frequently until you get a feel for it. Generally the closer you get and/or the hotter the air coming out of the gun, the quicker you have to move the gun (less exposure time) to avoid overheating the covering.

 

10.9.9.3. VCOTE2-3DS - Painting Tips

Question: I want to add some additional graphics to my VMAR ARF model using paint. The model I have is covered in VCOTE2 - 3DS. Can you give me any tips on painting VCOTE2 - 3DS?

Answer: Yes we can. Here are some tips:

  1. Please thoroughly review  the articles included below.
  2. Resolve any issues related to punctures, sags, seams etc BEFORE painting. The material to be painted must be tight, secure, clean and in a good state of repair before applying any paint.
  3. After carefully maintaining & cleaning the material to be painted, select a small out of sight area to test. Do NOT assume that your paint is compatible with any covering material, plastic or component without testing first.
  4. If the paint is to be applied to plastic or covering, use fine steel wool or very very fine wet/dry sandpaper (400+ grit) to buff out the gloss from the factory finish on the test area. All paints will stick better if the underlying surface has been cleaned and "de-glossed". Remember this is a test, do not work with a large area until you test first!
  5. Vaccuum or use a clean tack cloth to remove any sanding dust from the test area.
  6. We suggest trying a PolyUrethane based spray paint. Follow the paint instructions, cautions & warnings. Pay particular attention to health warnings, hazards & requirements for ventilation. Unless the paint instructions specifically state otherwise, work in a dry area at room temperature and build up the paint layer slowly. Do not flood. Mist a partial first coat onto the test area, let it set up according to the instructions on the can and then build up the first coat so that it is more or less opaque (solid). If you cannot get an opaque first coat without flooding, stop and plan on applying a second coat later.  
  7. Please note that most paints specifically state how they should be applied and how long to wait before attempting to apply a second or third coat.
  8. As you are applying the first coat and for at least 24 hours after applying the first coat, watch the paint and underlying material for any adverse reaction. If the paint or the underlying material bubbles, blisters, wrinkles, sags or otherwise reacts adversely, stop applying paint immediately. Remember the purpose of testing a small area is to work out the technique AND to avoid inducing damage to your model. If the test is a failure, do not continue!
  9. If the testing produces a good result, after 24 hours, test for adhesion of the paint to the underlying material (substrate). A good test is to use low tack masking tape pulled back upon itself. If the paint has not adhered well to the substrate, you will likely have to choose a different paint type or method. Primers and etches may be needed. Further research and testing will be required.
  10. Test that the paint stands up OK to your type of fuel and your cleaning solution.
  11. Provided that all your testing turns out successfully, you can then move forward with painting the area you have in mind. Always avoid flooding and always stop painting if you detect any adverse reactions.
  12. Following the application of your paint layers, you may wish to overspray the new paint with a clear protective layer of similar paint type to help seal and protect the color coat. Again, review the instructions that come with the paint re applying second and subsequent coats. Test Test Test before going hog wild!

 

10.9.9.4. VCOTE2-3DS - Rivets (3D) - Are they Fuel Proof?
Question: My model is covered with VCOTE2-3DS. The 3D rivets are very authentic looking! Some of the rivet indentations appear to have punctured the covering all the way through leaving a very small hole at the center of their base. Should I be concerned about this? How about fuel proofing?

Answer:
Some of the 3D rivet indentations may have a very small hole in their center. These are then sealed with a small drop of CA at the factory before the entire model is factory overcoated with a clear coat sealer.
 
If you wish to be doubly sure about fuel proofing, for example in an area that is directly exposed to raw or burned fuel during operation, take a bottle of ZAP/CA with a microdropper tube and apply a drop of CA to any small holes that appear in the base of the 3D Rivets. This will apply yet another clear barrier and help to further ensure fuel proofing.
 
 
VCOTE2-3DS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of VCOTE2 - 3DS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips and at www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") we have an expanded explanation for each of these Tips.

VCOTE2 - 3DS is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR. Please note that VCOTE2 - 3DS is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. As with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering so its important to read the Tips over FIRST. Whatever you want to do with VCOTE2 - 3DS, test it on a small out of the way area first.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to VCOTE2 - 3DS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the VCOTE2 - 3DS, work outdoors and after testing first on a small out of the way area, use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Alcohol over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Avoid raw fuel with nitro content higher than 15%. Dab away all raw fuel regardless of nitro content. Test a small out of the way area and all plastics first before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing, peal tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13 bigger) on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a heat gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use a heat gun and soft cotton cloth or glove and hand pressure to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates. Consult our Knowledge Base for further information.
  • Tools for Working with VCOTE2 - 3DS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.  

 

10.9.10. VMAR - Covering - Tools - Recommended

Question: What would you recommend in the way of tools for working with Covering materials?

Answer: Here's a list of what we would suggest:

  • A pair of sharp scissors
  • An Xacto Knife with a SHARP #11 Blade
  • A Heat Iron with controllable temperature (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Iron Sock (on VCOTE or VCOTE2-3DS use only for applying patches)
  • A Heat Gun with controllable consistent output temperature
  • A soft cotton cloth or glove.

Please note that the heat gun is particularly important. Unfortunately the standard RC covering heat gun has been driven down in price so that it is selling at times for usa$14.95-19.95. We say unfortunately because at that price we are getting exactly what we are paying for... a pretty crude unregulated heat producer. Even a decent hair dryer costs more!

Most of these low end RC covering heat guns do not monitor the heat coming out of the nozzle. They have a heating element that heats the air sucked into the back of the gun and a fan that blasts it out the front. The vanes at the back of the gun have a very limited effect on the output temperature. So... if you take a 1000 watt gun for example, and heat air that is at 50F flowing into the back of gun you get a fixed amount of temperature increase... lets say 350F and the outflowing air is at 50+350=400F. Now run the same gun with ambient air of 75F flowing into the back of the gun and the same 1000W of energy will increase this 75F air by 350 degrees to 425F. So depending on the ambient air temperature you get a different output temperature. To add to the confusion somewhat, adding a fixed amount of energy to dry air (low humidity) will change the temperature of the air more than if you add if you add the same amount of energy to moist (high humidity) air. This variation in output temperature due to changes in the ambient air and ambient humidity makes it very difficult to work out a reliable consistent technique when you are working with heat shrink covering. One day you get a "feel" for the right amount of heat, time and distance and everything goes great. The next day or a month later you try this with a different ambient air temperature and/or different humidity and your technique does not work... why? Because the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun has changed without you being aware of it.

What can you do about this to make your covering technique more consistent? Well sadly to say you either have to live with this problem or you have to dump the cheapy RC covering heat gun and get a heat gun that measures and controls the consistency of the temperature of the air flowing out of the gun.

There are a number of heat guns for shrinking heat shrink tubing that work well. They can be rather expensive but give you good control over the temperature you want AND hold that temperature consistently regardless of ambient temperature and humidity. It's nice to be able to select the temperature if you've got the cash to buy such a gun. If you need to watch your pennies a bit more carefully, we suggest opting for less control and go for consistency. Some of the lower priced heat guns intended for stripping paint do this. You will need to work out the distance and time technique that works for your covering but at least you will be doing so with a gun that is producing a reliable temperature output. We have used the Black & Decker #9756 with good results. This has two temperature settings, 500F and 1000F. Read the safety instructions that comes with the unit. Work with the 500F setting at a good distance at first (say 15") and move the gun frequently until you get a feel for it. Generally the closer you get and/or the hotter the air coming out of the gun, the quicker you have to move the gun (less exposure time) to avoid overheating the covering.

 

POLYCOTE ECS - Tools - For working with POLYCOTE ECS

 

10.10. VMAR - Cowl Installation - Information & Tips
10.10.1. Cowl - Custom Fitting Tips

We have embedded here a link to the VMAR Bird Dog ARF Assembly and Operations Manual. Although the manual is intended to specifically provide for assembly of the Bird Dog, modelers may find Stage 13 on page 9 to be of help when mounting any cowl.

We have also attached a PDF reprint from the Model Airplane News "Flight Ready" book of tips and techniques related to ARF model airplanes. Copyright (c) 2004 Model Airplane News. All Rights Reserved. Used by Permission. The PDF outlines a simple reliable method to measure, cut and fit a cowl around an engine without the use of a dummy cowl.

In summary,  the Bird Dog manual gives a good overview of a technique for mounting a cowl on the fuselage somewhat irrespective of engine cut outs while the Model Airplane News reprint focusses on cutting the cowl to accomodate your muffler and engine head, carb etc. We suggest readers review both of these before mounting their cowl.

Acrobat Reader is required to view PDF files. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded free from www.adobe.com or by clicking on the icon below.

Get Adobe Reader

 

 

10.10.2. Cowl - Retaining Screws - Using

Question: My VMAR ARF came with a nice fibreglass cowl and 3 or 4 retaining screws. How do I use the screws?

Answer: Generally we recommend screwing the screws into the edge of the fixed firewall at the forward end of the fuselage. Use one screw on each side and one at the top of the cowl. Or you may wish to go with two screws on each side and forego having a screw at the top. Leave any opening (slack space) at the top and sides, try to avoid a gap at the top.

To prevent the holes from chaffing out under vibration you may wish to enlarge the holes just large enough to accomodate a small rubber grommet (servo grommets work well for this) and then put a flat washer under the head of each screw.

Before drilling any holes in your cowl, we recommend thoroughly reviewing your manual AND the related articles attached here. The article from Model Airplane News is well worth reading.

Cowl - Custom Fitting Tips

We have embedded here a link to the VMAR Bird Dog ARF Assembly and Operations Manual. Although the manual is intended to specifically provide for assembly of the Bird Dog, modelers may find Stage 13 on page 9 to be of help when mounting any cowl.

We have also attached a PDF reprint from the Model Airplane News "Flight Ready" book of tips and techniques related to ARF model airplanes. Copyright (c) 2004 Model Airplane News. All Rights Reserved. Used by Permission. The PDF outlines a simple reliable method to measure, cut and fit a cowl around an engine without the use of a dummy cowl.

In summary,  the Bird Dog manual gives a good overview of a technique for mounting a cowl on the fuselage somewhat irrespective of engine cut outs while the Model Airplane News reprint focusses on cutting the cowl to accomodate your muffler and engine head, carb etc. We suggest readers review both of these before mounting their cowl.

Acrobat Reader is required to view PDF files. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded free from www.adobe.com or by clicking on the icon below.

Get Adobe Reader

 

 

10.11. VMAR - Electric Power Conversions & Requirements
10.11.1. What Electric Motor, Speed Control, Battery, Prop etc works with what model?

Question: What electric motor, speed control and battery should I use when converting my VMAR ARF to electric or when powering my VMAR Electric ARF?

Answer: This is a rapidly expanding area of RC modeling and there is a wide range of products coming into the market along with some rather dubious claims and some strong opinions about what is good and what is bad. Rather than getting ourselves and our customers in hot water working with third party heresay recommendations we have determined that aside from products that we have tested ourselves we are not able to make recommendations regarding specific electric power systems. In general, you will require an electric motor of comparable power to that produced by the size of engine recommended for your model. You will also require an electronic speed control (ESC), a battery pack, wirning harness, fuse and connectors. A suitable prop will also be required and it will usually be considerably different than they prop you would use on a glow engine.

Although there are many things to consider, if the flying weight remains the same and your electric motor produces similar thrust (power) as engines recommended for your model, you are on the right track. If the weight goes up and the thrust goes down, you are headed for problems and the model will likely not fly.

As of Sept 2005, we have released our VMAR L19 Bird Dog and VMAR Electric Aero Subaru ARF and both of these products have been tested extensively with a battery, motor and speed control system that we are able to recommend and supply. Please see our web site at www.richmondrc.com

10.12. VMAR - Engine Mounting - General Information & Tips
10.12.1. Installing Engines on the Mounts - Clamp or Drill.

We occasionally get inquiries from modelers who are concerned that their engine will not fit on the VMAR engine mounts supplied with VMAR ARF's. Although there is no way to guarantee that the VMAR engine mounts will accomodate every engine on the market we are quite careful to make sure that VMAX and most other popular engines fit on the mounts, provided that the engine is of the recommended size. Discussions with consumers reveals that some modellers occasionally misunderstand the way the engine mount is to be used or do unnecessary work (drilling) when installing their engines.

Resolution:

In Brief: The VMAR clamp style engine mounts do not have to be drilled for most engines. The engine lugs fit between the engine mount beams and the clamping plates. Generally the instruction manuals illustrate how to use the clamping plates.

In Detail: No drilling is normally required to use the VMAR clamp style engine mount. Remove the four black machine bolts and clamping plates from the engine mount beams. Place the engine on the engine mount beams and reinstall the clamping plates and bolts so that the clamping plates are above the engine lugs and the bolts are placed such that one bolt is ahead of each engine lug and one bolt is aft of each engine lug. Align the engine to be pointing straight ahead or slightly to the right and tighten the clamping bolts firmly to hold the engine in place.

Generally the clamping plates have three bolt holts to allow for two different orientations and different fore and aft locating of the engines. Four Stroke engines should be set further foreward if they are too long aft of the engine lugs. In the event that an engine does not fit on the beams with the clamps and bolts in place, the bolts should be removed and the engine mount drilled or drilled and tapped for bolts to pass through the engine and the lugs in the traditional manner.

Some engines such as the OS LA series have narrower cases than others and may be pose difficulties when mounting.  If modelers are determined to install an OS LA they may have to remove the engine mounts and respace them closer together. The engine mounts can be removed by undoing the mounting bolts from the back of the beams i.e. inside the fuel tank compartment slightly aft of the beams or, depending on the model, when blind nuts have been installed behind the firewall the bolts can be loosened from the front.  Alternatively, modellers may wish to leave the engine mounts in place per the factory location and use a plywood adapter plate to accomodate the OS LA. Use 1/8" or thicker plywood. To make a plywood adapter plate, remove the four machine black machine screws and clamping plates from the engine mounts. Make the adapter large enough to completely cover the flat area of engine beams... from left to right and from the beam forward tip to the aft end near the firewall ensuring that the adapter plate is sized to sit flat on the engine beams. Mount the plywood plate to the engine beams with the four screws and washers. Do not reuse the metal engine clamps. Now position your engine on top of the plywood plate, center it and mark the cutout area you will require in the plate center area so that your engine lugs can sit down upon and be supported by the plywood. Cut away the engine clearance area. Center and mount the engine using machine bolts/nuts/washers... the bolts should pass through the engine lug holes and the plywood adapter plate.

Some engines have wider crankcases or in cases where a larger engine is being installed and the beams are not wide enough apart, they beams can be removed and reinstalled with a wider stance OR filing the clamping plates to accomodate the case width may help where only a small additional bit of clearance is required.

10.12.2. Engine Orientation - Upright, Sideways, Inverted - Relation to Position on FIrewall

Question: How do I position my engine on the engine mounts and on the firewall when I intend on installing the engine at an angle or inverted rather than upright?

Short Answer: Regardless of orientation, the center line of the crankshaft must be positioned over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal thrust lines for your particular model. There are a few exceptions as described below.

Better Answer: Some models pretty much force you to install your engine in an upright orientation. Other models, particularly once you move up from basic trainers, offer you a variety of engine orientation options. Rotated 90 degrees is one such choice that often works well with Pitts style mufflers...  inverted (sometimes called 180 degree rotation) is another choice. Generally these non-upright orientations, hide more of the engine and muffler and result in a more realistic scale like appearance to the model.

The choice of what angle to use is pretty much up to you, limited by the physical size of the engine, muffler, cowl etc. Some engines for example can be oriented at 90 or 135 degrees but run into a physical problem at other angles... they hit something, the muffler won't clear the fuselage, the needle valve is at an awkward location etc. When selecting an angle to mount your engine, you have to balance off appearance, convenience, practicality and most of all make sure it can physically fit. Don't forget to test your planned installation angle with the muffler and carb installed. Also check out your engine manual for any specific guidance from the engine manufacturer. Some manufacturers don't recommend an exactly inverted 180 degree installation. We have found this to be good advice in many cases... 180 degree inversions have a tendency to smother the glow plug in oil and residue if run at low RPM for too long.

Once you've decided on the installation orientation that you want, the actual position of the engine on the firewall is no different with a rotated engine than it is with an upright engine. The engine thrust is always centered around the crankshaft and regardless of orientation, the center line of the crankshaft must be positioned over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal thrust lines for your particular model. The vertical thrust line lies up and down through the middle of the firewall. The horizontal thrust line is often drawn on the firewall or is to be draw on the firewall by you after referencing location information in the model instruction manual.  

There are some exceptions but the exceptions are few and far between... if the mounting face of the engine mounting lugs is offset from the center line of the crankshaft you have to adjust accordingly. This is rare, we have not seen this in standard two stroke engines. Engine manufacturers avoid this if at all possible. If you are working with a large gas engine adapted from another industry or a multi piston engine, examine the mounting system carefully and make sure you understand the relation between the engine mounting lugs and the center line of the crankshaft.

 

10.12.3. Engine Mounts - Plastic vs Aluminum - Interchangeable

Question: Which engine mounts are supposed to come with my model... Aluminum or Plastic type mounts?

Answer: Either Plastic or Aluminum mounts could be supplied depending on availability when your ARF was produced and packed at the factory.

Better Answer: The Plastic and Aluminum mounts are interchangeable. Both use the heavy duty metal clamping bars and machine bolts and nuts... only the base material of the T-Beam itself is different. Depending on availability from our suppliers we supply either type. Given increases in availability we are planning on moving all production to the plastic mount by the end of 2005 unless the model has a specific need for the aluminum mount.

 

 

10.12.4. Engine Mounts - Slight Variations in Finish & Surface Complexion

Question: Is it important that the two T-Beam Engine Mounts be exactly the same in appearance, smoothness and/or surface shape or size?

Answer: No. It does not matter.

Better Answer: No. It does not matter. There are several molds that make the T-Beam Engine Mounts and variations in appearance, smoothness, surface shape and/or size can be found between parts made in the different molds. These are a clamp style mount and the top surface of the T-Beam that lies against the engine lugs is flat. The sides and other appearance attributes of the mount do not affect its performance or suitability.

10.12.5. Engine Mounts - Without Clamps - How to Use

Question: I have a VMAR ARF model with an Engine Mount with no clamps. I bought my model in the summer or fall of 2004. Why does my engine mount not have clamps and how do I use it with my engine?

Answer: In response to some feedback from modellers we produced a limited number of models in the summer and fall of 2004 with no clamps to gauge public acceptance in advance of our 2005 production schedule. A set of four motor mount bolts, nuts and washers or 4 self tapping screws were included with each such ARF in lieu of the clamps. Position your engine so that the engine lug forward edge is about 15/16" back from the forward end of the engine mount.

If your model came with bolts, mark and then drill the mount with a 5/32" bit and bolt the engine directly to the engine mounts using the 4 bolts, nuts and washers provided.

If your model came with self tapping screws, drill the mount with a 1/16" drill bit to make pilot holes and then expand the holes to about 2/3 of the diameter of the screws provided. Do not over-enlarge the holes.

 

10.12.6. Engine Width - Will my engine fit between the VMAR pre-installed engine mounts?

Question: I have already purchased a .40 to .52 size engine. How do I know if my engine will fit properly between the engine mounts that are installed in many VMAR ARF's?

Answer: Most popular .40 to .52 size two stroke engine cases will fit between the engine mounts that are pre-installed in many VMAR ARF's. Most popular two stroke engines of this size have similar case dimensions. For example the VMAX, Thunder Tiger and OS .40-.52 size engines are very similar in size. The OS 40LA and 46LA have non-standard (too narrow) cases and pose difficult installation problems. We do not recommend the use of these engines unless you are able to modify either the engine mount T-beam spacing by removing and reinstalling the engine mounts OR can build and install a shim set (2 shims) to narrow the gap between the pre-installed engine T-Beams OR can cut a 1/8-3/32" plywood mounting plate and install it on top of the T-beams after cutting a horseshoe U-shaped recess for the engine case. 

Supplementary Information: Although case sizes vary somewhat we have ensured that most popular engines fit. To get an idea of a typical case size that does fit, consult the VMAX .46 - .52 Engine Operations Manual at ... http://142.179.114.175/novo/default.asp?SID=&Lang=1&id=4002&Lang=1&SID= See the dimensional diagram on Page 7 and note carefully the sizes denoted D, A and G. Metric dimensions in mm can be converted into imperial inches by dividing by 25.4
 
Some engines may be a tight fit when trying to install them. In this situation we recommend removing the steel clamp plates from the factory installed engine T-beam engine mount and using self tapping sheet metal screws or bolts, nuts and washers when trying to install a tight fitting engine. If the engine case is too wide to fit between the factory installed engine mount T-beams after the metal clamps plates have been removed from the engine mounts carefully determine how much additional clearance you required.  If you need only 1-2 mm more of total clearance to accomodate your engine, you may wish to grind or file away up to 1mm of material from the inside faces of each engine mount T-beam. If more than 1-2 mm of total clearance is needed to install your engine, you will need to consider a different engine or repositioning the factory provided engine mount T-beams or replacing the factory installed engine mount with a third party engine mount having enough clearance to accomodate your particular engine.  
10.12.7. Firewall - Finished Appearance & Sealing - Tips and Hints

Question: Can I finish my firewall to enhance it's appearance and seal it against oil and fuel?

Answer: Yes.

Better Answer: The firewalls are made from either 6mm plywood or multiple layers of thinner 2-3mm plywood laminated together. They are more than strong enough for any modelling application. They will withstand oil and fuel without further treatment or finishing. If you wish to seal the edges and faces that is also fine. When finishing, we suggest checking the edges for any voids, fill them with CA or Epoxy and then seal the edges and faces with finishing resin or epoxy. Let dry and then install your engine mounts and tank.

10.12.7.1. Firewall - Templates - VMAX Engines on RRC-MOUNTUNP Mount

Question: I want to make a new firewall and install a VMAX Engine using the standard VMA-MOUNTUNP componsite Engine Mount. Do you have any Templates that I could use a cutting and drilling guides?

Answer: Yes, please see the attached PDF files below. These are a bit rough and ready but they should do the trick.

10.12.8. Firewall - Thrust Lines - Can they be moved from the factory location?

Question: I am installing my engine and I'd like to shift the thrust line. Is this OK?

Answer: Well... it depends! The factory location for the vertical and horizontal thrust lines is fairly important and the best option is to not depart from the factory specs regarding thrust lines. However, we recognize that some engines and some engine orientations may look better aesthetically if they are shifted somewhat from the factory thrust line locations.

Our advice in this regard is as follows:

1) Do not shift the left and right location of the engine from the location of the vertical thrust line recommended for the model. i.e. keep the engine centered on the firewall with respect to left and right. If you need a bit of left or right thrust, use the power module nut and bolt spacing system or the engine mounting angle to change the thrust angle but do not offset the engine itself to the left or right.

2) You can shift the engine slightly higher or lower on the firewall than indicated by the location of the horizontal thrust line on the firewall. Don't go crazy... a centimeter maybe is a good maximum guideline depending on the model and how you plan on using it. The more you depart from the recommended location the more risk you are taking that this will adversely and significantly affect the flying characteristics of the model. Again, if all you want to do is induce some up or down thrust, use the the power module nut and bolt spacing system or the engine mounting angle to change the thrust angle rather than offset the entire engine up or down.

To understand what is happening when you shift the thrust lines by moving the engine up or down, left or right on the firewall.... it helps to take things to an extreme in your head. Consider nailing a 48" long 2x4 plank to your firewall so that the plank is pointing up and down and centered over the firewall so that 24" is above the center of the firewall and 24" is below the center of the firewall.

Now imagine mounting your engine to the front of the top end of the 2x4 and think what would happen when you rev up the propeller. The engine thrust would pull the top of the 2x4 forward and torque (twist) the nose of the model downwards. So applying power would result in the model pointing down... not really what you expected but that's what will happen! This will require aggressive amounts of up elevator to correct and the degree of up elevator required will constantly change not only with the engine thrust per RPM and prop selection but with the degree of effectiveness of the elevator depending on the air speed of the model. So every time you change the tprop or the throttle setting (RPM) of the motor or the models air speed you will need to adjust the elevator trim. Talk about a pain in the butt!

Now let's go the other way... imagine mounting your engine to the bottom end of the 2x4 and think would would happen when you rev up the propeller. The engine thrust would pull the bottom of the 2x4 forward and torque (twist) the nose upwards... i.e. applying power will result in the model pointing up. This will in turn require lots of down elevator to compensate for and the amount of down elevator needed will constantly change depending upon engine thrust and the effectiveness of any down elevator setting will in turn vary with the air speed of the model. Every time you change throttle setting of the motor or the prop or the air speed of the model, you will need to adjust the elevator trim. Big time headache!

So taking our imaginary extreme analogy and putting it into context of a typical model without a big honking 2x4 nailed to the front of the firewall... here are the results of moving the engine up or down from the recommended thrust line location:

a) Moving the motor below the recommended thrust line will pitch up the nose somewhat and require varying amounts of down elevator trim depending upon RPM, prop selection and air speed of the model.

b)  Moving the motor above the recommended thrust line will pitch down the nose somewhat and require varying amounts of up elevator trim depending upon RPM, prop selection and air speed of the model. 

c) The pitch up and pitch down forces will increase as you move the engine further from the recommended thrust line.

d) The further you shift the thrust line the more "snaky" and jumpy the model will tend to be as you vary throttle settings and the more difficult it will be to fly in a controlled and predictable manner.

10.12.9. Firewall - Thrust Lines - Where are they? Horizontal and Vertical

Question: I am installing my engine. Where are the thrust lines on the firewall?

Answer: The horizontal thrust line normally appears on the forward face of the firewall or you draw the horizontal thrust line on the forward face of the firewall yourself following location instructions contained in the documentation that came with your model.

If there is no horizontal line indicated on the firewall and you are unable to locate the location of the line in the reference material there is an easy way to position the horiztonal thrust line youself. To do this, fit your cowl over the fuselage. Look at the cowl from the left and right sides and adjust the vertical angle of the cowl to align with the fuselage. There should not be any sharp drop or rise in the silhouette profile of the fuselage as you move your eye along the fuselage and over the cowl. Once you have the cowl in place, look through the front hole where the crankshaft is going to protrude. Mark the horizontal thrust line on the firewall so that it is evenly located up and down with respect to the hole in the front of the cowl.

The vertical thrust line lies up and down through the middle of the firewall. If it is not shown, you can simply draw it into place. Make sure it is in the middle.

You may also find this information on our web site. Look for the links to your model, then the link to the detailed information and browse down to the engine section. The position of the horizontal and/or vertical thrust line may be stated there.

10.12.10. Firewall - What is it? What is it for? Do I have one?

Question: What is a Firewall? 

Answer: The firewall is the flat plate or wall like component that the engine mounts are attached to. All propeller driven model airplanes have a firewall. It is located near the front of the model just behind the engine.

Better Answer: The term firewall comes from the first use of internal combustion engines in cars and aircraft and dates back to even earlier usage in the 1800's. If we take the word apart into its elements it is exactly what is says it is... a Fire Wall.

Internal combustion engines like model airplane engines... burn fuel. They get hot, very hot. This heat is ok for the engine but is not generally a good thing for the rest of the aircraft. The Fire Wall separates the hot, heavy engine from the rest of the aircraft.

In most propellor driven aircraft the firewall is just aft of the engine and is a wall that pretty much caps the forward end of the fuselage. The engine mounts are attached to the forward face of the firewall and the engine in turn is attached to the engine mounts.

In VMAR models the firewall is generally a piece of plywood that looks like a small flat plate. The firewall may be round or elliptical, or be squarish in shape with rounded corners and measure 3 to 8+ inches across. It is usually about 6mm (1/4") thick.

 

10.12.11. Using 4 Stroke Engines on VMAR Models

Question: Can I use a 4 Stroke engine on my VMAR ARF model?

Answer: In most cases, Yes.

Better Answer: There are some things to consider here. First of all if the model has a cowl it will usually have a power module consisting of a removeable forward firewall and a set of engine mounts. These engine mounts can be oriented in many different ways so you can select the orientation and separation of the mounts to suit your engine. It is also very easy to work on with this setup because the forward firewall is completely removeable from the model. So... VMAR models with a cowl and power module probably will be able to accomodate a 4 stroke engine. Conversely... models without a cowl and power module usually have a factory installed engine mount and a fixed firewall only and may be more problematic when trying to fit them out with a 4 stroke engine. It is safe to say that if the model does not have a cowl and power module there may be significant work and mucking around in order to install a 4 stroke engine.

4 stroke engines are not as standardized as most 2 stroke engines... some have the carburetors at the front, some at the back. Some have valve pushrods running up the front of the crankcase... some up the back. As a consequence, 4 stroke engines vary quite a bit in length (i.e. the distance from the prop shaft to the back of the engine) within a particular size. Although for example a 2 stroke .46 from one supplier will be very similar in external size to that of a 2 stroke .46 from another supplier... it is not necessarily the case when comparing 4 strokes. A .52 four stroke from one manufacturer can be quite different from a .52 four stroke from another manufacturer. There is no way we can be aware of all the different sizes and shapes of four stroke engines in the market and modelers should be checking with the engine manufacturer for sizes before assuming that the engine will fit into any particular model. Once you know the length of the four stroke engine that you are considering, place the cowl on your model. Then measure from where the back plate of the spinner will be to the front face of the removeable power module firewall. Subtract about 1.25" from this distance and then compare the result with the length of your four stroke engine. Engines that exceed this length will significantly protrude from the front of the cowl and should be trial fitted carefully before purchase.

In some cases, we are pre-cutting cowls to make installation of our recommended 2 stroke engine go as quickly and easily as possible. We do stock blank (not cut) cowls for those who wish to use a differnet 2 stroke engine size (for example a .61 instead of a .46) or a 4 stroke instead of a 2 stroke or want to go with an inverted installation or other orientation when we may have assumed a 90 orientation when pre-cutting the factory cowl.

Lastly, we have some models that do not use a cowl per-se and do not have a power module but may look like they do. For example the F4U Phantom and Skyhawk and Arrow Tiger have a shaped and fitted nose section but not a cowl and we have not recommended 4 stroke engines for these models at all. Again, if we do not use a cowl and power module on a model... we may be significant work and mucking around in order to install a 4 stroke engine.

Please note that to this point this article makes no attempt to explain the differences between the different types of engine systems. For some of the pro's and con's of 2 stroke and 4 stroke engines please the article included below:

Engine Types and Power Considerations - 2 Stroke, 4 Stroke & Glow vs Gas vs Electric

Question: What gives with Model Airplanes Engines? What's a 2 stroke? What's a 4 Stroke? What do you mean by Glow as compared to Gas? Now there are electric motors being adapted to replace engines... how the heck do I choose what is right for my model?

Answer: Well, answers to this can take a bit of explaining. Here is an overview.

2 Stroke (sometimes called 2 cycle)

  • Is what the majority of current modelers mean when they say "Model Airplane" or "Glow" Engine
  • Noisy screaming type of sound that must be carefully muffled and never sounds like the real thing.
  • Uses Model Airplane Fuel (alcohol, oil, nitromethane and additives)
  • Uses a Glow Plug hence the term "Glow" Engine.
  • Generally the cheapest, lightest, most powerful engine for the money.
  • Referred to by displacment in hundreds of cubic inches (or in cubic centimeters = cc)
  • Imperial measure is cubic inches and a slang has developed
    • .40 cubic inches is referred to as "a 40"
    • .90 cubic inches is referred to as "a 90"
    • 1.20 cubic inches is referred to as "a 120"
  • Generally range in size from .049 to 1.80 although some smaller and bigger engines exist.

4 Stroke (sometimes called 4 cycle)

  • Has become more popular since the 90's with those wanting quieter more realistic engine sound for use in semi-scale or scale models.
  • Quieter more familiar engine sound when in the air. Much more realistic for scale flying models. Sounds much more like the real thing.
  • Uses Model Airplane Fuel (alcohol, oil, nitromethane and additives) although special blends with more or less oil and more or less nitro may be required for some engines.
  • Uses a Glow Plug hence the term "Glow" Engine can be used for either 2 stroke or 4 stroke engines
  • Generally costs more, weighs more and gives less power for more money than a 2 stroke engine of similar size.
  • Referred to by displacment in hundreds of cubic inches (or in cubic centimeters = cc)
  • Imperial measure is cubic inches and a slang has developed
    • .52 cubic inches is referred to as "a 52"
    • .91 cubic inches is referred to as "a 91"
  • Generally range in size from .25 to 2.50 although some smaller and bigger engines exist.
  • To get the same power as a 2 stroke, add on about 30-50% in size. This is a very rough rule and does not consider weight and torque issues but it is a good guide.
    • A model calling for a 2 stroke .46 would require roughly a 4 stroke of size .60-.70
    • A model calling for a 2 stroke .61 would require roughly a 4 stroke of size .80-.90

Gas (sometimes called Ignition Engine)

  • Has become more popular for use with big models.
  • Quieter more familiar engine sound when in the air. Much more realistic for scale flying models. Sounds like the real thing  because it pretty well is the real thing!
  • Uses Gasoline. Special oil or additives may be added to the gas in some cases. Gas is 25-50% cheaper than Model Airplane Fuel.
  • Uses a Spark Plug hence the term "Ignition".
  • Often adapted by the manufacturer from some other purpose such as a weed eater, leave blower etc. Although the engines end up quite different with regards to fuel supply, ignition, prop adapter and flywheel etc, they usually started with an existing product and adapted from there.
  • Seldom used on smaller models and nearly always used on big models due to the higher weight of the engine and ignition system.
  • Generally costs more, weighs more and gives less power for more money that a 2 stroke engine of similar size. May cost and weigh more than a 4 cycle Glow engine.
  • Referred to by displacement in cubic centimeters (cc) (or in cubic inches but almost universally now in cc)
  • Metric measure is cubic centimeters (cc) and the cc is nearly always noted in referring to these engines
    • for example "30 cc"
  • Generally range in size from 20cc to about 65cc although some smaller and considerable numbers of bigger engines exist.

Electric Motors (both brush type and brushless type)

  • Have become more popular since 2000. Increasing in popularity
  • Just as a combustion  Engine needs and is succesful depending on the type of fuel it burns, an electric Motor needs batteries.
  • As battery technology put more and more power (run time) into batteries of a certain weight (we call this energy density) electric powered flight is starting to take off (literally)
  • Generally brushless motors are taking over. They can be very expensive when coupled to a suitable electronic speed control and a good set of NiMh or LiPo batteries.
  • Main advantage is quieter and no mess. No fuel to buy.
  • Main disadvantage is price and flight time per charge.
  • They will continue to improve and be more popular in time.
  • The rating system is not yet standardized so it is hard to compare apples with applies. Generally if a model calls for a .40 two stroke engine, modelers need to select an electric motor that can provide similar power in order to have similar flight characteristics. This can vary widely by motor type (brushless is better), battery type, speed control and wiring.

Please note that to this point this article makes no attempt to advise on if a particular model can be adapted to accomodate a different type of power system. For some considerations related to fitting 4 stroke engines into a model please search on "Four Stroke" for further assistance.

10.13. VMAR - Engine Power Module - Information & Tips
10.13.1. Power Module - Alignment - What angle to use?

Question: My VMAR ARF uses the VMAR Power Module system. What angle should I align the Power Module at?

Answer: The VMAR Power Module system uses a fixed firewall "ring" permanently attached to the fuselage and a removable forward firewall "plate" to which the engine mounts are installed. Four stud bolts protrude from the fixed firewall ring and are used to set the offset spacing and hence the angle between the fixed firewall ring and the removable firewall plate.
 
This system provides a great deal of control over the offset spacing ("gap") between the firewalls to accommodate a wide range of different engine depths and spinner types. By varying the placement of the retaining bolts and washers on the four stud bolts, modelers can also control both the horizontal and vertical engine thrust angles.
 
We recommend a default setting for the horizontal and vertical engine thrust angles of 0, 0 respectively by having a consistent (equal valued) offset between the fixed firewall ring and forward firewall plate. The most common departure for this default configuration is 1-3 degrees of right thrust to assist with take offs. The vertical thrust angle can be adjusted as well if for example a particular engine power and weight combination results in "ballooning" of the model when additional power is applied above a cruise setting sufficient to maintain level flight. Such ballooning is often an indication of the need to adjust vertical thrust angles.  
 
The default 0.0 settings are the best place to start remembering that the VMAR Power Module system makes it easy to make incremental adjustments to the horizontal and vertical thrust angles as fliers become more familiar with their model and engine power settings. No setting is irreversible. The thrust angles can be changed at any time.
10.13.2. Power Module - Distance from fixed Firewall - How Much?

Question: My VMAR ARF uses the VMAR Power Module system. How much space should I allow between the fixed (aft) firewall attached the fuselage and the power module (adjustable) firewall?

Answer: The VMAR Power Module system uses a fixed firewall "ring" permanently attached to the fuselage and a removable forward firewall "plate" to which the engine mounts are installed. Four stud bolts protrude from the fixed firewall ring and are used to set the offset spacing and the angle between the fixed firewall ring and the removable firewall plate.
 
This system provides a great deal of control over the offset spacing ("gap") between the firewalls to accommodate a wide range of different engine depths and spinner types. By varying the placement of the retaining bolts and washers on the four stud bolts, modelers can adjust the gap and also control both the horizontal and vertical engine thrust angles.
 
We recommend first checking the assembly manual for your model and any specific Read Me First or Knowledge Base articles that may refer to this specific question as it pertains to your model.
 
In the absense of any specific documentation, we suggest the following:
 
a) Look over the cowl mounting tips provided in your assembly manual and in the article referenced below. Without installing the power module, mock up your cowl installation on the fuselage. No need to actually cut the cowl out at this point. Just align it and angle it etc per the articles and your assembly manual. Generally this leaves the back edge of the cowl overlapping the front of the fuselage by about .125-.25 in. (3-6mm). Mark the edge of the cowl with low tack masking tape for later reference.
 
b) Measure the distance between the front of the cowl crankshaft clearance hole and the forward face of the fixed firewall attached to the fuselage.
 
c) Now remove the cowl from the fuselage. Install your engine mounts to the power module firewall and your engine to the engine mounts.
 
d) Install the power module firewall with engine mounts and engine onto the four threaded studs using the nuts and washer arrangement outlined in your assembly manual.
 
e) Position the power module firewall so that the distance from the fixed firewall (fuselage front) to the forward face of the engine thrust washer (behind the prop) is about .125-.25 in. (3-6mm) longer than the distance measured in b) above. You can adjust the location of the power module firewall and the engine on the mounts to obtain this distance.
 
f) This can be a bit of an iterative process. You may have to try several different positions to get the optimum solution for your particular engine and model combination. Work slowly and patiently. Try to think ahead about eventually cutting out the cowl to clear your engine and muffer. Also the location of the fuel tank. type of spinner and prop etc. Also the thrust angles etc. We have referenced a thrust angle article below to keep in mind when adjusting the distance between the fixed firewall and the power module firewall.
 
g) Remember that the power module system gives you tremendous flexibility to accomodate a great number of different engines. If it does not work out on the first try, don't sweat it, we've given you a system that you can easily adjust many times until you get it the way you want it.
10.13.3. Power Module - Wood - Quality of Plywood

Question: A friend of mine has a VMAR model from a couple of years back. It has a power module with removeable firewall. He mentioned to me that the plywood used was strong but was not attractive to look at. Is this still the case?

Answer: We have been upgrading our plywood and sourcing new supplies since early 2004. Except for older production that may still be in the distribution chain, all firewalls now have a better and cleaner appearance. That said, please note that we were dealing with a cosmetic issue here. All firewalls have been more than strong enough to work well with the model they were supplied with.

10.13.4. Power Module - Wood - Laminations - Visible

Question: When I look at the edge of my power module firewall, I can see small gaps between some of the laminations. Is this normal? Is it OK? Is it coming apart?

Answer: Yes this is normal. Yes it is OK. No it will not come apart.

Expanded Answer: The power module wood firewall is made from 2 or 3 plywood layers that have then been laminated together with epoxy to produce a firewall that is approximately 1/4" (6mm) thick. There will be a wider gap between the plywood pieces than between the individual plys within a plywood piece. This is normal. The power module firewalls are extremely strong and are held together in operational use not only by Epoxy but by four engine mounting bolts and four power module to fuselage stud and nut sets. This represents 8 mechanical fasteners in addition to the epoxy between layers... all acting over an area less than the size of a dinner plate.

Short of a very violent crash the power module firewall is not going to come apart. Small gaps or voids in the plys or in the bonding layer between plywood pieces are not going to impact on the performance of the power module firewall in our application.

If you are wondering about sealing the power module firewall, please see below:

Power Module - Wood - How to Seal?

Question: Should I seal the wood power module firewall that came with my VMAR ARF?

Answer: It's not really necessary but it probably can't hurt aside from adding a bit of weight. If you have an hour or so and the right materials, you can improve the cosmetic appearance of the power module firewall by sealing it.

For those who wish to seal the edges and faces of the power module firewall, we recommend Pacer ZAP-A-GAP CA+ for filling edge voids or edge gaps between layers and then after the CA+ has cured, apply Pacer Finishing Resin to the edges and the front and rear faces of the firewall.

10.13.5. Power Module - Wood - How to Seal?

Question: Should I seal the wood power module firewall that came with my VMAR ARF?

Answer: It's not really necessary but it probably can't hurt aside from adding a bit of weight. If you have an hour or so and the right materials, you can improve the cosmetic appearance of the power module firewall by sealing it.

For those who wish to seal the edges and faces of the power module firewall, we recommend Pacer ZAP-A-GAP CA+ for filling edge voids or edge gaps between layers and then after the CA+ has cured, apply Pacer Finishing Resin to the edges and the front and rear faces of the firewall.

10.13.6. Power Module - Retaining Nuts - Self Locking & Plated

Question: What type of retaining nuts are used with the Power Module?

Answer: Prior to mid 2004, we used a lightly plated metric nut. These worked but occasionally rusted and required thread locker to ensure they stayed tight.

Since mid 2004 we have used a plated (chrome look) metric self locking hex nut like you would find on high end machinery. These look better, work better and do not require thread locker.

10.14. VMAR - Flaps & Flaperons - General Information and Tips
10.14.1. Flaps - If provided must they be used or is usage optional?

Question: My VMAR model comes complete wtih Flaps. Do I have to use them or is usage optional?

Answer: No you do not have to use the flaps. Although we have provided flaps with the model, you can simply lock the flaps in place at a neutral position and fly without activating them. We'd suggest that if you are going to go that route, install the control horns to the flaps and run the control rods to a fixed point near the flap servo cavity trays. Some folks actually mount a servo wheel to the servo cavity cover and attach the control rod to the servo wheel or even install flap servos as they would normally do for flap operation but don't hook the servos up to your receiver. This latter solution in effect has you all ready to use the flaps should you decide to later on.

10.14.2. Flaperons - If provided must they be used or is usage optional?

Question: My VMAR model comes complete wtih flaperons. Do I have to use them or is usage optional?

Answer: No you do not have to use the flaperons. Although we have provided flaperons with the model, you can simply use them as ailerons. You will need a computer radio to make the ailerons work as flaperons and this is entirely optional... they will work just fine as ailerons only.

For further information about flaperons please review the following article:

 

Flaperon Ready - What does it Mean? What are Flaperons anyway?

Question: What are Flaperons and what is meant by the term Flaperon Ready?

Answer: The term Flaperons is used to describe Ailerons that can act as Ailerons AND act as Flaps. When we design Ailerons so that they can or must use two servos the model is Flaperon Ready.

The Flaperons in a Flaperon Ready model are not mandatory but we have designed the model so that the Ailerons can be activated as Flaperons if you use two servos for the ailerons and a computer radio.

Better Answer: Flaps are generally used for take offs and landings only. They hang down from the back edge of the wing and increase the lift of the wing enabling the model to take off and land at slower speeds. Landing at slower speeds can make landing a little easier on the nerves. Flaps go down only.

Ailerons are used all the time in flight. Ailerons go up and down.

By using two servos and a computer radio it is possible to use an Aileron like a Flap while still using it as an Aileron. This is called a Flaperon.

When we manufacture a model we always include Ailerons. When we design Ailerons so that they can or must use two servos the model is Flaperon Ready.

To take advantage of Flaperons in a Flaperon Ready model, you must use two servos for the Ailerons and must have a computer radio.

For information regarding Flaperon Deflection please see the following article,

10.14.3. Flaps &/or Flaperons - End Sealing After Cutting - Tips and Hints?

Question: My VMAR model came with a long aileron running along almost the entire trailing edge of the wing panel. My model also came equipped with four servo mounting bays and instructions for the optional cutting of each single aileron into a flap and aileron or flap and flaperon. I have cut each single aileron as instructed. Should I seal the exposed wood ends of each of the resulting control surfaces? What should I use for sealant that will stand up to fuels and oils?

Answer: Yes you should seal the exposed wood ends so that they are fuel proof. You can use ZAP-CA as a quick sealant. Just apply a small amount at a time and let it wick into the wood. A better solution would be Pacer Finishing Resin which is a thin two part system that you mix together in equal amounts and then brush on.

10.15. VMAR - Fuel Leaks - Fuselage Soaked.- Can it be restored?

Question: I have discovered that fuel has somehow flooded the inside front section of my fuselage. Any ideas as to what caused the leak and how I might go about restoring the fuselage?

Answer: 

1) Fuel in copious amounts will gradually soften and weaken some of the glues used in your model. It takes quite a bit of fuel for a long time of exposure to really attack the adhesives and it is often noticed only when the fixed firewall suddenly pulls loose or the landing gear tears out rather neatly from the bottom of the fuselage after what appears to be pretty good landing. Such separations are usually clean indicating that the fuel has eventually broken down the adhesive and under load the parts have separated. .

2) To sort this out... first of all remove your engine, power module (if so equipped) tank and servo tray. Set everything aside. Get some kitty litter (the type with baking soda in it is best) and apply a good layer of kitty litter over all the oil soaked wood. Let it sit overnight and then discard it. Kitty Litter absorbs oil as well as other stuff! Now try to get some K2R spot remover and apply that to the oil soaked wood as well. This will absorb more oil. Let it dry and brush/vacuum it off.

3) Once you've sucked up all the oil that you can, reglue all the affected glue joints. Use Pacer ZAP-A-GAP (it is amazing on oil soaked wood... no other CA bites through oil like ZAP-A-GAP) on all the joints except those related to the landing gear and the fixed firewall. Use 30 minute (not 5 minute...30 minute) Epoxy and reglue the fixed firewall and landing gear blocks back into place. Let it dry overnight and then brush Pacer Finishing Resin over all the affected surfaces and into as many of the joints as you can reach... even those that you have reglued. You want a nice seal here... over all the wood and all the joints.

4) Once you have restored the wood and joints as best you can, the next step is remove all your external fuel tubing and discard it. Carefully check the metal tubes protruding from the tank for cracks. Use a pressure test (mouth/lung pressure is fine) and see if the tubes or tank is leaking. Check the seam of the tank carefully... a seam can split weeks or months later if the stopper has been overtightened. (many folks do this to try to make sure the stopper is sealed). Overtightening squeezes the stopper longitudinally and expands it laterally. This put tremendous pressure on the tank neck and although it may last forever, after a few weeks or months, the pressure may split the seam quite unexpectedly leading to a flood of raw fuel entering the fuselage. If only the top splits, the leakage will occur when the tank is full but slow down or stop as the fuel is consumed so it may be leaking for quite a while before it is noticed.

5) Once you have the tank and tubing all checked out and repaired/replaced to ensure a pressure tight system, re-install all of your equipment.

6) Do a thorough ground test under full RPM load before flying. Firstly you want to make sure the tank is not still leaking and secondly you want to make sure that your repair job on the wood and joints has the proper strength. Do your first flight well away from people and property and inspect the tank and joints for strutural integrity after each flight. You will have to keep an eye on things for quite a while. The oil can seep out of the wood and affect a joint at a later date... your cleanup should have done a good job of wicking up any oil, but you will need to inspect frequently thereafter. If you have any doubts about the structural integrity of your model, do not fly it.

10.16. VMAR - Fuel Proofing the Fuselage - Is it necessary?

Question: Should I fuel proof my fuselage?

Answer: Well, it depends on if your firewall is removeable.

If your firewall is not removeable, we do not recommend trying to fuel proof the fuel tank compartment. The only way fuel can get into the fuel tank compartment in this type of model is via a leaking tank or leaking tank to firewall gasket. You've generally be better off putting the time into carefully assembling the tank (do not overtighten the stopper cinch bolt) than trying to fuel proof the fuel tank compartment. Sort of a prevent leaks rather than plan for them approach.

If your firewall is removeable then it's a bit more of a six of one, a half dozen of the other type of decision. It's not really necessary but if you've got the time and material it probably won't hurt. Fuel proofing will be adding weight to the model so don't go overboard and really ladel the sealant on.

Here is some information on sealing the removeable power module firewall itself that is worth reviewing vis-a-vis considering a similar approach to fuel proofing the fuel tank compartment.

Firewall - Finished Appearance & Sealing - Tips and Hints

Question: Can I finish my firewall to enhance it's appearance and seal it against oil and fuel?

Answer: Yes.

Better Answer: The firewalls are made from either 6mm plywood or multiple layers of thinner 2-3mm plywood laminated together. They are more than strong enough for any modelling application. They will withstand oil and fuel without further treatment or finishing. If you wish to seal the edges and faces that is also fine. When finishing, we suggest checking the edges for any voids, fill them with CA or Epoxy and then seal the edges and faces with finishing resin or epoxy. Let dry and then install your engine mounts and tank.

Flaps &/or Flaperons - End Sealing After Cutting - Tips and Hints?

Question: My VMAR model came with a long aileron running along almost the entire trailing edge of the wing panel. My model also came equipped with four servo mounting bays and instructions for the optional cutting of each single aileron into a flap and aileron or flap and flaperon. I have cut each single aileron as instructed. Should I seal the exposed wood ends of each of the resulting control surfaces? What should I use for sealant that will stand up to fuels and oils?

Answer: Yes you should seal the exposed wood ends so that they are fuel proof. You can use ZAP-CA as a quick sealant. Just apply a small amount at a time and let it wick into the wood. A better solution would be Pacer Finishing Resin which is a thin two part system that you mix together in equal amounts and then brush on.

10.17. VMAR - Fuel Tanks - General Information
10.17.1. Fuel Tank - How to Measure Capacity?

Question: What is the typical capacity of the fuel tanks supplied with VMAR ARF models?

Answer: Generally 300-350ml (10-12oz)

Better Answer: To be sure you will need to determine exact capacity using a measured amount of clean water. Tanks with a plastic stopper cap, two lines and a notch in the front are approx 300ml (10oz) in capacity. Tanks without a notch in the front range up to 315-350ml (11-12oz). For more information please review the specifications for the particular tank of interest.

There are some exceptions: Control Line and small RC ARF's have a 100ml (3.3oz) tank. Dornier DO27 45 ARF's with the squat short tank have a 250ml (8oz) capacity and larger models like the 10 foot span Dehavilland Beaver have a 750ml (26oz) tank.

10.17.2. Fuel Tank - How to Install into Trainers & other models without Power Modules

Question: Once the fuel tank is assembled how do I install and secure it into my VMAR Trainer?

Answer: After assembly and pressure test, install the tank with the metal tubes protected and facing up. Use sealant to secure the black gasket to the tank and firewall from behind. Seal around neck from front. Support & surround tank with sponge foam.

Better Answer: VMAR Trainers and other non-cowled VMAR models generally do not have a power module. After tank assemly per the instruction book (all tanks assemble in a similar manner) do a pressure test and then protect the metal tubes from contamination by taping up the open ends or running a short length of fuel line between the metal tubes. Now apply sealant to both sides of black donut like rubber gasket and around the neck of the tank. Use Pacer Dap-A-Goo or clear silicone. Install the tank into the fuel tank compartment of the fuselage with the metal tubes facing up. Press the tank and sealant bead firmly against the back of the firewall and secure the tank while the sealant cures. Seal around the neck from the front of the fuselage to prevent fuel seapage into the fuselage. Support and surround the tank in the fuel tank compartment with sponge foam.

Note that in most cases, the receiver batttery pack is to be wrapped in cling film and installed beneath the fuel tank. Consult your radio manual for more information. In this case, the sponge foam should be arranged to support the tank and the battery pack.

10.17.3. Fuel Tank - How to Seal neck where it protrudes through firewall

Question: How do I install my fuel tank and seal the fuel tank neck area where it protrudes through the firewall.

Answer: Plan your fuel tank installation per the instructions in the manual that came with your model. Orient the tank and the metal tubes etc and install the tank clunk, tubing and stopper. See the illlustrations in your manual. Once you have the tank prepared, connect silicone tubing between the metal tubes so that the metal tubes are closed off and no dirt or material can get inside the metal tubing or your tank while you are working on it. Plan the position of your tank in the fuel tank compartment. See your manual. You may need some foam rubber pads or other material to position the tank on models that are not equipped with a power module. If the model has a power module, seal both sides of the forward firewall with epoxy or finishing resin and let it dry. Make sure you can dry fit the tank into place where you want it before proceeding to the next step. See your manual.

Once you have everything prepared you are ready to seal the tank into place. You will need some clear silicone or Pacer Dap-A-Goo sealant. Dap-A-Goo is perfect for this job. It's thick, dries quickly and seals well. On VMAR fuel tanks there is a foam rubber gasket around the neck of the tank. Remove the gasket. Apply a bead of sealant to the forward face of the tank in a circle about 1/4" (6mm) away from the neck. Re-install the foam rubber gasket and press it down onto the sealer. If your model has a power module system, apply a bead of sealant to the top of each dowel protruding from the back of the firewall. Keep moving and apply a second bead of sealant to the exposed face of the foam rubber gasket and press the tank firmly against the back of the firewall (and resting on the dowels if you have a power module system). Hold the tank in place with tape, elastic bands or other retainers and let the sealant dry. Apply additional sealant around the tubes (along the sides of the power module dowels if so equipped) and into the firewall passage hole from the front face of the firewall. Let the sealant dry. Remove any unnecessary retainers if they are no longer needed. Your tank is now installed and sealed into place.

10.17.4. Fuel Tank - Splitting - What causes this?

Question: After I had flown for about 3 weeks or so, my fuel tank split and fuel leaked into the foreward part of the fuselage. Any ideas what caused the tank to split?

Answer: Well you won't like to hear this... we test all our tanks before shipping and you tested it again after you assembled and installed it. So we know it was not leaking when you installed it into the ARF. We have done extensive testing and tanks that split anywhere from1 day or so to 6 months or more after installation do so when the stopper retaining screw has been overtightened. This compresses the stopper longtudinally and expands it laterally which of course is what seals the stopper in place. However, when the stopper screw is overtightened, the lateral expansion of the stopper becomes excessive and the tremendous pressure eventually splits the tank.

So... if you are using our tank or any other brand of tank, if you overtighten the stopper it will eventually split the tank or split the stopper... usually the tank. There are two ways to avoid this problem... go light on the torque... you want a seal yes but there is no need to really reaf on it. Secondly, recognizing that some folks like to use the same tools for a model airplane as a tractor (sorry but it's true), we invented our safety stopper to further reduce the chances that the tank will split.

Here is some information about our safety stopper.

Fuel Tank - What does "Safety Stopper mean?

Question: What does it mean in a VMAR model when I see the term "Safety Stopper"?

Answer: Beginning in mid 2004, the VMAR factory began a gradual change to a new 3 line tank with a metal overcap that aside from the convenience of a 3 line tank, helps prevent tank splitting due to overtightening of the stopper expansion bolt. The metal cap covers the end of the stopper like the older plastic disk units and also extends down and around the neck of the tank to prevent the stopper from being over compressed and splitting the tank. So, we call this new stopper and metal cap system "Safety Stopper" because it helps prevent the tank from splitting.

10.17.5. Fuel Tank - Three (3) Line Safety Stopper

Question: Which models come with fuel tanks equipped with the three line safety stopper?

Answer: The three line safety stopper was introduced into production across the VMAR ARF line in mid 2004.

Modelers who may wish to upgrade to the three line safety stopper can purchase this stopper as part number VMA-TANKCAP3

10.17.6. Fuel Tank - Two (2) Lines or Three (3) ? What's the third fuel line for?

Question: My VMAR ARF model came with a three (3) line fuel tank stopper. What is the third line for?

Answer: The third line is a fuel fill line that allows you to fill the fuel tank without using the line that normally supplies fuel to the carburetor.

More Information: With a two line system, one fuel line supplies fuel from the fuel tank to the carburetor and the other line normally supplies muffler pressure to the fuel tank. When adding fuel to the tank, since there is a clunk on the fuel end of the line running to the carburetor, filling must take place through this fuel supply line which necessitates removing the line from the carburetor fuel nipple. This is a nuisance and can result in a split at the end of line when done many times. Such splits can result in leakage and difficulty in setting a reliable mixture setting.

By adding a third line, the fuel line that supplies fuel to the carburetor can be left in place during fueling. Fuel is added to the fuel tank through the fuel fill line (i.e. the third line).

After fueling close the fuel fill line off with a plug to allow the muffler pressure line to pressurize the fuel tank.

Note: Most engine manufacturers stress the importance of NOT flooding the engine with fuel during the fueling process. If you flood the engine with fuel and then try to turn it over with an electric starter you can severely damage any or all of the following components; piston, wrist pin, connecting rod, crank pin. This will not be covered by warranty and will necessitate a very expensive repair. The best way to avoid this is to ALWAYS do the following:

  • Remove the pressure line from the muffler during fueling
  • Turn the engine over by hand without glow plug or spark plug power. Rotate the engine through a full 360 degrees by hand before using an electric starter. If you cannot rotate the engine by hand, do NOT use an electric starter. Drain excess fuel from the cylinder and try again.

 

 

10.17.7. Fuel Tank - Tubing - Bent or Straight

Question: Which models come with fuel tanks equipped with straight tubes?  

Answer: The three line safety stopper was introduced into production across the VMAR ARF line in mid 2004. The straight tubes were also phased in at that time. The tubes can be bent from straight or left as is depending on the application.

Kits introduced prior to mid 2004 may have Assembly and Operations Manuals showing the older two line tank with no safety stopper and bent tubes. The new tank, safety stopper and straight tubes have superceded the assembly shown.

10.17.8. Fuel Tank - What does "Safety Stopper mean?

Question: What does it mean in a VMAR model when I see the term "Safety Stopper"?

Answer: Beginning in mid 2004, the VMAR factory began a gradual change to a new 3 line tank with a metal overcap that aside from the convenience of a 3 line tank, helps prevent tank splitting due to overtightening of the stopper expansion bolt. The metal cap covers the end of the stopper like the older plastic disk units and also extends down and around the neck of the tank to prevent the stopper from being over compressed and splitting the tank. So, we call this new stopper and metal cap system "Safety Stopper" because it helps prevent the tank from splitting.

10.18. VMAR - Glow Power Conversions & Requirements
10.18.1. What do I need to convert a VMAR Electric model to Glow Power?

Question: What do I need to consider when converting one of the VMAR Electric ARF's to Glow Power?

Answer: VMAR Electric Models have retained the convention of providing a range of glow engine sizes in their name and description. Look on the box, on your invoice or in the operations manual and you will find a recommended engine range for your particular model.

Our Electric models come with a set (usually two) of power module firewalls that are drilled to fit the engine mounting studs. If you have two of these in your parts bag or on the fuselage you will use both of them. Glue them together using 30 minute epoxy so that the mounting stud holes line up. You will need a glow engine mount compatible with your engine. You will also need a small fuel tank such as the VMA-TANK100 (100cc... about 3.3 ounces) and fuel tubing appropriate to your type of fuel.

Mounting the engine is no different than any other model. See the articles included below for some helpful information on thrust lines and engine orientation. .  

Firewall - Thrust Lines - Where are they? Horizontal and Vertical

Question: I am installing my engine. Where are the thrust lines on the firewall?

Answer: The horizontal thrust line normally appears on the forward face of the firewall or you draw the horizontal thrust line on the forward face of the firewall yourself following location instructions contained in the documentation that came with your model.

If there is no horizontal line indicated on the firewall and you are unable to locate the location of the line in the reference material there is an easy way to position the horiztonal thrust line youself. To do this, fit your cowl over the fuselage. Look at the cowl from the left and right sides and adjust the vertical angle of the cowl to align with the fuselage. There should not be any sharp drop or rise in the silhouette profile of the fuselage as you move your eye along the fuselage and over the cowl. Once you have the cowl in place, look through the front hole where the crankshaft is going to protrude. Mark the horizontal thrust line on the firewall so that it is evenly located up and down with respect to the hole in the front of the cowl.

The vertical thrust line lies up and down through the middle of the firewall. If it is not shown, you can simply draw it into place. Make sure it is in the middle.

You may also find this information on our web site. Look for the links to your model, then the link to the detailed information and browse down to the engine section. The position of the horizontal and/or vertical thrust line may be stated there.

Engine Orientation - Upright, Sideways, Inverted - Relation to Position on FIrewall

Question: How do I position my engine on the engine mounts and on the firewall when I intend on installing the engine at an angle or inverted rather than upright?

Short Answer: Regardless of orientation, the center line of the crankshaft must be positioned over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal thrust lines for your particular model. There are a few exceptions as described below.

Better Answer: Some models pretty much force you to install your engine in an upright orientation. Other models, particularly once you move up from basic trainers, offer you a variety of engine orientation options. Rotated 90 degrees is one such choice that often works well with Pitts style mufflers...  inverted (sometimes called 180 degree rotation) is another choice. Generally these non-upright orientations, hide more of the engine and muffler and result in a more realistic scale like appearance to the model.

The choice of what angle to use is pretty much up to you, limited by the physical size of the engine, muffler, cowl etc. Some engines for example can be oriented at 90 or 135 degrees but run into a physical problem at other angles... they hit something, the muffler won't clear the fuselage, the needle valve is at an awkward location etc. When selecting an angle to mount your engine, you have to balance off appearance, convenience, practicality and most of all make sure it can physically fit. Don't forget to test your planned installation angle with the muffler and carb installed. Also check out your engine manual for any specific guidance from the engine manufacturer. Some manufacturers don't recommend an exactly inverted 180 degree installation. We have found this to be good advice in many cases... 180 degree inversions have a tendency to smother the glow plug in oil and residue if run at low RPM for too long.

Once you've decided on the installation orientation that you want, the actual position of the engine on the firewall is no different with a rotated engine than it is with an upright engine. The engine thrust is always centered around the crankshaft and regardless of orientation, the center line of the crankshaft must be positioned over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal thrust lines for your particular model. The vertical thrust line lies up and down through the middle of the firewall. The horizontal thrust line is often drawn on the firewall or is to be draw on the firewall by you after referencing location information in the model instruction manual.  

There are some exceptions but the exceptions are few and far between... if the mounting face of the engine mounting lugs is offset from the center line of the crankshaft you have to adjust accordingly. This is rare, we have not seen this in standard two stroke engines. Engine manufacturers avoid this if at all possible. If you are working with a large gas engine adapted from another industry or a multi piston engine, examine the mounting system carefully and make sure you understand the relation between the engine mounting lugs and the center line of the crankshaft.

 

10.19. VMAR - Hardware & Fittings - General Information
10.19.1. Axles
10.19.1.1. Axles - What type of Axle do you use in VMAR ARF products?

Question: What type of axle do you use in VMAR ARF products?

Answer: We have used two main types of axles.

  • a) An axle that requires a wheel collar outboard of the wheel, and
  • b) An axle that does not require a wheel collar outboard of the wheel.

The latter is currently our standard axle and consists of a hardened machine bolt with a socket head and depending on the configuration, related fastening hardware such as retaining safety nut(s), washer(s) and in many cases one wheel collar. This axle has been found to be extremely strong, easy to install and most importantly, it is extremely resistant to vibration loosening of either the axle or the wheel.

10.19.2. Control Rods
10.19.2.1. Control Rods - Metal Studs - with 2mm threads

Question: What type of metal stud threads into the VMAR CNC metal clevis? Will imperial threaded rod work?

Answer: The VMAR CNC metal clevis is tapped for 2mm threaded studs. We make precision double ended 2mm studs in various lengths that work well with the VMAR CNC clevis and thread securely into VMAR inner plastic control rod. We have also found that our 2mm studs thread well into other brands of inner plastic rod as well, However we have not tested each and every alternative for compatibility with our 2mm threaded studs. Always test thorougly before and after flying... TUG TUG TUG!

 

10.19.2.2. Control Rods - Plastic with Splines

Question: What type of plastic control rods do you use? Are they splined or not?

Answer: We have used a variety of different plastic control rods since inception in 1999. From mid 2004 onwards we standardized on a new inner/outer plastic rod set. The rod set is of our own design. The inner rod is splined, the outer rod is not. The inner rod accepts our 2mm threaded metal studs and most other brand of studs. Always test for a secure joint when using threaded metal studs.

 

10.19.2.3. Control Rod System - Can it be Changed?

Question: I have my own favorite control rod system that I would to install on my VMAR ARF. Can the VMAR factory control rod system be changed?

Answer: Yes

Better Answer: Yes, we use a plastic or metal inner rod sliding in a plastic outer tube. The outer tube will accomodate the inner yellow splined plastic rod from Sullivan. The Sullivan inner rod will in turn accept threaded metal rods or studs which can engage with either plastic or metal clevises. To install your preferred system, simply remove the clevises or EZ connectors from the factory rods and gently pull the factory inner rods out of the fuselage. Then install your preferred system.

10.19.2.4. Control Rods - Wings - Too Short or Too Long

Question: When I install my wing servo for the ailerons and/or flaps and/or flaperons the control rod appears to be either too short or too long to connect with the control horns on the control surface. What should I do?

Answer: Estimate how much too long or too short the control rods appear to be. If it appears that the discrepancy is about 3/4" then you likely have the servos installed in the wing the wrong way around. Rotate the servo 180 degrees and check again. Most servos have the output shaft closer to one end than the other end and by rotating the servo you in effect change the required length of control rod by about 3/4".

10.19.3. Clevises
10.19.3.1. Clevis - Metal (CNC- Pin Diamater - Drill size for Servo Arm

Question: Should I drill out the holes in my servo arms and/control horns when using the new VMAR CNC produced metal clevis with 2mm screw pin?

Answer: VMAR control horns work with the clevis as is. It is not necessary to drill the horns. If you are using a non VMAR horn then we recommend drilling the hole to accomodate a 2mm screw pin. See below.

You will find it easier to insert the screw through the hole in the servo arms if you drill them out to 2mm first. It is possible to self tap your way through them using the screws but we don't recommend it.

For modelers with access to metric drill bits, use a 2mm drill bit. For modelers with access to imperial drill bits use a 5/64 inch drill bit. Keep in mind that 2mm is what you really want to use... 5/64" is a touch smaller than 2mm. For comparison purposes.

  • 2mm is .078740 in. 
  • 5/64" is .078125 in. which is 1.984 mm

If you are stuck and have neither a 2mm drill bit nor a 5/64" drill bit you can probably find a 1/16" drill bit. This is a bit small but will open up some of the very small holes in the arms of sub-micro servos enough so that with careful pressure you can self tap your way through the arm with the clevis screw. This is not ideal but 1/16" is better than trying to work the clevis screw through some of the very small pin holes in some of the servo arms we have seen on sub-micro servos. For comparison purposes here is some information on 1/16" drill bits.

  • 1/16" (4/64") .0625 in. which is 1.5875 mm
10.19.3.2. Clevises - What type is used in VMAR ARF products?

Question: What type of clevis do you use in VMAR ARF products?

Answer: We have used a number of different clevises.

  • a) A third party USA made clevis was used in 2000 and/or 2001
  • b) A plastic clevis with metal pin was used in 2002
  • c) A plastic clevis with screw pin was used in 2003
  • d) A third party metal clevis with metal pin was used in 2004
  • e) Our own CNC produced metal clevis with screw pin was introduced in mid 2004. This high quality solid metal CNC clevis is now standard in all production and used exclusively except for special applications requiring a plastic clevis. The CNC clevis is compatible with our own 2mm threaded studs and other precision 2mm threaded rods. In addition to superceding earlier clevises, the CNC metal clevis is also being used in most applications formerly requiring an EZ connector.
  • f) In early 2005, a new lightweight CNC metal clevis was developed and introduced into production for the L19 Bird Dog and other VMAR electric ARFS.  
10.19.4. Control Horn Assemblies
10.19.4.1. Control Horn Installation - How to

Question: How are VMAR control horns installed? 

Answer: VMAR control horns are unique. They work better and are easier to install. They do not look like most of the control horns you have seen before and you may not recognize them for what they are or you may think they are missing. They are in the control horn parts bag &/or wing parts bag  inside the master bag of hardware and consist of a metal bolt, metal nut, beveled white plastic washer, a white plastic T-nut and the white plastic control horn itself that connects to a clevis or rod.

The iillustration below and to the left shows a control horn set before installation. Note 5 parts make up the set. In Light Duty applications the Metal Nut may not be included and only 4 parts will make up the set. The illustration below and to the right shows a control horn set partially installed. Although illustrations in various manuals show the bevelled washer with the bevel pointing away from the surface we find that we get a cleaner strong installation with the bevel pointing inwards.

We recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP/CA (Pink) into the exposed wood surrounding the hole in the control surface. This helps further strengthen the wood. This is not a requirement but if you are pushing the power limits or planning on extreme aerobatics or speeds, the extra strength could come in handy. Use two applications of thin CA 1 minute apart, BEFORE installing the control horn.

The illustration below shows horn side view of a control horn set fully installed. The illustration to the left is a lighter duty application without the metal nut. The illustration to the right shows a heavier duty application with the metal nut installed. If the metal nuts have been supplied with the horns, we recommend using them.  

10.19.4.2. Control Horn - Bevelled Washer - Orientation

Question: The bevelled washer that is a component of the control horn assembly can be oriented in two ways... either with the flat surface facing towards the bolt head or with the flat surface facing away from the bolt head. Which is correct?

Answer: Well in most cases it really does not matter. The main thing is to keep the bolt and lock washer hand snug so that nothing loosens up.

The assembly and operations manuals generally show the washer with the flat side of the washer towards the control surface and the tapered side of the washer facing towards the bolt head.

We actually prefer doing it the other way around so that the flat side of the washer is facing the towards the bolt head and the tapered side of the washer is facing towards the control surface. This helps self center the washer in the control horn hole thereby aligning the entire control horn at right angles to the control surface. This does NOT work well on smaller models with thin control surfaces. For thin control surfaces always have the flat side of the washer facing the control surface.

10.19.5. EZ Connectors - How to Install.
Question: How are the VMAR EZ Connectors Installed? 

Answer: This is a screw type EZ connector. It works in a similar manner to that of other manufacturers. Remove the set screw (larger) and beneath the set screw there is a small screw that passes like a shaft through the bottom of the EZ connector. Remove the nuts from the external threaded end of the small screw, thread the small screw through the hole in a control horn, steering arm or servo arm and fasten it in place with one or two of the small nuts. Now pass the control rod through the side holes in the EZ connector and lock the rod into place with the set screw. Apply thread locker to retain the set screw and the nut(s).

For pictures, modelers may wish to check their instruction manuals. There is a good collection of instruction manuals located on the support section of our web site. This can be accessed through the support button in our On-Line store or directly at http://www.richmondrc.com/support.htm . Some good pictures can be seen in the manual (PDF file) for the VMA-D260D Dornier DO27 on Page 4 (Figure 5.3) and on Page 5 (Figures 6.2 and 6.3)
10.19.6. Hinges
10.19.6.1. Hinges - Live - Ultratough and Flexible

Question: Do VMAR ARFS use so called one piece "Live" hinges or the two piece hinge with a metal pin holding them together?

Answer: We have used both in the past but since mid 2003 we have used one piece live hinges. We use a proprietary composite hinge material that has a textured surface and is very flexible, extremely strong and bonds well with CA or Epoxy.  Extensive testing and the experience of building 10's of thousands of ARFS using our live hinge material has confirmed that our live hinge allows us to give modelers a nice looking result that is simply the strongest in the industry.

 

10.19.6.2. Hinges - Pinned for Satety

Question: What do you mean by "pinned hinges"?

Answer: When we install the control surfaces using our proprietary composite live hinge material the hinges are glued into place using CA. Then we insert pins through the surfaces and right through both ends of the hinge itself. so that the hinge is trapped into place. The pin is then cut off flush with the surface and pressed further into the substrate. VMAR does this is at least for the hinges are each end of all control surfaces.

Question: What's the big deal? Why bother with this? Why are "pinned hinges" better than "un-pinned hinges"?

Answer: Most ARF manufacturers throw the control surfaces in the box, give you some rough and ready hinges and leave the job of hinging and installing the control surfaces to you. At VMAR we like to put more ARF in all our ARFS so we install your control surfaces at the factory. By using a super strong hinge, gluing it into place and pinning the hinge as well, we are reducing the chance that a control surface will come off in flight. As the builder and flyer of any model, you are responsible for all aspects of flight safety and integrity of the model no matter how much factory work has been done in advance... but we like to help you with this responsibility with a really good hinge, a really good hinge system and pins!

Remember... tug tug tug, test test test before and after each flight. If something is going wrong or loosening up or a sloppy fit is creeping into play, you want to find out on the ground... not in the air!

10.19.6.3. Hinges - Preinstalled Control Surfaces - Alignment & Gap

Question: Do VMAR ARF products come with the control surfaces pre-installed by the factory? Can I expect a clean hinging job and the correct hinge gap?

Answer: Yes Yes and Yes! We put more ARF in our ARFS than anyone in the business so we install the control surfaces for you. This is a real time saver and frankly, most people have trouble getting the control surfaces aligned in all three axis's and a hinge gap that is a gap not a GAP! We have a factory system for doing this and the system turns out a clean installation with consistently good alignment and just the right amount of hinge gap.

10.19.6.4. Hinges - Hinge Line Gap - Can it be reset?

Question: I want to increase the throws of my control surfaces. This requires increasing the hinge line gap. Can I do this?

Answer: Yes you can increase the hinge line gap to allow more movement of the control surfaces but you should NOT exceed the maximum recommended "throws" for your particular model.

Increasing the hinge line gap &/or exceeding the maximum recommended throws can lead to unpredictable results &/or control surface flutter and may result in loss of control and a crash.

If you are sure that you want to do this here is what to do:

  1. Cut the hinges (only the minimum required, don't cut hinges unless necessary) using a sharp #11 blade.
  2. Do not attempt to pull the hinge stubs out, they are glued and possibly pinned as well. Pulling the stubs out will make a heck of a mess. Trim the stubs down flush and leave the rest in place.
  3. Rehinge about 1/2" (12mm) over from the original hinge location.
  4. Use playing cards or other thin shim material to set the hinge gap.
  5. Apply hinge adhesive (Pacer Hinge Glue is recommended) and insert the hinges. Hold the control surface in place using low tack tape.
  6. Let the adhesive dry.
  7. Test the throws. Ensure the surface moves the way you want it to and that it does not exceed the maximum recommended throw.
  8. Pin at least the inboard and outboard hinges to ensure that the control surface cannot come loose even if the hinge glue lets go.
  9. Tug Tug Tug on the control surface. Make sure it is secure.
  10. Do Not Fly until you are sure that the control surface is securely attached and working properly.
10.19.7. Small Square Wood Blocks with Slots. What are they for?

Question: There are some small square wood blocks with slots in one side in my hardware pack. What are they for?

Answer: These are included with some of the VMAR ARF's as an extra item to be used if you wish to guide control rods at the servo end of the rod. They can be stacked or glued individually to the fuselage side with the slot "around" the rod to prevent the rod from flexing. With most installations they are no longer needed but if you find that the control rod flexes up or down you can trap the rod in the guide slots to limit the motion.

10.19.8. Spinners
10.19.8.1. Spinner - Collets - Plastic Rings on a Tree

Question: My VMAR ARF model came with a very complete set of Hardware & Accessories. I have one item that I am not sure about. Its a plastic "tree" with 8 rings on it. They look like they are intended to be a spacer or collet. What are they for?

Answer: These are collets for adapting VMAR spinners to various crankshaft diameters. Most VMAR ARF's now come with metal spinners that have a brass collett and generally do not require the plastic collets. But there may be some modelers who need to adapt a spinner to their crankshaft so we have included the 8 plastic rings (collets) with some models. In most cases they will not be required.

10.19.8.2. Spinners - Metal - Used on Most VMAR ARFS

Question: Does a spinner come with a VMAR ARF? Is the spinner plastic or metal?

Answer: With few exceptions (such as small electric and small glow engine ARF's) VMAR ARF's come with a spinner. Most of the lower price point products such as Trainers come with a good quality plastic spinner. Mid and higher end products and even some of the lower priced sport and fun fly products come with a VMAR metal spinner. Yes this is entirely metal. The back plate is either steel or aluminum and the cone is aluminum as is the mounting hardware with the exception of the steel center screw.

In the case of several of our Jets (prop), the metal spinner is sized and shaped for a scale look, for example the Mig21 has a pointed narrow spinner and the F4U Phantom has an elongated bullet like spinner.

 

10.19.8.3. Spinners - Plastic - Better Fit & Use of Socket Head Screws

Question: Has the VMAR plastic spinner been improved since it was first introduced in 1998?

Answer: Yes. In 1998-2000 the spinner did not have a good finsh and used Phillips head screws to retain the cone. In about 2000 (depending on size and color), we introduced hex head machine screws and redid all of the spinner molds to ensure a better fit and a cleaner finish.

As of 2005, these plastic spinners remain in use in our lower price point products including most VMAR Trainers.

10.19.9. Tail Wheel Assemblies
10.19.9.1. Tail Wheel Flange in Rudder - Hole Not Big Enough

Many of the VMAR Tail Dragger Models use a flange inserted into the bottom of the Rudder. This flange has a pipe like tube on one end. The tube has a plastic liner with a hole through it like a piece of air line tubing.

The Tail wheel assembly has a metal rod protruding from it. This rod is to go through the plastic liner of the Rudder Flange. In some cases either the rod is a bit too big in diameter or the hole in the plastic liner is a bit too small making it difficult to insert the metal rod into the plastic liner. Without inserting the rod into the plastic liner in the flange, the tail wheel will not steer when the rudder is turned.

Resolution:

Use a small drill bit and an electric drill to drill a larger hole through the
plastic liner. Or remove the plastic liner and install 1-2 layers of thin heat shrink tubing over the metal rod and then insert the shrink covered rod into the flange. It is important to maintain some form of plastic or insulating later between the metal rod and the metal flange to avoid radio noise caused by metal pieces vibrating against each other.

10.19.10. Wheels
10.19.10.1. Wheels - Metal Hub - Work Better, Look Better

Question: I have heard that VMAR has a new main and nose wheel with a metal hub. Do you mean looks like metal or for real metal? Just how many different styles of wheels have been used in VMAR ARF products?

Answer: Well, first of all, YES we have a new main and nose wheel with a metal  hub and YES it's real metal, not plastic painted to look like metal. More about the metal hub wheel shortly.

As to the different styles of wheel that we have had over the years: Beginning in about 96 or 97 we had a wheel that had a plastic hub and a square shouldered tire. We hated it... it was rather ugly, it was round in a sense, had too much run out in all axis, it worked OK on grass fields but was poor on pavement. At the time, the technology available to us was limited and this wheel was about the best that could be produced at our factory without huge increases in cost. Most modelers trashed these wheels and the wheels that came with most brands of ARFS at that time and installed their own favorite wheel.

In 2000 we introduced a new wheel with a better plastic hub and better rounded shoulder tires. It looked way way better, was more true to the concept that wheels should be round, had less run out and worked just fine on grass. Pavement was somewhat problematic if the wheel had any run out. Manufacturing cost was higher but manageable without a price increase to the end user. Anecdotal surveys of field use indicated that 80-90% of modelers with our trainers were using these wheels as is. Usage factors were lower in the intermediate, sport and scale categories.

In 2003 we began internal development of a new wheel that would have a better truer hub and help to reduce run out even more and work with round shouldered tires. A large number of sample sets were built and tested. In mid 2004 this wheel entered production and is the metal hub wheel that people are asking about. This wheel is significantly better than anything we had in the past, it works well on grass or pavement, is more consistent in production, looks good and lasts pretty much indefinitely. Prices to consumers purchasing VMAR ARF models did not increase with the introduction of the metal hub wheel. As of mid 2005, the metal hub main and nose wheel has been in production about a year. It is used on almost all models (some of the lower price point products were transitioned over last) and the supply chain is now generally flowing these new wheels into the market. Feedback to date indicates that this wheel is seldom discarded by the modeler. We expect and accept that scale modelers will continue to utilize high end after market replacements for stock wheels.

 

10.19.11. Why we use VMAR brand hardware in our ARF products.

Question: Why do you use VMAR brand hardware in VMAR ARF products?

Answer: Well, there a bunch of reasons. We are pretty flexible and have used alternatives with mixed results. Around 2000 we used an American source for plastic clevises. The quality was acceptable but we found that the metric sizing was not quite what we expected in the way of a match to our metric sized rods. Secondly we took a lot of flak from people who wanted a metal clevis and from everywhere outside the Americas market that wanted European or Japanese hardware. Lastly, there was confusion on the part of buyers who thought all of the hardware came from one Brand Name supplier when in fact it did not. We clearly stated this in our ads and on the box art but unfortunately some folks were confused anyway and complained loudly when they did not get the hardware that they thought they would be getting.

So... we made a decision to make our own hardware, all of it! This did the following for us:

  • Allowed us to design hardware that worked well for VMAR models. Our control horn is a good example. Our horn design was simple, easy to install, nearly fool proof and extremely reliable. We are still using it today and are flattered that other manufacturers are now making horns with a similar design.
  • Allowed us to control the metric to metric fit that we needed between our metal clevises, threaded studs and plastic inner (long) rods.
  • Ensured a steady reliable supply. There is nothing worse than having a thousand ARFS ready to ship except for some small piece of hardware coming from overseas.
  • Allowed us to avoid battles between us and modelers with rather strong opinions about the design and quality of various European, USA or Japanese hardware components.
  • Allowed us to control and steadily improve on the quality and change designs more readily. When you have access to CNC, presses and casting equipment you can pretty much make whatever you need whenever you need it. Our new three line safety stopper for our fuel tanks is a good example. With the metal overcap that wraps down the side of the tank neck, our safety stopper has greatly reduced the chances of modelers overtightening the cinch screw and expanding the stopper to the point that it splits the tank allowing fuel to leak everywhere. .
  • Allowed us to control costs and keep our ARF's priced right for todays market. Our universal servo tray is a good example, this tray is very compatible with all popular standard sized servos. Nobody else could supply us with a tray that worked well for Airtronics, Sanwa, Futaba, JR and HiTech. Each source had their own tray, some worked with other brands of servos, some did not... with our own tray we are good to go with pretty much any servo a modeler might have without having to raise the price of our product.
10.20. VMAR - Jet (Turbine) Power Conversions & Requirements

Question: I have a VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF model that runs great with a 2-stroke engine turning a prop in the nose but I would like to know if I could convert my VMAR model to use one of the Jet Turbines that are on the market?

Answer: In theory a very skilled modeller could possibly adapt a VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF to use a Jet Turbine for power. We do not recommend this as a viable conversion. This would be a great deal of work and likely would not lead to a workable solution and could result in a fire hazard or structural failure of the model or related components.

For those who are particularly determined to proceed along these lines in spite of all odds and in the face of our recommendation against such, given the all wood construction of VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF models, it may make more sense to use the VMAR fuselage as a male plug in order to make a mold for a new fibreglass fuselage with the same shape as the VMAR original fuselage. Then  it may be possible, with a great deal of effort, to safely incorporate the Jet Turbine into the new Fibreglass fuselage and adapt the remaining original VMAR components to mate with the new fibreglass fuselage.

Extensive testing will be required in order to validate the safety and integrity of any of the original VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF components for use in a model utilizing Jet Turbine power. No such testing has been done by VMAR or Richmond RC Supply Ltd. and we specifically again advise against such a conversion.

 

10.21. VMAR - Landing Gear - General Information
10.21.1. Landing Gear - Adjusting Height and/or Nose Up/Down Angle

Question: How do I adjust the nose up/down angle on my trike gear model?

Answer: Generally the nose gear can be adjusted slightly up and down so that the wing is near zero incidence (level) when the model is on the ground. If the nose is pointing up, the wing will be flying when the model is on the ground and you will tend to porpoise up and down when landing. If the nose is pointing down a high ground speed and excessive up elevator is often necessary to get the model to lift off.  

To adjust the nose up/down angle of the model when it is on the ground, you can do several different things or combine these things to get the desired result.

Lengthen the gear leg by loosening the set screw in the steering arm and pulling the gear downward or shorten the nose gear by pushing it upward slightly and then reseating the set screw.

AND/OR

A different nose wheel can be installed. Increasing the nose gear diameter by 1/2" will lift the nose approximately 1/4" higher with respect to the ground. So instead of a 2.5" wheel for example, try a 3" nose wheel. Do the reverse if you want to drop the nose lower towards the ground.

AND/OR

A different set of main gear wheels can be installed. Decreasing the main gear diameter by 1/2" will lower the center of model by approximately 1/4" with respect to the ground and at the same time reduce the degree of nose down attitude. So instead of a 3 " main wheels for example, try 2.5" main wheels. Do the reverse if you want to drop the nose lower towards the ground.

Note that by combining changes to both the nose wheel and the main wheels, a great deal of adjustment can be done to the nose up or down angle of the model when on the ground.

10.21.2. Landing Gear - Main - Wire Tight Fit into pre-drilled Holes

Question: I am about to install the main landing gear which is made from plated wire. Each gear "leg" is to be inserted into a pre-drilled hole in the bottom of the wing or fuselage and then aligned with a slot and clamped down with retaining straps. I find that it is difficult to insert the wire into the pre-drilled hole... either the wire is a touch too wide in diameter or the pre-drilled hole is a bit too narrow. Should I tap the gear legs into place with a small hammer or what?

Answer: If you can tap lightly and rotate the wire slightly to and fro a few times that will often work. If you find that it is a really tight fit and light tapping is not sufficient it would be best to take a few minutes and drill the hole out or grind the end of the wire.

Better Answer: Have a look at the wire first. Is there a burr or slight flairing at the end of the wire where it has been cut? If so, file the end to a slight taper. If the wire has no burrs or flairing at the end, the problem is likely that the wire is slightly oversized due to the plating and/or the pre-drilled hole has narrowed just a bit as the wood has dried after production. Either way, drill the hole out one size bigger. Here is how to do that... select a drill bit that is just large enough in diameter to barely fit into the hole without having to actually drill. Insert the drill into the hole and note how deep the hole is. Now select a drill bit that is 1/64" to 1/32" bigger in diameter. Apply masking tape to this drill bit to mark the depth of the hole. You don't want to overdrill the depth or you run the risk of drilling through a wing or other surface on the opposite side. Now use this larger drill bit to drill out one landing gear hole. Remember the idea is to increase the diameter of the hole slightly... not to drill deeper. Test fit the gear again. Then drill the second hole. Clamp the gear down with the retaining straps and screws.

If you ever end up with a hole that is too large and the gear has a loose or sloppy fit, turn the wing or fuselage so that the wheels are pointing up. Align the gear carefully so it is straight. Slide 1 or more narrow tooth picks into any slack space between the gear leg and the side of the hole. Flow CA+ such as ZAP-A-GAP CA+ from PACER down into the hole and around the tooth pick. Let the CA+ cure or accelerate with a light mist of ZIP KICKER. The gear should be nice and tight when you are finished.

10.21.3. Landing Gear - Main - Modification For Strength

Question: My landing gear appears to be made from aluminum or fiberglass. Is it possible to make it even stronger?

Answer: Yes. Please see the attached guidance for after market modification.   

10.21.4. Landing Gear - Nose - Alignment
Question: The nose gear on my VMAR model is steerable. I am having trouble aligning it so that it is centered (straight ahead) and so that I have some movement to both the left and right. What should I do?
 
Answer: Most VMAR models use a steering arm attached to a control rod and a servo. The steering arm is then slid over the nose gear wire or cylinder and locked into place with a set screw which engages with a flat spot that has been pre-positioned on the nose gear.
  
To resolve alignment problems:
 
1) Turn on your radio and center the servo that will move the nose gear.
 
2) Slide the steering arm into place on the nose gear, rotate the gear so that it points straight ahead. Cinch down the set screw. Check left and right movement. If you have more or less all the movement in just one direction, remove the wire gear and grind a new flat spot onto the wire at a location to allow the steering arm to engage with the wire and still rotate equally to both the left and right.
 
3) Remember that the amount of deflection to the left and right does not have to be large to enable nose steering. Slight left and right movement is all that is necessary.
 
4) In some cases, it may help to remove the steering arm and flip it over so that the distance between the firewall and the arm portion of the steering arm assembly is maximized. This stands the steering arm off from the firewall and enables the servo to "pull" more and hence turn the nose gear more before the arm contacts the firewall.
 
 
 
 
10.21.5. Landing Gear - Nose - Number of Wheel Collars

Question: My assembly manual has a picture showing one wheel collar holding the nose wheel in place and this matches the one collar found in the parts bag. However the manual mentions the use of two collars. What's the story here?

Answer: Depending on the model and the parts packing, there is always at least one wheel collar provided for retaining the nose wheel and only one wheel collar is required.

In some cases, we have also included an extra wheel collar in the parts bag in case of loss. Modelers can retain this extra collar in case they need it OR may wish to install the wheel collar on the nose gear axle inboard of the wheel itself.

10.21.6. Landing Gear - Oleo Struts
10.21.6.1. Simulated Plastic Oleos - Can I buy them separately?

Question: Many VMAR semi-scale models come with pre-installed landing gear struts. Can they be purchased separately?

Answer:  Yes they are available separately as an after market item. Best to call our order desk at 604-940-1066 or order on line. There are two sizes... roughly for 45 size and 90 size models. There are white or grey colored versions of both sizes. They are searchable on our web site as part numbers that begin with VMA-STR or search for "strut". They are sold as single sets for one gear leg at a time. Please have this information at hand if you are calling our order desk.

Please note that the plastic clamshell like struts are decorative only. The two halves wrap around the internal wire gear. They are not functional and do not bear weight.

10.21.6.2. Simulated Plastic Oleos - Appear to Be Cracked or Split

Question: My model came with simulated plastic oleo struts on some of the gear legs. They appear to be cracked or split. What should I do?

Answer: The simulated plastic oleo struts are a no-charge bonus item included with many of the scale and semi scale models. Even some of our high end trainers use these on the nose gear. Each simulated strut consists of two clamshell like plastic halves that "wrap around" the wire gear leg and are retained in place usually by a couple of small screws and a plastic ring and/or adhesive.

These struts are not functional, they are decorative only. Under load and/or during shipping the seams between the clamshell halves and/or the retaining ring can open up and expose a small gap along the seam. We suggest carefully tightening the screws again and regluing the clamshell halves and retaining ring back into place. Plasti-ZAP or ZAP-A-GAP from Pacer work well on this plastic.  

These simulated oleo struts are also available for purchase as a part. Please see the Replacement Parts section of our web store and search for "strut".

10.21.6.3. Simulated Plastic Oleo Struts - Can they be relocated to Retracts on Retract Ready Models?

Question: I have a VMAR model that comes with fixed landing gear and is considered retract ready so that I can install my own retracts at a later date. The fixed landing gear has simulated struts surrounding the wire gear legs. Can these simulated struts be moved to my retractable landing gear?

Answer: Quite likely yes but they may require some modification. There are large number of different retract systems and the only way to really be sure is to remove the simulated struts from the landing gear legs on your fixed gear and to trial fit them to the gear legs on your retracts. If they fit, then carefully confirm that the retract can operate freely with the simulated struts in place.

10.21.7. Landing Gear - Retracts - How to Install - Instructions.

Question: I have a VMAR ARF that is Retract Ready. Where do I get installation instructions for retracts?

Answer: The installation instructions for retracts are provided by the retract manufacturer. The procedure can be quite different from retract to retract depending on the brand and type. Please consult with the retract manufacturer for installation instructions.

10.21.8. Landing Gear - Retracts - In VMAR ARF's - Which Type?

Question: I have a VMAR ARF that is Retract Ready. What retracts do you recommend?

Answer: We actually don't recommend a particular brand of retracts. Modelers have their own preferences which vary dramatically from region to region. Some prefer a particular brand while others prefer mechanical or pnuematic (air). There is no "right" recommendation.
 
When we are designing mounting rail size and placement and bolt patterns etc we use Robart Pnuematic #ROB-605HD Main Gear, #ROB-607 Nose Gear and #ROB-188 Air Control Kit. (Please contact Robart to confirm suitability, size, bolt spacing, weight range, pricing and availability in your market area)
10.21.9. Landing Gear - Trike vs Tail Dragger - Whats what? What works Best?

Question: What is the difference between Trike and Tail Dragger landing gear?

Short Answer: Trike models have a nose wheel and two main wheels. Tail dragger models have two main wheels and a tail wheel or tail skid.

Better Answer: Trike is slang for TRI-cycle... TRIke gear uses 3 wheels and looks much like the front and two main wheels of a kids tricycle... hence the name Trike Gear. Think of a kids tricycle and you know what it looks like. The front wheel does the steering.

Tail Dragger is a slang term for aircraft that do not have a nose wheel. Tail draggers have main landing gear and a tail skid or tail wheel. Generally we think of Tail Draggers having only the two main wheels but in fact they may have a small tail wheel as well. On some models the small tail wheel is coupled to the rudder so that the airplane can be steered left and right more easily when it is taxiing on the ground.

In general, and there are lots of exceptions... trainers have a high wing and trike gear. Most beginners who are learning with a trainer and many other RC flyers find trike models easier to steer on the ground provided the runway is smooth and the grass is not long. For rough fields or runways with coarse gravel or longer grass, trike gear can be a problem and tail draggers work better. Some trainers and lots of sport and scale airplanes are tail draggers. Some trainers give you a choice... trike or tail dragger... the VMAR Apache for example offers both configurations with all the parts in the box for either set up.

10.21.10. Landing Gear - Wheels - Diameter - Is it OK to change from stock?

Question: Is it OK to change to smaller or larger diameter wheels? Any tips on this?

Answer: Depending on the model, the stock wheel diameter has been chosen to work well on asphalt, packed sand/dirt /&or close cropped grass. Yes it is OK to change the diameter of the wheels provided that you maintain the same angle of incidence when sitting on the ground... i.e. if you change the diameter of the mains you must change the diameter of the nose or tail wheel by the same amount and vice versa.

Here are some tips:

  1. The angle of incidence on the ground should be the same as that provided by the stock wheels to ensure that the model has the correct angle of attack when making its take off run and when landing. i.e. if you change the mains by X inches in diameter, make sure you change the diameter of the nose or tail wheel by the same amount and vice versa.
  2. If you are always flying from smooth asphalt, concrete, clay or other very hard surface, you can reduce the wheel size slightly provided that you retain sufficient prop tip clearance from the ground. You may have to opt for a smaller diameter prop with a larger pitch or more blades to sustain sufficient ground clearance for the prop.
  3. If you are flying from packed dirt, fine gravel, sand, sandy soil or closely cropped grass, the stock wheel size is probably best unless you have some particular need to change the wheels.
  4. If you are flying from a grass field where the grass is quite long and/or the turf is soft or spongy or variable in "hardness" you may need to go to larger diameter wheels to get consistent ground handling and stability. If your model appears to be bogging down on take off, failing to run out smoothly upon landing or is hard to taxi in a straight line try increasing the diameter of the wheels in .25" increments. Use lightweight wheels and test as you increase the diameter in .25" steps. Generally trike gear will require larger diameter wheels in these conditions than tail draggers due to drag on the nose gear wire/axle.

 

10.21.11. Landing Gear - Wire vs Fibreglass vs Aluminum - Whats what? What works best?

Question: What is the difference between landing gear made of wire vs that made of fibreglass or aluminum?

Short Answer: Wire gear is OK for just about any model particularly low wing models with short landing gear legs. When the landing gear legs are longer such as on a high wing trainer or sport tail dragger, fibreglass or aluminum is best. We are now using 7075 T6 aluminum on many models because it is as strong or stronger than fibreglass gear and much lighter.  

Better Answer: When wire gear is used it tends to bend easily if long and on an angle. This can actually be a help when training because the bending sucks up some of energy associated with a hard landing. Re-bending wire back into shape quickly becomes tedious in spite of it's low cost and energy tolerant attributes. So for example on our Discovery, Challenger and Hornet trainers where entry price is critical we use wire gear and offer stronger gear as an aftermarket upgrade. On the slightly higher priced Apache we include heavier duty gear made from either fibreglass or 7075 T6 aluminum. Both are exceptionally strong but aluminum is now favoured due to a lighter weight. Softer grade T6 or non-T6 aluminum does not stand up well in service. Beginning in the second half of 2003 we began changing most of our sport and semi-scale models that had fibreglass main gear over to 7075 T6 Aluminum. We continue to use Fibreglass when the leg length is very long such as the 120 Size Beaver.

 

 

10.21.12. Landing Gear - Wire Coil Direction - Which is Right?

Question: My model has landing gear made of wire. The wire has a shock coil just below the fuselage. There are two ways to install this gear. Which is correct?

Answer: The landing gear should be installed so that the coil winds up (tightens) when the landing gear contacts the ground. There are a few exceptions for reasons of scale appearance and/or softening the shock of landing but these are rare.

10.21.13. Landing Gear - Wire Coil or Not? Which is right?

Question: If the picture in my instruction book shows a wire coil and my landing gear does not have a wire coil or vice versa... if the instruction book shows no wire coil and my landing gear has a wire coil... do I have the correct landing gear wire set for my model?

Answer: Most of the time yes. If the landing gear fits into the slots and accomodates the wheels and results in the correct ground height for your model you are going to be OK to use the landing gear provided with or without a coil in the gear.

Better Answer: The instruction books are laid up early in the production cycle of a model. At times we change the gear to add or remove a coil depending on what we learn from users. Ideally we would have it right from the get go but if we find that a landing gear is too "springy" in operational use, we take the coil out in the next run. Conversely if we find that the gear is too stiff in operational use, we add a coil in the next run. Either way, the main thing is that the gear fit correctly into the mounting slots and provide the correct ground height for your model when using the wheels provided.

10.22. VMAR - Information related to Packaging
10.22.1. VMAR - Packaged to Survive - What we do.

Question: How does VMAR package ARF's so that they have the best possible chance of arriving in one piece after weathering the hazards of todays shipping systems?

Answer: Good question. No matter what we do, there is a chance that someone will drop a V8 Engine or a box of 400 bricks on a shipment and crush or damage something. We don't run UPS, FedEX, DHL or any other shipping outfit but we work closely with them when designing our packaging and shipping boxes.

In summary:

  • Each component is individully bagged to keep it clean and reduce scuffing
  • Each bag is then secured between dividers and/or taped down inside the display box.
  • Double decker display boxes have internal bulkheads and single layer display boxes have multi-ply dividers
  • The entire display box is then closed off with a lid and inserted into a plastic bag to protect the label against scuffing and to protect against water damage in transit
  • The bagged display box is then inserted into an outer shipping box.(may not apply in markets outside the Americas)
  • 2mm plywood shields are then inserted on both wide sides between the bagged display box and the outer shipping box to add even more resistance to crushing. (Americas market only)
  • All in all, nobody in the ARF industry makes the kind of effort we do to ensure that a VMAR ARF arrives in the hands of the end user in perfect condition.
10.22.2. VMAR - Wood Spacer in the Slot for the Horizontal Stabilizer.

Question: My VMAR ARF model has a small wooden block near the aft end of the slot for the horizontal stabilizer. What is this for?

Answer: This is a spacer and retainer that has been tack glued into place to provide extra strength during shipment of the model. The wood spacer/retainer should be removed with a sharp hobby knife just prior to the trial fitting of the horizontal stabilizer.

10.23. VMAR - Parts Information
10.23.1. VMAR - Parts - Availability - Where can I get?

Question: How can I get parts for my VMAR ARF?

Answer: Parts are available through your Hobby Retailer or direct from Richmond RC.

In either case, in order to get what you need, you should know:

  • What model you have and what it's color is.
  • The part number of the item you are looking for.

To locate a parts list complete with descriptions, part numbers and typical retail prices please do this:

This site also allows you to order the parts you need directly on line.

10.23.2. VMAR - Wings, Stabilizers, Fuselages etc... are they Covered or not?

Question: I need a wing for my VMAR ARF? Does it come covered?

Answer: Yes. When you purchase a VMAR factory part such as a fuselage, wing or stabilizer it comes with the factory covering already applied.

10.24. VMAR - Servo Trays - General Information
10.25. VMAR - Specifications of Models - Where can I find them?

Question: Where are the specifications for the various VMAR ARF products?

Answer: Please visit www.richmondrc.com

10.26. VMAR - Wings - General Information

 

10.26.1. Wing - Ailerons Loose on Torque Rods - How to Tighten

Question: The ailerons on my VMAR ARF are activated by torque rods running from the center of the wing. The torque rods are a bit sloppy where they enter the aileron. I am not sure if they were like this from the get go or if this arose after flying for a while. How can I fix this?

Answer: Fill the slack space around the torque rods where they enter the ailerons using Medium or Thick CA.

Better Answer: Hold the wing so that the ailerons are pointing with their leading edge facing upwards and deflect the ailerons one at a time so that the hinge line is clearly visible. Apply ZAP-A-GAP Medium CA or SLO-ZAP thick CA down into the torque rod holes in the aileron leading edge. Apply a small amount of ZIP KICKER accelerator and then more CA until the hole is solidly filled with CA. Let cure thoroughly. Test to ensure there is no remaining slop before flying.

10.26.2. Wing - Aileron Torque Rod angle different between wing halves - How do I fix?

Question: I have noticed that the aileron torque rods to which the control horns are attached protrude from the left and right wings at different angles when the ailerons are neutral. Is this a problem? If so, how do I fix it?

Answer: Ideally the aileron torque rods should be in-sync angle wise when the ailerons are at a neutral position. In practise they may be at slightly different angles and in all but the most exacting requirements (FAI pattern flying for example), a slight variation in angle will not have any noticeable effect.

If however, the angle of the aileron torque rod does not allow for full deflection of the aileron both up and down as per the maximum allowable deflection stated in the operations manual for your model then this should be fixed before flying.

How does this happen? The aileron torque rods are bent and installed at the factory and they have the same angle at that point. The most common cause is compression and bending during shipping. The aileron torque rods are shipped with covers holding the ailerons and aileron torque rods in place but if a large heavy object is placed on the box so that it compresses the wing, the aileron torque rod maybend with no other damage to the wing or the rod will not bend but will compress the wood surrounding the rod in the aileron resulting in a sloppy and off-angle fit. The rods are also subject to bending or otherwise acquiring unequal angles when in a crash or if they are impacted or snagged during transport of the wing.

How do I fix it? There are a number of ways to resolve this... none of them are difficult... if you don't feel comfortable on your own, talk to an experienced modeler and ask them to give you a hand. An experienced modeler will be able to resolve this in minutes. Here are two recommended approaches.

Do either a) or b) and then c) or do a) and b) and then c). In all cases do a) and c). In extreme cases do b).

a) Bend the aileron torque rod without removing the aileron: This should be tried first and will work most of the time. Take two wooden rulers or paint stir sticks and clamp the aileron in its neutral position. Place one ruler on each side of the aileron (above and below) with about three inches (75mm) overlapping the center section of the wing in the wing saddle area. Clamp these retainers in place with a couple of C clamps or other suitable clamping device. Apply one C clamp directly over the location where the torque rod enters the aileron. The main thing is that the aileron be at it's neutral position. Now bend the aileron torque rod that protrudes from the wing so that the angle of the aileron torque rod is similar to the aileron torque rod in the other wing presuming that the other wing is a good reference. If both wings require work, then bend the aileron torque rods in both wings until they are approximately perpendicular (90 degrees) with respect to their respective wing surface. Don't sweat it if the angle is not 90 degrees...  focus on getting the angles similar for both wings and ensuring that the ailerons can be moved fully to their maximum recommended deflection. 

OR

b) Bend the aileron torque rod after removing the aileron. Removing an aileron is not a big deal but why bother if you can fix the problem using method a) outlined above. However, assuming that you have tried method a) and it did not work for you, then here is the ultimate solution. Use a sharp #11 blade and cut the hinges holding the aileron in place. Cut the hinges... do not remove them! Now wiggle the aileron up and down at the wing tip end while gently pulling it back and away from the wing trailing edge. When the aileron has been removed you will have both ends of the aileron torque rod exposed. Bend the rod to align properly with the other wing or so that the aileron will at neutral when the other end of the rod is approximatley perpendicular (90 degrees) with respect to the wing surface. Use the #11 blade to trim the old hinge stubs down flush. Do NOT pull the old hinges out. Re-hinge the aileron by placing new hinges beside the old hinges and re-install the aileron.

AND THEN

c) Toughen up the wood in the aileron around the aileron torque rod and fill in any voids. Now that the aileron torque rod(s) has been bent to the correct angle and the ailerons can be moved to their maximum recommended deflection, it is time to wick some thin CA such as ZAP/CA and then some medium CA+ such as ZAP-A-GAP down into the hole in the aileron that surrounds the aileron torque rod. Hold the aileron so that the hinge line is above the aileron. Deflect the wing about 20-30 degrees so that the aileron remains upright with the hinge line up and you can see the aileron torque rod entering the aileron. Wick thin CA into the hole in the aileron that surrounds the aileron torque rod. Do this several times. The thin CA will wick into the soft wood around the rod and make the wood much harder and durable. After the thin CA has cured, apply medium CA+ into the hole in the aileron. Whereas the thin CA was intended to toughen up the surrounding wood, the medium CA+ is intended to fill any voids left over in the hole between the aileron torque rod and the aileron itself. Let the CA+ cure or accelerate with ZIP KICKER. When dry, try flexing the aileron via the control rod. There should be no slop in the movement.

That's it! A bit difficult to describe but easy to do!

 

 

 

10.26.3. Wing Alignment Dowels - Tight Fit - Can I Adjust the Fit?

Question: Can I adjust the position of the alignment dowel holes in the wing roots? I find that the dowels are a bit tight or out of position when trying to join the wing halves together.

Answer: Yes.

Better Answer: Yes. Here is some information and a procedure that you may find helpful to review first.

The alignment dowels are the short (approx 1/4 x 1 inch) wooden dowels used with the wing spar joiner when joining the wing halves.

Taper the alignment dowel ends with a knife or sandpaper. Do NOT modify the dowel center section, just taper the ends. Insert the wing spar joiner. Now try fitting the wing together again. If the wings now fit together well then separate the wings and spar joiner and continue with the wing joining procedure outlined in your instruction book using plenty of 30 Minute Epoxy on all of the components.  

If you find that the fit is still tight then try the following: Separate the wing halves. Remove the alignment dowels. Insert the spar joiner and join the wing halves. If the joiner fits and the wings line up well, then you can adjust the location or size or shape of the alignment dowel holes slightly. Separate the wings again. Remove the dowels and taper the ends but not the main center section of each dowel. Insert one alignment dowel in the forward hole of the left wing. Glue the dowel into the forward hole of the left wing with CA glue. Join the wings and check where the dowel contacts the opposite right wing root. Separate the wings, elongate the forward hole in the right wing root to better line up with the dowel. Work in small steps. Elongate the hole slightly and then check again. Repeat this process in small steps. At some point the hole will accomodate the dowel. Make sure the wing roots can now be joined.

Separate the wing halves again. Insert the second dowel in the aft hole of the right wing. Glue the dowel into the aft hole of the right wing with CA glue. Join the wings and check where the dowel contacts the opposite left wing root. Separate the wings, elongate the aft hole in the left wing root to better line up with the dowel. Work in small steps. Elongate the hole slightly and then check again. Repeat this process in small steps. At some point the hole will accomodate the dowel. Make sure the wing roots can now be joined.

Separate the wing halves and spar joiner and then follow the wing joining procedure outlined in your instruction book using plenty of 30 Minute Epoxy on all of the components.

10.26.4. Wing Bolts Broken - Background and Tips to Avoid

We have had several questions about wing bolts, do they break, what happens if they break etc.

The wing bolts are extremely strong. Longitudinal load such as that induced by a wing in flight (lift or descent) will not break the wing bolts. Only shear either horizontally (crash damage) or by twisting the bolts under high load will break or weaken the bolts. In order to break the bolts they must be excessively overtightend using either a nut driver, electric drill with socket or a battery operated electric screw driver. Cross threading the bolts into the wing bolt block inserts will strip the bolts and or the wing bolt block inserts.

Our strong recommendation is to tighten snugly only using hand tools. Do not overtighten. Do not use a power tool of any sort. When using a hand tool, tighten until the wing is seated in the wing saddle of the fuselage and then snug down about 1/8 turn more. That is all that is required. If you hold the fuselage in your hand near where the bolts engage the wing bolt blocks in the fuselage you will feel the fuselage sides between to warp inwards just inboard from the wing bolt blocks if you overtighten the bolts. If you feel the fuselage sides begin to warp or see the wing bolt heads beginning to sink into the bottom of the recesses in the wing, you are too tight. Back off on the tension on the bolts. If you persist in overtightening the bolts, you will strip or shear them off or pull out the mounting blocks or in some cases pull the head of the bolt right through the wing! All of these situations can lead to wing damage, fuselage damage and/or wing separation from the fuselage in flight.

Cross threading the bolts into the wing bolt block inserts will damage both the bolts and the inserts. If you persist in forcing the wing bolt in spite of the cross threading, you can damage the threads beyond repair and/or over stress the wing bolt.

Check the bolts before and after each time you install the wing. If the bolts look stripped, replace them. If the bolts appear to bind or require a great deal of torque to tighten them, lubricate the bolts with light oil and make sure they are not cross threaded. If you have any concerns that the bolts may have been damaged due to overtightening, cross threading or crash damage, change the bolts and check the wing bolt mounting blocks and inserts in the fuselage to make sure the blocks are secure and the inserts have a good thread. Do NOT fly without checking the wing bolts, handtightening them and making sure the wing is secure. Mounting blocks and bolts can be damaged by overtightening or crashes and may not be obviously loose upon cursory inspection. Check carefully and remove the wing after any crash so that you may examine the wing bolts and the mounting blocks carefully.

10.26.5. Wing Bolts Broken - Will not Thread into Fuselage T-Nuts

Question: I am having trouble threading my wing bolts through the wing into the T-nuts installed in the fuselage. I think there might be some epoxy in the T-nut threads. What should I do?

Answer: Try to thread the wing bolts into the T-nuts without the wing.

If the wing bolts thread into the T-nuts OK without the wing them the T-nuts are fine and you probably are not seating the wing firmly against the former before trying to thread the bolts into the T-nuts.

If the wing bolts will NOT thread into the T-nuts without the wing, the T-nut threads are either plugged with something like epoxy or have been stripped out. They will need to be replaced.

10.26.6. Wing - Dihedral - What is It? Is it Adjustable?

Question: What is Wing Dihedral? Is it Adjustable on a VMAR ARF aircraft?

Answer: Dihedral is the bend upwards at the center of the wing. When you look at a wing with dihedral when it is top side up, the wing tips will be higher than the center. The more dihedral the higher the tips. Dihedral provides stability so trainers usually have more than sport airplanes and pattern or aerobatic airplanes often have none at all.

The dihedral on VMAR models is set at the factory. There is nothing to adjust. The angle of the wing roots and the angle of the wing spar joiner ensure that when the wing is assembled properly using 30 minute epoxy, the wing roots will be flush to each other and the correct amount of dihedral will be built into the wing.

10.26.7. Wing - Gaskets and Fairings - What are they For?

Question: I have found what looks like a foam sheet in the shape of a wing rib in my kit. My friend has another VMAR ARF and it has a black plactic component that also looks like a wing rib. What are these for?

Answer: These parts help seal and fit the wing root to the side of the fuselage.

Better Answer: The pre-cut foam is a gasket that can be attached to the wing root of your wing and serves as a sealing and protective gasket between the wing root and the side of the fuselage. Use silicone or latex contact cement to attach the gasket to the wing root.

The pre-molded plastic piece is a fairing that can be cut and attached to the wing root to serve as a finishing piece to enhance the appearance of the wing root to fuselage fit. This is used on fuselages that have a considerable taper or curve to them.

10.26.8. Wing Joints - Do it Right the First Time.

Question: A friend of mind had his wings break in half during flight. I don't want this to happen to me. How do I make sure that I do a good job when joining the wing halves of my ARF?

Answer: Use 30 Minute Epoxy and don't overpower your model.

Better Answer: Wing strength is critical to the integrity of an aircraft and we do extensive testing to make sure that the design is strong and solid. Wing failure is not something that we see or hear a lot of . We have analysed a few wing failures  sent to us for review by consumers and in all cases we found that improper assembly and use of adhesives was the cause of the failure. Do a dry assembly first with no adhesive while following the procedures listed in the instruction manual. This will ensure that the parts fit well and that you are familiar with what goes where and how to install it. When you are ready for the final assembly with adhesive, use 30 Minute Epoxy only and use plenty of it. Secondly do not overpower your model. See below for some more information that you may find helpful.

 

Epoxy - Slow Cure vs Fast Cure - Which is Best?

Question: Epoxy is available in different cure speeds. Should I use a Slow Cure (30 Minute) or a Fast Cure (5 Minute) Epoxy?

Short Answer: Use 30 Minute Epoxy where strength and structural integrity is important such as when joining wings or mounting stabilizers, engine firewalls etc. Use Fast Cure for quick repairs of small non-critical components or joints. If in doubt, always use 30 Minute Epoxy.

Better Answer: There are two general factors to consider,  Bond Strength and Working Time. 30 Minute Epoxy creates a stronger bond and it gives you more time to work. 5 Minute Epoxy gives a good bond but it is not as strong as 30 Minute Epoxy and it must be used very quickly, particulary in warm conditions.

The Bond Strength is pretty straighforward... 30 Minute simply gives stronger bonds. Use 30 Minute when joining wings, installing stabilizers, engine firewalls or other load bearing critical structural components that you simply cannot afford to have come off or fail. Use 5 Minute Epoxy for quick minor repairs of non-load bearing or light load bearing less critical components.

The Working Time is something that modelers frequently overlook and tend to err a bit in favor of  "fast is good". In some cases, like a quick repair of a simple small component... fast is really nice! But in cases where the amount of adhesive is considerable, the components are large or complex and/or need to be simultaneously mated with other parts.... you need to allow for plenty of time to work in order to get the parts aligned and properly placed. It is very important that the Epoxy is fully "wet" when being used. If Epoxy starts to thicken at all before the parts are joined, the Epoxy will not produce a good bond.

The worst possible scenario is using 5 Minute Epoxy on a complex multi-piece job like joining a wing. We have had too many calls from people who end up with the Epoxy beginning to cure before the wing halves are properly joined. We have also seen wing joints after in flight failures caused by gummy thick half cured Epoxy not penetrating and filling the joint and component substrates properly.

If you have any doubts about the complexity of a job, need for strength, working time etc, always use 30 Minute Epoxy!

Engine Power - What is Appropriate? How Much is Too Much?

Question: How much engine power is appropriate? Many models give a range of engine sizes... should I use an engine that is at the bottom of the range or go for broke and use the biggest engine recommended?

Answer: If in doubt go with something that is more or less in the middle of the range unless the distributor or your dealer have some specific recommendations.

DO NOT use an engine larger than the maximum size recommended by the model manufacturer. You run the risk of overstressing the airframe which can lead to sudden breakup of the model in the air and may injure someone.

Better Answer: Generally manufacturers specify a range of engine sizes for a model. An engine in the middle usually works well but you might want to consider going with the higher end of the range if you are going to be flying at altitudes above 2000 feet or in very hot weather or flying off of floats. Naturally if you are doing all of these, flying at high altitudes from a lake on a hot day... the bigger engine is the better choice. You might also want to ask around in your area to see what other RC flyers are doing. Be a bit cautious of the "power at all costs" type of recommendations but listen carefully when you get advice from those who have thought it through and tried it out.

 

10.26.9. Wing Joint Tape - How do I use this?

Question: I found a small roll of what looks like Covering material. What is this for and how do I use it?

Answer: This is for sealing the joint after the wings have been epoxied and joined together. Peel the backing off and apply it to the joint.

Better Answer: This is a long narrow strip of self adhesive tape with a removeable peel off backing. It may be colored to match the center section of the wing but is generally clear in color to enable it to be used universally with any graphics or color scheme. Some modelers may confuse the clear material for the white of the peel off backing material. The self-adhesive side is applied so that it seals the wing center joint.

Unroll it and plan your work according to your instruction manual. In the absence of specific instructions in your manual, start on the fuselage side of the wing and work from back to front. Peal off about 4-6 inches of the backing at a time and carefully apply the sticky side evenly astride the joint. Work to the trailing edge on the fuselage side of the wing and carefully continue over to the non-fuselage side of the wing and back around to the leading edge and over to the top side of the wing to where you started. Firmly apply pressure to the tape so that it sticks to the wing.

10.26.10. Wing Saddle Fit

Problem/Question: When mounting the wing to the fuselage of a VMAR model, the wooden dowels in the wing key into the receiving holes in the fuselage former OK but when I try to push the wing onto the wing saddle, there is considerable resistance and back pressure. I can't easily seat the wing at the back edge and it almost appears as if the wing saddle is the wrong shape for this wing. What causes this and what should I do?

Solution/Answer: This is quite easy to put right. In some cases the dowels in the wing or the holes in the fuselage are not lined up quite right or the holes in the fuselage former are a bit too low. The wing saddle will be the correct shape, but some adjusting of the holes in the fuselage former is needed in order to better seat the wing.

First things first... DO NOT modify or reposition the dowels in the wing. Instead, modify the holes in the fuselage former slightly by elongating the holes higher towards the top of the fuselage. Do the adjustments in small steps with frequent tests. Use a small round file. You will gradually elongate the holes into more of an elliptical shape (egg shaped). After each small adjustment, test the the wing fit again. You will find that it will be easier to press the rear of the wing towards the saddle as you make the adjustments. When the wing seats properly in the saddle, you are done. Remember, it is easy to do BUT do it in small steps rather than all at once.

10.26.11. Wing Spar Joiner - Fit - Tight vs Loose vs Too Long etc

Question: Can I modify the shape of Wing Spar Joiner to provide a better fit in my particular wing?

Answer: Yes with cautions. See Below

Better Answer: The Wing Spar Joiner is a very important component. Looks simple, is simple... but the most vital piece in the entire wing.

Yes you can modify the shape of the wing spar joiner if you really have to provided that you strictly pay attention to the following cautions:

1) Do you really have to? Understand what you are doing and why.

2) By how much? Sanding a corner that binds or reducing the thickness a couple of thousands of an inch at each end to assist with insertion or trimming the overall length by 1/8" or so is one thing... but doing anything more than that requires careful consideration. If you require big changes, make sure that something else is not wrong.

3) Remember LOTS of 30 Minute Epoxy must be used when gluing the wing spar joiner and wing roots together. LOTS, fill up the entire cavity and cover all surfaces and the wing roots thoroughly. Never use 5 minute or 15 minute Epoxy for joining wings... 30 Minute Epoxy only. Lots of it!

4) Never score or mar the surface of the wing spar joiner with a knife, scribe, vice grip teeth, plier teeth or meat tenderizer. Each time you indent the surface of the wing spar joiner you create a risk of a stress fracture later. If you want to roughen up the surface a bit, use 80 grit sand paper and blow away the dust before glueing into place.

5) If you want to make the vertical dimension of your wing spar joiner thicker (i.e. in the dimension that lies from the top to the bottom of the wing) you can use 1-16-3/16 thick balsa or other strip wood if you prefer to eliminate any gap in the fit. Any gap in the fit is normally found only on trainers where we use a wing spar joiner for several different models each with a different degree of dihedral. By making the wing spar joiner a bit narrow, we can vary the dihedral a few degrees between models.  Adding strip material to fill the gap is fine as long as you can flush fit the wing roots of your wing with the spar joiner inserted AND as long as you can still insert plenty of 30 Minute Epoxy into the joiner cavities in the wing.

 

10.26.11.1. Wing - Spar Joiner Cavity - Blocked at Wing Root End

Question: I have a VMAR ARF model. I notice that the cavity for the Wing Spar Joiner is blocked at the wing root end of one wing panel. It appears to be blocked by wood. Can I fix this?

Answer: Yes. The wings on some of the models are produced in one piece and then cut into two halves. What you are seeing is a very thin skin of balsa covering the wing cavity entrance. Use a sharp #11 blade to carefully cut away the thin skin of balsa from the cavity entrance.

10.26.12. Wing Tubes in Plug In Wing - Loose Fit - How to Tighten Up

Question: I have an Extra 330L and I find that one of the plug in wing panels is slightly loose on one of the wing tubes. Is this a problem? How can I tighten this up a but.

Answer: Actually this answer applies to pretty much any of our models that have plug in wings and aluminum wing tubes. If you want a tighter fit, we suggest inserting the tubes through the fuselage and then applying a small piece of heat shrink tubing around the end and mid point of the wing tube that is loose. This will increase the diameter of the tube slightly and you can adjust the thickness of tube by adding additional heat shrink layers if you wish. Or if you are short on shrink, vinyl like MacTac or even black vinyl electricians tape works well.

If you want to do this to both sides of the wing tubes to accomodate both plug in wing panels, you will have to consider the following:

a) You can increase the diameter of both ends (but not the middle) of the tube and leave it in place in the fuselage, or

b) You can increase the diameter of the entire tube (shrink works well for this) and ream out the fuselage holes carefully ( a round sanding stick works best for this) to accomodate the bigger tube. This way the tube will be removeable as before, or

c) Remove the tape or shrink from one side of the tube at the end of the day and slide the tube out as per usual. You would then have to re-apply the tape or shrink next time.

10.26.13. Wing Tubes in Plug In Wing - Should they be Glued or Not?

Question: I have a VMAR model with plug in wings. Should I glue the aluminum spar joiner tubes into the fuselage or not?

Answer: With very few exceptions, VMAR models that utilize plug in wings have wing channels for the spar joiner tubes that are closed at the outboard ends to prevent the spar joiner tubes from "creeping" further into either wing during flight.
 
We recommend confirming that your wing joiner tubes are restricted from moving overly far into either wing panel. Provided that the wing tubes are limited in their motion and cannot come out of the opposite wing during flight, there is no need to glue or otherwise secure the wing joiner tubes to the fuselage.
 
If you wish to leave the wing joiner tubes to the fuselage for convenience or for ease of assembly or for purposes of transport or storage, you may wish to "tack" the tubes into the fuselage using a small amount of medium CA+ such as Zap-A-Gap applied from inside the fuselage. Just a small amount of CA+ is required.
10.26.14. Wings - The wing tips hang down (droop) when the wing is mounted on the fuselage

We occasionally (but still too often) get inquiries from modelers who are concerned that their wing tips appear to hang lower than the centre section of the wing when the wing is mounted on the fuselage.

Resolution:

In Brief: Check the instructions, pictures, illustrations, box art and all documentation to ensure that the wing has been assembled right way up. If the wing has been assembled upside down, a new wing will be required.

In Detail: Most real aircraft and most models have wing tips that are slightly higher than the centre section of the wing when the wing is mounted on the fuselage. This is called Dihedral and is a part of the design. Dihedral helps with stabilty and Dihedral is used on most trainers and many scale models of real aircraft. Some models are designed for aerobatics and will have a very small amount of Dihedral or may have none at all... they will have wing tips that are more or less even with the height of the centre section of the wing when the wing is mounted on the fuselage. In rare cases full size aircraft will have the wing tips hanging lower (drooping) than the centre section of the wing when the wing is mounted on the fuselage. This is called Anhedral... it is rare in full size aircraft winds and even rarer in model wings. Anhedral is used on a few horizontal stabilizers such as the F4 Phantom II.

If a wing is intended to have drooping wing tips (Anhedral) then the wing roots will still fit tightly together where they join with no gap in the joint on either the top or bottom of the wing. If a wing has drooping wing tips and has a gap in the top or bottom of the wing where the wing sections join, the wing has been assembled upside down. If the wing has been assembled upside down, a new wing will be required.

10.27. VMAR - Wing Fairing Replacement - How to Tips

Question: What is the best way to go about replacing a Fairing (generally used for wing to fuselage joints) on a VMAR model?

Answer: Actually it is not difficult if you go about it the right way. Please review the entire process listed below before actually doing anything.  

The key to this process is to NOT remove the entire old fairing off the model. If you take the old fairing entirely off the model you run the risk of damaging the covering AND will have a more difficult time aligning the new fairing into position.

1) First of all do NOT totally remove the old fairing!  We don't want to take a chance on spoiling the covering so we are going to leave the portion of the old fairing in place that currently is bonded to the covering.

2) Instead of removing the old fairing, carefully clean it all off with Fantastic and paper towels. This will remove all oil, dirt and grime. Clean the fairing and surrounding fuselage area twice.

3) Use Pacer (the ZAP people) RC56 Canopy Glue or Pacer DAP-A-GOO to carefully bond any loose spots of the old fairing back into place on the fuselage. If you've had a crash carefully retrieve and reuse as much of the fairing as possible. Ideally you want the fairing contact area firmly bonded to the fuselage. Will CA work... yes but be careful to avoid "clorosis" which leaves a white powder like residue... use Pacer Poly Zap or Plasti Zap to reduce clorosis effects. Best of all is the Canopy Glue.  

3) Now take a new SHARP #11 Xacto blade and carefully cut the fairing about 1/4" offset from the fuselage. We want to leave the "stub" of the old fairing in place.  

4) Now inspect the remainder of the old fairing and make sure that it is bonded to the fuselage... you can work from "inside" the exposed portion of old fairing if you have to.

5) Carefully trial fit the new fairing on top of the remains of the old fairing stub. You should get a nearly perfect fit particularly if the fairings have simulated 3D rivets. The simulated rivets will key exactly into the new fairing rivets.

6) After trial fitting the new fairing, use Pacer RC56 Canopy glue to carefully bond it into place. Clean up any excess adhesive before it cures. Check several times in case adhesive oozes out. Use low tack masking tape to hold the new fairing in place until the RC56 has thoroughly dried.

That's it!

10.28. VMAR - Wood Types Used in Construction

Question: What type of wood is used in the construction of a VMAR ARF?

Answer: Primarily (85%+) Balsa and Light Ply. Selected harder woods are used for some structural components such as stringers and wing joiners.

Production early in the new millenium included the use of wood alternatives to balsa for the wing sheeting and formers in some models. This was phased out starting in mid 2002 and the change over was complete by early 2003. .

As Balsa was more widely used throughout the VMAR line, average flying weights began to decrease significantly. The average VMAR model weighs 6-12oz less than it did prior to 2003.

VMAR began selling Balsa sheets in mid 2002 and rapidly became a major supplier of sheet Balsa worldwide. To order the same Balsa that is used in VMAR ARF products, see www.richmondrc.com

11. Technical Information - VMAR - Product by Product
11.1. VMA-A0026 Avenger 60 ARF Aerobatic Pattern
11.1.1. VMA-A0026 Avenger 60 ARF Aerobatic Pattern - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with VCOTE Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with VCOTE applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.1.2. VMA-A0026 Avenger 60 ARF Aerobatic Pattern - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.1.2.1. VMA-A0026 Avenger 60 ARF Aerobatic Pattern - Rear Exhaust & Tuned Pipe
Question: I have a VMA-A0026 Avenger 60 ARF Aerobatic Pattern. Can I use an engine with a rear exhaust and a tuned pipe?

Answer: The VMA-A0026 Avenger 60 ARF Aerobatic Pattern was designed assuming a side exhaust and standard muffler. You will likely need to make many changes to the factory engine compartment and mount to accomodate a rear exhaust engine and depending on the engine this may not be possible at all.
 
Tuned pipes that are exposed and attach to the side of the fuselage may be possible however the Avenger was not designed with tuned pipes in mind.
 
11.1.3. VMA-A0026 Avenger 60 ARF Aerobatic Pattern - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.2. VMA-A460X A4 Skyhawk Jet (Prop) 45-52 ARF 3DS - Blue & Navy
11.2.1. VMA-A460X A4 Skyhawk Jet (Prop) 45-52 ARF 3DS - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with VCOTE2 - 3DS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with VCOTE2 - 3DS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.2.2. VMA-A460X A4 Skyhawk Jet (Prop) 45-52 ARF 3DS - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.3. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69"- Various Colors
11.3.1. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.3.2. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.3.2.1. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Control Horns - How Many in Parts Bag?

Question: The assembly manual for my Apache refers to five control horn sets. The parts bag contains only 3 sets in total and I think I only need 3 sets. Is this correct?

Answer: Yes only three control horn sets are required for your Apache. One control horn is used for the rudder and two control horns are used for the elevators.

11.3.2.2. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Engine Clamp Bolts - How to Remove

Question: I want to completely remove the engine clamp bolts from the engine mount in my Apache III. How do I do this?

Answer: This is not difficult but if it is necessary, there are two ways to approach this.

  • Method A: Undo the engine mount bolts that retain the engine mount to the firewall. Try to just loosen them enough so that you can toe the engine mount beam inwards at the nose and then subsequently remove the engine clamp bolts. Then retighten the engine mount bolts to secure the engine mount beam to the firewall.
  • Method B: Notch small cutouts into the lip of the fuselage that wraps into the engine compartment. The cutout notches should be positioned above each engine clamp bolt. Once the cutout notches have been completed you will be able to to undo the engine clamp bolts and remove them without moving the engine mount beams. Use a dremel tool or a small round bastard file to cut out the notches. Seal the exposed wood in the notches with Pacer Finishing Resin or thin ZAP/CA to prevent oil and fuel residue from penetrating into the wood.

 

11.3.2.3. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Fuel Tank - How to install

Question: How do I install the Fuel Tank into my VMAR Apache III?

Answer: This is not difficult but the instruction book does not cover this directly.

Do the fuel tank setup first. Install the internal tubing and clunk(s). When the stopper has been tightened but not overtightened, install pieces of fuel tubing between or over the ends of the metal pipes to seal them against dirt and debris. Mark the bottom of the tank so that you can clearly see which way the tank is to be positioned in the model.

Remove the fuel compartment hatch from the bottom of the fuselage.

Remove the black sealing gasket from the fuel tank. Apply sealant such as Pacer Dap-A-Goo to the front face of the tank around the neck and re-install the gasket. Apply more sealant to the front face of the gasket.

Insert the tank into the fuel tank compartment with the tubes forward and oriented so that the bottom of the tank is positioned correctly. Press the tank firmly against the back side of the firewall and secure in place while the sealant cures.

From the engine mount area, apply more sealant around the neck of the fuel tank working from the front of the fuselage.

When the sealant has dried, support the tank with sponge foam around the sides and bottom of the tank. You may wish to install your battery pack beneath or behind the tank before inserting the sponge foam.

Reinstall the fuel tank compartment hatch to the bottom of the fuselage.

11.3.2.4. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Landing Gear Location - Instructions Wrong

Some copies of the the Apache III Instruction Manual may have typo errors as follows:
Page 15 (or 20 depending on your manual) Stage 20 Picture 20.2 The annotation on the bottom of the fuselage showing the location of the landing gear for the tricycle gear configuration may be wrong. If the annotation says "Main gear mounting holes for tail dragger configuration" it is incorrect and should say "Main gear mounting holes for tricyle gear configuration"

11.3.2.5. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Landing Gear - Steering Arm does not fit
Consumer called and advised his steering arm does not fit into the Apache III nose gear.

The do fit but requires careful alignment and a bit of up pressure and twisting motion of the nose gear to insert into the steering arm bearing in some cases. To make this a bit easier the modeler can either drill out the steering arm bearing a bit, or grind the end of the nose gear wire a bit or sand a bit of plastic off the back of the steering arm bearing holder.
11.3.2.6. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Rudder Control Horn Hole - Wrong Location

Some versions of the Apache III may have been shipped with the rudder control horn mounting hole drilled too low. The rudder control horn mounting hole is pre-drilled at the factory prior to the rudder being covered. The hole is about .25” (6mm) in diameter and is located just aft of the rudder hinge line towards the bottom of the rudder. The hole can be located by holding the vertical stabilizer and rudder assembly and backlighting it from behind. A limited number of Apache III’s produced in the fall of 2003 and shipped to market in the Nov 2003 through Spring 2004 time frame may have the hole drilled about 1.25”(31mm) too low.

 

Resolution.

 

In Brief: Drill a new hole for the rudder control horn approximately 1.25” (31mm) higher than the hole pre-drilled at the factory.

 

In Detail: Insert the vertical stabilizer and rudder assembly into the mounting slot in the top of the fuselage. Locate the rudder control rod protruding from the top of the aft end of the fuselage. Free the rudder control rod from any lockdown tape installed near the servo tray for shipping purposes. From the aft end of the fuselage, extend the rudder control rod until it reaches the rudder hinge line. The rod should be approximately in line with the rudder control horn hole. If it is not, mark where the control rod crosses the rudder hinge line. Remove the vertical stabilizer from the fuselage. Drill a new rudder control horn hole to align with the control rod. Drill the hole to be the same diameter as that of the incorrectly placed hole done by the factory. Install the rudder control horn assembly in the new hole per the instruction procedures in the manual.

11.3.2.7. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Wing Servo Arm contacting Pilot Figure

Question: The servo arm on my wing servo is contacting the head of the pilot figure in my Apache III. Is this normal? What should I do to fix it?

Answer: No this is not what we intended and it should be fixed before flying your model. There are a couple of ways to resolve this.

1) Make sure your servo is a standard servo and that it is mounted down on the rails properly. Some of the ball bearing and high torque servos are in a case that stands higher than a standard servo.

2) Orient the servo so that the output shaft and arm are closer to the trailing edge of the wing rather than the leading edge. Adjust the aileron control rod lengths accordingly.

3) If after checking on 1 and 2, your servo arm is still contacting the pilot figure you will need to go to a lower profile servo or move the pilot figure slightly. We recommend moving the pilot figure and/or mounting plate... it's relatively simple to do. Here are three options that more or less accomplish the same thing:

  • Loosen the mounting screws for the plate and try to slide the plate further forward to gain more clearance, or
  • Remove the plate with pilot by sliding it backwards and out of the model. Examine the mounting rails. On both sides of the fuselage add a new rail below the existing rail leaving a wide enough vertical gap to accomodate the thickness of the plate. Re-install the plate and pilot so that the new rail is below the plate, or
  • The pilot figure is mounted to a plate. You can remove the pilot figure from the plate and relocate the figure further forward to clear the servo. Reattach the pilot figure to the plate using Pacer Dap-A-Goo.
11.3.3. VMA-A140X Apache III 40 ARF ECS Trainer 69" - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.4. VMA-A340X Arrow Tiger 46-52 ARF ECS SPORT AEROBATIC - Various Colors
11.4.1. CG Location - Instructions Wrong - VMA-A340X VMAR Arrow Tiger 46-52 ARF ECS

The CG location in the Instruction Book for the VMAR Arrow Tiger may be incorrect in some printings.

The CG for the VMAR Arrow Tiger should be located 3-3/4" to 4.0" back from the leading edge of the wing (measured where the wing meets the fuselage side). This will be approximately coincident with the thickest part of the wing. We recommend 3-3/4" for first flights.

Instructions that give the CG location at 3-1/8" to 3-3/8" are incorrect.

11.4.2. Hovering - Is It Possible for the VMA-A340X VMAR Arrow Tiger to Hover?

Question: Can the VMA Arrow Tiger 46-52 ARF be made to Hover?

Answer: No.

Better Answer: The Arrow Tiger was designed with knife edge and high speed in mind. Hovering was not in the design criteria. In theory almost anything with a power to weight ratio greater than 1 can be made to Hover. Give the weight of the Arrow Tiger and power of a typical 46 to 52 it is not possible to Hover the Arrow Tiger.

11.4.3. Instructions - Wrong Model Named - VMA-A340X VMAR Arrow Tiger 46-52 ARF ECS - Hornet means Arrow Tiger
There are various references to the VMAR Hornet in the instruction book for the VMAR Arrow Tiger.

References to the VMAR Hornet in the instruction book for the VMAR Arrow Tiger are misprints. All references to the VMAR Hornet are intended to refer to the VMAR Arrow Tiger.
11.4.4. VMA-A340X Arrow Tiger 46-52 ARF - Is it a pattern ship?

Question: Is the VMA Arrow Tiger 46-52 ARF considered a pattern ship?

Answer: No not really. The Arrow Tiger is a hot moving sport plane that is very aerobatic, does knife edge and many other maneuvers but it was not designed with pattern flying in mind. In could be used a stepping stone moving towards a pattern airplane such as the VMAR Avenger 60 ARF.

11.4.5. ZBO-Y190604A More Information

More Information about #ZBO-Y190604A ... BLOWOUT - VMAR ARROW TIGER 46-52 ARF - FINAL SALE 

This is a BLOWOUT... FINAL SALE item and the following caution applies: 

If you are able to build, repair, supply hardware for, assemble and set up without assistance you can save money buying a BLOWOUT item. If you are not able to perform these functions without assistance, you should NOT NOT NOT purchase a BLOWOUT item. Assume that work will be required and that some or all hardware and documentation will be missing. Shipping by Ground to USA and Canada only. Subject To Change Without Notice.

Without negating the caution above, we can provide the following additional information about this particular item:

 Overall Condition:  "New In Box" 
 Color:  Red with Yellow, Black & White Trim. 
 Fuselage:  Included. 
 Wing:  Included.  
 Horizontal Stabilizer: Included. 
 Vertical Stabilizer:  Included.
 Cowl:  Included.
 Parts Bag:  Included.
 Previous Part#: VMA-A340U

Previous Part# general information (for reference purposes only):

http://www.richmondrc.com/vma/common/techinfocommon/a340x/summary.htm

No other information is available regarding #ZBO-Y190604A  BLOWOUT - VMAR ARROW TIGER 46-52 ARF - FINAL SALE

11.5. VMA-BS110 Balsa Stripper
11.5.1. VMA-BS110 - What type of Blade does the unit use?

Question: What type of blade is used in the VMAR Balsa Stripper? I want to have some spares in case the factory blade gets dull or breaks.

Answer: The VMAR Balsa Stipper uses standard #11 Blades.

11.6. VMA-B140X Beaver 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Various Colors
11.6.1. VMA-B140X - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.6.2. VMA-B140X - Landing Gear (Main) - Fibreglass or Aluminum?
Question: Does the VMAR Beaver 45-60 ARF come with fibreglass or aluminum main gear?
Answer: During mid 2006 the VMAR Beaver 45-60 ARF main landing gear was upgraded from fibreglass to T6 aluminum main gear. The new main gear is lighter and stronger than that used earlier.
11.6.3. VMA-B140X - Wing Spars - Aluminum (VMA_B140XSPR) Size
Question: I have one of the new VMAR Beaver 45-60 ARF's with plug in wings. What size are the wing spar tubes? They appear to be aluminum.
 
Answer: The VMAR Beaver 45-60 was upgraded in 2006 to include a plug in wing. The wing is joined and mated to the fuselage using two aluminum tubes. The tube sizes are as follows:
 
1) Long Tube: 22.9 in. (582 mm) long x .43 in. (11 mm) OD
 
2) Short Tube: 11.4 in. (289 mm) long x .43 in. (11 mm) OD
11.6.4. VMA-B140X - Weight of Beaver 45-60 with VMAR Floats

Question: I am planning a project using the VMAR Beaver 45-60 ARF on the VMAR 35" Floats. What would be the weight of the Beaver plus floats? I qm considering different power systems and radio gear, so please tell me the weight of the model plus floats without any engine or radio gear.

Answer: The weight of the VMAR Beaver 45-60 ARF equipped with VMAR 35" Floats is approx 5 lbs 9 oz [2530 grams]. This includes the weight of the cowl and a typical propeller but without any power system or radio gear.

11.7. VMA-B160C Beaver 60-90 Semiscale ARF
11.7.1. VMA-B160C Beaver 60-90 Semiscale ARF - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.7.2. VMA-B160C Beaver 60-90 Semiscale ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.7.3. ZBO-Y190702A More Information

More Information about #ZBO-Y190702A ... BLOWOUT - VMAR BEAVER 60-90 SEMISCL ARF FINAL SALE

This is a BLOWOUT... FINAL SALE item and the following caution applies: 

If you are able to build, repair, supply hardware for, assemble and set up without assistance you can save money buying a BLOWOUT item. If you are not able to perform these functions without assistance, you should NOT NOT NOT purchase a BLOWOUT item. Assume that work will be required and that some or all hardware and documentation will be missing. Shipping by Ground to USA and Canada only. Subject To Change Without Notice.

Without negating the caution above, we can provide the following additional information about this particular item:

 Overall Condition:  "New In Box" 
 Color:  White with Yellow & Black Trim
 Fuselage:  Included. 
 Wing:  Included.  
 Horizontal Stabilizer: Included. 
 Vertical Stabilizer:  Included.
 Cowl:  Included.
 Landing Gear: Included
 Parts Bag:  Included.
 Previous Part#: VMA-B160W

Previous Part# general information (for reference purposes only):

http://www.richmondrc.com/vma/common/techinfocommon/b160c/summary.htm

No other information is available regarding

#ZBO-Y190702A  BLOWOUT - VMAR BEAVER 60-90 SEMISCL ARF FINAL SALE

 


11.8. VMA-B191C Beaver 120+ ARF SemiScale ARF 120 in. Span
11.8.1. VMA-B191C Beaver 120+ ARF SemiScale ARF 120 in. Span - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.8.2. VMA-B191C Beaver 120+ ARF SemiScale ARF 120 in. Span - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.8.2.1. VMA-B191C Beaver 120+ ARF SemiScale ARF 120 in. Span - Aileron Extensions - Not Provided

Question: My assembly manual for the 10 foot Beaver #VMA-B191C makes reference to some aileron extensions. I did not get these. What's the story? Am I missing something?

Answer: Due to the wide variation in radio connectors, servos and tolerance for different lengths of extensions we have discontinued supplying aileron extensions. Modelers should follow their radio manufacturers recommendations regarding the use of aileron extensions.

11.8.2.2. VMA-B191C Beaver 120+ ARF SemiScale ARF 120 in. Span - Instructions Do Not Reflect Plug In Wing

The Beaver 120ARF has been updated to incorporate a plug-in semi-symmetrical wing. Some of the screws, washers etc in the instruction book are no longer included as they are no longer needed. The wooden spar joiner has been replaced by two long round aluminum tubes that mount the wings to the fuselage.

The CG Location has not changed. The CG is as stated and is approx coincident with the thickest part of the wing about 30% back from the leading edge.

Short Term... information has been published on our external Knowledge base and will be provided as an addendum sheet with Beaver 120ARF instruction books.

Longer Term... the instruction book will be amended to reflect the upgrade and changed hardware.

11.8.2.3. VMA-B190C Beaver 120+ ARF SemiScale ARF 120 in. Span - Older Version Without Tube Spars

The attached PDF contains important information about the original older version of the B190C Beaver 120ARF that had wood spar joiners and the wing located in a saddle in the top of the fuselage. This older model was superceded in 2004-2005 by the new B191C Beaver 120ARF that has two aluminum tube spars and a fuselage that is used with "plug in" wings.

11.8.3. VMA-B191C Beaver 120+ ARF SemiScale ARF 120 in. Span - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.9. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Elect & Glow - Various Colors
11.9.1. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.9.1.1. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.9.1.2. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Supplement to the Manual
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.9.1.2.1. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Battery Installation

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20050712 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 16, Figure 28B. The text below the Caption for Figure 28B refers to "...with Velcro (supplied) or ..."  Please note that Bird Dogs produced prior to August 2005 did not come with Velcro and the battery should be secured using lightweight foam so that it does not move. Beginning with production in September 2005, a new laser cut battery platform and Velcro retaining strap was included along with an ADDITIONAL INFORMATION sheet that explains how to install the battery platform. The ADDITIONAL INFORMATION sheet supercedes the manual.
 
 
11.9.1.2.2. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Control Horns

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20050712 (see manual back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Some Bird Dogs produced prior to August 2005,  were shipped with two small plastic disc's in lieu of a single square backing plate for some of the control horns. These small disc's serve exactly the same purpose as the square backing plate... the only difference is that there are two of them... one for each screw. Beginning with production in September 2005, a new laser cut control horn assembly replaced the plastic screw type control horns previously used with the VMAR Bird Dog 06-12 ARF. If laser cut control horns have been supplied, an ADDITIONAL INFORMATION sheet has been included with the control horn parts bag and shows the correct method of installing the laser cut control horns. The ADDITIONAL INFORMATION sheet supercedes the manual.
 
 
11.9.1.2.3. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Firewall Spacing - Page 8, Figure 12K

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20050712 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 8, Figure 12K. This figure shows the 3mm nuts evenly spaced at .875 in. (22 mm) from the firewall. This works well for some motor shafts but may be lessened or expanded to reflect different lengths of motor shafts. The important thing here is that the motor shaft be able to extend through the front of the cowl and still securely hold the propeller without the propeller contacting the cowl. A distance of 1-3/32 in. (27mm) works well for many popular motors.
 
 
11.9.1.2.4. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Vertical Stabilizer Fit - Page 6, Step 8.1 & Figure 8A

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20050712 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 6, Step 8.1 & Figure 8A. Step 8.1 and Figure 8A describe and show the dry test fitting of the vertical stabilizer into the vertical stabilizer slot in the top of the fuselage. On some early versions of the Bird Dog produced in July and August of 2005 the slot in the fuselage is slightly too deep so that the vertical stabilizer tab shown in Figure 8D does not contact the bottom of the slot when inserted into the fuselage. 

If your vertical stabilizer does not contact the bottom of the fuselage slot when inserted into the fuselage you need to rectify this with a small filler strip inserted into the fuselage slot and tacked into place with CA or other glue before installing the vertical stabilizer using 30 minute epoxy. The filler strip should be approximately 5-7mm high and the width and length of the slot. Use balsa or other light wood to make this strip. Dry fit the strip and the vertical stabilizer before gluing anything into place. The idea here is to make sure that the bottom of the vertical stabilizer tab seats firmly against the strip which in turn fills the gap in the bottom of the fuselage slot. 

11.9.1.3. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Important Information
 
 
 
 
11.9.1.3.1. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.9.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.9.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.9.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.9.2. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below. 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.9.2.1. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Electric Power Systems for Flight at High Altitudes

For those of you who may be wondering about flying a VMAR Bird Dog at High Altitude please see the general article on high altitude electric performance included further below.


In addition to the article included below, here is some feedback provided by a modeler flying a Bird Dog near Durango, CO at approximately 7000 feet above sea level.

He has equipped his Bird Dog as follows:

  • AXI Outrunner 2808/24
  • 3 Cell LiPo consisting of 2 x 2200mAh 3 cell packs in parallel for 4400 mAh total capacity.
  • Using a Graupner Folding 10x6 Prop

Reports brisk reliable performance with this power system in the Bird Dog.


 

Electric Power - Performance at High Altitudes

Question: I live at 5000 feet above sea level. What should I do to get my electric power system to perform at high altitudes as well as it does at sea level?

Answer: It's tough to get the same performance at 5000 or 8000 feet as you do at sea level but we do have a technique that will help you come close.

First of all it's important to understand a few things:

1) Unlike an internal combustion engine (i.e. glow or gas), an electric motor does not consume oxygen and hence could care less about oxygen or anything else that affects combustion.

2) An electric motor system that runs well at sea level will underperform at higher altitudes not because the air has less oxygen but because the air is thinner. Hot weather does the same thing... the air gets thinner. Hot and high together can really gang up and take a chunk out of the performance.

In order to get your electric motor system to perform in thinner air the same way it does at sea level, you may actually have to change the motor, speed control, battery pack and prop but before you go reaching for your credit card here is a technique that attacks the problem from the lowest cost component first.

1) Measure the watts that your power system consumes at sea level or other relatively low altitude location. Use a Medusa Power Analyzer or AstroFlight Whatt meter.

2) Better yet, if possible, use the Medusa Power Analyzer PRO thrust meter to measure the thrust generated and the watts consumed.

3) Now do the same measurements (1 & 2) at the higher altitude location. You will notice that your system consumes less watts and if you are able to measure thrust you will notice that you get less thrust at higher altitude than you do at lower altitude. This is because the air is thinner (less dense) at higher altitudes.

4) In order to get the thrust back up to where it was at lower altitudes you need the prop to move more of the thinner air. To do this, select a higher pitch and/or larger diameter prop for use at higher altitudes. Test again and try to find a prop that gives you the same thrust and/or watt values as you were getting on the original prop at lower altitude. If you can get the same thrust at 5000 feet as you got at sea level for example, you will have similar flight performance. Thrust is really the key here and it's best to work with thrust numbers but watts are a good relative indicator of thrust. Not perfect but still helpful!

Be cautious when testing to ensure that the motor, ESC and battery do not overheat with the new prop. Some compromising may be necessary to get good performance that does not overheat components.

In a perfect world, you would carefully select a specific motor, ESC, battery and prop to get the ideal combination for high altitude performance when installed in a particular model. Yup... perfect is best... but for those of us who can settle for a bit less than ideal and have limited budgets, changing the prop to generate similar thrust in high, hot & thinner air as you get in low, cool & thicker air is a good low cost way to go.    

 

11.9.2.2. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Stage 12 Installing Electric Motor and ESC - Step 12C Mounting Screw (Bolt) Set
Question: Stage 12 Step 12C of my B210X Manual refers to installing three bolt and washer sets for mounting the motor. These bolt sets are stated to come with the kit but I did not get these in my kit. What's the story here?

Answer: The reference to the bolt sets (mounting screws) in your version of the B210X Manual is incorrect. The motor mounting system was modified to use four mounting screws not three as stated. These mounting screws come with the Power Module and Power Pack but are not included with the kit. Each motor is different and requires different mounting hardware and methods. We do provide a blank firewall set that can be drilled to suit nearly all motors. 
 
Mounting Screws - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What do I need in the way of mounting screws?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on what you have in mind:
a) VMAX VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motors that are supplied with VMAX Power Modules and VMAX Power Packs come pre-mounted with the appropriate screws for the motor.
 
b) The threads are 3mm and generally four 3mm x 6-12 mm machine hex head screws with washers will work.
 
c) We sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MS) consisting of four 3mm x 10mm hex head screws. Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
d) We also sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MT) consisting of 16 mounting screws. Four screws in each of four different sizes/styles.
  • 3 x 10 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (like VMM-111B18MS)
  • 3 x 16 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (longer version of above)
  • 3 x   6 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting)
  • 3 x 10 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting) 
The four different sizes/styles allow for thicker firewalls, multi-layer firewalls where the screw heads must be countersunk between the layers, etc.
 
This set provides for a very wide range of different mounting methods.
 
Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
CAUTION: When mounting motors using any method, ensure all fasteners are tightened securely. Check for vibration free operation of the motor. If not vibration free, reseat and retighten all fasteners and ancilliary components such as props and gears. Tighten fasteners firmly but don't strip the threads. Use medium strength thread locker on all metal to metal fasteners.

 

11.9.2.3. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Tool Sizes for Power Module Hardware

Wrench and Socket Head sizes for the VMAR Bird Dog power module hardware are as follows:

For the Prop Nuts 7/32"

For the Power Module nuts (that fit on the four threaded studs that attach the firewall to fhe fuselage) 7/32" deep socket

For the four black machine screws that go through the firewall and thread into tapped holes in the motor mount (backing plate) 2.5mm Allen Wrench

For the 2 or 3 black grub screws that retain the motor into the backing plate are accessed via the slot between the motor the backing plate 1.5 mm Allen Wrench.

 

11.9.2.4. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Wing Servo Requires Clearance Slot in Wing Strut Mounting Washer.

Question: When I am mounting wing servos in the VMAR Bird Dog, the wing strut attachment point washer is in the way of the mounting tab on one of the servos. What do I do?

Solution: This is easy to fix. Use a sharp #11 Xacto blade to knotch out the wooden washer as shown in the picture below. Takes about 15 seconds and you'll be good to go.

Note that this notching is only required where the strut washer and servo are in contact. This appears only to be an issue on production models up to November 2005.

11.9.3. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.9.4. VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.9.4.1. Logo VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF
11.9.4.1.1. Logo VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - JPG (RGB)
11.9.4.1.2. Logo VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - PSD (PhotoShop)
11.9.4.1.3. Logo VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - TIF (CMYK)
11.9.4.2. Pictures VMA-B210A Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Army (Red on White)
11.9.4.2.1. Pictures VMA-B210A Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Army (Red on White) - JPG (RGB)
11.9.4.2.2. Pictures VMA-B210A Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Army (Red on White) - PSD (Photoshop)
11.9.4.2.3. Pictures VMA-B210A Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Army (Red on White) - TIF (CMYK)
11.9.4.3. Pictures VMA-B210U Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - USAF (Yellow on Gray)
11.9.4.3.1. Pictures VMA-B210U Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - USAF (Yellow on Gray) - JPG (RGB)
11.9.4.3.2. Pictures VMA-B210U Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - USAF (Yellow on Gray) - PSD (PhotoShop)
11.9.4.3.3. Pictures VMA-B210U Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - TIF (Yellow on Gray) - PSD (CMYK)
11.9.4.4. Pictures VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - from the Fan Club
11.9.4.4.1. Pictures - VMA-B210X Bird Dog 06-12 ARF - Courtesy Barry Waters
11.10. VMA-C019 Cap 231EX 90-120 ARF Aerobatic Sport
11.10.1. VMA-C019 Cap 231EX 90-120 ARF Aerobatic Sport - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.11. VMA-C0024X Chipmunk 40 Semiscale ARF - Canada & British
11.11.1. VMA-C0024X Chipmunk 40 Semiscale ARF - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with VCOTE Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with VCOTE applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.11.2. VMA-C0024X Chipmunk 40 Semiscale ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.11.2.1. VMA-C0024X Chipmunk 40 Semiscale ARF - Horizontal Thrust Line

Question: Where is the horizontal thrust line on the VMAR Chipmunk 40 ARF removeable firewall?

Answer: The VMAR Chipmunk 40 ARF horizontal thrust line is 1-13/32" down from the top of the firewall.

Better Answer: The VMAR Chipmunk 40 ARF horizontal thrust line is 1-13/32" down from the top of the firewall. It can also be estimated by locating the cowl correctly on the fuselage and then drawing the horizontal thrust line so that it appears to pass midway through the crankshaft hole in the front of the cowl.

11.11.3. VMA-C0024X Chipmunk 40 Semiscale ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.12. VMA-C044 Cap 231EX 40 ARF Aerobatic Sport
11.12.1. VMA-C044 Cap 231EX 40 ARF Aerobatic Sport - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.12.2. VMA-C044 Cap 231EX 40 ARF Aerobatic Sport - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.12.3. VMA-C044 Cap 231EX 40 ARF Aerobatic Sport - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.13. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Elect & Glow - Various Colors
11.13.1. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.13.1.1. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.13.1.2. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Supplement to the Manual

11.13.1.2.1. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Control Horns - Laser Cut Wood

Question: My VMAR VMA-C210X 09-15 ARF was supplied with control horns that appear to be made of wood. Are these OK? 

Answer: Yes these are laser cut from aircraft plywood and are strong, light, reliable and easy to install. In some later production J3 Cub and L4 Grasshoppers the horns are laser cut from Mylar sheets.

Additional Information:  After installing the control horns made from plywood, we recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP (Pink) into the plywood of the control horn to "harden" the plywood and holes. Do two applications about 1 minute apart.

 

11.13.1.3. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Important Information

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.13.1.3.1. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.13.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.13.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.13.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.13.2. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.13.2.1. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Quick Release Wing Strut Set #VMA-C210YWSQ

Question: I travel a great deal and take my VMAR C210X 09-15 ARF with me in my RV. When I'm home, I remove the wing and undo the struts from the fuselage. But when I am travelling I like to remove the struts from the wing as well. I've been undoing the screws and it works OK but I was wondering if you have a strut set that can be removed more easily and quickly for traveling?

Answer: Yes we do. For modelers who need to frequently remove the wing struts from the VMAR C210X 09-15 ARF, we have released a new Quick Release Strut Set. For the J3 Cub these struts are Yellow (#VMA-C210YWSQ) and for the L4 Grasshopper these struts are Drab Green (VMA-C210DWSQ). The quick release struts are easier to install and can be removed more quickly that the standard struts. Colored to match the model, the quick release struts use Z-Bend ends for the wing attachment points (2 per strut) instead of using screws and brass plates.

Fitting the quick release strut set requires minor modification to the wing attachment points (4).

Instructions for modifying the wing attachment points:

  1. Wick CA into & around the 4 plywood washers where the struts attach to the wings.
  2. Use a 3/32" drill bit to enlarge the screw holes at the attachment points.
  3. Use a 7/64" drill bit to further enlarge the screw holes to 50% depth.
  4. Test fit the struts and then remove them.
  5. Wick thin CA into the drill holes to toughen the wood or if the strut Z-bends become loose in the holes.  

Caution: be careful with drilling. Don't drill through the wing or your fingers!

11.13.2.2. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Stage 1 Wing Assembly Joining the Wing Halves - Step 1G Leading Edge Dowel
Question:  Stage 1 of my C210X Manual for the J3 Cub and L4 Grasshopper shows a notch in both wing roots but does not show me when to install the small leading edge dowel. What should I do?

Answer: Your version of the Manual is missing Step 1G and its accompanying picture. After you have completed Step 1F, please do the following: 
    1. Locate the leading edge dowel in the Wing Parts Bag. The dowel is made of wood and is about 5/8 in [16 mm] in length. 
    2. Wait for the 30 minute epoxy you applied earlier to dry. 
    3. Trial fit the wing halves together. 
      • Carefully insert the dowel into the pre-drilled hole (formed by the channels in each wing root) in the leading edge. 
      • Mark the dowel where it meets the leading edge of the wing when the dowel is about half way inserted. 
    4. Remove the dowel and separate the wings.
    5. Carefully position the dowel into the pre-drilled channel in one wing half.
      • Position the dowel consistent with the reference mark you made earlier.
      • Secure the dowel into place with a small amount of medium thick CA+ such as Pacer Zap-A-Gap.
      • Make sure the dowel is reasonably straight (perpendicular to the leading edge).
      • Let the CA+ dry.
    6. From this point on you can proceed with Stage 2 where you apply 30 minute epoxy to the wing roots, spar joiner etc and mate the wing halves.
      • When doing so make sure you apply 30 minute epoxy into the visible portion of the dowel channels and over the dowel itself prior to mating the wings.
11.13.2.3. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Stage 12 Installing Electric Motor and ESC - Step 12C Mounting Screw (Bolt) Set
Question: Stage 12 Step 12C of my C210X Manual refers to installing four bolt and washer sets for mounting the motor. These bolt sets are stated to come with the kit but I did not get these in my kit. What's the story here?

Answer: The reference to the bolt sets (mounting screws) in your version of the C210X Manual is incorrect. These mounting screws come with the Power Module and Power Pack but are not included with the kit. Each motor is different and requires different mounting hardware and methods. We do provide a blank firewall set that can be drilled to suit nearly all motors. 
 
Mounting Screws - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What do I need in the way of mounting screws?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on what you have in mind:
a) VMAX VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motors that are supplied with VMAX Power Modules and VMAX Power Packs come pre-mounted with the appropriate screws for the motor.
 
b) The threads are 3mm and generally four 3mm x 6-12 mm machine hex head screws with washers will work.
 
c) We sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MS) consisting of four 3mm x 10mm hex head screws. Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
d) We also sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MT) consisting of 16 mounting screws. Four screws in each of four different sizes/styles.
  • 3 x 10 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (like VMM-111B18MS)
  • 3 x 16 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (longer version of above)
  • 3 x   6 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting)
  • 3 x 10 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting) 
The four different sizes/styles allow for thicker firewalls, multi-layer firewalls where the screw heads must be countersunk between the layers, etc.
 
This set provides for a very wide range of different mounting methods.
 
Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
CAUTION: When mounting motors using any method, ensure all fasteners are tightened securely. Check for vibration free operation of the motor. If not vibration free, reseat and retighten all fasteners and ancilliary components such as props and gears. Tighten fasteners firmly but don't strip the threads. Use medium strength thread locker on all metal to metal fasteners.

 

11.13.2.4. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Stage 12 Installing Electric Motor and ESC - Step 12J Bolt Length
Question: Stage 12 Step 12J of my C210X Manual for the J3 Cub and L4 Grasshopper refers to installing four bolts for the power module. These bolts are stated to be 50mm long. My bolts are only about 30mm in length. What's the story here?

Answer: The reference to 50mm long bolts in your version of the C210X Manual is incorrect. The bolts are 30 mm long when used in the J3 Cub and L4 Grasshopper. This allows the tapered cowl to be mounted without contacting excess bolt length. The picture and instructions of Step 12K are correct in showing the separation between the fixed fuselage firewall and the nuts to be approximately 22mm. It is this spacing of the nuts and power module firewall at approximately 22mm from the fixed firewall in the fuselage that is important, not the actual length of the bolts themselves.
 
11.13.2.5. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Stage 15 Installing The Servos - Step 15B & 15C
 
11.13.3. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.13.4. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.13.4.1. Pictures VMA-C210Y J3 Cub 09-15 ARF - Yellow
11.13.4.1.1. Pictures VMA-C210Y J3 Cub 09-15 ARF - Yellow - TIF (CMYK)
11.13.4.2. Pictures VMA-C210D L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - DDay
11.13.4.2.1. Pictures VMA-C210D L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - DDay - TIF (CMYK)
11.13.5. VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper 09-15 ARF - Reviews
11.13.5.1. Reviews VMA-C210Y J3 Cub 09-15 ARF - Yellow
11.14. VMA-C260U F4U Corsair 60 SemiScale ECS ARF - US Marines
11.14.1. VMA-C260U F4U Corsair 60 SemiScale ECS ARF - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.14.2. VMA-C260U F4U Corsair 60 SemiScale ECS ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.14.2.1. VMA-C260U F4U Corsair 60 SemiScale ECS ARF - Landing Gear - Retract Ready?

Question: Is the VMAR Corsair 60 ARF Retract Ready?

Answer: No

Better Answer: The Corsair comes with fixed gear. It was not designed with retracts in mind and no provision for retracts has been made. It is not retract ready. A great deal of work on the wings and wing structure would be required by modelers if they wish to install retracts in the VMAR Corsair. We have not designed the wing to accept retracts and do not recommend modifying the wing to accept retracts.

11.14.3. VMA-C260U F4U Corsair 60 SemiScale ECS ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.14.4. ZBO-Y190611B More Information

More Information about #ZBO-Y190611B ... BLOWOUT - VMAR CORSAIR 60 SEMISCALE ARF -  FINAL SALE 

This is a BLOWOUT... FINAL SALE item and the following caution applies: 

If you are able to build, repair, supply hardware for, assemble and set up without assistance you can save money buying a BLOWOUT item. If you are not able to perform these functions without assistance, you should NOT NOT NOT purchase a BLOWOUT item. Assume that work will be required and that some or all hardware and documentation will be missing. Shipping by Ground to USA and Canada only. Subject To Change Without Notice.

Without negating the caution above, we can provide the following additional information about this particular item:

 Overall Condition:  "New In Box" 
 Color:  Blue (USA Marines)
 Fuselage:  Included. 
 Wing:  Included.  
 Horizontal Stabilizer: Included. 
 Vertical Stabilizer:  Included.
 Cowl:  Included.
 Parts Bag:  Included.
 Previous Part#: VMA-E260U

Previous Part# general information (for reference purposes only):

http://www.richmondrc.com/vma/common/techinfocommon/c260u/summary.htm

No other information is available regarding #ZBO-Y190611B  BLOWOUT - VMAR CORSAIR 60 SEMISCALE ARF - FINAL SALE

11.15. VMA-C360X Cessna 182 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Various Colors
11.15.1. VMA-C360X Cessna 182 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.15.2. VMA-C360X Cessna 182 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.15.2.1. VMA-C360X Cessna 182 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Extra Parts
Question: In the shipping box for my VMAR Cessna 182 45-60 ARF ECS I found several extra white plastic parts. What are they for?

 
Answer: The extra parts are optional but do help to dress up the model. The larger pieces are center wing joint covers. The smaller pieces are fairings that can be slid over the wing struts to hide the end fittings where the struts meet the wing.  
11.15.2.2. VMA-C360X Cessna 182 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Thrust Line Location

Question: In the instruction manual for the VMAR Cessna 182 45-60 ARF ECS it says to align to the thrust line with the engine "sharp". This is confusing and I don't understand this. What does this mean?

Answer: This is a misprint. It is supposed to say "shaft" not "sharp" as in align the thrust line with the engine shaft and specifically refers to the center of the engine shaft.

Supplementary Information: Here are some additional articles that may be helpful.

Firewall - Thrust Lines - Where are they? Horizontal and Vertical

Question: I am installing my engine. Where are the thrust lines on the firewall?

Answer: The horizontal thrust line normally appears on the forward face of the firewall or you draw the horizontal thrust line on the forward face of the firewall yourself following location instructions contained in the documentation that came with your model.

If there is no horizontal line indicated on the firewall and you are unable to locate the location of the line in the reference material there is an easy way to position the horiztonal thrust line youself. To do this, fit your cowl over the fuselage. Look at the cowl from the left and right sides and adjust the vertical angle of the cowl to align with the fuselage. There should not be any sharp drop or rise in the silhouette profile of the fuselage as you move your eye along the fuselage and over the cowl. Once you have the cowl in place, look through the front hole where the crankshaft is going to protrude. Mark the horizontal thrust line on the firewall so that it is evenly located up and down with respect to the hole in the front of the cowl.

The vertical thrust line lies up and down through the middle of the firewall. If it is not shown, you can simply draw it into place. Make sure it is in the middle.

You may also find this information on our web site. Look for the links to your model, then the link to the detailed information and browse down to the engine section. The position of the horizontal and/or vertical thrust line may be stated there.

Engine Orientation - Upright, Sideways, Inverted - Relation to Position on FIrewall

Question: How do I position my engine on the engine mounts and on the firewall when I intend on installing the engine at an angle or inverted rather than upright?

Short Answer: Regardless of orientation, the center line of the crankshaft must be positioned over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal thrust lines for your particular model. There are a few exceptions as described below.

Better Answer: Some models pretty much force you to install your engine in an upright orientation. Other models, particularly once you move up from basic trainers, offer you a variety of engine orientation options. Rotated 90 degrees is one such choice that often works well with Pitts style mufflers...  inverted (sometimes called 180 degree rotation) is another choice. Generally these non-upright orientations, hide more of the engine and muffler and result in a more realistic scale like appearance to the model.

The choice of what angle to use is pretty much up to you, limited by the physical size of the engine, muffler, cowl etc. Some engines for example can be oriented at 90 or 135 degrees but run into a physical problem at other angles... they hit something, the muffler won't clear the fuselage, the needle valve is at an awkward location etc. When selecting an angle to mount your engine, you have to balance off appearance, convenience, practicality and most of all make sure it can physically fit. Don't forget to test your planned installation angle with the muffler and carb installed. Also check out your engine manual for any specific guidance from the engine manufacturer. Some manufacturers don't recommend an exactly inverted 180 degree installation. We have found this to be good advice in many cases... 180 degree inversions have a tendency to smother the glow plug in oil and residue if run at low RPM for too long.

Once you've decided on the installation orientation that you want, the actual position of the engine on the firewall is no different with a rotated engine than it is with an upright engine. The engine thrust is always centered around the crankshaft and regardless of orientation, the center line of the crankshaft must be positioned over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal thrust lines for your particular model. The vertical thrust line lies up and down through the middle of the firewall. The horizontal thrust line is often drawn on the firewall or is to be draw on the firewall by you after referencing location information in the model instruction manual.  

There are some exceptions but the exceptions are few and far between... if the mounting face of the engine mounting lugs is offset from the center line of the crankshaft you have to adjust accordingly. This is rare, we have not seen this in standard two stroke engines. Engine manufacturers avoid this if at all possible. If you are working with a large gas engine adapted from another industry or a multi piston engine, examine the mounting system carefully and make sure you understand the relation between the engine mounting lugs and the center line of the crankshaft.

 

11.15.3. VMA-C360X Cessna 182 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.16. VMA-D014 Discovery 40 ARF Hi Wing 63 in. - Various Colors
11.16.1. VMA-D014 Discovery 40 ARF Hi Wing 63 in. - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.16.2. VMA-D014 Discovery 40 ARF Hi Wing 63 in. - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.16.3. VMA-D014 Discovery 40 ARF Hi Wing 63 in. - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.17. VMA-D160F Dewoitine D520 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Wood
11.17.1. VMA-D160F Dewoitine D520 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Assembly and Operations Manual

20200415

11.17.2. VMA-D160F Dewoitine D520 45-60 Semiscale ARF ECS - Specifications
 SPECIFICATIONS
 Part #: VMA-D160F
 Description: VMAR Dewoitine D520 45-60 Semiscale ARF - Polycote ECS Covering. All Wood. 
 Wing Span:62 in.
 Wing Area: 640 sq. in.
 Length: 47.25 in.
 Weight (Dry): 5.5 - 65. lbs. 
 Engine 2 Stroke:.45 - .60
 Engine 4 Stroke: .52 - .90
 Radio:4 Channels with 4 servos. 
 Features: Universal Servo Tray.  Built Up Ailerons.  Fibreglass Cowl.  Power Module Engine Mount System with Aluminum Engine Mount.  All Wood Construction. 
11.18. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS
11.18.1. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.18.1.1. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - General Information
 
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.18.1.2. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Supplement to the Manual
11.18.1.2.1. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Electric Power - Options
Question: I have a VMAR VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS.  What do you recommend for a power system?
 
Answer: We have a couple of options for you to consider:
 
1) Our VMAX Power Module for the DO27 1100EP is #VMM-D210XPM1. This consists of our VMAX Brushless Motor (#VMC-120B15VC) and our VMAX Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC). The motor and the ESC have been pre-installed onto the power module firewall to fit your model. 
 
2) Our VMAX Power Pack for the DO27 1100EP (#VMM-D210XPP1) contains the Power Module plus a LiPO battery pack, wiring harness and propeller.
 
Both of these options have been tested with the VMAR D027 1100EP and help you get into the air quickly and stay there!
 
 
11.18.1.2.2. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Electric Power - Wiring
Question: How should I wire my VMAR VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS?
 
Answer: The simplest solution is to use our VMAX Power Pack which comes with a brushless motor, electronic speed control (ESC with BEC), battery pack, propellor etc and includes a custom made wiring harness for the the DO27 1100EP.
The Power Pack for the DO27 11EP IS #VMM-D210XPP1.
 
If you have purchased the VMAX Power Pack please follow the installation instructions that come with the Power Pack. The VMAX Power Pack will save you hours of time and greatly reduce the chances of making an expensive mistake.

The DO27 1100EP includes a fuse switch assembly that is externally accessible and a short Y-splitter for coupling both aileron servos so that they can be driven from one receiver channel.
 
If you have your own motors, servos, speed controls etc that you intend on using, the manufacturer of these electric components is your best bet for advice.
 
11.18.1.3. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Important Information

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.18.1.3.1. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.18.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.18.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.18.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.18.2. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.18.2.1. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Control Rod Length - Adjusting
Question: Can I adjust the length of the control rods in my model?  I want to use my existing servos and shift one servo slightly and when I do that the rods seem slightly too long. What should I do?
 
Answer: Most VMAR models use an inner and outer plastic rod system for the control rods. At each end, the plastic inner rod usually couples to a threaded metal rod which in turn connects to a clevis.

1) Slightly Longer Control Rods: You can make the control rods slightly longer by adjusting the position of the clevis on the threaded metal rod at each end. Do not over do it or the clevis could come off under load. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any adjustment.

2) Much Longer Control Rods: You will need to change either the metal threaded rods at each end (we have these in stock in various lengths) OR cut the inner plastic rod and splice an additional piece of the splined plastic rod into place. Use 2mm threaded metal studs as couplers. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any such modification.

3) Shorter Control Rods: You can make the control rods slightly shorter by adjusting the position of the clevis on the threaded metal rod at each end. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any adjustment.

To further reduce the control rod length:

  • From one end of the rod, unscrew the clevis and threaded stud.
  • Use a pair of scissors or snips to cut the plastic rod to the shorter length you required.
  • Thread the stud and clevis back onto the plastic rod.
  • Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling.

4) If in any doubt about the security of any coupling, unthread the clevis and wick thin CA into the coupling between the stud and the plastic tube. Do not get CA into the clevis threads.

11.18.2.2. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Extra Hardware Items
Question: I have completed the assembly of my VMAR VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS and I have a few extra hardware items such as horns, screws and wing bolts. What are these for?
 
Answer: We usually include a few extra horns and wing bolts with all VMAR ARF's. You may also find a spare clevis and a couple of small screws depending on the model. These are free and intended to help you out if you drop or misplace one of these small items. If you have followed all of the assembly steps, completed your model, tested that your radio and control surfaces all move correctly, tug tested everything twice, just put any of extra hardware pieces in one of the bags and set it aside as spares just in case you need them later on. Don't throw anything out, you just never know when that screw, horn or nut may be needed!
11.18.2.3. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Glow Power - Tips
Question: Can I use a glow engine to power my VMAR VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS. If so what sizes are recommended? Any tips you can suggest on what I need to plan for? 
 
Answer: Yes the VMAR VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS can be powered with a glow engine. We suggest glow engines be  .06 to .10 cu. in.Please note that this model has been intended for Electric Flight and does not come with a tank or engine mount. It does however utilize the VMAR power module system which makes it easier to modify the propulsion system to glow.

Tips on use of glow power:
 
1) We recommend two stroke engines for this model. Four stroke engines tend to be bigger and heavier.
 
2) You will need to plan your fuel tank and engine mounting system with careful consideration for physical space particularly if you wish to try to install the engine so that you can use the cowl
 
3) Use Pacer Finishing Resin and a brush to throughly seal any exposed wood, particularly that of the firewall, the power module forward firewall and the attachment area on the wing. Also the wing saddle area. The exhaust from glow engines contains lots of hot vapourized and liquid oil residue. Although most of this oil will be channeled out in the exhaust, some oil will inevitably get on the model itself and will be absorbed by any unsealed wood. Oil can weaken glue joints and the wood itself.
 
4) Glow engines tend to produce considerable vibration particularly if the propellor is not balanced correctly. Take particular care to balance your propellor. Vibration can cause fuel feed problems, lean runs and engine cut off as well as structural failure, control surface flutter and/or separation and is very damaging to servos. It is very important to keep vibration to a minimum.
 
11.18.2.4. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Stage 11 Installing Electric Motor and ESC - Step 11C Mounting Screw (Bolt) Set
Question: Stage 11 Step 11C of my D210X Manual refers to installing four bolt and washer sets for mounting the motor. These bolt sets are stated to come with the kit but I did not get these in my kit. What's the story here?

Answer: The reference to the bolt sets (mounting screws) in your version of the D210X Manual is incorrect. These mounting screws come with the Power Module and Power Pack but are not included with the kit. Each motor is different and requires different mounting hardware and methods. We do provide a blank firewall set that can be drilled to suit nearly all motors. 
 
Mounting Screws - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What do I need in the way of mounting screws?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on what you have in mind:
a) VMAX VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motors that are supplied with VMAX Power Modules and VMAX Power Packs come pre-mounted with the appropriate screws for the motor.
 
b) The threads are 3mm and generally four 3mm x 6-12 mm machine hex head screws with washers will work.
 
c) We sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MS) consisting of four 3mm x 10mm hex head screws. Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
d) We also sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MT) consisting of 16 mounting screws. Four screws in each of four different sizes/styles.
  • 3 x 10 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (like VMM-111B18MS)
  • 3 x 16 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (longer version of above)
  • 3 x   6 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting)
  • 3 x 10 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting) 
The four different sizes/styles allow for thicker firewalls, multi-layer firewalls where the screw heads must be countersunk between the layers, etc.
 
This set provides for a very wide range of different mounting methods.
 
Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
CAUTION: When mounting motors using any method, ensure all fasteners are tightened securely. Check for vibration free operation of the motor. If not vibration free, reseat and retighten all fasteners and ancilliary components such as props and gears. Tighten fasteners firmly but don't strip the threads. Use medium strength thread locker on all metal to metal fasteners.

 

11.18.3. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.18.4. VMA-D210X DO27 1100 EP 43 in. Electric ARF ECS - Specifications
 SPECIFICATIONS
 Part #: VMA-D210Z
 Description: VMAR Dornier DO27 1100 EP ARF ECS - Civilian
 Wing Span:42.5 in.
 Wing Area: 290 sq. in.
 Length: 32.66 in.
 Weight (Dry): 23 - 25 oz.
 Engine: 2 Stroke Glow: .06 - .12 2 Stroke
 Motor Electric: 100-150 Watts Brushless such as VMAX VMM-111B18VM 
 Radio (for Glow):4 Channels with 5 micro servos such as VRS-140P08VS (9 gram)  
 Radio (for Electric):4 Channels with 4 micro servos such as VRS-140P08VS (9 gram)
11.19. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Various Colors
11.19.1. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.19.1.1. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.19.1.2. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Supplement to the Manual
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.19.1.2.1. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Ailerons and Flaps - Locations

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please note that this model has ailerons located outboard on the wings and flaps located inboard on the wings. The ailerons are activated by a servo in the bottom of each wing. The flaps are optional and will require two servos located in the more inboard wing cavities.  

11.19.1.2.2. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Control Horns

 

Control Horn Installation - How to

Question: How are VMAR control horns installed? 

Answer: VMAR control horns are unique. They work better and are easier to install. They do not look like most of the control horns you have seen before and you may not recognize them for what they are or you may think they are missing. They are in the control horn parts bag &/or wing parts bag  inside the master bag of hardware and consist of a metal bolt, metal nut, beveled white plastic washer, a white plastic T-nut and the white plastic control horn itself that connects to a clevis or rod.

The iillustration below and to the left shows a control horn set before installation. Note 5 parts make up the set. In Light Duty applications the Metal Nut may not be included and only 4 parts will make up the set. The illustration below and to the right shows a control horn set partially installed. Although illustrations in various manuals show the bevelled washer with the bevel pointing away from the surface we find that we get a cleaner strong installation with the bevel pointing inwards.

We recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP/CA (Pink) into the exposed wood surrounding the hole in the control surface. This helps further strengthen the wood. This is not a requirement but if you are pushing the power limits or planning on extreme aerobatics or speeds, the extra strength could come in handy. Use two applications of thin CA 1 minute apart, BEFORE installing the control horn.

The illustration below shows horn side view of a control horn set fully installed. The illustration to the left is a lighter duty application without the metal nut. The illustration to the right shows a heavier duty application with the metal nut installed. If the metal nuts have been supplied with the horns, we recommend using them.  

11.19.1.2.3. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Cowl - Handle Carefully

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please handle the cowl carefully. The cowl has been pre-painted to match the appearance of the full size aircraft that this model has been based upon. The shape of the cowl will be most realistic when fitted over the firewall.
 
11.19.1.2.4. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Engine & Prop Size - Recommendations

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

This model flies well on a .46 size two stroke engine such as the VMAX 46PRO or a .52 size two stroke engine such as the VMAX 52PRO. We suggest using a larger diameter lower pitch prop that you might have used on another model with a similar sized engine. Check your engine manual and select a prop that is at the maximum diameter in the recommended range of props for your engine. We have found that a .46 works well on this model with an 11 x 5 or 12 x 4 prop. The idea here is to locate the thrust out beyond the edge of the fuselage and cowl. A larger diameter prop helps accomplish this.
 
11.19.1.2.5. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Fuel Tank Installation - Page 9 & 10, Stage 18

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 4, Stage 5, Figures 5.1 and 5.2

Some servos have a rubber boot strain relief around the wire coming from the servo. Notch the bottom of the servo rails shown in Figures 5.1 and 5.2 to clear the rubber root or wire if required.   
 
11.19.1.2.6. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Long Servo Arm - Page 4 & 5, Stage 5 & 6

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 4 & 5, Stage 5 & 6,
 
Use a long servo arm and mount the servo as close to the servo cover plate as possible to maximize the length of the servo arm protruding from the bottom of the wing. 
 
 
11.19.1.2.7. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Servo Boot Clearance - Page 4, Stage 5, Figure 5.1 & 5.2

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 4, Stage 5, Figures 5.1 and 5.2

Some servos have a rubber boot strain relief around the wire coming from the servo. Notch the bottom of the servo rails shown in Figures 5.1 and 5.2 to clear the rubber root or wire if required.   
 
11.19.1.2.8. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Servo Cover Plates - Aileron & Flaps - Page 4 & 5, Stage 5 & 6

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 4, Stage 5, Figures 5.1 and 5.2

Some servos have a rubber boot strain relief around the wire coming from the servo. Notch the bottom of the servo rails shown in Figures 5.1 and 5.2 to clear the rubber root or wire if required.   
 
11.19.1.2.9. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Trim Pieces - Test before Cleaning

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20030321 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

The factory has supplied a number of trim pieces. Many of these pieces such as the chin blocks on either side of the fuselage near the cowl and the spats on the main landing gear legs have been pre-applied and painted with epoxy paint. Always test these painted surfaces for compatibitliy with any fuels, solvents or cleaning solutions. Review and follow our recommendations regarding cleaning your model.
 
11.19.1.3. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Important Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.19.1.3.1. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.19.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.19.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.19.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.19.2. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.19.3. VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.19.3.1. Logo VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS
11.19.3.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-D260X Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS
11.19.3.2. Pictures VMA-D260D Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Military
11.19.3.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-D260D Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Military
11.19.3.3. Pictures VMA-D260Z Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Civilian
11.19.3.3.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-D260D Dornier DO27 45-61 ARF ECS - Civilian
11.20. VMA-D290Z Dornier DO27 120+ Semiscale ARF
11.20.1. VMA-D290Z Dornier DO27 120+ Semiscale ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.21. VMA-D310X DO335 1240/300 Twin EP ARF ECS Electric - Various Colors
Technical Information related to the VMAR DO335 1240/300 Twin EP ARF ECS Electric
 
11.21.1. VMA-D310X DO335 1240/300 Twin EP ARF ECS Electric - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.21.2. VMA-D310X DO335 1240/300 Twin EP ARF ECS Electric - Specifications
 SPECIFICATIONS
 Part #: VMA-D310X
 Description: VMAR Dornier DO335 1240/300 Twin EP ARF ECS Electric
 Wing Span:48 in.
 Wing Area: 400 sq. in.
 Length: 37 in.
 Weight (Dry): 37-42 oz.
 Motor Electric: 150-250 Watts Brushless (x2) 
 Radio (for Electric):4 Channels with 4 micro servos such as VRS-140P08VS (9 gram)
11.22. VMA-E0014 Extra 300L 40-46 ARF ECS Sport
11.22.1. VMA-E0014 Extra 300L 40-46 ARF - Read Me First

Please see guidance attached.pdf.

11.22.2. VMA-E0014 Extra 300L 40-46 ARF - Parts, Options and Accessories
11.22.3. ZBO-Y190605A More Information

More Information about #ZBO-Y190605A ... BLOWOUT - VMAR EXTRA 300L 40 ARF - FINAL SALE 

This is a BLOWOUT... FINAL SALE item and the following caution applies: 

If you are able to build, repair, supply hardware for, assemble and set up without assistance you can save money buying a BLOWOUT item. If you are not able to perform these functions without assistance, you should NOT NOT NOT purchase a BLOWOUT item. Assume that work will be required and that some or all hardware and documentation will be missing. Shipping by Ground to USA and Canada only. Subject To Change Without Notice.

Without negating the caution above, we can provide the following additional information about this particular item:

 Overall Condition:  "New In Box" 
 Color:  Blue Trim on White Base. 
 Fuselage:  Included. 
 Wing:  Included.  
 Horizontal Stabilizer: Included. 
 Vertical Stabilizer:  Included.
 Cowl:  Included.
 Parts Bag:  Included.
 Previous Part#: VMA-E0014

Previous Part# general information (for reference purposes only):

http://www.richmondrc.com/vma/common/techinfocommon/e0014/summary.htm

No other information is available regarding #ZBO-Y190605A  BLOWOUT - VMAR EXTRA 300L 40 ARF - FINAL SALE

11.23. VMA-ETS120 Model Engine Test Stand
11.23.1. Firewalls Not Tight on VMA-ETS120 Model Engine Test Stand

We have received a some feedback re the firewalls on the VMAR Model Engine Test Stand being loose. This is a hazardous situation and users are cautioned to ensure that the Firewalls are not loose and do not become loose during operation.

Resolution:

In Brief: Review the safety instructions in the instruction book. Wear eye protection and stay well clear of the propellor and ahead of the propeller. See Page 10 Section 3.2.2 of the instruction book and note the importance of keeping the firewalls fitting SNUGLY between the steel beams. Tighten the bolts, apply the extra locking nuts to each bolt and check bolt and firewall tightness frequently. Reduce vibration.

In Detail: Firstly review the safety instructions. Wear eye protection and stay well clear of the propellor and ahead of the propeller.  The cinch bolts should be firmly tightened during assembly and the extra locking nuts should be applied to help keep the bolts from backing off under vibration. Everything possible should be done to reduce vibration when running an engine in the test stand... balance the propellor and the spinner... tighten the engine hold down clamps and engine mount bolts and firmly screw or clamp the entire Model Engine Test Stand to a heavy bench or other suitable surface before operating. Check and watch for any loosening of the cinch bolts, locking nuts, engine clamps, firewalls or other fasteners. Stop the engine if anything appears to be loosening up or appears visually blurry when you are looking at it. Do NOT operate the engine test stand unattended!

 

11.23.2. VMA-ETS120 Model Engine Test Stand - Rust on Metal Parts
Question: I have bought a VMAR Engine Test Stand #VMA-ETS120. Some of the metal hardware appears to be rusty. Is this a problem? What should I do?
 
Answer: This item is sourced from a factory in Southeast Asia. The temperature and humidity in the tropics are both high and the combination of high temperature and high humidity creates surface rust on all ferrous materials even when they are treated with normal plating.
 
The rust is surface based only and does not affect the utility or longevity of the product. Remember that an engine test stand will normally be literally dripping with oil within a few minutes of first use.
 
If you wish to remove the rust, one simple trick is to put the metal parts in a sock or bag and wash them with dishwasher soap in a dishwasher. Do NOT use the dry cycle... wash only. Then remove the metal parts and dry them by hand using a paper towel. Any rust remaining on rods or flat metal plates can then be removed using a bit of sandpaper. Finally, use a few drops of WD40 or 3-in-1 Oil to lubricate the bolt threads and you will be good to go.
 
 
 
11.24. VMA-E160X Edge 540T 45-61 ARF ECS Sport

 

11.24.1. Parts Check Off List - Does not match Box contents

Question: I have a VMAR Edge 540T and I notice that the parts check off list for some of the minor hardware does not match what I received in the kit. What is going on?

Answer: The parts in the Edge 540T are correct but the checkoff list is wrong.

Better Answer: We fouled up when printing the instruction book. The instruction book is correct in and of itself but the component check off list was copied from a model without plug in wings. The Edge 540T has plug in wings and therefore some of the parts like the wing joiner, dowels etc are not required on this model and are not included.

11.24.2. Plastic Wing Root Pieces - To seal between the Fuselage and Wing Roots

Question: I found two plastic pieces that appear to match the shape of the wing roots. What are these for?

Answer: These are a bonus component that was added to this model. Usually they appear on one "sheet" of plastic and can be cut out and mounted by the modeler after assembly. These are wing root fairings or covers and serve to provide a cleaner seal between the wing roots and the sides of the fuselage. They can be cut a bit large initially and then trimmed to fit.

Supplementary Information: Are they absolutely necessary? No they are not. They provide a better seal and look nice but they are not mandatory for flight.

What adhesive should I use to mount these? Always test any adhesive on a small out of view area of any painted or plastic component before proceeding. We generally recommend Pacer Dap-A-Goo for this type of component in this type of application. Dap-A-Goo is a silicone like material that has a solvent base rather than acetic acid and it dries quickly, fuel proof, relatively clear and best of all it sticks to just about any plastic and stays slightly flexible. Remember... ALWAYS TEST FIRST!

11.25. VMA-E24XX Easy 3D ARF ECS - Various Colors
11.25.1. VMA-E24XX Easy 3D ARF ECS - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below. 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.25.1.1. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 40-52 & Electric ARF - Aileron Horn Hole Location
Question: We have a VMAR Easy 3D and find that when we install the aileron servos and the aileron control horns they don't quite line up and the control rod ends up not quite perpendicular to the hinge line. Can we move the control horn slightly?
Answer: Yes. Simply redrill the control horn bolt holes so that your aileron control horn aligns better with your aileron servo arm. Depending on your servo arm length and the orientation of your servo you may wish to redrill the new horn bolt hole slightly inboard or slightly outboard of its original location.
 
To fill in the original hole use Epoxy or a short length of wood dowel.  
11.25.2. VMA-E24XX Easy 3D ARF ECS - Assembly & Operations Manual
20190602... the manufacturer (VMAR) has supplied a manual for the 45-52 Glow Powered version of this model. The manual for the glow powered model provided with the Glow powered model and with the Electric powered version to serve as a guide to the assembly process.
11.25.3. VMA-E24XX Easy 3D ARF ECS - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Part #: VMA-E24EX
Description: VMAR EASY 3D ELECTRIC ARF ECS
Wing Span:50.4 in.
Wing Area: 800 sq. in.
Wing Airfoil: Symmetrical
Length: 47 in.
Weight: 4.25-4.75 lbs.
Engine (Glow):.40-.52 2 Stroke
Motor Electric: 600-900 Watt Brushless
Radio: 4-5 Channels with 5 Servos. Computer Radio to utiliize Flaperons. 
Main Landing Gear: Aluminum
Cowl:Fibreglass
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.25.4. VMA-E24EX Easy 3D ARF ECS - Using Glow Power
Question: Is the VMAR Easy 3D intended for electric or glow power? I would like to use glow power. Can this be done?
 
Answer: Although some Easy 3D's are produced with the assumption that glow power will be used, most are produced with electric power in mind. The airframe is the same in any event. Only the power systems vary.
 
To use glow power in an Easy 3D that was intended for electric power (i.e. it was not shipped with a fuel tank or glow power engine mount) please see the sub-article below to configure your Easy 3D for glow power using our Glow Engine Installation Pack (#VMA-E240EIP) for the Easy 3D that includes a set of templates and the parts you require. The templates will also be helpful to modelers who are "going it alone" without our Installation Pack.
 
11.25.4.1. VMA-E240EIP Glow Engine Installation Pack for VMAR Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.25.4.1.1. VMA-E240EIP Glow Engine Installation Pack for VMAR Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.25.4.1.2. VMA-E240EIP Glow Engine Installation Pack for VMAR Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Important Information

When mounting your throttle servo you will need to install two mounting rails or a servo tray for the throttle servo. The Glow Engine Installation Pack does not include the rails or servo tray for the throttle servo.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.25.4.1.3. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Preparing for Glow Power - Templates
To prepare your Easy 3D for glow power, please review the Easy 3D Assembly and Operations Manual. Note in particular Step 14 Fitting the Fuel Tank and Step 15 Installing the Engine. Pictures 14D and 15A illustrate the engine mount, and power module firewall mounted at a 207 degree angle that works well for the VMAX 46PRO and VMAX 52PRO engines and other engines that have an beam mount spacing of approximately 1.53 in. (65 mm). (This is equivalent to a distance of 2.56 in. (65mm) between the outside faces of the beam mounts when clamped to the motor.)
 
In addition to an engine such as the VMAX 46PRO or 52PRO or similar two stroke engine you will require a fuel tank, two 7/32" diameter wooden dowels about 3.5 inches long, an engine mount (set of T-beams) and a piece of 3/16" plywood for the firewall. If you purchased the glow engine version of the Easy 3D you will find these parts included with your Easy 3D. If they were not included with your Easy 3D you will need to obtain these items either separately or as a set in our Glow Engine Installation Pack for the Easy 3D.
 
For reference, the individual parts are as follows (included in the Glow Engine Installation Pack #VMA-E240XEIP):
  • 3/16 in. Birch Plywood. (Metric 4 or 5 mm is acceptable)
  • 7/32 x 3.5 in. Round Dowels (5.5 mm). 1/4 in (6mm) can be used.
  • Fuel Tank #VMA-TANK3503
  • Engine Mount #RRC-MOUNTUNP.
  • Four #8 x 5/8 inch Button Head Sheet Metal Screws

You also will require Pacer ZAP-A-GAP CA+, a Glue Stick such as Super Glue Corp #SGC-GS88 and Pacer Dap-A-Goo or Silicone Sealer such as Super Glue Corp #SGC-THC. You may also require Pacer Finishing Resin and Pacer 30 Minute Epoxy.

We have prepared a set of templates to assist you with shaping the plywood firewall, installing the engine mount and modifying the fixed firewall at the front of the fuselage. These Templates are printed on sheets for cutout with scissors and are included with the Glow Engine Installation Pack for the Easy 3D. The Templates also can be downloaded from the attached file links below.
 
Please note that the Super Glue Corp Glue Stick #SGC-GS88 we have recommended contains a water soluble adhesive that is used to hold the templates into place. Once the work has been completed the templates can be peeled off and the adhesive removed from the wood surfaces using a moist cloth leaving a clean residue free surface.
 
For tools to make the job easier we suggest a fine toothed scroll saw, Dremel tool with drum sander, sandpaper, a drill or drill press and a set of drill bits.
  
11.25.4.1.4. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Make the Power Module Firewall
Please review Pictures 14D and 15A in the Easy 3D Assembly and Operations Manual. The power module firewall is the plywood piece that the engine "T-beam" mounts are attached to. The fuel tank is attached to the power module firewall and the fuel tank stopper and in/out tubes extend from the tank forward and through the power module firewall.
 
Use Template A.  Use scissors to trim to the outer perimeter of the power module firewall as shown on Template A. Attach the template to a suitably sized piece of good quality 3/16 inch plywood using a glue stick. You may wish to only attach the center and perimeter of the template to the firewall if you wish to more easily remove the template from your firewall later on.
 
Center punch the two holes marked A and the center hole at the intersection pont of all of the lines. Drill all three center punch locations with a 7/32" drill.
 
Use a scroll saw to cut the plywood to match the perimeter shape of the template.
 
Plywood with Template A - Before Cutting
 
Power Module Firewall - After Cutting
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11.25.4.1.5. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Align the Engine Mount (T-beams)
After completing the cutting and drilling of your power module firewall, review Pictures 14D and 15A in the Easy 3D Assembly and Operations Manual. 
 
Use Template B.  This template is used to position the T-beam engine mounts and subsequently drill the T-beam mounting holes in the power module firewall. This template is for the VMAX 46PRO, 52PRO and similar engines that mount on T-beams with approximately 1.53 in spacing (38mm) between the lug portion of the beams. If your engine mounting lugs require T-beam spacing that cannot work with 38mm spacing you can modify the template by cutting the template vertically along the center line and increasing or decreasing the distance between the resultant template halves to reflect the size of your engine.
 
The Template B sheet contains a expanded depiction of a typical T-beam mount and engine installation. Use scissors to cut out just the retangle bounded by the T-beam mounts as shown in Template B. Consult the pictures before cutting. You want to end up with Template B looking like the lighter (whiter) shaded paper shown in the pictures below.
 
Position the center point of Template B over the center line intersection point of Template A on the power module firewall. Rotate Template B 207 degrees counter clockwise from horizontal until the engine lug lines on Template B align with the corresponding diagonal lines (Z1 to Z1 and Z2 to Z2) shown on Template A attached earlier to the firewall. Ensure the center point of Template B remains centered over the fuel tank outlet hole while the lug line remains aligned diagonally. Secure Template B in this position using adhesive from a glue stick.    
 
Use a scroll saw to cut the fuel tank outlet clearance hole in the plywood as shown on the template. 
 
Center punch the four holes marked B. Drill all three center punch locations with a 5/32 inch drill. You can use a 3/16" drill if you wish to provide a bit looser tolerance. After drilling the holes, turn the firewall over and counter sink these four holes from the back of the wirewall using a 27/64 in. drill. Counter sink the holes to a depth of the thickness of a washer (approx 1-1.5mm) at the perimeter of the counter sunk holes.  
 
If you wish to seal the power module firewall, now is the time to do it. This is not mandatory but makes for a neater more professional looking finish. Remove the templates and wipe away any adhesive residue. Blow off any dust. Coat all surfaces with Pacer Finishing Resin. Set aside to cure.
 

Template B overlying and aligned with diagonal lines of Template A.

 
T-beam mounting holes drilled
 
Back view after T-beam mounting holes have been countersunk
 
11.25.4.1.6. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Install the Engine Mount (T-beams)
After aligning the engine mount T-beam mounting holes, you are ready to install the engine mounts.
 
Use four hex head 4mm bolts with washers under the heads. Insert the bolts through the firewall from the backside of the firewall. Position the T-beam mounts as shown in Pictures 14D and 15A in the Assembly and Operations Manual.
 
Loosely screw all four bolts through the firewall and though the T-beams and into 4 mm nuts before tightening any one bolt or nut. Once all bolts are inserted through firewall and the T-beams and engaged with the 4mm nuts, tighten the bolts and nuts snugly. Ensure the washers on the back side of the firewall sink down into the counter sink holes so that the outer surface of the washers are flush with the back surface of the power module firewall. Wait for 1 hour and then apply Pacer Z42 Blue Threadlocker to the nuts and the threads near the nuts. Retighten the bolts snugly.
 
Engine T-beam Mounts Installed - Back View
 
Engine T-beam Mounts Installed - Front View
 
 
11.25.4.1.7. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Install the Fuel Tank
After installing the engine mount T-beams and securing the nuts and bolts please review Step 14 in the Assembly and Operations Manual. Prepare your fuel tank per Step 14 and the associated pictures.
 
From the back of the firewall, insert the two 7/32 x 3.5 inch dowels into the 7/32 dowel holes drilled using Template A. If you are using 1/4 in. dowels, redrill the holes to 1/4" inside diameter. Insert the dowels only to the point where their forward ends are flush with the forward face of the firewall. You may wish to tap the dowels into the holes using a small hammer. Carefully study the tank tubes and alignment before proceeding. Make sure you know which tube is for what and which way around the tank is. Using Pacer Dap-A-Goo, glue the tank to the dowels and seal both sides of the tank black rubber gasket and tank neck and metal safety ring into place in the firewall center hole. Protect the tubes with tape while sealing. Hold the tank in place with masking tape until the sealant cures. Wick Pacer ZAP-A-GAP CA+ into the dowel holes from the front side of the firewall.

Set aside and let all adhesives and sealants cure.
 

Fuel Tank Installed - Back View

Fuel Tank Installed - Front View

 
11.25.4.1.8. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Modify the Fixed Firewall in the Fuselage.
Use Template C. Use scissors to trim to the outer perimeter of the fuselage as shown on Template C. Cut out the inner area of Template C that is bound by the black line. The black line denotes the fixed firewall installed by the factory for electric power systems. Carefully, center, align and attach template C to the forward face of the fixed firewall of the fuselage using adhesive from a glue stick.
 
Use a Dremel tool and sanding drum to carve away the fixed firewall to match the red line perimeter of Template C. Work in small steps and test the fit of your power module assembly frequently. Continue carving in small steps with frequent test fits until the fuel tank can be easily inserted into the fuselage from the front and the back face of the power module firewall can be pressed flush against the forward face of the fixed firewall while the power module firewall is centered and aligned.
 

Template C Applied to Firewall. Black Outline Represents Factory Cutout for Electric Power System. Use Drum Sander to Expand Cutout to Perimeter Denoted by Red Line.

Firewall After Cutting to Red Line

 
11.25.4.1.9. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Temporarily Attach the Power Module to the Fuselage.
Use two button head sheet metal screws to temporarily hold the power module centered and flush fitted to the front of the fuselage. This will enable you to attach the engine and check the cowl and muffler fit before completing the permanent installation of the power module firewall. We strongly suggest drilling pilot holes for the screws to prevent splitting wood in the fuselage.   
 
11.25.4.1.10. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Install Engine, Cowl, Muffler, Spinner & Throttle Control
See Step 15 of the Assembly and Operations Manual to install your engine, cowl, muffler and spinner. Use a Dremel drum sander and sharp scissors to cut out the cowl to fit your engine. Use Template D as a guide for cutting the cowl. Install your muffler and check the muffler clearances through the cowl and around the fuselage. Use an exhaust stack extender if necessary to enable the muffler to clear the fuselage.
 
See Step 19 of the Assembly & Operations Manual for routing and connection of the Throttle Control.
 

Cowl After Cutting - View From Front Lower Right Quarter

11.25.4.1.11. VMA-E240X Easy 3D 45-52 ARF - Finalize Attachment of the Power Module to the Fuselage.
After test fitting your engine, cowl, muffler and spinner you are ready to finalize the attachment of the power module to the fuselage.
 
There are two general ways to go about this, removeable or non-removeable.
 
If you want to be able to remove the power module for maintenance etc in the future we suggest using four button head sheet metal screws (four #8 x 5/8 Robertson screws provided). Use screws that are just long enough to go through the firewalls but not protrude into the fuel tank area. Choose the screw down points carefully to pick good solid widely distributed areas. Drill pilot holes through both firewalls being careful not to nick or hole the fuel tank.
 
Wick Pacer ZAP CA into the holes in the fuselage to toughen them up.
 
Firmly attach the power module to the fuselage using the screws.
 
If you want to permanently attach the power module to the fuselage, use Pacer 30 Minute ZEPOXY. Apply plenty of ZEPOXY to both the power module firewall and the fixed firewall. Flush the firewalls together ensuring that everything is aligned properly. Hold in place with masking tape or screws for several hours.
 
Clean away excess expoxy before it cures.
 
11.25.4.1.12. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.25.4.1.12.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.25.4.1.13. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.26. VMA-E260X Extra 330L 45-61 ARF ECS Sport
11.26.1. VMA-E260X Extra 330L 45-61 ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.26.2. VMA-E260X Extra 330L 45-61 ARF - CG - Where is it located? Is the manual correct?

Question: Where is the CG located on the VMAR Extra 330L 45-60 ARF ECS?

Answer: In stage 29 on page 15 of the manual there is a diagram and information as follows: The CG is located 4.75-5.25 inches (120-130 mm) back from the leading edge of the wing. This information is correct.

Additional Information: This is an aerobatic model. It is designed for aerobatics and is inherently less stable than a high wing trainer. The CG location affects its ability to do aerobatics. Setting the CG further forward will make the model more stable (easier to fly) but will limit it's ability to do aerobatics. Flyers who are unfamiliar with flying an Extra 330L OR who wish to test the model initially in a more stable configuration may wish to move the CG further forward for the first few flights. The CG can be moved ahead to lie up to 1/2" (12 mm) forward of the thickest part of the wing. This will be a more stable less aerobatically capable configuration. After becoming confident and more familiar with the flying characteristics the CG can be moved further aft towards the recommended location.

11.26.3. VMA-E260X Extra 330L 45-61 ARF - Plastic Wing Root Pieces - What are they for?

Question: I found two plastic pieces that appear to match the shape of the wing roots. What are these for?

Answer: These are a bonus component that was added to this model. Usually they appear on one "sheet" of plastic and can be cut out and mounted by the modeler after assembly. These are wing root fairings or covers and serve to provide a cleaner seal between the wing roots and the sides of the fuselage. They can be cut a bit large initially and then trimmed to fit.

Supplementary Information: Are they absolutely necessary? No they are not. They provide a better seal and look nice but they are not mandatory for flight.

What adhesive should I use to mount these? Always test any adhesive on a small out of view area of any painted or plastic component before proceeding. We generally recommend Pacer Dap-A-Goo for this type of component in this type of application. Dap-A-Goo is a silicone like material that has a solvent base rather than acetic acid and it dries quickly, fuel proof, relatively clear and best of all it sticks to just about any plastic and stays slightly flexible. Remember... ALWAYS TEST FIRST!

11.26.4. VMA-E260X Extra 330L 45-61 ARF - Template for Cowl Decal Placement
When placing the decals on the VMA-E260X Extra 330L cowl it may be helpful to use the template provided below as an attachment.
 
11.26.5. ZBO-Y190611A More Information

More Information about #ZBO-Y190611A ... BLOWOUT - VMAR EXTRA 330L 45-61 ARF (RED) - FINAL SALE 

This is a BLOWOUT... FINAL SALE item and the following caution applies: 

If you are able to build, repair, supply hardware for, assemble and set up without assistance you can save money buying a BLOWOUT item. If you are not able to perform these functions without assistance, you should NOT NOT NOT purchase a BLOWOUT item. Assume that work will be required and that some or all hardware and documentation will be missing. Shipping by Ground to USA and Canada only. Subject To Change Without Notice.

Without negating the caution above, we can provide the following additional information about this particular item:

 Overall Condition:  "New In Box" 
 Color:  Red
 Fuselage:  Included. 
 Wing:  Included.  
 Horizontal Stabilizer: Included. 
 Vertical Stabilizer:  Included.
 Cowl:  Included.
 Parts Bag:  Included.
 Previous Part#: VMA-E260R

Previous Part# general information (for reference purposes only):

http://www.richmondrc.com/vma/common/techinfocommon/e260x/summary.htm

No other information is available regarding #ZBO-Y190611A  BLOWOUT - VMAR EXTRA 330L 45-61 ARF (RED) - FINAL SALE

11.27. VMA-E340X Escape 40-52 ARF ECS Low Wing Trainer - Various Colors

Question: I am about to install the vertical stabilizer into my Escape. I find that when I am dry fitting and testing the installation of the vertical stabilizer before gluing that the rudder prevents full deflection of the elevator. The notch in the rudder that is intended to provide sufficent clearance appears to be slightly too high when viewed with the model top side up. What do I do?

Answer: This is a problem on some early production Escapes produced prior to 20050426. Enlarge the clearance slot in the rudder by about 1/8" expanding it downwards. This should be done BEFORE the vertical stabilizer is installed. Do NOT modify the elevator. See more information below.

More Information: See the attached picture. The Red tinted area should be cut away using a very sharp #11 blade OR preferably a powered fine blade scroll saw. Remove only about half of what is shown in the red tinted area and then do another trial fit. Only cut away more if you have to. Do NOT exceed the size of the red tinted area which as shown denotes removing a total of about 1/8" of material to expand the bottom limit of the cut out in the rudder.

After expanding the clearance hole in the rudder, wick thin CA such as ZAP CA from PACER into the wood edges of the cutout. Let the CA soak well into the wood. Do two applications. This will stiffen and significantly strengthen the wood. Now remove the covering from the pre-drilled rudder control horn hole represented by the blue circle in the picture (hold the rudder up to a light source to illuminate the hole if cannot locate it). Once the covering has been removed from both sides of the hole, wick thin CA into the edges of the hole. Let the CA soak well into the wood. Do two applications.

After the wood has been reinforced with CA, install the rudder control horn. Note carefully which way around you want to do this. Make sure that you have the control horn coming out the correct side of the rudder so that it connects to the rudder control rod. Seat the control horn firmly into the hole. You want a snug fit but do not overtighten. Remember that this is a model airplane not a Sherman Tank... no pipe wrenches please! After you have installed the control horn, again check that is correctly positioned and that it engages with the rudder control rod. Only after you are satisfied that the control horn is correctly positioned and snugly tight, then wick more CA or even better CA+ down the sides of the white T nut that is on the opposite side of the rudder. You want to fill any gap in the hole around the T-Nut so that there is one integral bond between the T-nut and the wood surrounding it.

Now you are ready to use 30 Minute Epoxy to glue the vertical stabilizer into place AFTER you do one more check on alignment, clearances etc.  

What to do if you have already glued the Vertical Stabilizer into place before you noticed the lack of clearance? Well it would have been best to check things out during the dry fit before you glued it into place BUT all is not lost. Review the information above and the picture attached. Then do what is described but you have to do the modification "in situ" i.e. in place. It's the same procedure just a bit more difficult to manage. Go slowing and carefully and use a shart #11 blade.

11.28. VMA-F210X Fournier RF4D 2000 ARF ECS Electric - Various Colors
Technical Information related to the VMAR Fournier RF4D 2000 ARF ECS Electric
 
11.28.1. VMA-F210X Fournier RF4D 2000 ARF ECS Electric - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.28.2. VMA-F210X Fournier RF4D 2000 ARF ECS Electric - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Part #: VMA-F210X
Description: VMAR Fournier RF4D 2000 ARF ECS Electric
Wing Span:80 in.
Wing Area: 600 sq. in.
Length: 43.5 in.
Weight (Dry): 3.5 lbs.
Motor Electric: 250-300 Watt Brushless
Radio: 4 Channels (4 Servos)
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.28.3. VMA-F210X Fournier RF4D 2000 ARF ECS Electric - Spinner

Various pictures of the VMAR Fournier and picture 12i on Page 7 of the Assembly & Operations Manual show a small spinner installed on the model.

This spinner was included by the manufacturer into some of the first production run, primarily the blue version of the model. The spinner was subsequently NOT included with later production runs of what were mainly the red version of the model.

If you find a spinner included with your model of the VMAR Fournier, we recommend NOT installing the spinner or it's related backing plate. It is difficult to install the spinner and backing plate in a secure and balanced manner. If your model did include a spinner (most do not) and you wish to install the spinner and backing plate, take extra care to ensure that they are securely held in place and balanced to keep vibration to a minimum.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.29. VMA-F35X08 Floats 40 ARF for 06-10 lbs (40-60) Models

202004018... noted that the F32x07 version has been superceded by the F35x08 version. The F35x08 version is approx 3 inch longer and 1 inch wider than the F32x07 version. Whereas the F32x07 version was rated for 05-09 lbs, the F35x08 version is rated for 06-10 lbs. 

The Assembly & Operations manual remains the same.  

11.29.1. What is the difference between the various versions of the 05-09lb float sets. How to Adapt?

Question: What is the difference between F32W07 F35W08 and F32W07B F35W08B or the difference between F32Y07 F35Y08 and F32Y07B F35Y08B?

(20200418... edits above... strokeouts superceded by type in red.  


Answer: The Floats are the same except for the color. The forward mounting bracket on the "B" version of the floats was designed to fit the early versions of the Beaver 40-60 ARF built prior to 20050101. These brackets have a three hole mounting system to match three pre-drilled holes in the bottom of the Beaver 40-60 ARF fuselage.

Since 20050101 the Beaver 40-60 ARF has four holes predrilled in the bottom of the fuselage for the standard main gear set that comes with the Beaver 40-60 ARF. The spacing of the holes in the bottom of the fuselage may not match the holes in the mounting bracket that comes with your floats. If it matches, you are good to go... if it does not match, four new holes will have to be drilled... this is not a big job if you follow the procedure outlined below.

Procedure:

Remove the forward mounting bracket from the float box. Turn the fuselage upside down and locate the pre-drilled holes in the bottom of the fuselage. Hold the mounting bracket with the flat non-tapered edge facing the engine end of the fuselage. Check the holes in the bracket vs the holes in the fuselage. If they match, attach the bracket to the fuselage with the screws provided. If they do not match, carefully center the mounting bracket and mark the location of the bracket holes on the fuselage using a ball point pen. Remove the bracket and examine the four pen marks. Plug the factory drilled holes in the fuselage with clear or white silicone. Use a 3/32" drill bit to make four new holes in the fuselage at the loction of the pen marks. 

Turn the fuselage upright and note the location of the four new holes in the landing gear flat plate in the bottom of the fuselage.  Locate the extra flat plate provided with the floats. Epoxy this plate into place inside the fuselage on top of the four holes you drilled. Let the Epoxy dry. Now turn the fuselage back over and drill the four holes again.

Attach the front bracket for the floats (flat non-tapered edge facing forward) to the fuselage with the four screws provided.

11.29.2. Floats - Hard Point Area... Can it be Moved?
Question: I want to adapt the VMAR Floats to fit on my model. Can I move the hard point attachment locations on the floats?
 

Answer: The hard point attachment points on the floats should not be moved. If you need to change the relative position of the floats with respect to your model (to position the step with respect to the CG for example) we recommend adding or relocating hard point locations within the fuselage of the model rather than modifying the floats.
 
 
11.30. VMA-F40X12 Floats 60-90 ARF for 09-15 lbs (60-90) Models

20200418

11.30.1. Floats - Hard Point Area... Can it be Moved?
Question: I want to adapt the VMAR Floats to fit on my model. Can I move the hard point attachment locations on the floats?
 

Answer: The hard point attachment points on the floats should not be moved. If you need to change the relative position of the floats with respect to your model (to position the step with respect to the CG for example) we recommend adding or relocating hard point locations within the fuselage of the model rather than modifying the floats.
 
 
11.31. VMA-F490X Phantom II 60-90 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS - USAF and USN
11.31.1. VMA-F490X Phantom II - Balancing for Correct CG Location - Adding Weight

Question: Should I expect to add weight to the VMAR Phantom in order to have the CG in the correct location? If I must add weight, where will it normally go and how much do you think I will need?

Answer: This will depend on the weight of your engine, servos, receiver and in particular the weight and location of your airborne battery pack.  

Additional Information: The VMAR Phantom accomodates two stroke engines in the .60-.91 size range. As of 2005, engines in this class are often built from the same casing and although the crankshaft may be a bit heavier in a .91 the case is a bit lighter. Hence, in many brands there is not much of a weight difference between a .60 and a .91 two stroke engine. Many popular engines in this class weigh, with muffler, approximately 24 oz.

Radio receivers generally do not vary in weight much between brands. Servos can vary in weight from servo to servo(ball bearing heavy duty servos weigh more than standard servos) and airborne battery packs can be significantly different depending on their voltage and mAh capacity.

Experience with a variety of standard servos, 4.8V-6.0V nicad packs and .60-.91 size two stroke engines weighing approximately 24 oz with muffler has shown that for first flights 6-8 oz of weight in the tail is needed for a CG location that is somewhat nose heavy. After first flights moving the CG back slightly within the recommended range may be desired and require 10-12 ounces of weight in the tail.

These guidelines are NOT considered to be suitable for all situations. If your engine is heavier than 24 ounces, you may need more weight in the tail. If you are using a 6.0V 2000 mAh airborne battery located in the aft end of the model you may need less additional weight in the tail than if you are using a 4.8V 600mAh battery. Each model should be carefully checked for CG and compared with the recommended CG location. First flights should be slightly nose heavy (forward CG location) and no model should be flown with a CG outside the recommended range.

11.31.2. VMA-F490X Dummy Fuel Tanks - Is it Ok to Fly with them?

Question: I have the VMAR Phantom 90+ ARF. The Phantom comes with set of Dummy Wing Tanks. Is it OK to fly the Phantom with the Dummy Wing Tanks in place?

Answer: Yes they are airworthy and you can fly the Phantom with the Dummy Wing Tanks in place.

11.31.3. VMA-F490X Electric Power? Can it be done?
F490X - Electric Power
 Question? Can the Phantom be modified to use Electric Power? I

If so....any suggestion as for Electric motor types and sizes?
 Answer? We have not given electrics any consideration in this model to date. It was designed and tested around .60-.91 two stroke glow engines only.

Additional Information: We are not aware of any particular reason why it could not be done using LiPo batteries and a high output brushless motor but have no information and have done no testing.

 

11.31.4. VMA-F490X Phantom II - Engine Sizes - Will it fly OK on a .60?

Question: Will the VMAR Phantom II fly OK on a .60? What do you recommend?

Answer: We recommend a .60 to .91 two stroke engine. Yes it flys well on a .61. A .75-.91 would be the best overall choice... .91 is the max and a bit over the top but favored by flyers who like power. Anything larger than a .91 will require considerable work on the fuselage nose section and you run the risk of detracting from the scale like appearance if you butcher the nose area. This model is NOT intended to accomodate four stroke engines.

Please note that we have NOT tested this model with two strokes larger than a .91 and have NOT tested this model with four strokes. We recommend the use of a .60 to .91 two stroke engine for this model. We are not able to endorse the use of two stroke engines larger than a .91 or the use of four stroke engines for this model.

 

11.31.5. VMA-F490X Phantom II - Exhaust Outlets - Fit
Question: Do I trim the open end of the exhaust outlets to fit over the factory installed "circles" that are attached to the rear of the fuselage?
 
Answer: Yes. The circles are 3-1/8 inches (79 mm) in diameter. When trimming the open end of the exhaust outlets to fit over these circles, trim any flashing away in small steps. If you over do it, the diameter of the exhaust cones will end up being 3 inches in diameter or less and will not fit over the factory installed mounting circles. If you do over  trim the exhaust outlets the easiest way to resolve this is use a magic marker to black out the edge of the factory circles and then cut new circles to match the inside diameter of your trimmed down exhaust outlets. Once you have cut new smaller circles glue the new circles in place on top of the factory installed circles so that they are centered within the circumference of the factory circles.
11.31.6. VMA-F490X Phantom II - Oleo Strut Sets - Are They Available?

Question: Are there oleo strut sets available for the VMAR Phantom II 60-91 ARF? Are they actually functional or just dummies?

Answer:  The VMAR Phantom II 60-91 ARF comes standard with fixed gear and we offer a set of oleo struts (3) for this model. Yes they are functional and easy to install. They are well made, work well, look very scale like and help protect your model from damage by sucking up hard landings and rough fields. These oleo strut sets are very economical and we offer them at a very low combo price to anyone buying them with the Phantom. See the VMAR On Line store at www.richmondrc.com . Look just below the Jets listing in the left frame. 

This combo offer is open to all owners of VMAR Phantom II 60-90 ARF's until the end of 2006... regardless of when or where the model  was purchased.  

For oleo strut installation instructions please click the following: Installation Tips - VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets  [New Window]

11.31.7. VMA-F490X Phantom II - Retract Recommendations

Question: If I want to install optional retracts in the VMAR Phantom II 60-91 ARF which retracts should I use?

Answer:  The VMAR Phantom II 60-91 ARF comes standard with fixed gear and it is ready to accept Robart mechanical retracts. Robart #608HD main gear retracts and the Robart #610 nose gear retract have been installed and tested in this model. Other brands of medium duty retracts can, with work be fitted. Please see the instructions that come with your retracts for specific installation instructions and requirements.  

11.31.8. VMA-F490X Phantom II - Retract Servo Requirements

Question: How many servos are needed if I want to install optional mechanical retracts in the VMAR Phantom II 60-91 ARF?

Answer: 2 standard servos for the mains and 1 standard servo for the nose gear. We recommend the use of Airtronics servos.

 

11.31.9. VMA-F490X Phantom II - Rudder Control Rod - Fit

Question: Is the control rod in the rudder of the VMAR Phantom II supposed to be a very tight fit or a slightly loose fit?

Answer: The control rod in the rudder of the VMAR Phantom II is intended to have a slightly loose fit until the vertical stabilizer is installed into the fuselage per the assembly and operations manual. Once installed per the manual, the control rod will have a tighter fit. After installation, always ensure that the control rod and rudder move freely with a standard servo.

11.32. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS - Camo & Grey
11.32.1. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.32.1.1. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.32.1.2. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Supplement to the Manual
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.32.1.2.1. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 ARF - Control Horns

 

Control Horn Installation - How to

Question: How are VMAR control horns installed? 

Answer: VMAR control horns are unique. They work better and are easier to install. They do not look like most of the control horns you have seen before and you may not recognize them for what they are or you may think they are missing. They are in the control horn parts bag &/or wing parts bag  inside the master bag of hardware and consist of a metal bolt, metal nut, beveled white plastic washer, a white plastic T-nut and the white plastic control horn itself that connects to a clevis or rod.

The iillustration below and to the left shows a control horn set before installation. Note 5 parts make up the set. In Light Duty applications the Metal Nut may not be included and only 4 parts will make up the set. The illustration below and to the right shows a control horn set partially installed. Although illustrations in various manuals show the bevelled washer with the bevel pointing away from the surface we find that we get a cleaner strong installation with the bevel pointing inwards.

We recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP/CA (Pink) into the exposed wood surrounding the hole in the control surface. This helps further strengthen the wood. This is not a requirement but if you are pushing the power limits or planning on extreme aerobatics or speeds, the extra strength could come in handy. Use two applications of thin CA 1 minute apart, BEFORE installing the control horn.

The illustration below shows horn side view of a control horn set fully installed. The illustration to the left is a lighter duty application without the metal nut. The illustration to the right shows a heavier duty application with the metal nut installed. If the metal nuts have been supplied with the horns, we recommend using them.  

11.32.1.2.2. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 ARF - Elevator Servo Mounts
PLEASE NOTE:
 
Before installing your elevator servos, ensure that the elevator servo mounts are securely attached to the surface of the horizontal stabilizer..
If the mounts appear to have been factory installed, you should consider the mounts to be only tacked into place to indicate positioning. Carefully secure the servo mounts to the horizontal stabilizer using 30 minute epoxy or good quality medium CA+ such as ZAP-A-GAP.
11.32.1.3. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Important Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.32.1.3.1. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Covering

This model uses VCOTE2 - 3DS Covering

VCOTE2-3DS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of VCOTE2 - 3DS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips and at www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") we have an expanded explanation for each of these Tips.

VCOTE2 - 3DS is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR. Please note that VCOTE2 - 3DS is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. As with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering so its important to read the Tips over FIRST. Whatever you want to do with VCOTE2 - 3DS, test it on a small out of the way area first.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to VCOTE2 - 3DS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the VCOTE2 - 3DS, work outdoors and after testing first on a small out of the way area, use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Alcohol over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Avoid raw fuel with nitro content higher than 15%. Dab away all raw fuel regardless of nitro content. Test a small out of the way area and all plastics first before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing, peal tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13 bigger) on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a heat gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use a heat gun and soft cotton cloth or glove and hand pressure to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates. Consult our Knowledge Base for further information.
  • Tools for Working with VCOTE2 - 3DS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.  

 

11.32.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.32.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.32.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.32.2. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below. 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.32.2.1. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Missile Set - Is it Included?

Question: Does a dummy missile set come with the VMAR F5E?

Answer: Yes, a dummy missile set comes with the VMAR F5E. 

11.32.2.2. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Oleo Struts - Available or Not?

Question: Does the VMAR F5E support the use of functional Oleo Struts?

Answer: Yes. The VMAR F5E supports the use of functional Oleo Struts. The VMAR Oleo Strut set  is #VMA-OLEO2S3. The Oleo Strut set includes two oleos for the main gear and one for the nose. It also includes the wheels, axles and wheel retainers.

11.32.2.3. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Retract Ready?

Question: Is the VMAR F5E retract ready?

Answer:  Yes the VMAR F5E is retract ready. We include nicely machined fixed gear and have pre-arranged the structure to accomodate easy installation of third party retracts.
11.32.2.4. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Retract Recommendations?

Question: If I want to install optional retracts in the VMAR F5E Tiger II 60-91 ARF which retracts should I use?

Answer:  The VMAR F5E Tiger II 60-91 ARF comes standard with fixed gear and it is ready to accept Robart mechanical retracts. Robart #608HD main gear retracts and the Robart #610 nose gear retract have been installed and tested in this model. Other brands of medium duty retracts can, with work be fitted. Please see the instructions that come with your retracts for specific installation instructions and requirements.  

11.32.3. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.32.4. VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.32.4.1. Logo VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF
11.32.4.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-F590X F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF
11.32.4.2. Pictures VMA-F590G F5E Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Gray
11.32.4.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-F590G F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Gray
11.32.4.3. Pictures VMA-F590U F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Camo
11.32.4.3.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-F590U F5E Tiger II 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Camo
11.33. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 JET (PROP) ARF 3DS - Blue & Navy
11.33.1. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.33.1.1. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.33.1.2. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Supplement to the Manual
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.33.1.2.1. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-90 ARF - Control Horns

 

Control Horn Installation - How to

Question: How are VMAR control horns installed? 

Answer: VMAR control horns are unique. They work better and are easier to install. They do not look like most of the control horns you have seen before and you may not recognize them for what they are or you may think they are missing. They are in the control horn parts bag &/or wing parts bag  inside the master bag of hardware and consist of a metal bolt, metal nut, beveled white plastic washer, a white plastic T-nut and the white plastic control horn itself that connects to a clevis or rod.

The iillustration below and to the left shows a control horn set before installation. Note 5 parts make up the set. In Light Duty applications the Metal Nut may not be included and only 4 parts will make up the set. The illustration below and to the right shows a control horn set partially installed. Although illustrations in various manuals show the bevelled washer with the bevel pointing away from the surface we find that we get a cleaner strong installation with the bevel pointing inwards.

We recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP/CA (Pink) into the exposed wood surrounding the hole in the control surface. This helps further strengthen the wood. This is not a requirement but if you are pushing the power limits or planning on extreme aerobatics or speeds, the extra strength could come in handy. Use two applications of thin CA 1 minute apart, BEFORE installing the control horn.

The illustration below shows horn side view of a control horn set fully installed. The illustration to the left is a lighter duty application without the metal nut. The illustration to the right shows a heavier duty application with the metal nut installed. If the metal nuts have been supplied with the horns, we recommend using them.  

11.33.1.2.2. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-90 ARF - Horizontal Stabilizer Fit - Page 6, Figure 6D

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20060822 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 6, Figure 6D.

Figure 6D shows the fitting of the horizontal stabilizers into the horizontal stabilizer slots in the side aft section of the fuselage.

The horizontal stabilizers fit into the slots in the fuselage and are to be seated securely into their respective fuselage slots in the same manner for both the left and right horizontal stabilizers. The distances shown in Figure 6D of the 20060822 version of the manual are incorrect. The "leading edge" distance (bottommost in the picture) should be approximately 16.14 in. (410 mm) and the "hinge line" distance (uppermost in the picture) should be approximately 13.31 in. (338 mm). These distances may vary slightly in production. The important point to note here is that the two horizontal stabilizers should be seated securely into their respective fuselage slots in the same manner for both the left and and right horizontal stabilizers.

The actual distances are not as critical as the requirements that:

  • Both horizontal stabilizers be securely inserted into their respective fuselage slots,
  • Both horizontal stabilizers are angled so that they are both oriented in a similar manner, and
  • Both elevators move freely without binding.  

 

11.33.1.2.3. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-90 ARF - Vertical Stabilizer Fit - Page 5, Figure 5C

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20060822 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 5, Figure 5C.

Step 5.1 and Figure 5C describe and show the dry test fitting of the vertical stabilizers into the vertical stabilizer slots in the top aft section of the fuselage.

The vertical stablizers fit into the slots in the fuselage and are to be seated securely into their respective fuselage slots in the same manner for both the left and right vertical stabilizers. The distances shown in Figure 5C of the 20060822 version of the manual are incorrect. The "leading edge" distance (rightmost in the picture) should be approximately 13.58 in. (345 mm) and the "hinge line" distance (leftmost in the picture) should be approximately 11.02 in. (280 mm). These distances may vary slightly in production. The important point to note here is that the two vertical stabilizers should be seated securely into their respective fuselate slots in the same manner for both the left and and right vertical stabilizers.

The actual distances are not as critical as the requirements that:

  • Both vertical stabilizers be securely inserted into their respective fuselage slots,
  • Both vertical stabilizers are angled so that they are both oriented in a similar manner, and
  • Both rudders move freely without binding.  

 

11.33.1.3. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Important Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.33.1.3.1. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Covering

This model uses VCOTE2 - 3DS Covering

VCOTE2-3DS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of VCOTE2 - 3DS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips and at www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") we have an expanded explanation for each of these Tips.

VCOTE2 - 3DS is a proprietary covering system engineered in Canada & available only from VMAR. Please note that VCOTE2 - 3DS is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. As with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering so its important to read the Tips over FIRST. Whatever you want to do with VCOTE2 - 3DS, test it on a small out of the way area first.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to VCOTE2 - 3DS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the VCOTE2 - 3DS, work outdoors and after testing first on a small out of the way area, use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Alcohol over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Avoid raw fuel with nitro content higher than 15%. Dab away all raw fuel regardless of nitro content. Test a small out of the way area and all plastics first before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing, peal tape back on itself so that the pulling is parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13 bigger) on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a heat gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use a heat gun and soft cotton cloth or glove and hand pressure to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates. Consult our Knowledge Base for further information.
  • Tools for Working with VCOTE2 - 3DS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.  

 

11.33.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.33.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.33.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.33.2. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below. 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.33.2.1. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Missile Set - Is it Included?

Question: Does a dummy missile set come with the VMAR F18?

Answer: A dummy missile set comes with the Navy Version of the VMAR F18. The Blue Angels version does NOT come with a missile set. The Blue Angels version is modeled after the aircraft used by the Blue Angels precision flying team where missiles are not permitted.

11.33.2.2. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Oleo Struts - Available or Not?

Question: Does the VMAR F18 support the use of functional Oleo Struts?

Answer: Yes. The VMAR F18 includes VMAR Oleo Strut set  #VMA-OLEO6S3. These are included with the kit and available as aftermarket replacements. The Oleo Strut set includes two oleos for the main and one for the nose. It also includes the wheels, axles and wheel retainers.

11.33.2.3. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Oleo Strut Nose Gear - Functional or Not?

Question: Is the steerable nose gear assembly for the VMAR F18 actually a functional Oleo strut?

Answer: Yes. In fact the steerable nose gear assembly for the VMAR F18 incorporates two functional Oleos: 

  • The regular Oleo dampens shock in the vertical axis.
  • The brace Oleo dampens longitudinal shock and limits the aft deflection of the nose gear  
11.33.2.4. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Oleo Strut Nose Gear - Steerable or Not?

Question: Is the Oleo Strut on the nose of the VMAR F18 steerable?

Answer: Yes the Oleo Strut for the nose gear of the VMAR F18 is steerable.

11.33.2.5. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Retract Ready?

Question: Is the VMAR F18 retract ready?

Answer: No the VMAR F18 is not retract ready. The F18 is a very unique design and we could not find any retract makers who had an economical reliable retract suitable for this model.

In theory a very skilled modeller could possibly adapt retract equipment available in the market to fit into the VMAR F18 and/or a machinist could make a set of retracts and then modify the VMAR F18 to accept them. This is a great deal of work and may not lead to a workable solution.

We do supply a set of functional Oleo Struts (3) for the VMAR F18 that work well and look very scale like.

11.33.2.6. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Tail Numbers - Blue Angels

Question: We have a VMAR F18 in Blue Angels schema at our field. It flies great and a few of us are thinking of forming a flying team using this model. Is it possible to get different tail numbers?

Answer: Yes. The VMAR F18 Blue Angels tail numbers range from 1 to 6. 

  • They are randomly stocked and we may not be able to guarantee the availability of a specific tail number at all times.
  • If you have a preference, let us know and we will try to get you what you are looking for from our stock.
  • If we don't have your preferred number let us know if an alternative will do.
  • Lastly, if you are willing to wait for our next shipment from the factory, tell us and we will custom order your F18 with your specified tail number on it.
11.33.3. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.33.4. VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.33.4.1. Logo VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF
11.33.4.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-F690X F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF
11.33.4.2. Pictures VMA-F690B F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Blue Angels
11.33.4.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-F690B F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Blue Angels
11.33.4.3. Pictures VMA-F690N F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Navy
11.33.4.3.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-F690N F18 Hornet 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Navy
11.34. VMA-H240X Hornet 40-52 ARF ECS Sport Trainer+

 

11.34.1. VMA-H240X Hornet 40-52 ARF ECS Sport Trainer+ - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.34.2. VMA-H240X Hornet 40-52 ARF ECS Sport Trainer+ - Fuel Tank - How to install

Question: How do I install the Fuel Tank into my VMAR Hornet 40-52ARF?

Answer: This is not difficult but the instruction book does not cover this directly.

Do the fuel tank setup first. Install the internal tubing and clunk(s). When the stopper has been tightened but not overtightened, install pieces of fuel tubing between or over the ends of the metal pipes to seal them against dirt and debris. Mark the back of the tank with an arrow pointing up so that you can clearly see which way the tank is to be positioned in the model.

Remove the black sealing gasket from the fuel tank. Apply sealant such as Pacer Dap-A-Goo to the front face of the tank around the neck and re-install the gasket. Apply more sealant to the front face of the gasket.

Insert the tank into the fuel tank compartment with the tubes forward and oriented so that the top of the tank is positioned correctly. Press the tank firmly against the back side of the firewall and secure in place while the sealant cures.

From the engine mount area, apply more sealant around the neck of the fuel tank working from the front of the fuselage.

When the sealant has dried, support the tank with sponge foam around the sides and bottom of the tank. You may wish to install your battery pack beneath or behind the tank before inserting the sponge foam.

11.34.3. VMA-H240X Hornet 40-52 ARF ECS Sport Trainer+ - Maximum Engine Size without modifying fuselage or engine mounts?

Question: What is the maximum engine size that can be mounted on the VMAR Hornet 40-52 ARF without modifying the fuselage or engine mounts?

Answer: The Maximum engine size is a .52 2 stroke or about a .70 four stroke provided that it will physically fit.

Better Answer: We can only endorse the use of engines up to .52 2 stroke in size or other engine types such as a 4 stroke having similar power.

The specifications on the engine mounts are as follows:


Engine Mount Engine Width Max: 1.3 in. (32 mm)
Engine Mount Engine Lug Length Max using Factory drilled holes: .7 in. (18.5 mm)

Engine Mount Engine Lug Length Max if using Custom drilled holes: 1.5 in. (39 mm)
Engine Mount T-Bar Beam Length Max: 2.9 in. (74 mm)

 

11.34.4. VMA-H240X Hornet 40-52 ARF ECS Sport Trainer+ - Servo Cavity for Aileron - Missing

Question: My VMAR Hornet ARF does not appear to have a cavity for the Aileron Servo. What should I do?

Answer: This is a manufacturing glitch that occurred on a few models produced in late 2006 and early 2007. The cavity is in fact there but the skin has not been trimmed away after covering.

This is easy to fix and takes about one minute per wing. Here is what to do:
 
  1. The cavity is to be 11 mm wide x 40 mm long in each wing. When the wings are joined, the cavity will be 22 mm wide x 40 mm long. This will accomodate major brand "standard" servos.
  2. Examine each wing root.
  3. The cavity is bounded at the front (towards leading edge of the wing) by the triangle stock adjacent to the wing spar joiner channel and bounded on the rear (towards the trailing edge of the wing) by a strip of "rail" hardwood. You can see the triangle stock and the rail strip from the wing roots. 
  4. Carefully cut away the balsa skin that lies over the cavity between the triangle stock and the rail strip. Each cut out will be approximately 11mm wide and 40 mm long.
  5. Test the cutout to ensure it will accomodate your standard servo. Trim to fit accordingly.
 
 
11.35. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Various Colors
Technical Information related to the VMAR JU52 Trimotor 64 in. ARF ECS. 
 
Notification Service - Subscribe Now
For automated update notifications please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service
 
11.35.1. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.35.1.1. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.35.1.2. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Supplement to the Manual

11.35.1.2.1. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Electric Power - Options
Question: My VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS Electric uses three motors. What do you recommend for a power system?
 
Answer: We have a couple of options for you to consider:
 
1) Our VMAX Power Module for the VMAR JU52 Trimotor is #VMM-J210XPM1. This consists of three of our VMAX Brushless Motors (#VMC-120B15VC) and three of our VMAX Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC). Each motor and ESC has been factory mounted to a power pylon ready to mate with the wing.
 
2) Our VMAX Power Pack for the VMAR JU52 Trimotor (#VMM-J210XPP1) contains the Power Module plus a LiPO battery pack, tri-motor wiring harness, two receiver throttle Y harnesses and 3 propellers. .
 
Both of these options have been tested with the VMAR JU52 Trimotor and help you get into the air quickly and stay there!
 
 
11.35.1.2.2. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Electric Power - Wiring
Question: My VMAR VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS uses three electric motors. How should I wire these up so that I can control them from the single throttle channel on my receiver?
 
Answer: The simplest solution is to use our VMAX Power Pack which comes with brushless motors, electronic speed controls (ESC), battery pack, propellors etc and includes a custom made Wiring Harness Set for the power and control system. The Power Pack for the VMAR JU52 Trimotor is #VMM-J210XPP1.
 
If you have your own motors, servos, speed controls etc that you intend on using in the VMAR JU52 Trimotor, the manufacturer of these electric components is your best bet for advice on operating in a Triple Power configuration. The Wiring Harness Set for the VMAR JU52 Trimotor (#VMA-J210XWHS) is available as an aftermarket accessory and in most installations will make it much easier to work with the VMAX Power Module, third party motors, speed controls and servos.
 
If you have purchased the VMAX Power Pack for the JU52 Trimotor (#VMM-J210XPP1) please follow the installation instructions that come with the Power Pack. The VMAX Power Pack will save you hours and hours of time and greatly reduce the chances of making an expensive mistake.
 
If you are using third party power components, follow their instructions. In the absence of specific information from the manufacturer here are some general tips that may assist you. Remember, without specific information from the supplier of your Motors and ESC, you run the risk of doing something wrong and such booboos are usually expensive. Use our tips with this in mind. We can't verify that these tips will work with third party equipment and strongly encourage you to obtain information from the manufacturer of your Motors and ESC.
 
a) Use three idential Brushless Motors and three identical Electronic Speed Controls (ESC). Each motor should have its own speed control. (see footnote below)
 
b) Connect each ESC to a Brushless Motor using the color coded wire as a guide. Test and ensure that the motor turns in the direction expected and that thrust is aft of the motor.
 
c) Make a power Y3-connector to feed power from your LiPo battery to the power input leads on both of your ESC's. 
 
d) Use the power Y3-connector to connect the power input to the ESC's to a common (1) LiPO battery source.
 
e) Make a throttle Y3-connector (you can serially gang up two Y connectors). This is necessary for Triple ESC operation which assumes that you are using three motors and three ESC's.
 
For TRIPLE ESC operation use ONLY the NEGATIVE (-) Power (usually black or brown) & SIGNAL lines
(see table below) between the receiver throttle channel and the ESC's.
 
Do NOT use the POSITIVE (+) Power (usually Red) wires.  
The following table serves as a guide to common radio systems and their wiring schema and color usage. Use this table with caution. If in doubt, please defer to information provided by your radio supplier.  
 
RADIO BRAND NEGATIVE (-) SIGNAL
VRS & Futaba Black White
Airtronics Z Black Blue
JR Brown Orange
HiTec Black Yellow
f) Plug the ESC throttle control wires into the ends of the throttle Y3-connector
 
g) Plug the remaining single end of the throttle Y3 connector into your receiver throttle channel.  
 
h) Use the airborne battery pack from your radio system to power your receiver. Do NOT attempt to use power from either BEC to power your receiver. You may wish to consider using a stand alone BEC such as that from Western Robotics to power your radio system but do NOT use the BEC's that are a part of many ESC's. They will not work in a triple power configuration.
 
i) Select suitable propellers for your motors and your speed controllers. The three props should be identical. Prop selection is vital with brushless motors. Overloading the motors and ESC by using the wrong prop can get very very expensive in a big hurry.
 
j) Verify that you can control the RPM of the motors via the receiver and that they produce similar RPM and thrust throughout the throttle range.  
 
Footnote: There may be some triple ESC's that enable you to control three Brushless motors from one ESC. These eliminates the need for a second and third ESC and may make the installation of third party components simpler. If you are using a triple ESC, ensure that you follow the manufacturers instructions regarding wiring and operations.
 
 
 
11.35.1.3. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Important Information

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.35.1.3.1. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.35.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.35.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.35.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.35.2. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.35.2.1. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Extra Hardware Items
Question: I have completed the assembly of my  VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor and I have a few extra hardware items such as horns, screws and wing bolts. What are these for?
 
Answer: We usually include a few extra horns and wing bolts with all VMAR ARF's. You may also find a spare clevis and a couple of small screws depending on the model. These are free and intended to help you out if you drop or misplace one of these small items. If you have followed all of the assembly steps, completed your model, tested that your radio and control surfaces all move correctly, tug tested everything twice, just put any of extra hardware pieces in one of the bags and set it aside as spares just in case you need them later on. Don't throw anything out, you just never know when that screw, horn or nut may be needed!
11.35.2.2. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Hinges - Spares Available
Question: I have snagged one of my control surfaces when tranporting my VMAR JU52 Trimotor. This resulted in breaking one of the hinges. The hinges are intended to be scale like and are not a regular hinge. Are the hinges available as a spare part?
 
Answer: Yes hinges are available as a spare part. For a package of hinges for replacement of the variety of unique hinges on the VMAR JU52 Trimotor please order #VMA-J210XHS1
11.35.2.3. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Glow Power - Tips
Question: Can I use glow engines to power my VMAR JU52 Trimotor? If so what sizes are recommended? Any tips you can suggest on what I need to plan for? 
 
Answer: Yes the VMAR JU52 Trimotor can be powered with glow engines. We suggest glow engines be at least .09 cu. in. each as a minimum. Maximum engine size should be limited to .15 cu. in. each for those on the wings and limited to .25 cu. in. for that in the nose of the fuselae. Please note that setting up and operating multiple glow engines is not for novices. It requires considerable expertise with modeling, glow engines and RC flying to be able to successfully equip and fly the VMAR JU52 Trimotor with glow engines.

Tips on use of glow power:
 
1) We recommend two stroke engines for this model. Four stroke engines tend to be bigger and heavier and they may cause structural failure of the standard wood engine mounting pylons.
 
2) You will need to plan your fuel tanks and engine mounting system with careful consideration for physical space particularly if you wish to try to install the engines so that you can utilize the scale like engine shrouds and nacelles.
 
3) Do NOT permanently attach the engine mounting pylons (factory assembled of wood) to the wing or fuselage until you have test fitted the engine mounting pylons, engine mounts, engines, mufflers, fuel tanks, fuel tubing, throttle linkages, engine shrouds and nacelles.
 
4) Once you have test fitted all of the components related to the glow engines, follow the instructions in the assembly and operations manual to attach the engine pylons to the wing and fuselage.  Ensure they are aligned and fitted properly. Let adhesives used cure thoroughly before proceeding.
 
5) Use Pacer Finishing Resin and a brush to throughly seal any exposed wood, particularly that of the engine mounting pylons and the attachment area on the wing and fuselage. Also the wing saddle area. The exhaust from glow engines contains lots of hot vapourized and liquid oil residue. Although most of this oil will be channeled out in the exhaust, some oil will inevitably get on the model itself and will be absorbed by any unsealed wood. Oil can weaken glue joints and the wood itself.
 
6) Glow engines tend to produce considerable vibration particularly in a twin configuration when the engines are not quite at the same RPM. Take particular care to balance your props and to run the engines at the same RPM when compared to each other throughout the range of throttle positions. Vibration can cause fuel feed problems, lean runs and engine cut off as well as structural failure, control surface flutter and/or separation and is very damaging to servos. It is very important to keep vibration to a minimum.
 
 
 
 
11.35.3. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.35.4. VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.35.4.1. Logo VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS
11.35.4.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS
11.35.4.2. Pictures VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Lufthansa
11.35.4.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Lufthansa
11.36. VMA-M024 T34C Mentor 40 Semi-Scale ARF
11.36.1. VMA-M024 T34C Mentor 40 Semi-Scale ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.37. VMA-M340U P51D Mustang 40 ARF - Big Beautiful Doll

 

11.37.1. VMA-M340U Mustang - Retract Ready - Cutouts or Not? New Fixed Gear Mounting Method.
Question: Is the #VMA-M340U P51D Mustang retract ready? Have there been different configurations and different fixed gear sets supplied in the kit?
 
Answer: Yes to both questions.
 
Better Answer: Yes the VMAR #VMA-M340U Mustang is retract ready. All except the earliest models made prior to mid 2003.
 
There have been a number of variations of the factory implementation of the retract cavities.
 
Mustangs made from mid 2003 to the summer of 2004 had the cavities cut out at the factory and lined with plastic inserts and a set of flat covers were provided that modelers could attach with ZAP or Pacer Dap-A-Goo (works best) if retracts were not being installed.  
 
Beginning summer 2004, the factory pre-installed the retract rails etc then they are covered over. Modelers who wish to install retracts can cut away the covering and install the plastic cavity inserts ONLY if they wish to install retracts. The plastic cavity inserts are included in the kit. We recommend Pacer Dap-A-Goo for installing the cavity inserts. Always test fit and test a small amount of any adhesive on any plastic and covering before proceeding.
 
When the VMAR Mustang 45-60 ARF was made retract ready, the fixed gear that comes with the kit were changed to allow the fixed gear to be bolted into a standard block mounting cavity that could later accomodate optional retracts. The instruction book may show wire fixed gear being fitted into slots in the wing. This is correct for models produced prior to mid 2003. Since mid 2003 the fixed gear uses a block mounting system with screws (4/wing) instead of the slots and clamps used in earlier production.
11.37.2. Cowl - Detailing - Strips applied in Checkerboard Pattern

Question: I have purchased a VMAR P51D Mustang with Big Beautiful Doll graphics. The cowl in the picture has a checkerboard pattern. How is this done?

Answer: The cowl comes pre-painted in a silver color with a roll of black and white strips that are used for the checkerboard pattern. The strips are rolled up and usually in the nose of the cowl when shipped or in the parts bag.

Better Answer: First lay out either the white or black strips in lines on the cowl. Just do one of the colors for now. Mask out what you want to keep of the first color and using a sharp knife cut away the excess. Now lay the second set of colored strips down into the cutout areas and again cut away the excess leaving a checkboard pattern of white and black squares.

11.37.3. VMA-M340U P51D Mustang 40-52ARF - Plastic Scoop and Fairing Placement

Question: I have a VMAR P51D 45-52 ARF. This ARF comes with what looks like an airscoop and another plastic plate like fairing. Where do these go and how do I attach them?

Answer: Both of these trim pieces go on the bottom of the wing. We recommend attaching the wing to the fuselage before applying the trim pieces.

Both pieces are to be centered over the wing joint seam.

The plate like fairing is to be applied near the leading edge of the wing with the flat face forward so that it butts up against the fuselage.

The air scoop is to be applied near the trailing edge of the wing with the scoop inlet facing forward and about 1/4" of overhanging flashing at the back of the scoop overlapping the fuselage. When correctly positioned and overhanging the fuselage at the back, the wing bolts will be accessible with the scoop remaining in place.

Dry mount both pieces and if necessary trim the fit with a sharp #11 blade.

Once dry fitting well, glue the trim pieces to the wing with Pacer Dap-A-Goo. This is a silicone like material that dries flexible and sticks well to the trim pieces and the covering. Apply the Dap-A-Goo to the trim pieces in a thin bead just inboard from the outer edge. Do not apply Dap-A-Goo to the flashing of the airscoop that overlaps on to the fuselage. Apply the fairing first. Wipe away any excess Dap-A-Goo and secure firmly with low tack masking tape. Then apply the scoop and secure with low tack masking tape. Let dry for several hours and then remove the tape by pealing it back upon itself. Do NOT pull the tape off at right angles to the surface to which it is stuck.

 

11.38. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS - USSR
11.38.1. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Extra Wood Servo Tray Parts - What are they for?

Question:  My Mig 21 included some parts that look like two servo tray sets made from plywood. What these for?

Answer: The Mig21 is retract ready. The extra plywood servo tray sets are for retract servos if fitted and can be placed where ever suitable for your retract setup and your servos

11.38.2. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Landing Gear Mounting Screws - What Size?

Question: My Mig 21 came with fixed landing gear pre-mounted into blocks with a metal retaining plate. There are also pre-drilled mounting holes in the wing and fuselage that match with the retaining plate. What screws do you recommend for attaching the gear to the wing and fuselage?

Answer: Early production runs of the Mig 21 came with 12 metric Phillips head wood screws. Depending on market preferences around the world some modelers did not like the Phillips head and other modelers did not like the metric threads. The factory no longer provides the screws with the model leaving the choice of screws open the modeller.

Generally we suggest a pan head #6 or #8 wood or self tapping sheet metal screw about 5/8" long. Try the #6 first. Thread it into the pre-drilled holes and ensure that it bites into the mounting rail wood properly. If it does... go with the #6 screws. If the pre-drilled holes are too large for a #6 screw, try a #8 but if it is a tight fit, do not screw it in all the way. Back it out and redrill the holes first. You do NOT want to split the rails by forcing a large screw into a small pilot hole.

 

11.38.3. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Lock Nuts for Wing - Superceded by new Wing Nuts

Question: On page two of the Assembly and Operators Manual that came with my Mig21 (version 20050329 per back cover) there is mention of four lock nuts in addition to four butterfly nuts. I cannot find these four lock nuts. What should I do?

Answer: The lock nuts were difficult to install and remove when used in conjunction with butterfly nuts. We are now using a better grade of butterfly nuts that do not require the use of additional lock nuts. Lock nuts are no longer included with the Mig21. If you do not wish to remove the wings for transport and want a longer term solution to ensure the butterfly nuts remain snug, use medium thread locker such as Z42 from Pacer.

In any event, check the butterfly nuts before each flying outing to ensure they are snug (do not overtighten or you will strip the studs) and retain the wing securely attached to the fuselage.

 

 

11.38.4. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Engine Mounts - Where are they?

Question: I can not find the engine mounts for my Mig 21. What should I do?

Answer: The engine mounts are wrapped in foam and packed by the factory into the fuselage. Remove the fuselage hatch from the bottom of the fuselage and the power module firewall from the front of the fuselage and retrieve the engine mounts.  

11.38.5. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Rudder Control Rod Connection - Mark One Version

Question: The control rod for the rudder on my Mig 21 connects to a vertical torque rod that activates the rudder. All of this is internal within the aft end of the fuselage. Given that the rudder hinge line is swept back, how can I have this work properly?

Answer: The Mig21 has undergone several upgrades since the Mark I production lot was released in mid 2005. The rudder connection has since been changed to an external connecting rod and horn system.

For Mark I models with the internal rudder control rod system, there are two simply approaches to having this work better.

1) Leave the control rod system internal to the fuselage but change to a ball link on the arm that is connected to the torque rod. Leave the end of the control rod itself free to move laterally side to side but use a ball link to accomodate the difference in angle caused by the rotation of the swept rudder.

2) Change the control rod for the rudder to be external and connect to a traditional external rudder control horn. The further addition of a ball link on the horn itself may make for a smoother movement.

 

11.38.6. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Wing Root Gaskets - Where are they?

Question: On page two of the Assembly and Operators Manual that came with my Mig21 (version 20050329 per back cover) there is mention of wing root gaskets. I cannot find them. What should I do?

Answer: The Mig21 wing fits into cavities in the sides of the fuselage. The wing root joint is therefore recessed and not exposed directly to air flow. The wing root gaskets are not necessary and not included with the Mig21 due to this unique method of recessing the wing roots into cavities in the sides of the fuselage.

11.38.7. VMA-M490R Mig 21 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual
11.39. VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF - SHORT FUSE SALLEE
Technical Information related to the VMAR VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF
 
11.39.1. VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF - SHORT FUSE SALLEE - Assembly & Operations Manual

The assembly and operations manual for the VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF is attached here for download.

11.39.1.1. VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF - SHORT FUSE SALLEE - Assembly & Operations Manual - Errata
None.
11.39.2. VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF - SHORT FUSE SALLEE - Horizontal Stabilizer Pictures & Dimensions

20200105... See attached.pdf (x2) for pictures and dimensions of the VMA-M195U Horizontal Stabilizer. 

11.39.3. VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF - SHORT FUSE SALLEE - Specifications
 SPECIFICATIONS
 Part #:  VMA-M195U
 Description:  VMAR P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF
 Wing Span: 77 in.
 Wing Area:  1100 sq. in.
 Length:  67 in.
 Weight (Dry):  10 - 12 lbs.
 Engine: 2 Stroke Glow .90 - 1.20
 Engine: 4 Stroke Glow 1.20 - 1.80
 Motor Electric:  1500 Watt Brushless
 Radio:  4 - 6 Channels
11.40. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Various Colors
Technical Information related to the VMAR Nouvo 1300 EP ARF ECS Electric with 51 inch wing span.
 
Notification Service - Subscribe Now
For automated update notifications please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service
 
11.40.1. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.40.1.1. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300EP 51 in. Electric ARF - General Information
 
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.40.1.2. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Supplement to the Manual
11.40.1.2.1. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Electric Power - Options
Question: I have a VMAR VMA-N210X  Nouvo 1300EP 51 in. Electric ARF.  What do you recommend for a power system?
 
Answer: We have a couple of options for you to consider:
 
1) Our VMAX Power Module for the Nouvo 1300EP is #VMM-N210XPM1. This consists of our VMAX Brushless Motor (#VMC-120B15VC) and our VMAX Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC). The motor and the ESC have been pre-installed onto the power module firewall to fit your model. 
 
2) Our VMAX Power Pack for the Nouvo 1300EP (#VMM-N210XPP1) contains the Power Module plus a LiPO battery pack, wiring harness and propeller.
 
Both of these options have been tested with the VMAR Nouvo 1300EP and help you get into the air quickly and stay there!
 
 
11.40.1.2.2. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Electric Power - Wiring
Question: How should I wire my VMAR Nouvo 1300 51 in. Electric ARF?
 
Answer: The simplest solution is to use our VMAX Power Pack which comes with a brushless motor, electronic speed control (ESC with BEC), battery pack, propellor etc and includes a custom made wiring harness for the the Nouvo 1300EP.
The Power Pack for the Nouvo is #VMM-N210XPP1.
 
If you have purchased the VMAX Power Pack please follow the installation instructions that come with the Power Pack. The VMAX Power Pack will save you hours of time and greatly reduce the chances of making an expensive mistake.

The Nouvo 1300EP includes a fuse switch assembly that is externally accessible and a short Y-splitter for coupling both aileron servos so that they can be driven from one receiver channel.
 
If you have your own motors, servos, speed controls etc that you intend on using, the manufacturer of these electric components is your best bet for advice.
 
11.40.1.2.3. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Firewall (Power Module) Spacing - Page 7, Figure 11K

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20070418 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 7, Figure 11K.

Figure 11K illustrates the spacing between the fixed firewall in the front of the fuselage and the power module firewall to which is attached the motor and speed control.

The picture is correct. However the red type annotated distance shown in Figure 11K of the 20070418 version of the manual is incorrect. The distance should be .39 in. (10 mm).

The actual distance is not particularly critital. What is important is that: 

  • The spacing is equal at all four bolt locations.
  • The cowl can be pushed over the motor and power module firewall and back onto the fuselage with an overlap of 1/8 in. (3 mm)
  • The cowl does not touch the motor itself.

 

11.40.1.3. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Important Information

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.40.1.3.1. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.40.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.40.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.40.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.40.2. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.40.2.1. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Control Rod Length - Adjusting
Question: Can I adjust the length of the control rods in my model?  I want to use my existing servos and shift one servo slightly and when I do that the rods seem slightly too long. What should I do?
 
Answer: Most VMAR models use an inner and outer plastic rod system for the control rods. At each end, the plastic inner rod usually couples to a threaded metal rod which in turn connects to a clevis.

1) Slightly Longer Control Rods: You can make the control rods slightly longer by adjusting the position of the clevis on the threaded metal rod at each end. Do not over do it or the clevis could come off under load. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any adjustment.

2) Much Longer Control Rods: You will need to change either the metal threaded rods at each end (we have these in stock in various lengths) OR cut the inner plastic rod and splice an additional piece of the splined plastic rod into place. Use 2mm threaded metal studs as couplers. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any such modification.

3) Shorter Control Rods: You can make the control rods slightly shorter by adjusting the position of the clevis on the threaded metal rod at each end. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any adjustment.

To further reduce the control rod length:

  • From one end of the rod, unscrew the clevis and threaded stud.
  • Use a pair of scissors or snips to cut the plastic rod to the shorter length you required.
  • Thread the stud and clevis back onto the plastic rod.
  • Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling.

4) If in any doubt about the security of any coupling, unthread the clevis and wick thin CA into the coupling between the stud and the plastic tube. Do not get CA into the clevis threads.

11.40.2.2. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Extra Hardware Items
Question: I have completed the assembly of my VMAR Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF and I have a few extra hardware items such as horns, screws and wing bolts. What are these for?
 
Answer: We usually include a few extra horns and wing bolts with all VMAR ARF's. You may also find a spare clevis and a couple of small screws depending on the model. These are free and intended to help you out if you drop or misplace one of these small items. If you have followed all of the assembly steps, completed your model, tested that your radio and control surfaces all move correctly, tug tested everything twice, just put any of extra hardware pieces in one of the bags and set it aside as spares just in case you need them later on. Don't throw anything out, you just never know when that screw, horn or nut may be needed!
11.40.2.3. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Stage 11 Installing Electric Motor and ESC - Step 11C Mounting Screw (Bolt) Set
Question: Stage 11 Step 11C of my N210X Manual refers to installing four bolt and washer sets for mounting the motor. These bolt sets are stated to come with the kit but I did not get these in my kit. What's the story here?

Answer: The reference to the bolt sets (mounting screws) in your version of the N210X Manual is incorrect. These mounting screws come with the Power Module and Power Pack but are not included with the kit. Each motor is different and requires different mounting hardware and methods. We do provide a blank firewall set that can be drilled to suit nearly all motors. 
 
Mounting Screws - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What do I need in the way of mounting screws?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on what you have in mind:
a) VMAX VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motors that are supplied with VMAX Power Modules and VMAX Power Packs come pre-mounted with the appropriate screws for the motor.
 
b) The threads are 3mm and generally four 3mm x 6-12 mm machine hex head screws with washers will work.
 
c) We sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MS) consisting of four 3mm x 10mm hex head screws. Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
d) We also sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MT) consisting of 16 mounting screws. Four screws in each of four different sizes/styles.
  • 3 x 10 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (like VMM-111B18MS)
  • 3 x 16 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (longer version of above)
  • 3 x   6 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting)
  • 3 x 10 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting) 
The four different sizes/styles allow for thicker firewalls, multi-layer firewalls where the screw heads must be countersunk between the layers, etc.
 
This set provides for a very wide range of different mounting methods.
 
Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
CAUTION: When mounting motors using any method, ensure all fasteners are tightened securely. Check for vibration free operation of the motor. If not vibration free, reseat and retighten all fasteners and ancilliary components such as props and gears. Tighten fasteners firmly but don't strip the threads. Use medium strength thread locker on all metal to metal fasteners.

 

11.40.2.4. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Pilots - What sizes fit?
Question: Can pilots be installed in the VMAR Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF? 
 
Answer: The design does not provide for a pilot. The Nouvo 1300 EP has simulated windows and hence the cockpit area is not visible from the outside of the model. You may wish to consider our slightly larger semi-scale model of the J3 Cub, L4 Grasshopper or Bird Dog.
 
11.40.2.5. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. ARF - Glow Power - Tips
Question: Can I use glow engines to power my VMAR Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. ARF? If so what sizes are recommended? Any tips you can suggest on what I need to plan for? 
 
Answer: Yes the VMAR Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. ARF can be powered with glow engines. We suggest glow engines be  .06 to .10 cu. in.Please note that this model has been intended for Electric Flight and does not come with a tank or engine mount. It does however utilize the VMAR power module system which makes it easier to modify the propulsion system to glow.

Tips on use of glow power:
 
1) We recommend two stroke engines for this model. Four stroke engines tend to be bigger and heavier.
 
2) You will need to plan your fuel tank and engine mounting system with careful consideration for physical space particularly if you wish to try to install the engine so that you can use the cowl
 
3) Use Pacer Finishing Resin and a brush to throughly seal any exposed wood, particularly that of the firewall, the power module forward firewall and the attachment area on the wing. Also the wing saddle area. The exhaust from glow engines contains lots of hot vapourized and liquid oil residue. Although most of this oil will be channeled out in the exhaust, some oil will inevitably get on the model itself and will be absorbed by any unsealed wood. Oil can weaken glue joints and the wood itself.
 
4) Glow engines tend to produce considerable vibration particularly if the propellor is not balanced correctly. Take particular care to balance your propellor. Vibration can cause fuel feed problems, lean runs and engine cut off as well as structural failure, control surface flutter and/or separation and is very damaging to servos. It is very important to keep vibration to a minimum.
 
11.40.3. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.40.4. VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.40.4.1. Logo VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF
11.40.4.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF
11.40.4.2. Pictures VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Blue
11.40.4.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Blue
11.41. VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets - For various VMAR ARFS & other 60-90 size models
11.41.1. Construction - VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets

Question: What are the VMAR functional oleo struts made from?

Answer: VMAR functional oleo struts are made primarily from Chromoly 4041 steel alloy. Chromoly is an abbreviation for "chromium-molybdenum steel". Chromoly offers high tensile strength, good malleability, easier welding and better durability than standard 1020 steel tubing.

The outer components are painted. The inner "oleo" that moves up and down is not painted.and appears naturally as a darkish "GunMetal" color.

11.41.2. Installation Tips - VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets

Question: I have a set of the VMAR Oleo Struts for my VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF. Do you have any tips re installing them?

Answer: Here is a procedure that will work with the VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF's and most other models assuming that the factory standard gear is made from 5/32 to 3/16" wire.

It's important to understand the basic approach first:

Examine the oleo struts and you will find a channel running down the center of each strut from the non-wheeled end. This channel has two set screws entering it from the side of the strut. The oleos are installed by cutting the factory wire landing gear to the correct length and sliding the oleos over the factory wire landing gear "stubs" after you have the length of the wire cut down to fit. The oleos are then locked on to the wire by the set screws.

Now for some specifics:

  1. Test that the factory gear wire is of a diameter that fits into the channel running vertically down the center of each oleo strut. If the wire is too large in diameter, you will have to make (talk to a friend with a wire bender) another set of gear from wire that will fit into the oleo strut OR you can try to adapt by using the extra wire studs provided with your oleo strut set. For the purposes of this procedure, we are going to assume that the factory wire set is of a diameter that will fit into the strut channel or that you have made up a new wire set that does.
  2. Set up your model with the factory fixed gear set and factory wheels first.
  3. Using a tape measure, measure the following distances:
    • Height of the prop tip from the ground when the prop is closest to the ground
    • Height of the fuselage above the ground at the nose gear leg position
    • Height of the fuselage or wing above the ground at the main gear leg position
    • Height above the ground of a reference point at the tail end of the model.
  4. Label each of your oleo struts, "Nose", "Main-Left" and "Main-Right" appropriately. Use low tack masking tape and apply the labels directly to the struts.
  5. Back out the set screws from the "legs" of each oleo strut. Don't remove the screws, just back them out so that the internal channel is clear.  
  6. Using a piece of wire or rod as a probe, measure the depth of the channel from the "bottom" closed end of the channel to the top exit end of the channel for each oleo strut. Write this number on the label attached to each strut and on a sheet of paper with the measurements you made earlier.
  7. Now calculate the amount that you will cut off the bottom of your factory wire for each leg so that the distances you measured earlier can be maintained with the oleo struts installed. If you want to increase the ground clearance somewhat that's fine, just make sure that all four distances increase by the same amount. In fact, we suggest planning on 1/2" longer legs to start to give yourself some room to adjust things later. The idea here is to make sure that the angle of incidence on the ground is the same after you install the oleo struts as it was before.  If the vertical distances are the same as before or all longer by the same amount, then the factory angle of incidence on the ground will also be the same.
  8. After you have measured everything twice (remember the old carpenters maxim... think three times, measure twice, cut once!) mark and cut the factory wire gear legs. Again we suggest about 1/2" too long to start. You can always cut wire a bit shorter but once it's cut, there's no way to grow it longer!
  9. After cutting off the excess wire from each factory gear leg, slide the oleo struts into place over each wire stub. Align the wheels to so that the nose is straight ahead and the mains are 1-2 degrees "toed in" (this helps ground handling). Now measure the same vertical distances that you did earlier. Make sure that they are the same as before OR if one is higher by 1/2" that all of them are higher by the same 1/2".
  10. Make any final cuts to maintain the angle of incidence on the ground
  11. Remove the masking tape labels from each strut and you are done.
11.41.3. Using with Other Models - VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets

Question: I have a set of VMAR Oleo Struts that were made for a specific VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF. Can these Oleo Struts that were made for one VMAR Jet be used on another model?

Answer: If there is a specific oleo set available for your model, you are far better off using the recommended oleo set.

If there is not a specific oleo set available for your model, you may be able to adapt an existing oleo set to work with your model. This is not for the faint of heart or novice... it will take patience, ingenuity, work and likely cash to undertake this and there is NO guarantee that you will be successful at the end of the day.

Installation Tips - VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets

Question: I have a set of the VMAR Oleo Struts for my VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF. Do you have any tips re installing them?

Answer: Here is a procedure that will work with the VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF's and most other models assuming that the factory standard gear is made from 5/32 to 3/16" wire.

It's important to understand the basic approach first:

Examine the oleo struts and you will find a channel running down the center of each strut from the non-wheeled end. This channel has two set screws entering it from the side of the strut. The oleos are installed by cutting the factory wire landing gear to the correct length and sliding the oleos over the factory wire landing gear "stubs" after you have the length of the wire cut down to fit. The oleos are then locked on to the wire by the set screws.

Now for some specifics:

  1. Test that the factory gear wire is of a diameter that fits into the channel running vertically down the center of each oleo strut. If the wire is too large in diameter, you will have to make (talk to a friend with a wire bender) another set of gear from wire that will fit into the oleo strut OR you can try to adapt by using the extra wire studs provided with your oleo strut set. For the purposes of this procedure, we are going to assume that the factory wire set is of a diameter that will fit into the strut channel or that you have made up a new wire set that does.
  2. Set up your model with the factory fixed gear set and factory wheels first.
  3. Using a tape measure, measure the following distances:
    • Height of the prop tip from the ground when the prop is closest to the ground
    • Height of the fuselage above the ground at the nose gear leg position
    • Height of the fuselage or wing above the ground at the main gear leg position
    • Height above the ground of a reference point at the tail end of the model.
  4. Label each of your oleo struts, "Nose", "Main-Left" and "Main-Right" appropriately. Use low tack masking tape and apply the labels directly to the struts.
  5. Back out the set screws from the "legs" of each oleo strut. Don't remove the screws, just back them out so that the internal channel is clear.  
  6. Using a piece of wire or rod as a probe, measure the depth of the channel from the "bottom" closed end of the channel to the top exit end of the channel for each oleo strut. Write this number on the label attached to each strut and on a sheet of paper with the measurements you made earlier.
  7. Now calculate the amount that you will cut off the bottom of your factory wire for each leg so that the distances you measured earlier can be maintained with the oleo struts installed. If you want to increase the ground clearance somewhat that's fine, just make sure that all four distances increase by the same amount. In fact, we suggest planning on 1/2" longer legs to start to give yourself some room to adjust things later. The idea here is to make sure that the angle of incidence on the ground is the same after you install the oleo struts as it was before.  If the vertical distances are the same as before or all longer by the same amount, then the factory angle of incidence on the ground will also be the same.
  8. After you have measured everything twice (remember the old carpenters maxim... think three times, measure twice, cut once!) mark and cut the factory wire gear legs. Again we suggest about 1/2" too long to start. You can always cut wire a bit shorter but once it's cut, there's no way to grow it longer!
  9. After cutting off the excess wire from each factory gear leg, slide the oleo struts into place over each wire stub. Align the wheels to so that the nose is straight ahead and the mains are 1-2 degrees "toed in" (this helps ground handling). Now measure the same vertical distances that you did earlier. Make sure that they are the same as before OR if one is higher by 1/2" that all of them are higher by the same 1/2".
  10. Make any final cuts to maintain the angle of incidence on the ground
  11. Remove the masking tape labels from each strut and you are done.
11.41.4. Using with Retracts - VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets

Question: I have a set of the VMAR Oleo Struts for my VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF. Can the Oleo Struts be used with my third party retracts or only with the fixed gear that comes with the VMAR model.

Answer: There are a great number of different makers and styles of third party retracts and we are not familiar with all of them. It would be best to check with the retract maker for sizes and specifications etc.

As a very rough first guess, if the wire used in your retract is the same or smaller than that used in the fixed gear supplied with your VMAR model you may be able to adapt your retracts to accomodate the oleo struts. A related article has been included here and may help with some installation tips that may be helpful in adapting your retracts to accomodate the VMAR oleo struts. .

You will also need to ensure that the "cups" in the wing and fuselage can accomodate your retracts and wheels when the oleo struts have been installed.

Installation Tips - VMA-OLEOxxx Oleo Strut Sets

Question: I have a set of the VMAR Oleo Struts for my VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF. Do you have any tips re installing them?

Answer: Here is a procedure that will work with the VMAR Jet (Prop) ARF's and most other models assuming that the factory standard gear is made from 5/32 to 3/16" wire.

It's important to understand the basic approach first:

Examine the oleo struts and you will find a channel running down the center of each strut from the non-wheeled end. This channel has two set screws entering it from the side of the strut. The oleos are installed by cutting the factory wire landing gear to the correct length and sliding the oleos over the factory wire landing gear "stubs" after you have the length of the wire cut down to fit. The oleos are then locked on to the wire by the set screws.

Now for some specifics:

  1. Test that the factory gear wire is of a diameter that fits into the channel running vertically down the center of each oleo strut. If the wire is too large in diameter, you will have to make (talk to a friend with a wire bender) another set of gear from wire that will fit into the oleo strut OR you can try to adapt by using the extra wire studs provided with your oleo strut set. For the purposes of this procedure, we are going to assume that the factory wire set is of a diameter that will fit into the strut channel or that you have made up a new wire set that does.
  2. Set up your model with the factory fixed gear set and factory wheels first.
  3. Using a tape measure, measure the following distances:
    • Height of the prop tip from the ground when the prop is closest to the ground
    • Height of the fuselage above the ground at the nose gear leg position
    • Height of the fuselage or wing above the ground at the main gear leg position
    • Height above the ground of a reference point at the tail end of the model.
  4. Label each of your oleo struts, "Nose", "Main-Left" and "Main-Right" appropriately. Use low tack masking tape and apply the labels directly to the struts.
  5. Back out the set screws from the "legs" of each oleo strut. Don't remove the screws, just back them out so that the internal channel is clear.  
  6. Using a piece of wire or rod as a probe, measure the depth of the channel from the "bottom" closed end of the channel to the top exit end of the channel for each oleo strut. Write this number on the label attached to each strut and on a sheet of paper with the measurements you made earlier.
  7. Now calculate the amount that you will cut off the bottom of your factory wire for each leg so that the distances you measured earlier can be maintained with the oleo struts installed. If you want to increase the ground clearance somewhat that's fine, just make sure that all four distances increase by the same amount. In fact, we suggest planning on 1/2" longer legs to start to give yourself some room to adjust things later. The idea here is to make sure that the angle of incidence on the ground is the same after you install the oleo struts as it was before.  If the vertical distances are the same as before or all longer by the same amount, then the factory angle of incidence on the ground will also be the same.
  8. After you have measured everything twice (remember the old carpenters maxim... think three times, measure twice, cut once!) mark and cut the factory wire gear legs. Again we suggest about 1/2" too long to start. You can always cut wire a bit shorter but once it's cut, there's no way to grow it longer!
  9. After cutting off the excess wire from each factory gear leg, slide the oleo struts into place over each wire stub. Align the wheels to so that the nose is straight ahead and the mains are 1-2 degrees "toed in" (this helps ground handling). Now measure the same vertical distances that you did earlier. Make sure that they are the same as before OR if one is higher by 1/2" that all of them are higher by the same 1/2".
  10. Make any final cuts to maintain the angle of incidence on the ground
  11. Remove the masking tape labels from each strut and you are done.
11.41.5. VMA-OLEOXSX Oleo Strut Sets - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.41.5.1. Logo VMA-OLEOXSX Oleo Strut Sets
11.41.5.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-OLEOXSX Oleo Strut Set
11.41.5.2. Pictures VMA-OLEO1S3 - Oleo Strut Set - for F4 Phantom
11.41.5.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) - VMA-OLEO1S3 Oleo Strut Set for F4 Phantom
11.41.5.3. Pictures VMA-OLEO2S3 - Oleo Strut Set - for F5 & MIG21
11.41.5.3.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) - VMA-OLEO2S3 Oleo Strut Set for F5 & MIG21
11.41.5.4. Pictures VMA-OLEO3S3 - Oleo Strut Set - for A4
11.41.5.4.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) - VMA-OLEO3S3 Oleo Strut Set for A4
11.42. VMA-P190X 90+ Texan II, Harvard II and PC9 in all color schemes
11.42.1. VMA-P190X VMAR Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 90+ ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.42.2. VMA-P190X VMAR Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 90+ ARF - Servos for Rudder & Elevator - Why 2 each?
Question: My Texan II 90+ ARF uses two servos for the elevator and two servos for the rudder. Why do I have to use two? Can I use one high torque servo per control surface instead?

Answer:
The Texan II, Harvard II and PC9 series of VMAR ARF models uses two servos for the elevator and two servos for the rudder. There are a couple of reasons for this and the logic behind the design is somewhat different for the elevator than the rudder.
 
In order to replicate the performance of this semi-scale airframe as well as the appearance we wanted to enable strong control and aerobatic capability. At the same time we do not like to force modelers into premium priced high torque servos. Standard servos are cheaper and almost all modelers have them on hand. Unfortunately, in order to drive the price down some servo makers have reduced the power of the motors to the point that torque on some standard servos is down near 30 oz-in or even less. For the big PC9 based airframe we needed torque of 55+ oz-in on the elevator and rudder and the only way to hit this mark with the weaker of the standard servos is to double them up.
 
In the case of the elevator, the two servo system is required to ensure sufficient torque using standard servos. A high torque single servo will work for the elevator in lieu of two standard servos if the single servo has torque of  at least 55+ oz-in. When trying this, test in flight before being totally confident that one servo works.
 
The dual servo rudder is a bit of overkill in some cases. Yes, a push-pull system like that used with two servos is inherently less likely to flutter or bog down under high loads when in knife edge flight. A high torque single servo will work for the rudder in lieu of two standard servos if the single servo has torque of  at least 55+ oz-in. When trying this, test in flight before being totally confident that one servo works. If you find flutter in the rudder in some conditions, go back to two servos. If you find knife edge flight is better one way than the other, you could be overloading the single servo or the control rod in the push mode. If possible use both rudder control rods with your single high torque servo to avoid the high load problems found with "push" only rod set ups. Test test test if you are departing from the two servo rudder.  
11.42.3. VMA-P190X VMAR Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 90+ ARF - Slot in Upper Section of Vertical Stab - What's it for?

Question: My Texan II 90+ ARF has a small slot in the upper section of the vertical stabilizer. What is this for?

Answer: The Texan II, Harvard II and PC9 series of VMAR ARF models has this slot in both 90+ size and the 45-60 size. These models are all semi-scale and we have really tried to capture all of the detailing possible. The full size versions of this aircraft have a small additional horizontal stabilizer in the upper part of the vertical stabilizer. The slot you see in your model holds a small rectangular piece of balsa that is located in the parts bag. This piece is about 1 x 1.5" and finished in white covering. If it is missing, you can cut a small piece of balsa and install into the slot. On the model this is not a functional piece, it is purely for scale like detailing.

 

11.42.4. VMA-P190X VMAR Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 90+ ARF - Where should the Ventral Units be Located?
Question: My Texan II 90+ ARF came with various ventral unit components that appear to for mounting to the bottom of the fuselage. What is the correct location for these units?

Answer:
 Please see the attached file showing the location of the Ventral Units. Please note that the ventral fins are not normally provided with the PC9 versions of this model.
 
11.42.5. VMA-P190X VMAR Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 90+ ARF - Wing Assembly - Bolt Together or Glue?

Question: Can the wing on the VMAR Texan II 90+ ARF (same as Harvard II 90+ and PC9 90+) be bolted together or is it only to be glued together?

Answer: The design of this wing assumes that the it is being assembled with 30 Minute Epoxy. No factory provision has been made for bolting the wing together or providing for disassembly after flight.

11.43. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Various Colors
Technical Information related to the VMAR PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF ECS
 
Notification Service - Subscribe Now
For automated update notifications please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service
 
11.43.1. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.43.1.1. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF- General Information
 
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.43.1.2. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Supplement to the Manual
 
11.43.1.2.1. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Electric Power - Options
Question: I have a VMA-P210X PC9 or Texan II 06-12 ARF.  What do you recommend for a power system?
 
Answer: We have a couple of options for you to consider:
 
1) Our VMAX Power Module for the PC9 and Texan II 06-12 ARF is #VMM-P210XPM1. This consists of our VMAX Brushless Motor (#VMC-120B15VC) and our VMAX Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC). The motor and the ESC have been pre-installed onto the power module firewall to fit your model. 
 
2) Our VMAX Power Pack for the PC9 and Texan II 06-12 ARF  (#VMM-P210XPP1) contains the Power Module plus a LiPO battery pack, wiring harness and propeller.
 
Both of these options have been tested with the VMAR PC9 and Texan II 06-12 ARF and help you get into the air quickly and stay there!
 
 
11.43.1.2.2. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Electric Power - Wiring
Question: How should I wire my VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF?
 
Answer: The simplest solution is to use our VMAX Power Pack which comes with a brushless motor, electronic speed control (ESC with BEC), battery pack, propellor etc and includes a custom made wiring harness for the PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF. The Power Pack for the PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF  is #VMM-P210XPP1.
 
If you have purchased the VMAX Power Pack please follow the installation instructions that come with the Power Pack. The VMAX Power Pack will save you hours of time and greatly reduce the chances of making an expensive mistake.

The PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF includes a fuse switch assembly that is externally accessible and a Y-splitter for coupling both aileron servos so that they can be driven from one receiver channel.
 
If you have your own motors, servos, speed controls etc that you intend on using, the manufacturer of these electric components is your best bet for advice.
 
11.43.1.2.3. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Firewall (Power Module) Spacing - Page 7, Figure 11K

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20070418 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 7, Figure 11K.

Figure 11K illustrates the spacing between the fixed firewall in the front of the fuselage and the power module firewall to which is attached the motor and speed control.

The picture is correct. However the black type annotated distance shown in Figure 11K of the 20060314 version of the manual is incorrect. The distance should be .5 in. (12.5 mm).

The actual distance is not particularly critital. What is important is that: 

  • The spacing is equal at all four bolt locations.
  • The cowl can be pushed over the motor and power module firewall and back onto the fuselage with an overlap of 1/8 in. (3 mm)
  • The cowl does not touch the motor itself.

 

11.43.1.3. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Important Information

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.43.1.3.1. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.43.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.43.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.43.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.43.2. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.43.2.1. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Control Rod Length - Adjusting
Question: Can I adjust the length of the control rods in my model?  I want to use my existing servos and shift one servo slightly and when I do that the rods seem slightly too long. What should I do?
 
Answer: Most VMAR models use an inner and outer plastic rod system for the control rods. At each end, the plastic inner rod usually couples to a threaded metal rod which in turn connects to a clevis.

1) Slightly Longer Control Rods: You can make the control rods slightly longer by adjusting the position of the clevis on the threaded metal rod at each end. Do not over do it or the clevis could come off under load. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any adjustment.

2) Much Longer Control Rods: You will need to change either the metal threaded rods at each end (we have these in stock in various lengths) OR cut the inner plastic rod and splice an additional piece of the splined plastic rod into place. Use 2mm threaded metal studs as couplers. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any such modification.

3) Shorter Control Rods: You can make the control rods slightly shorter by adjusting the position of the clevis on the threaded metal rod at each end. Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling after any adjustment.

To further reduce the control rod length:

  • From one end of the rod, unscrew the clevis and threaded stud.
  • Use a pair of scissors or snips to cut the plastic rod to the shorter length you required.
  • Thread the stud and clevis back onto the plastic rod.
  • Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling.

4) If in any doubt about the security of any coupling, unthread the clevis and wick thin CA into the coupling between the stud and the plastic tube. Do not get CA into the clevis threads.

11.43.2.2. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Extra Hardware Items
Question: I have completed the assembly of my VMAR Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF and I have a few extra hardware items such as horns, screws and wing bolts. What are these for?
 
Answer: We usually include a few extra horns and wing bolts with all VMAR ARF's. You may also find a spare clevis and a couple of small screws depending on the model. These are free and intended to help you out if you drop or misplace one of these small items. If you have followed all of the assembly steps, completed your model, tested that your radio and control surfaces all move correctly, tug tested everything twice, just put any of extra hardware pieces in one of the bags and set it aside as spares just in case you need them later on. Don't throw anything out, you just never know when that screw, horn or nut may be needed!
11.43.2.3. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Glow Power - Tips
Question: Can I use glow engines to power my VMAR PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF? If so what sizes are recommended? Any tips you can suggest on what I need to plan for? 
 
Answer: Yes the VMAR PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF can be powered with glow engines. We suggest glow engines be  .06 to .12cu. in. Please note that this model has been intended primarily for Electric Flight and does not come with a tank or engine mount. It does however utilize the VMAR power module system which makes it easier to modify the propulsion system to glow.

Tips on use of glow power:
 
1) We recommend two stroke engines for this model. Four stroke engines tend to be bigger and heavier.
 
2) You will need to plan your fuel tank and engine mounting system with careful consideration for physical space particularly if you wish to try to install the engine so that you can use the cowl
 
3) Use Pacer Finishing Resin and a brush to throughly seal any exposed wood, particularly that of the firewall, the power module forward firewall and the attachment area on the wing. Also the wing saddle area. The exhaust from glow engines contains lots of hot vapourized and liquid oil residue. Although most of this oil will be channeled out in the exhaust, some oil will inevitably get on the model itself and will be absorbed by any unsealed wood. Oil can weaken glue joints and the wood itself.
 
4) Glow engines tend to produce considerable vibration particularly if the propellor is not balanced correctly. Take particular care to balance your propellor. Vibration can cause fuel feed problems, lean runs and engine cut off as well as structural failure, control surface flutter and/or separation and is very damaging to servos. It is very important to keep vibration to a minimum.
 
11.43.2.4. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Stage 11 Installing Electric Motor and ESC - Step 11C Mounting Screw (Bolt) Set
Question: Stage 11 Step 11C of my P210X Manual refers to installing four bolt and washer sets for mounting the motor. These bolt sets are stated to come with the kit but I did not get these in my kit. What's the story here?

Answer: The reference to the bolt sets (mounting screws) in your version of the P210X Manual is incorrect. These mounting screws come with the Power Module and Power Pack but are not included with the kit. Each motor is different and requires different mounting hardware and methods. We do provide a blank firewall set that can be drilled to suit nearly all motors. 
 
Mounting Screws - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What do I need in the way of mounting screws?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on what you have in mind:
a) VMAX VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motors that are supplied with VMAX Power Modules and VMAX Power Packs come pre-mounted with the appropriate screws for the motor.
 
b) The threads are 3mm and generally four 3mm x 6-12 mm machine hex head screws with washers will work.
 
c) We sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MS) consisting of four 3mm x 10mm hex head screws. Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
d) We also sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MT) consisting of 16 mounting screws. Four screws in each of four different sizes/styles.
  • 3 x 10 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (like VMM-111B18MS)
  • 3 x 16 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (longer version of above)
  • 3 x   6 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting)
  • 3 x 10 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting) 
The four different sizes/styles allow for thicker firewalls, multi-layer firewalls where the screw heads must be countersunk between the layers, etc.
 
This set provides for a very wide range of different mounting methods.
 
Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
CAUTION: When mounting motors using any method, ensure all fasteners are tightened securely. Check for vibration free operation of the motor. If not vibration free, reseat and retighten all fasteners and ancilliary components such as props and gears. Tighten fasteners firmly but don't strip the threads. Use medium strength thread locker on all metal to metal fasteners.

 

11.43.3. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.43.4. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.43.4.1. Logo VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF
11.43.4.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF
11.43.5. VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Specifications
 SPECIFICATIONS
 Part #: VMA-P210A & VMA-P210U
 Description: VMAR Pilatus PC9 and Texan II 06-12 ARF ECS Elect & Glow
 Wing Span:40.66 in.
 Wing Area: 280 sq. in.
 Length: 32 in.
 Weight (Dry): 23 - 25 oz.
 Engine: 2 Stroke Glow: .06 - .12 2 Stroke
 Motor Electric: 100-150 Watts Brushless such as VMAX VMM-111B18VM 
 Radio (for Glow):4 Channels with 5 micro servos such as VRS-140P08VS (9 gram)  
 Radio (for Electric):4 Channels with 4 micro servos such as VRS-140P08VS (9 gram)
11.44. VMA-P240X Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 45-60 45-60 ARF
11.44.1. VMA-P240X Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 45-60 ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.44.2. VMA-P240X Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 45-60 ARF - Fins (Ventral) Beneath Fuselage - What? Why? Where?

Question: What is the purpose of the small fins under the fuselage on the Texan II and Harvard II 40 ARF? Where do they attach to fuselage?

Answer: They are largely decorative. The real aircraft has them and we wanted to have a model that was as scale like as possible. They may also be helpful at high speeds when using larger engines. Please see the attached PDF for location information.

Better Answer: For most situations the fins can be installed or not depending on if you want the model to really look as close as possible to the real thing. The full size aircraft does have these fins. If you are using a 60 size engine on the model you may find that the fins help with lateral stability at high air speeds. The model will "groove" a bit better at high speeds and have more yaw stability... in effect the fins increase the size of the vertical stabilizer slightly. Please note that the ventral fins are not normally provided with the PC9 versions of this model.

11.44.3. VMA-P240X Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 45-60 ARF - Manual says Pilatus PC9. Is this OK to use for the Texan II and/or Harvard II?

Question: Is it OK to use the Assembly & Operations Manual for the Pilatus PC9 when assembling the Texan II or Harvard II?

Answer: Yes, the Texan II, Harvard II and Pilatus PC9 are the same airframe with different graphics. The assembly procedure and specifications are identical.

Better Answer: Yes. The full size Texan II and the full size Harvard II are based on the Pilatus PC9 and built under license in Wichita, KS by Raytheon. The Pilatus PC9 is made in Switzerland by Pilatus and sold worldwide. The Australian and Swiss models from VMAR have PC9 graphics... the Texan II has USAF graphics and the Harvard II has RCAF (Canada) graphics. The VMAR model airframes are the same for all four versions and the assembly procedure and specifications are identical. There are minor variations between the models that do not affect the assembly process... for example the fins beneath the fuselage may or may not be included with the PC9 and the canopies are different. The PC9 has a single roll bar type canopy... the Canadian and USAF product have double roll bars. The cockpit instrumentation is also different.

11.44.4. VMA-P240X Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 45-60 ARF - Engine Mounting - Inverted (Semi) - Regular Muffler

Question: I have a VMAR VMA-P240X (Texan II, Harvard II & PC9) 45-60ARF. I'd like to mount my .46-52 size engine inverted and use the regular factory muffler. Will this work?

Answer: Yes, depending on the size and shape of your engine it should work. It will require more work and possibly be more difficult to operate  than an upright or 90 degree installation but it will look more "scale like".  Please note that we do not recommend a perfect 180 degree upright installation. We suggest about 160 degrees (semi-inverted) for this model. For general information about inverted engine operation please see the relateed article.
 
Please see the attached PDF drawings of a typical  engine mounted to the removeable power module firewall and of the typical cowl cutouts that go with this engine orientation. These depictions relate to a typical two stroke engine for this model. You will need to adjust the cowl cutouts for your particular engine. Note that we strongly recommend proceeding in small incremental steps when cutting cowls to fit around an engine and muffler. Don't overdo it. Go slowly in small steps and test fit frequently.
11.44.5. VMA-P240X Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 45-60 ARF - Engine Mounting - Upright - Regular Muffler

Question: I have a VMAR VMA-P240X (Texan II, Harvard II & PC9) 45-60ARF. I'd like to mount my .46-52 size engine upright and use the regular factory muffler. Will this work?

Answer: Yes, depending on the size and shape of your engine it should work well. . It will not look as "scale like" as a 90 degree or semi-inverted installation but it will be easier to install and easier to operate.
 
Please see the attached PDF drawings of a typical upright engine mounted to the removeable power module firewall and of the typical cowl cutouts that go with this engine orientation. These depictions relate to a typical two stroke engine for this model. You will need to adjust the cowl cutouts for your particular engine. Note that we strongly recommend proceeding in small incremental steps when cutting cowls to fit around an engine and muffler. Don't overdo it. Go slowly in small steps and test fit frequently.
11.44.6. VMA-P240X Texan II, Harvard II & PC9 45-60 ARF - Engine Mounting - 90 Degrees - Pitts Muffler

Question: I have a VMAR Texan II 45-60 ARF. I'd like to mount my .46 size engine at 90 degrees and use a Pitts Style Muffler. Will this work?

Answer: Yes possibly but we would suggest an angle more like 110-140 degrees depending on your engine and muffler. This will be a matter of personal preference coupled with whatever limitations may be imposed by the muffler and the engine. The issue here is balancing the desire for a more scale like engine installation versus the scale like exhaust stacks on the cowl. If you mount your engine at 90 degrees you may (depending on the engine) have to cut into or cut away one of the scale like exhaust stacks fitted to the cowl on either side just aft of the nose ring. If you rotate your engine somewhat more (or less) than 90 degrees you can leave the exhaust stack unscathed and still achieve a good looking engine installation. Trial fittings will help you decide on what angle will give you the best overall appearance.

11.45. VMA-R014 Ramrod 40 ARF Low Wing 60" Trainer
11.45.1. VMA-R014 Ramrod - Canopy & Pilot

Question: Does the Ramrod come with a pilot and clear canopy?

Answer: Prior to late 2003, the Ramrod was produced with a clear canopy and a pilot was installed in the cockpit. From that time forward, the canopy was opaque ( usually silver).

11.45.2. Main Landing Gear too far forward on Ramrod. Settles on Tail.
Problem: The main landing gear legs on some VMAR Ramrods are not bent far{
enough back. The model is balanced correctly but tilts back on it's tail when on the ground.

Solution: Bend the gear legs slightly back so that the wheels are farther aft. The model may sit nose high after bending the main gear legs. To lower the height of the nose, reset the nose gear leg length or use a smaller nose wheel or slightly larger main wheels.
11.46. VMA-R160F JODEL DR400 45-61 SemiScale ARF ECS
11.46.1. VMA-R160F JODEL DR400 45-61 SemiScale ARF ECS - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.46.2. VMA-R160F JODEL DR400 45-61 SemiScale ARF ECS - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.46.3. VMA-R160F JODEL DR400 45-61 SemiScale ARF ECS - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.47. VMA-R240X RV4 45-60 SemiScale ARF ECS
11.47.1. VMA-R240X RV4 45-60 SemiScale ARF - READ ME FIRST
READ ME FIRST - for Models with POLYCOTE ECS Covering
The Read Me First for models covered with POLYCOTE ECS applies to this product and is available at:
 
 
The Read Me First will open in a second window. Please review it, print it or email it using the icons located near the top right of the Read Me First page (mouse over each icon for feedback about what it does). When you are finished, close the Read Me First window and continue browing here.
11.47.2. VMA-R240X RV4 45-60 SemiScale ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.47.3. VMA-R240X RV4 45-60 SemiScale ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.48. VMA-S140X Aero Subaru 40-52 Semiscale ARF ECS

 

11.48.1. VMA-S140X - How do I use the Optional Flaps?

Question: What do I have to do to use the Optional Flaps on my Aero Subaru?

Answer: Cut the Ailerons at the marks indicated. Install two flap servos in the wing. Install the flap control horns provided. Hook up control rods from the flap servos to the flap control horns. Test movement. Setup your radio flap switch etc.

Better Answer: Flaps should only be used with a 5+ channel radio that supports flaps. You will need two extra servos and aileron extensions about 12 to 18' long for each of the two flap servos.

The Subaru comes with full length strip ailerons. Hinges have  been pre-placed and control horn holes predrilled to allow you to cut each aileron at the location indicated on the aileron. Once the aileron has been cut into two sections... the outboard section will become the aileron and the inboard section will become the flap. The flap portion has a hole predrilled for the flap control horn... this is beneath the covering but can be located by examining the flap in strong backlighting. The flap control horns are supplied in the Subaru parts bags and should be installed into the pre-drilled holes in the flaps. There are two extra servo bays in the wings. These bays have covers over them just like the aileron bays did. Remove the flap servo bay covers, install your two flap servos and reinstall the covers and flap servos back into the wing. Now connect control rods from the flap servos to the flap control horns. Test the movement using your radio flap control.  

11.49. VMA-S190X SU27 Flanker 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS - Various Colors
Technical Information related to the VMAR SU27 Flanker 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS
 
11.49.1. VMA-S190X SU27 Flanker 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS - Assembly & Operations Manual
11.49.1.1. VMA-S190X SU27 Flanker 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS - Assembly & Operations Manual - Errata
 
a) Stage 8 INSTALLING THE MAIN LANDING GEAR
Stage 8 refers to and picture 8A illustrates functional oleo main gear struts. These are not included with the product. Wire based landing gear that is adorned with simulated decorative struts are provided with the product.
 
b) Page 6 consisting of Stage 6 and the introduction to Stage 7 may be missing from some of the factory Assembly and Operations manuals.
Check the back of the manual included with your product and review the copyright notice near the bottom margin. If the copyright notice is dated 20070517 you may have a manual that is missing Page 6. If so, please download a replacement manual in PDF format from our Knowledge base at  http://142.179.114.175/novo/default.asp?SID=&Lang=1&id=8213
11.49.2. VMA-S190X SU27 Flanker 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS - Specifications
 SPECIFICATIONS
 Part #:  VMA-S190R
 Description:  VMAR  SU27 Flanker 60-91 Jet (Prop) ARF 3DS
 Wing Span: 56 in.
 Wing Area:  610 sq. in.
 Length:  67 in.
 Weight (Dry):  10 - 11 lbs.
 Engine: 2 Stroke Glow .61 - .91
 Engine: 4 Stroke Glow na
 Radio:  6 - 9 Channels. Up to 9 Servos. 
11.50. VMA-S195B VMAR Spitfire 90-120+ ARF - British
Technical Information related to the VMAR VMA-S195B Spitfire 90-120+ ARF - British.
 
11.50.1. VMA-S195B Spitfire 90-120+ ARF - British - Assembly & Operations Manual

20190516... the manufacturer (VMAR) has NOT supplied a manual with this model.

The manual for the VMA-M195U P51D Mustang (similar size and construction) has been provided to serve only as a guide to the assembly process.  

VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF - SHORT FUSE SALLEE - Assembly & Operations Manual

The assembly and operations manual for the VMA-M195U P51D Mustang 90-120+ ARF is attached here for download.

11.50.2. VMA-S195B Spitfire 90-120+ ARF - British - CG Location

20190522... please see the information included below: 

VMAR - CG Location - General Guidelines

Question: How do I know where the CG (Center of Gravity) is to be located on my model?

Answer: Always refer to the instruction manual and documentation that came with your model. There is usually a diagram and/or explanation of where the CG lies in each manual. Any changes after the manual is printed are reflected in documents included with the kit. If the documentation has been misplaced and/or you want to double check, use our Knowledge Base and search on CG or look for your specific model in the listing of products.

Information: In the event that you cannot obtain any documentation related to your model and wish to locate the CG here is a procedure that you may wish to try. The CG is generally located just forward of the thickest part of the wing. Setting the CG slightly further forward will not hurt, it will limit the aerobatic capabilities of the model if the CG is too far forward but it will not cause loss of control. the CG too far back makes the model unstable, difficult to control and will often result in a crash. If you are stuck with no solid information at all we suggest setting the CG  3/4" forward of the thickest part of a non-swept wing for initial flights and then gradually moving it back to about 1/4-1/2" forward of the thickest part of the wing but only if the model remains stable in flight.

This procedure works reasonably well for non-swept wings. For swept wings, the thickest part of the wing also tends to sweep back with distance out from the fuselage. To roughly set the CG on a swept wing model we suggest going with a location that represents 25% of the area of the wing. This is the location from which a line running at right angles (perpendicular) from the fuselage will disect the wing such that 25% of the wing area is forward of this line and 75% of the wing area is aft of this line. After initial flights you may wish to move the CG back towards about the 30% mark but only if the model remains stable in flight.
 
Use of "CG Machine": Unfortunately, our comments in this regard are not very positive. Over many years we have noticed that when we get questions from modelers about CG, that 99% of the time they are using a "CG Machine" of some sort and get totally confused about how to use it and in many cases have erroneous information about the CG location of their model.
 
In our opinion, for the vast majority of RC Aircraft applications, such "CG Machines" are tools looking for a purpose. Yes, if you have a swept wing biplane with non-symmetric mass in all three axis and you are entering the Tournament of Champions and know little about CG in model airplanes, you might get some use out of a "CG Machine" IF IF IF you took a few hours to study the device carefully and read the instructions thoroughly.
 
However, if you are not in this rather august group, there are more practical, faster, easier and cheaper ways to set up the CG on your RC model airplane without spending money, getting yourself confused or frustrated.
 
1) Check the documentation that came with your model and any support information that may be on the suppliers web site or knowledge base. From this determine "where" the CG is supposed to be. We will call where the CG is supposed to be, the "CG Datum Point".
 
2) Mark the CG Datum Point on the model.
 
3) For a high wing model extend the CG Datum Point out to the wing tips. If the leading edge (LE) of the wing is straight, use that as your reference point. If, for example, the CG Datum Point is 3" back from the LE of  the wing then mark this on the wing tips. In any event the CG Datum Point should be extended out to the wing tips at right angles (90 degrees) to the thrust line running from the spinner to the tail.
 
4) Put your fingers on or under the wing tips where the CG Datum points are. Lift the model. If it is balanced, you are good to go. If the tail drops, move your battery forward or add small amounts of weight to the nose until it balances. If the nose drops you can leave it slightly nose heavy for training and first flights and then shift your battery back or add a bit of weight to the tail to balance it later on. If the nose drops a great deal, you are very nose heavy and should fix this before flying by shifting weight aft until the model is balanced.
 
5) For a low wing model, you can extend the CG Datum Point out to the wing tips in the same manner as for a high wing model OR better yet, invert the model and screw a cup hook ($.05 cents at the hardware store) into the wing center joint at the CG Datum Point. Hang the model from the cup hook using a piece of string. If it is balanced, you are good to go. If the tail drops, move your battery forward or add small amounts of weight to the nose until it balances. If the nose drops you can leave it slightly nose heavy for training and first flights and then shift your battery back or add a bit of weight to the tail to balance it later on. If the nose drops a great deal, you are very nose heavy and should fix this before flying by shifting weight aft until the model is balanced.
 
The "cup hook" method can also be used for high wing models if you can put a cup hook into top of the fuselage at the CG Datum Point. The cup hook method offers the advantage of also being able to balance the model across the wing span. The wings should also be level when hanging. If not, add weight to the high wing tip by pushing nails or lead pellets into the bottom of the high wing tip and using CA or Epoxy to retain them. You can also use stick on weights.
 
This is not intended to be a treatise on CG Datum Points or adjusting CG locations but it is a good practical simple approach that works for most trainers, fun-fly, sport, scale and pattern airplanes. If you are into something more exotic there are additional considerations.
 
 
11.50.3. VMA-S195B Spitfire 90-120+ ARF - British - Specifications
 SPECIFICATIONS
 Part #:  VMA-S195B
 Description:  VMAR Spitfire 90-120+ ARF - British
 Wing Span: 79 in.
 Wing Area:  1280 sq. in.
 Length:  67 in.
 Weight (Dry):  10-11 lbs.
 Engine: 2 Stroke Glow .90 - 1.20
 Engine: 4 Stroke Glow 1.20 - 1.80
 Motor Electric:  1500+ Watt Brushless
 Radio:  4 - 6 Channels
11.51. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Elect & Glow - Various Colors
11.51.1. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.51.1.1. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.51.1.2. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Supplement to the Manual

11.51.1.2.1. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Control Horns - Laser Cut Wood

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20050712 (see manual back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Question: My VMAR Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF was supplied with control horns that appear to be made of wood. Are these OK? 

Answer: Yes these are laser cut from aircraft plywood and are strong, light, reliable and easy to install.

Additional Information: There are two styles of control horns used on this model.

  • Style A: Please see Page 2, Stage 1, Picture 1A. These are used on the ailerons and are inserted into pre-drilled holes in the aileron using 30 minute epoxy as shown in Picture 1D, 3B and 3C.  
  • Style B: Please see Page 9, Stage 13, Picture 13A. These are used on the rudder and elevator and are to be inserted into pre-cut slots in the rudder and elevator using 30 minute epoxy as shown in Picture 13C, 13D and 13E.

After installing the control horns, we recommend wicking thin CA such as Pacer ZAP (Pink) into the plywood of the control horn to "harden" the plywood and holes. Do two applications about 1 minute apart.

 

11.51.1.2.2. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Firewall Spacing - Page 7, Figure 11K

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20050712 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 7, Figure 11K. This figure shows the 3mm nuts evenly spaced at .500 in. (12.5 mm) from the firewall. This works well for many motor shafts and may be shortened or lengthened to reflect different lengths of motor shafts. The important thing here is that the motor shaft be able to extend through the front of the cowl and still securely hold the propeller without the propeller contacting the cowl. 

 

11.51.1.3. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Important Information

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.51.1.3.1. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.51.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.51.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.51.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.51.2. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.51.2.1. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Stage 11 Installing Electric Motor and ESC - Step 11C Mounting Screw (Bolt) Set
Question: Stage 11 Step 11C of my S210X Manual refers to installing four bolt and washer sets for mounting the motor. These bolt sets are stated to come with the kit but I did not get these in my kit. What's the story here?

Answer: The reference to the bolt sets (mounting screws) in your version of the S210X Manual is incorrect. These mounting screws come with the Power Module and Power Pack but are not included with the kit. Each motor is different and requires different mounting hardware and methods. We do provide a blank firewall set that can be drilled to suit nearly all motors. 
 
Mounting Screws - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What do I need in the way of mounting screws?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on what you have in mind:
a) VMAX VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motors that are supplied with VMAX Power Modules and VMAX Power Packs come pre-mounted with the appropriate screws for the motor.
 
b) The threads are 3mm and generally four 3mm x 6-12 mm machine hex head screws with washers will work.
 
c) We sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MS) consisting of four 3mm x 10mm hex head screws. Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
d) We also sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MT) consisting of 16 mounting screws. Four screws in each of four different sizes/styles.
  • 3 x 10 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (like VMM-111B18MS)
  • 3 x 16 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (longer version of above)
  • 3 x   6 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting)
  • 3 x 10 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting) 
The four different sizes/styles allow for thicker firewalls, multi-layer firewalls where the screw heads must be countersunk between the layers, etc.
 
This set provides for a very wide range of different mounting methods.
 
Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
CAUTION: When mounting motors using any method, ensure all fasteners are tightened securely. Check for vibration free operation of the motor. If not vibration free, reseat and retighten all fasteners and ancilliary components such as props and gears. Tighten fasteners firmly but don't strip the threads. Use medium strength thread locker on all metal to metal fasteners.

 

11.51.3. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.51.4. VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.51.4.1. Logo VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF
11.51.4.1.1. Logo VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - JPG (RGB)
11.51.4.1.2. Logo VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - PSD (PhotoShop)
11.51.4.1.3. Logo VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - TIF (CMYK)
11.51.4.2. Pictures VMA-S210B Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Blue
11.51.4.2.1. Pictures VMA-S210B Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Blue - JPG (RGB)
11.51.4.2.2. Pictures VMA-S210B Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Blue - PSD (Photoshop)
11.51.4.2.3. Pictures VMA-S210B Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Blue - TIF (CMYK)
11.51.4.3. Pictures VMA-S210R Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Red
11.51.4.3.1. Pictures VMA-S210R Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Red - JPG (RGB)
11.51.4.3.2. Pictures VMA-S210R Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Red - PSD (PhotoShop)
11.51.4.3.3. Pictures VMA-S210R Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - Red - TIF (CMYK)
11.51.4.4. Pictures VMA-S210X Aero Subaru 06-15 ARF - from the Fan Club
11.52. VMA-S220X FI156 Storch 76 in. ARF ECS Electric - Various Colors
Technical Information related to this model: 
 
11.52.1. VMA-S220X FI156 Storch 76 in. ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.52.2. VMA-S220X FI156 Storch 76 in. ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.52.2.1. Logo VMA-S220X FI156 Storch 76 in. ARF
11.52.2.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-S220X Storch 76 in. ARF
11.52.2.2. Pictures VMA-S220D FI156 Storch 76 in. ARF - Luftwaffe (Green)
11.52.2.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-S220D Storch 76 in. ARF - Luftwaffe (Green)
11.52.3. VMA-S220X FI156 Storch 76 in. ARF Electric - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Part #: VMA-S220X
Description:  VMA-S220X FI156 Storch 76 in. ARF Electric
Wing Span:76.7 in.
Wing Area: 806 sq. in.
Length: 48.8 in.
Weight (Dry): 4.3 lbs.
Motor Electric: 250-300 Watt Brushless
Radio:Five (5) Channels (min)
Servos:

Six (6) 9 gram micro such as VRS-140P08VS.  2-Aileron, 2-Flap, 1-Elevator, 1-Rudder.

Electric Motor:250-400W. Brushless Outrunner.
Electronic Speed Control:30 Amps min.
LiPo Battery: 3-4 Cells. 3000-4000 mAh.
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.53. VMA-S240X Stinger 40-50ARF ECS Sport Trainer - Various Colors
11.53.1. Colors of Wing - Bottom vs Top - VMA-S240X Stinger 40-52ARF ECS Sport Trainer - Various Colors

Question: Is the bottom side of the wing of the Stinger 40-52ARF Sport Trainer the same as the top?

Answer: No.

Better Answer: The top and bottom of the wing are both covered with semi-transparent Polycote ECS. However they have different trim appearance. The VMAR logo and Polycote logo are quite large and appear only on the top of the wing.

A JPG image of the wing top showing the trim is attached below. Please click on VIEW to open the image.

11.53.2. VMA-S240X Stinger 40-52ARF - Compared to Hornet

Question: Aside from the obvious difference in graphics and colors between the VMAR Stinger and the VMAR Hornet, are there any other differences?

Answer: Yes the vertical stabilizer on the Stinger is slightly different to give the Stinger more aerobatic capabilities.

11.54. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF ECS Electric - Various Colors
Technical Information related to the VMAR Twin Otter ARF ECS. 
 
Notification Service - Subscribe Now
For automated update notifications please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service
 
11.54.1. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

11.54.1.1. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - General Information

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

11.54.1.2. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Supplement to the Manual

11.54.1.2.1. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Electric Power - Options
Question: My VMAR VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF uses two motors. What do you recommend for a power system?
 
Answer: We have a couple of options for you to consider:
 
1) Our VMAX Power Module for the Twin Otter is #VMM-T210XPM1. This consists of two of our VMAX Brushless Motors (#VMC-120B15VC) and two of our VMAX Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC). Each motor and ESC has been factory mounted to a power pylon ready to mate with the wing.
 
2) Our VMAX Power Pack for the Twin Otter (#VMM-T210XPP1) contains the Power Module plus a LiPO battery pack, parallel wiring harness, receiver throttle Y harness and propellers. .
 
Both of these options have been tested with the Twin Otter and help you get into the air quickly and stay there!
 
 
11.54.1.2.2. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Electric Power - Wiring
Question: My VMAR VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF uses two motors. How should I wire these up so that I can control them from the single throttle channel on my receiver?
 
Answer: The simplest solution is to use our VMAX Power Pack which comes with brushless motors, electronic speed controls (ESC), battery pack, propellors etc and includes a custom made Wiring Harness Set for the Twin Otter power and control system. The Power Pack for the Twin Otter is #VMM-T210XPP1.
 
If you have your own motors, servos, speed controls etc that you intend on using in the VMAR Twin Otter the manufacturer of these electric components is your best bet for advice on operating in a Twin Power configuration. The Wiring Harness Set for the Twin Otter (#VMA-T210XWHS) is available as an aftermarket accessory and in most installations will make it much easier to work with the VMAX Power Module, third party motors, speed controls and servos.
 
If you have purchased the VMAX Power Pack for the Twin Otter (#VMM-T210XPP1) please follow the installation instructions that come with the Power Pack. The VMAX Power Pack will save you hours and hours of time and greatly reduce the chances of making an expensive mistake.
 
If you are using third party power components, follow their instructions. In the absence of specific information from the manufacturer here are some general tips that may assist you. Remember, without specific information from the supplier of your Motors and ESC, you run the risk of doing something wrong and such booboos are usually expensive. Use our tips with this in mind. We can't verify that these tips will work with third party equipment and strongly encourage you to obtain information from the manufacturer of your Motors and ESC.
 
a) Use two idential Brushless Motors and two identical Electronic Speed Controls (ESC). Each motor should have its own speed control. (see footnote below)
 
b) Connect each ESC to a Brushless Motor using the color coded wire as a guide. Test and ensure that the motor turns in the direction expected and that thrust is aft of the motor.
 
c) Make a power Y-connector to feed power from your LiPo battery to the power input leads on both of your ESC's. 
 
d) Use the power Y-connector to connect the power input to the ESC's to a common (1) LiPO battery source.
 
e) Make a throttle Y-connector. This is necessary for DUAL ESC operation which assumes that you are using two motors and two ESC's.
 
For DUAL ESC operation use ONLY the NEGATIVE (-) Power (usually black or brown) & SIGNAL lines
(see table below) between the receiver throttle channel and the ESC's.
 
Do NOT use the POSITIVE (+) Power (usually Red) wires.  
The following table serves as a guide to common radio systems and their wiring schema and color usage. Use this table with caution. If in doubt, please defer to information provided by your radio supplier.  
 
RADIO BRAND NEGATIVE (-) SIGNAL
VRS & Futaba Black White
Airtronics Z Black Blue
JR Brown Orange
HiTec Black Yellow
f) Plug the ESC throttle control wires into the ends of the throttle Y-connector
 
g) Plug the remaining single end of the throttle Y connector into your receiver throttle channel.  
 
h) Use the airborne battery pack from your radio system to power your receiver. Do NOT attempt to use power from either BEC to power your receiver. You may wish to consider using a stand alone BEC such as that from Western Robotics to power your radio system but do NOT use the BEC's that are a part of many ESC's. They will not work in a twin power configuration.
 
i) Select suitable propellers for your motors and your speed controllers. The two props should be identical. Prop selection is vital with brushless motors. Overloading the motors and ESC by using the wrong prop can get very very expensive in a big hurry.
 
j) Verify that you can control the RPM of the motors via the receiver and that they produce similar RPM and thrust throughout the throttle range.  
 
Footnote: There are some dual ESC's that enable you to control two Brushless motors from one ESC. These eliminates the need for a second ESC and may make the installation of third party components simpler. If you are using a dual ESC, ensure that you follow the manufacturers instructions regarding wiring and operations.
 
 
 
11.54.1.2.3. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Wing - One Piece or Two?

Question: My VMAR VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF refers to a one piece wing. The Twin Otter I received has a two piece wing. What's the story here?

Answer: In some markets, shipping carriers such as UPS charge an additional surcharge for longer boxes. In these markets we have reduced the length of the box by shipping the wing in two pieces in order to save the end consumer from having to pay surcharges on freight.

Additional Information:  If your wing was shipped in two pieces, use the wing joiner and 30 minute epoxy to join the wing halves. A roll of wing joint tape has been supplied to seal the joint after the epoxy has cured. USE ONLY 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wing halves.  
 
A subsequent article provides detailed instructions for joining the halves of two piece wings.
 
11.54.1.2.4. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - (Stage 0) Wing Assembly - Joining the Wing Halves
 
In some markets we have reduced the length of the shipping box by shipping the wing in two pieces in order to save end consumers from having to pay surcharges on freight. The Assembly and Operations Manual (version 20061031) does not include instructions for joining the wing halves.
 
If your wing was shipped in two pieces, BEFORE BEGINNING Stage 1 of the Assembly and Operations Manual please COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING "Stage 0" INSTRUCTIONS in order to assemble your wing.
 
Parts Supplied:
- Right and left wing panels
- Wing joiner (also called dihedral brace)
- Roll of wing joint tape
Tools & Adhesives needed:
- 30 minute epoxy. Pacer Zepoxy #PAC-30ZPOXY8
recommended. (Do not use 5 Minute Epoxy)
- Epoxy brush or stir sticks
- Disposable mixing dish for the epoxy
- Sandpaper (Coarse 240 grit recommended)
- Low tack masking tape
- Pencil, knife and ruler
- Paper towels

Step 0.1 Locate the wing joiner (also called Dihedral brace). Use a ruler, determine the center of the wing joiner and mark a center line with a pencil as illustrated in 0B.
 
Step 0.2 Locate the wings (See 0A). Trial fit the wing joiner in the channels in the wing panels. You will see two channels in each wing. The channel closest to the leading edge should NOT be used. Insert the wing joiner into the channel that is slightly further aft in the wing. The wing joiner should insert smoothly up to the center line as illustrated in 0C.
 
Now slide the other wing panel onto the wing joiner until the panels meet. If the fit is overly tight, sand the wing joiner slightly and try again. Do not apply excessive force. Sand the joiner until a snug fit is obtained. If the panels slide onto the joiner relatively easily but you end up with a slight gap between the wing panels, trim the ends of the joiner by about 1/8 in. (3 mm) and try again. Work in small steps, testing the results between steps.
 
Mark the joiner to indicate which way is UP as illustrated in 0B.
 

0A - Left & right wing panels

0B - Preparation of wing joiner


Step 0.3
Apply plenty of 30 minute epoxy to all sides of one end (half) of the wing joiner using a stir stick or epoxy brush as illustrated in 0D. Carefully insert the epoxy coated half of the wing joiner into one wing panel as illustrated in 0E. 
 
See 0F and use a cloth or tissue to wipe away any excess epoxy that squeezes out of the joint.
 
Repeat this process several times to ensure the wing joiner and cavity are well coated with 30 minute epoxy.
 
When the wing joiner and cavity are well coated with 30 minute epoxy, insert the joiner to the center line, wipe way any excess epoxy and let dry. (Note: do not use 5 minute epoxy or CA to join the wings).
 

0C - Trial fit the wing joiner

0D - Apply plenty of 30 minute epoxy to the wing joiner

0E - Carefully insert the joiner all the way to the center line

0F - Wipe off the excess epoxy then allow to cure

 
Step 0.4 When the epoxy holding the wing joiner into the first wing panel has cured, trial fit the second wing panel onto the wing joiner (do not glue without trial fitting first) to ensure that the two wing panels fit without an excessive gap.
 
Step 0.5 Now apply plenty of 30 minute epoxy to all sides of the exposed half of the wing joiner (see 0G). Use only 30 minute epoxy to ensure a strong bond and to give yourself plenty of working time. As described in step 0.3, repeatedly apply 30 minute epoxy to the joiner and insert the joiner into the wing joiner cavity to ensure that the wing joiner and the cavity are well coated with 30 minute epoxy.
 
When you have worked plenty of epoxy into the wing joiner cavity, pull the joiner out of the cavity one last time and apply plenty of 30 minute epoxy to the wing root ribs of both panels. Slide the wings together until the wing roots are firmly in contact with each other and there is no gap remaining between the wing panels (see OH). Epoxy should ooze from the joint and be cleaned off with a rag or tissue before it cures.
 
Step 0.6 Use low tack masking tape (see 0I) to align the wing surfaces and to hold the wing panels firmly together until the epoxy cures.
 

0G - Apply plenty of 30 minute epoxy to all surfaces. 

0H - Align the two wing panels and slowly close the gap until the wing roots are firmly in contact with each other.

0I - Use low tack masking tape to hold the wing panels tightly together until the epoxy has completely cured.


Step 0.7  Once the epoxy has cured completely (allow several hours at least), the masking tape can be carefully removed from the wing panels. Peel the tape back on itself... do not pull upright away from the wing.
 
To seal and finish the joint between the wing panels, a roll of wing joint tape has been supplied. Starting on the bottom side of the wing, stick the tape centrally over the joint (see OJ) ensuring that the wing joint tape is pressed down firmly as you work around the wing. Wrap the wing joint tape all the way around the wing in one piece (see OK), starting and finishing on the bottom of the wing (see OL). Trim off any excess tape using a sharp knife.
 

0J - Apply wing joint tape over the joint starting here on the bottom.  

0K - Continue applying the tape over the top of the wing, pressing down firmly as you go.  

0L - Continue back around to the bottom of the wing & overlap the tape where you started. Trim off excess tape.  

NEXT STEPS:

If you are installing a VMAX Power Pack or VMAX Power Module or VMAR Wiring Harness Set, please review the instructions that were supplied with these items now.

Otherwise once you have joined the wing halves, please proceed to Stage 1 of the Assembly and Operations Manual to continue with the assembly of your model.

Pictures are intended to illustrate components and methods of assembly. Production components may vary in detail from that shown.

 
  
11.54.1.3. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Important Information

 

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.54.1.3.1. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Covering

This model uses POLYCOTE ECS Covering

POLYCOTE ECS - Care & Maintenance - Quick Tips

Question: Do you have any pointers regarding the Care & Maintenance of POLYCOTE ECS?

Answer: Yes we have this Summary of Quick Tips. See www.richmondrc.com ( Enter Site > Support Services > Knowledge Base then Search on "Covering") for an expanded explanation of each Tip.

Polyester offers the best in covering performance and as with any new modern technology, the maintenance methods may be different than those you used with your older covering. This is NOT Monokote or Solarfilm, its different. If you have used ORACOVER or ULTRACOTE you will have some experience with working with POLYESTER as a covering material.

Here is our Summary of Quick Tips related to POLYCOTE ECS covering.

  • Avoid Hot Vehicles
    • Cooking your model in your vehicle for hours on end is generally not a good idea! Temperatures can easily exceed 50C (122 F) under such conditions. You will get sags. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to remove sags.  
  • Cleaning After Flying
    • We recommend Fantastic household cleaner and disposable paper towels. Mist, do not flood. Wipe along seams, not across. Do NOT NOT NOT NOT use SIMPLE GREEN, 409 or similar materials for cleaning a model airplane.
  • Cleaning Initially
    • Upon initial inspection if you see a thin streaky film on any of the POLYCOTE ECS, work outdoors and use a paper towel and wipe a slightly wet film of Mineral Spirits over 1/4 of a wing or half a fuselage at a time. Rub gently while still wet. Change towels frequently. Avoid plastics.
  • Cutting
    • Use sharp scissors or an XACTO knife with a sharp #11 blade.
  • Pealing
    • Relatively rare. Fix as soon as possible. Consult our Knowledge Base before attempting to resolve.
  • Protecting the Finish
    • Most Importantly - Follow the cleaning instructions. Use the recommended cleaners and method. Dab away raw fuel. Test small out of the way area and all plastics before applying any glue, solvent, cleaner, paint or other preparation. Patch punctures promptly. Avoid hours and hours sitting in the direct sun.
  • Removing & Using Tape
    • Use low tack tape. When removing tape , peal the tape back on itself parallel to the surface of the covering.
  • Repairing Punctures
    •  Patch promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area of the puncture. Patch should be 1/2" (13mm) bigger on all sides. Round the corners. Seal in place with a heat iron & sock. Tighten area with a Heat Gun.
  • Resealing Seams
    • Act promptly. Clean any oil residue from the area and reseal the seam with thin CA.
  • Tightening Sags
    • Remember SSB... SECURE the perimeter then SHRINK to fit then BOND to the structure. Use an iron with sock to SECURE the perimeter, use a heat gun to SHRINK within the perimeter, use a soft cloth while the covering is warm to BOND the covering to solid substrates.
  • Tools for Working with POLYCOTE ECS
    • Scissors, XACTO with #11 blade, iron, iron sock, regulated heat gun, soft cotton cloth or glove.
11.54.1.4. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
11.54.1.4.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
11.54.1.5. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
11.54.2. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
11.54.2.1. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Aileron Control Rod Length
Question: The aileron control rods that run from the servo to the aileron control horn on my VMAR Twin Otter appear to be slightly too long. What should I do?
 
Answer: The Twin Otter wing has been produced in several different configurations depending on the market area. Early production runs shipped to Europe and the UK used a one piece wing. Later production runs and all shipments to North America used a two piece wing. The aileron control rod length is adjustable to fit the wing that you have.

For each aileron:

1) Ensure that your servo is mounted correctly and that the servo arm can rotate freely the way you have installed it. Center the servo arm so that it lies parallel to the wing trailing edge.

3) Install the control horns on the ailerons. Tape the ailerons into a neutral position as explained in the manual.

4) If you find that the aileron control rods are too long, use a ruler to measure how much shorter you need to make the rod.

  • From one end of the rod, unscrew the clevis and threaded stud.
  • Use a pair of scissors or snips to cut the plastic rod to the shorter length you required.
  • Thread the stud and clevis back onto the plastic rod.
  • Tug test to ensure you have a secure coupling.

5) If in any doubt about the security of the coupling, unthread the clevis and wick thin CA into the coupling between the stud and the plastic tube. Do not get CA into the clevis threads.

11.54.2.2. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Extra Hardware Items
Question: I have completed the assembly of my VMAR Twin Otter and I have a few extra hardware items such as horns, screws and wing bolts. What are these for?
 
Answer: We usually include a few extra horns and wing bolts with all VMAR ARF's. You may also find a spare clevis and a couple of small screws depending on the model. These are free and intended to help you out if you drop or misplace one of these small items. If you have followed all of the assembly steps, completed your model, tested that your radio and control surfaces all move correctly, tug tested everything twice, just put any of extra hardware pieces in one of the bags and set it aside as spares just in case you need them later on. Don't throw anything out, you just never know when that screw, horn or nut may be needed!
11.54.2.3. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Pilots - What sizes fit?
Question: Can pilots be installed in the VMAR Twin Otter? If so what are the dimensions that I should keep in mind when selecting pilots?
 
Answer: Yes pilots (2) can be installed in the VMAR Twin Otter. The factory seats and shoulder harnesses are installed and the seats have a flexible back that facilitates installation of after market pilots working from inside the main radio bay of the fuselage. Here are some approximate dimensions for reference purposes when selecting pilots.
    • Top of head to seat cushion = 3" max
    • Back of seat to back of knee = 2-1/2" max
    • Back of seat to front of knee = 3-1/8" max
    • Seat cushion to bottom of feet = 2-1/4" max
    • Width of hips and shoulders = 2" max
11.54.2.4. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Glow Power - Tips
Question: Can I use glow engines to power my VMAR Twin Offer? If so what sizes are recommended? Any tips you can suggest on what I need to plan for? 
 
Answer: Yes the VMAR Twin Otter can be powered with glow engines. We suggest glow engines be at least .09 cu. in. each as a minimum. Maximum engine size should be limited to .15 cu. in. each. Please note that setting up and operating multiple glow engines is not for novices. It requires considerable expertise with modeling, glow engines and RC flying to be able to successfully equip and fly the Twin Otter with glow engines.

Tips on use of glow power:
 
1) We recommend two stroke engines for this model. Four stroke engines tend to be bigger and heavier and they may cause structural failure of the standard wood engine mounting pylons.
 
2) You will need to plan your fuel tanks and engine mounting system with careful consideration for physical space particularly if you wish to try to install the engines so that you can utilize the scale like engine shrouds and nacelles.
 
3) Do NOT glue the engine mounting pylons (factory assembled of wood) to the wing until you have test fitted the engine mounting pylons, engine mounts, engines, mufflers, fuel tanks, fuel tubing, throttle linkages, engine shrouds and nacelles.
 
4) Once you have test fitted all of the components related to the glow engines, use 30 Minute Epoxy to attach the engine pylons to the wing. Ensure they are aligned and fitted properly. Let the adhesive cure thoroughly before proceeding.
 
5) Use Pacer Finishing Resin and a brush to throughly seal any exposed wood, particularly that of the engine mounting pylons and the attachment area on the wing. Also the wing saddle area. The exhaust from glow engines contains lots of hot vapourized and liquid oil residue. Although most of this oil will be channeled out in the exhaust, some oil will inevitably get on the model itself and will be absorbed by any unsealed wood. Oil can weaken glue joints and the wood itself.
 
6) Glow engines tend to produce considerable vibration particularly in a twin configuration when the engines are not quite at the same RPM. Take particular care to balance your props and to run the engines at the same RPM when compared to each other throughout the range of throttle positions. Vibration can cause fuel feed problems, lean runs and engine cut off as well as structural failure, control surface flutter and/or separation and is very damaging to servos. It is very important to keep vibration to a minimum.
 
 
 
 
11.54.2.5. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Steering Control Rod for Nose Gear
Question: Where is the steering control rod for the nose gear packed for shipping? What does it look like? I can't seem to locate it. Also, please provide any tips you may have for installing it.
 
Answer: The Twin Otter steering control rod for the nose gear is shipped in the fuselage main radio and forward bay. It is usually located near the left side. The rod is about 15.75 in. (654 mm) long. The inner rod is solid metal and the outer (shorter) rod is a semi transparent plastic tube. There is an EZ connector near the servo end of the metal rod and a Z-bend at the steering arm end of the metal rod.

Installation is described in the manual that came with the model and can be summarized as follows:

1) The Z-bend engages with the steering arm. The EZ connector attach's to the servo arm and the metal control rod.
 
2) Loosen the EZ connector set screw and remove the EZ connector from the metal rod.
 
3) Remove the steering arm from your servo.
 
4) Attach the EZ connector to the servo arm using the nut to fasten it.
 
5) Slide the EZ connector onto the metal steering control rod leaving the servo arm attached. 
 
6) Attach the servo arm to the servo. Align the nose gear and steering servo in a neutral position for straight ahead motion. Secure the servo arm to the servo.
 
7) Tighten the EZ connector set screw to engage the steering control rod.
 
8) Leave about .5 in (12 mm) of extra rod protruding beyond (aft) of the EZ connector. Snip off any excess length.
11.54.2.6. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Steering Direction sync with Rudder Direction
Question: I am using a Y-harness in my VMAR Twin Otter to enable control of the rudder and the nose gear steering using the rudder channel on my receiver. Will this automatically result in the steering direction on the ground using the nose gear being in sync (the same direction) as the rudder steering in the air?
 
Answer: It depends on your servo type and installation but in any event it's easy to sync the nose gear and rudder steering so that they are both moving in the correct direction even though you are controlling the two servos via a Y-harness from the rudder channel of your receiver.

1) First of all try it out. If the nose gear is moving in sync with the rudder you are good to go.

2) If they are not in sync please see your Assembly and Operations Manual. Look at pictures 12C and 12F and the picture in the Stage 12 introduction. Picture 12F shows the rudder control rod attached to the servo steering arm that is pointing up. To reverse the direction of the movement of the rudder move the rudder control rod to the opposite side of the rudder servo.

3) OR you can do the following: See pictures 20B, 20C, 21.1 and 21.2. These show the steering control arm connected via an EZ Connector attached to the left side of the steering servo arm. To reverse the direction of movement of the steering nose gear move the steering control rod and EZ Connector to the opposite side of the steering servo.
11.54.3. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Assembly & Operations Manual in PDF format
11.54.4. VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
11.54.4.1. Logo VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF
11.54.4.1.1. Logo (CMYK_TIF) VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF
11.54.4.2. Pictures VMA-T210W Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - White
11.54.4.2.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMA-T210W Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - White
11.55. VMA-U160X V-Stik 60 ARF Hi Wing Sport 68"
11.55.1. VMA-U160X V-Stik 60 ARF - CG Location - Where is it?

Question: The manual for the V-Stik 60 is the same as for the V-Stik 40. Is the CG the same for both models? What is the CG location for the Stik 60?

Answer: For the Stik 60, use 3-1/4" for the first flights and then if you wish to increase the aerobatic performance of the Stik 60, move the CG back until the CG is located at .25-.5" ahead of the thickest part of the wing. You can move slightly further aft for extreme maneuvers but test each 1/4" step and under no circumstances do we recommend locating the CG more than 4" back from the leading edge of the wing.

11.55.2. VMA-U160X V-Stik 60 ARF - Electric Power Conversion

For those of you who may be wondering about flying a VMAR V-Stik 60 ARF using Electric Power here is an equipment report from a modeler who has electrified his V-Stik 60 ARF as follows:

  • AXI Outrunner 4120/18
  • 5 Cell LiPo
  • APC 13 x 8.5
  • Reports brisk reliable performance with this power system in the V-Stik 60 ARF

Please note that this report comes from a modeler flying near Durango, CO at approximately 7000 feet above sea level. A lower pitch and/or smaller diameter prop could be used at lower elevations. See the article included below for more information re adjusting for altitude when flying electric.


Electric Power - Performance at High Altitudes

Question: I live at 5000 feet above sea level. What should I do to get my electric power system to perform at high altitudes as well as it does at sea level?

Answer: It's tough to get the same performance at 5000 or 8000 feet as you do at sea level but we do have a technique that will help you come close.

First of all it's important to understand a few things:

1) Unlike an internal combustion engine (i.e. glow or gas), an electric motor does not consume oxygen and hence could care less about oxygen or anything else that affects combustion.

2) An electric motor system that runs well at sea level will underperform at higher altitudes not because the air has less oxygen but because the air is thinner. Hot weather does the same thing... the air gets thinner. Hot and high together can really gang up and take a chunk out of the performance.

In order to get your electric motor system to perform in thinner air the same way it does at sea level, you may actually have to change the motor, speed control, battery pack and prop but before you go reaching for your credit card here is a technique that attacks the problem from the lowest cost component first.

1) Measure the watts that your power system consumes at sea level or other relatively low altitude location. Use a Medusa Power Analyzer or AstroFlight Whatt meter.

2) Better yet, if possible, use the Medusa Power Analyzer PRO thrust meter to measure the thrust generated and the watts consumed.

3) Now do the same measurements (1 & 2) at the higher altitude location. You will notice that your system consumes less watts and if you are able to measure thrust you will notice that you get less thrust at higher altitude than you do at lower altitude. This is because the air is thinner (less dense) at higher altitudes.

4) In order to get the thrust back up to where it was at lower altitudes you need the prop to move more of the thinner air. To do this, select a higher pitch and/or larger diameter prop for use at higher altitudes. Test again and try to find a prop that gives you the same thrust and/or watt values as you were getting on the original prop at lower altitude. If you can get the same thrust at 5000 feet as you got at sea level for example, you will have similar flight performance. Thrust is really the key here and it's best to work with thrust numbers but watts are a good relative indicator of thrust. Not perfect but still helpful!

Be cautious when testing to ensure that the motor, ESC and battery do not overheat with the new prop. Some compromising may be necessary to get good performance that does not overheat components.

In a perfect world, you would carefully select a specific motor, ESC, battery and prop to get the ideal combination for high altitude performance when installed in a particular model. Yup... perfect is best... but for those of us who can settle for a bit less than ideal and have limited budgets, changing the prop to generate similar thrust in high, hot & thinner air as you get in low, cool & thicker air is a good low cost way to go.    

 

11.55.3. VMA-U160X V-Stik 60 ARF - Landing Gear - Trike or Tail Dragger?

Question: Does VMAR V-Stik 60 ARF have trike gear or is it a tail dragger?

Answer: The VMAR V-Stik 60 ARF is a tail dragger.

11.56. VMA-X140X Xtreme Stik 40-52 ARF ECS Shoulder Wing
11.56.1. VMA-X140X - Wing Control Surfaces - Quad Flaps - What does it mean?

 

VMA-X240X - Wing Control Surfaces - Quad Flaps - What does it mean?

Question: What do you mean by Quad Flaps?

Answer: The VMAR Xtreme Stiks come with quad flaps in the wing. There are four control surfaces and each can be controlled by its own servo. There are two ailerons and two flaps.

Better Answer: Using a computer radio this four surface, four servo arrangment helps with XTREME aerobatics that the Xtreme Stik was designed for.

Normally, you would set up ailerons using two servos and the outboard control surfaces and you would set up flaps using two servos and the inboard control surfaces. With an appropriate computer radio, you can also configure the flaps as flaperons so that when flaps are deployed the ailerons act as flaps also. Spoilers and spoilerons (raised "flaps") are also possible using a computer radio.

 

11.57. VMA-X240X Xtreme Stik 40-52 ARF ECS Low Wing
11.57.1. VMA-X240X - Wing Control Surfaces - Quad Flaps - What does it mean?

Question: What do you mean by Quad Flaps?

Answer: The VMAR Xtreme Stiks come with quad flaps in the wing. There are four control surfaces and each can be controlled by its own servo. There are two ailerons and two flaps.

Better Answer: Using a computer radio this four surface, four servo arrangment helps with XTREME aerobatics that the Xtreme Stik was designed for.

Normally, you would set up ailerons using two servos and the outboard control surfaces and you would set up flaps using two servos and the inboard control surfaces. With an appropriate computer radio, you can also configure the flaps as flaperons so that when flaps are deployed the ailerons act as flaps also. Spoilers and spoilerons (raised "flaps") are also possible using a computer radio.

 

12. Technical Information - VMAX Electric Power Systems - General

 

12.1. ESC - No No's - That can Destroy Your Electronic Speed Control (ESC)

Question: Are there any No No's that I should be careful to stay clear of when running my Electronic Speed Control (ESC)?

Answer: We have sold many many ESC's.  From the questions and service requests we get we can pretty well sum up the No No's and Must Do's as follows:

a) Read Everything First! Every instruction! Every Warning Label! Browse our Knowledge Base while you are at it. About 90% of problems can be avoided by Reading First.

b) Do NOT screw up the electrical connections! Polarity is important. If you are not sure, figure it out first... trial and error testing can get expensive!

c) Do NOT exceed the maximum electrical specifications!  Pay attention to the maximum allowable Voltage, Current and Wattage (Volts x Amps).

d) Do NOT operate without a safety fuse system!

e) Do NOT use your plumbing tools or hammer or anything but the smallest of tools! An ESC is not a farm tractor. Often there is nothing to adjust. On some ESC's there may be an adjustment you can make with a small Phillips (cross) or flat bladed screw driver. Some ESC's use small jumpers or dip switches. Emphasis here on small and gentle and only if absolutely necessary and only if you know what you are doing!

f) Do NOT overheat. Ensure adequate cooling by exposing the heat sink and entire ESC to moving air.

g) Do NOT get dirt, water or metal objects into the ESC! ESC's really hate water. Get 'em wet and you might as well start reaching for your wallet. Nobody will warranty an ESC that has been wet. It leaves tell tale signs that stand out like a pimple on your nose. Stay the heck away from water, rain or moisture of any kind. Also protect the ESC from dirt or anything metal. Generally if you can keep moisture out, that will also prevent dirt or metal from contacting the ESC as well.

12.2. Motors - No No's - That can Destroy Your Motor

Question: Are there any No No's that I should be careful to stay clear of when running my Brushless Motor?

Answer: We have sold many many brushless motors.  From the questions and service requests we get we can pretty well sum up the No No's and Must Do's as follows:

a) Read Everything First! Every instruction! Every Warning Label! Browse our Knowledge Base while you are at it. About 90% of problems can be avoided by Reading First.

b) Do NOT screw up the electrical connections! Polarity is important. If you are not sure, figure it out first... trial and error testing can get expensive!

c) Do NOT exceed the maximum electrical specifications!  Pay attention to the maximum allowable Voltage, Current and Wattage (Volts x Amps).

d) Do NOT use a propeller that is bigger in diameter and/or bigger in pitch than the specifications provided! Use the recommended propeller.
 
e) Do NOT overheat. Ensure adequate cooling by exposing the motor and entire ESC to moving air.

f) Do NOT operate the motor if the prop appears to wobble when you turn it by hand! Look at the back of the hub as you rotate the propeller over by hand. The back of the hub should remain in one plane throughout the rotation, not wobble.

g) Do NOT operate if the motor appears to vibrate! Look at the prop shaft when it first gets going. If it looks blurry to the eyes or sounds strange it is vibrating. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor and possibly hurt your servos as well. Stop and check all bolts for tightness and make sure the prop is turning true (no wobble) and that the prop is balanced.

h) Do NOT operate with loose fasteners! Check bolts, nuts, screws etc for snug tightness. Do not over tighten but keep them snug. Check periodically, particularly after the first few times you use the motor. Use blue thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help keep fasteners from loosening up. If you find that fasteners are continously loosening up even after the motor has been used many times, you have a vibration issue. Check for sources of vibration. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor.

i) Do NOT operate at High Throttle on the ground or test bench for longer than 10 seconds! High Throttle static operation such as this where the airplane is not moving, induces maximum load on the motor while not providing proper air flow to help cool it. Heat will build up quickly, particularly if the motor is cowled. Heat is bad news. Heat can melt the windings down and quickly destroy the motor.

j) Do NOT operate without a safety fuse system!

k) Do NOT assume an electric motor is the same as a glow or gas engine! An electric motor is very different. Electric motors will attempt to overcome any load they encounter, even to the point of destroying themselves.

l) Do NOT use your plumbing tools or hammer! A brushless motor is not a farm tractor. Small hand tools only. Snugly tight does not mean you tighten things to the point they strip.

m) Do NOT get dirt, water or metal objects into the motor! If you drop a small screw or nut when working on your model, find it first before turning on your motor. Electric motors have strong magnets. Chances are that if you drop something small and metal into your model and can't find it... that it will be inside the motor. Turn the motor over by hand and pay attention to any unusual resistance, grinding or other odd sounds or feel. Find the missing metal item before operating your motor!
 
 
12.3. Motors - Prop Size - Why is it Important? Do NOT "OverProp"

Question: My brushless motor came with a label attached to the prop shaft or firewall that strongly warned me about the maximum propeller size that I should use with the motor and recommended a particular prop. The READ ME FIRST sheet that came with the motor also made reference to this. Why does the prop size matter?

Answer: Electric motors are very different than glow or gas engines. An electric motor will attempt to overcome any load. Rather than just stop, it will work very very hard to overcome any load and can draw massive amounts of current  from the battery, through the speed control and into motor while doing so. In the case of a totally locked motor for example, the current will become very high and we include a fuse in the line that will blow to protect the system.

This characteristic of electric motors is both good and bad. The good part is that an electric motor can produce a great deal of torque (power) from the first revolution whereas an internal combustion engine must get spooled up to a higher RPM level before it really begins to produce power. This is one of the main reasons combustion powered automobiles need a transmission... without a transmission we'd never be able to get our cars rolling in the first place.

The down side of this ability of electric motors to automatically attempt to overcome any load by drawing more current from the power source is that the motor will pull more and more current until the load is overcome or something blows. Sometimes the speed control will detect this and shut down, while at other times when the current really goes through the roof, a fuse in the line will pop. However, if the current draw is high but just below the level at which the ESC will shut down the motor will run and attempt to overcome the load. Massive amounts of current flow into the windings of the motor and this produces heat... lots of heat. In time this heat will melt the insulation on the windings and it's all down hill from there. Once the insulation begins to melt some of the windings will short out, more current flows, more heat, smoke appears and the end comes quick! In some cases this can happen in seconds... in other cases it can take 10 minutes or so.

OK... so what the heck does all this have to do with propeller size? Well, as far as the motor is concerned, the prop is the load on the motor. A prop with a big diameter induces more load than a small diameter prop. More pitch causes more of a load than low pitch. Bigger diameter props coupled with more pitch is double trouble if you exceed the propeller specs for the motor.

So, when we release a Power Module and/or Power Pack for one of our models, we have carefully matched the propeller, speed control, motor and battery to give you the best performance and best durability. If you change the prop to a larger prop or a prop with more pitch, you are changing the whole system and the part that suffers is the motor and sometimes the speed control. If you "over prop" a motor it will burn up quick. Sometimes in as little as 10 seconds. The worse scenario is over propping and then doing a run up of a cowled installation on the ground or test bench. This maximizes the load on the motor because the model is not moving and the prop cannot "unload". Static run ups also do not produce as much airflow into and out of the cowl to cool the motor and ESC. Static run ups on the ground or bench can gang up on the motor very quickly... they maximize the load on the motor while restricting the cooling air flow... ugly stuff!

Bottom line... pay strict attention to the maximum prop size specifications and use the prop we recommend. If someone tells you to do otherwise, make sure they buy you a second motor first because you are going to need it within anywhere from 10 seconds to 10 minutes later! You also might pick up a spare ESC while you are at it!

12.4. Motors - What does the term "Brushless Motor" mean?

Question: I see the term "Brushless" in some of the information about electric motors. What does this mean?

Answer: A tradional motor utilizes brushes to feed electricity to the armature (coils of wire) of the motor. The brushes physically brush up against the commutator (sometimes called a commutator "ring"). The commutator rotates with the armature and shaft while the brushes do not move. Various designs are used. Some commutators are split into segments and each time the brushes move over a different segment, different coils in the armature are "excited" by the electrical connection. Other designs use two or more continuous (non-segmented) commutator rings and alternate the current polarity and magnitude as the motor revolves through 360 degrees of rotation. Although simple and in spite of some very good material science work going into the composition of brushes over many decades of improvement, inevitably the brushes and commutator wear because they are in physical contact. Dust and contaminants in the air can accelerate this problem. Pitting due to electrical arcing can also occur particularly in high load, high current and/or high voltage situations. When the brushes wear down they must be replaced and eventually the commutator needs servicing as well. Often that is the end of motor because changing the commutator is an expensive process. Bottom line is that motors with brushes are wearing out from the first time they turn. It's just a matter of time. The plus side is that Brushed motors are easy to make, well understood, as common as dirt and hence generally cheap to manufacture.

A brushless motor is exactly what it purports to be... brushless! The magnets of a brushless motor rotate instead of the armature and hence the armature coils can be permanently wired up to the electrical feed. The rotating shaft is suspended in ball bearings and is never in direct contact with anything physical other than the bearings supporting the shaft. Brushless motors therefore last much longer, never need servicing (other than possibly bearings) and generally also produce more power more efficiently than a brushed motor of a similar size and weight. Unfortunately, in order to phase the current and time the excitation of the coils correctly, a brushless motor must rely on a sophisticated electronic controller made specifically for brushless motors. All of this sophistication, power, efficiency and longevity comes at a price... it costs more to make a brushless motor work properly than a brushed motor. You get more for your money but you gotta pay to get it! Bottom line here is that the brushless motor and the Lithium Polymer battery have together transformed electric model flying in a way that has not been possible before. It's not cheap but it works extremely well and for the first time we now have brushless motors, ESC's and LiPo's that when carefully matched up into a system, can give us performance and duration that was formerly only possible with glow or gas powered combustion engines.    

12.5. Motors - What does the term "OutRunner" mean?

Question: I see the term "Outrunner" in some of the Electric Motor information. What does "Outrunner" mean?

Answer: The following explanation should help you out.

a) A tradionaal "Inrunner" motor is the generally familiar design we have all become used to since electric motors were first invented. The inside of the motor rotates including the drive shaft to which is often attached a gear or pulley of some sort. The outside case of the motor is fixed. The case does not rotate and the case is often incorporates some sort of mounting flange or holes allowing the outside case and the motor itself to be bolted or clamped down to a platform or mounting system. From the outside of this traditional inrunner type of motor, only the shaft appears to rotate.

b) An outrunner motor has the shaft attached to the outside case of the motor and when the shaft rotates the entire outside case of motor rotates along with it. The inside of the motor is fixed and usually attached to a mounting plate of some sort at the back of the motor. This design has been around for many years but in modeling it is relatively new. Outrunner motors are generally brushless high power motors and offer the advantage of usually producing more power and being more efficient (using less energy) than inrunner motors.

13. Technical Information - VMAX Electric Power Systems - Product by Product

 

13.1. Batteries
Although there are a wide variety of different batteries, in our applications, batteries typically provide direct current (DC) power from the battery to a motor or other electrical component or circuit.
 
The output voltage and output current is important when selecting a battery. If the device you wish to power using a battery requires 12 Volts of Direct Current (VDC) as an input then you must choose a battery that provides 12 VDC output. The output current rating of the battery is also important. If your device requires 12 VDC at 10 Amps you must choose a 12 VDC battery that can safely supply 10 Amps or more.
 
A battery must be capable of providing the correct voltage for your device and it must be capable of providing at least the current that the device requires. A device that requires 12 VDC at 2 Amps will work fine with a battery rated for 12 VDC at 10 Amps but will not work with a 12 VDC battery that is rated capable of providing 1 Amp of current.
 
Never overload a battery or under power a device. You run the risk of damaging the battery and the device.
 
13.1.1. Battery Types - Chemistry & Characteristics
13.1.2. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate
VMAX Lithium Ion Batteries use A123 Nanophosphate Cells.
 
Please consult the READ ME FIRST document supplied with your battery before using.  
 
 
13.1.2.1. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - READ ME FIRST
 
BEFORE PROCEEDING
TO CHARGE OR 
USE THIS BATTERY
 
PLEASE
READ ME FIRST
          
PLEASE
READ ME FIRST
 
BEFORE PROCEEDING
TO CHARGE OR 
USE THIS BATTERY
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
13.1.2.1.1. Think Safety
Power supplies, battery chargers, batteries, motors and related accessories, tools and equipment can be hazardous if improperly used. Be cautious and follow all safety recommendations when using this product. Keep hands, tools, clothing, liquids and all foreign objects and flammables well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Check and double check all electrical connections before operating.  
 
WARNING - FIRE RISK
 
If this product or any wire, cable, adapter or other device to which it is connected Overheats, Smokes, Smells or Swells then IMMEDIATELY UNPLUG all connections & MOVE ALL COMPONENTS to a Safe Outdoor Location.
 
Do NOT Overload, Short Circuit, Drop, Mechanically Damage or Immerse 

Do NOT connect or operate Near Flammable Materials.

Do NOT operate inside an Automobile or other Vehicle.

Do NOT operate when Hot.

Do NOT operate in a wet environment.
 
Ensure that devices to which this product is connected have compatible voltage and current requirements.   
 
UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13.1.2.1.2. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - Introduction
Before proceeding please read the Overview and check off the components provided against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their packaging for now. Do not remove a component from it's packaging until it is needed.  
 
13.1.2.1.3. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - Contents
This VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate battery consists of the following:
  • The battery itself consisting of 1 or more A123 Nanophosphate cells
  • Wiring and connectors supplied with and/or attached to the battery
  • Documentation.

 

13.1.2.1.4. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - Installation Instructions
Consult any labels carefully, particularly any WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
Review carefully the following specifications printed on the battery:
Voltage - This is usually a multiple of 3.3. for example 3.3 Volts, 6.6 Volts, 9.9 Volts, 13.2 Volts etc. Ensure that the battery voltage is suitable for use with whatever you connect the battery to.
 
Capacity - This is stated in mAh for example 1100 mAh, 2300 mAh etc. 
 
MAX CELL CURRENT - A123 Cells are capable of 30C continuous current and 60C current for up to 10 seconds. The actual 30C and 60C current values in Amps are stated on the battery. These values are large and they are correct for the cells themselves but the battery pack assembly should not be assumed to be able to provide current at these levels. Often the manufacturer of the connector or wiring or internal welding strips has lower maximum current values. Look for lower limits stated on the battery,  for example "Connector rated for 45A". Ensure you test to ensure that your application does not exceed either the 30C rate or the third party component rating (such as the connector) whichever is lower.
 
MAX CHARGE - A123 Cells can be charged at up to the 5C rate. The actual 5C current value in Amps is stated on the battery. Make sure you do not exceed the MAX CHARGE current when charging. A123 cells perform best when balanced. The balancing voltage should not exceed 4.2V/cell. This is best done at a low current value such as 50mA or less.  
 
Connectors:
If your battery was supplied with an output power connector such as an Anderson Power Pole or a Deans Connector we strongly suggest NOT changing the connector. If your intended application requires a different connector we suggest using an adapter to mate the battery to your device.
 
If your battery was supplied with output power wires only (no connector) you need to install your choice of connector:
  • We strongly encourage the use of Anderson Power Pole connectors using 45 Amp contacts professionally crimped into place or Deans connectors professionally soldered to the power wires of the battery.
  • Remove the insulation from only one wire at a time to avoid the wires every contacting each other. Contact will create a high current short circuit that can cause a fire and damage your battery.
  • Ensure that the red wire is joined to the positive (+) connector and the black wire is joined to the negative (-) connector. Incorrect polarity will damage the battery and devices to which the battery is connected and may cause a fire.  

UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED. DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
 
 
13.1.2.1.5. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - Operating

Powering Up - Turning On

A) Consult any labels carefully, particularly any WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the labels will help prevent accidents and damage to your equipment.

B) Consult the documentation that came with the device you are going to connect your battery to.
  • Ensure that the voltage of the battery is suitable for use with the device.
  • Ensure that the current rating of the battery is suitable for use with the device.
  • Ensure that the power output plug on the battery is compatible with the power input connector on the device. If not, we strongly suggest using an adapter rather than cutting connectors off and rewiring.
  • Ensure you know how to turn the device on and off and what to watch for in the way of indicator lights etc.
C) Turn the device off before connecting the battery.
 
D) If the device has external moving parts such as a propeller, wheels, tires, shafts, gears etc ensure that the moving components are standing clear of any obstacles, hair or clothing. Be particularly careful to protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of others. Ensure that the device cannot move if power is suddenly applied.
 
D) Connect the battery to the device.
 
E) Ensure that the device cannot move if power is suddenly applied. Turn on the device and operate the device through its full range of power settings.
STAY ALERT FOR OVERHEATING, SMELLS, SMOKE OR OTHER SIGNS OF TROUBLE. UNPLUG ALL CONNECTIONS IMMEDIATELY IF THE BATTERY OR ANY CORD OR DEVICE OVERHEATS, SMELLS, SMOKES, SPARKS OR MAKES ANY UNEXPECTED NOISE OR EMISSION AND REMOVE COMPONENTS TO A SAFE OUTDOOR LOCATION UNTIL COOL.
 
 
Powering Down - Turning Off.

UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED.
A) Turn off all devices powered by the battery.
 
B) Unplug all devices and wiring from the battery.   
 
 
 
 
 

13.1.2.1.6. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - Charging
Charging correctly safely provides the best performance from your battery and maximizes it's life span.  

VMAX Lithium Ion batteries use A123 Nanophosphate cells. These cells are considerably more tolerant of over discharge, over charge and current values than many other batteries. They are more robust and much safer than Lithium Polymer batteries. However, it is important to use common sense, follow instructions and understand what you are doing when charging.

A) From the battery label determine:

Voltage - Make sure you know the voltage of and the number of cells (Voltage/3.3) in the battery. Consult the battery label. Typical values for VMAX Lithium Ion batteries are as follows: 3.3V (1 cell), 6.6V (2 cells), 9.9V (3 cells), 13.2V (4 cells), 16.5V (5 cells) etc
 
Capacity - This is stated on the battery label in mAh for example 1100 mAh, 2300 mAh etc. 
  
MAX CHARGE - A123 Nanophosphate Cells can be charged at up to the 5C rate. The actual 5C current value in Amps is stated on the battery. Make sure you do not exceed the MAX CHARGE current when charging. 
 
Balance Voltage - A123 Nanophosphate cells perform best when balanced. The balancing voltage should not exceed 4.2V/cell. This is best done at a low current value such as 50mA or less. Although balancing is important it is less critical with A123 Nanophosphate cells than Lithium Polymer. Typically 95% of more of the battery capacity can be obtained without balancing. The final 5% of capacity requires balancing.
B) Select your charger. We recommend a charger that is capable of balancing the cells. Slow chargers will take up to a few hours to charge your battery and generally connect only via the white balance connector on your battery. Fast Chargers can charge your battery in a little as 15 minutes provided that the charger is capable of operating at the 5C charge rate. Fast chargers usually work with dual connections, one set of wires runs to the power connector on the battery while a second set runs to the balance connector. 
The VMAX Slow Charger #VME-LPBC10 works well 2 and 3 cell VMAX Lithium Ion batteries. No programming or switch settings are required.

The VMAX Fast Charger #VME-LPBC50 works well with VMAX Lithium Ion batteries having up to 5 cells (16.5 Volts). This charger uses a menu driven program to set voltage and current limits.
 
C) Follow the instructions that came with your charger. Set your charger to match the Voltage, Capacity, Max Charge and Balance Voltage of your battery. In many cases the capacity is not selectable and the charger will automatically bring the battery to near 95% capacity before beginning a slower trickle charge cycle to top up the final 5% of capacity.  
 
DO NOT CHARGE UNATTENDED
STAY ALERT FOR OVERHEATING, SMELLS, SMOKE OR OTHER SIGNS OF TROUBLE. UNPLUG ALL CONNECTIONS IMMEDIATELY IF THE BATTERY OR ANY CORD OR DEVICE OVERHEATS, SMELLS, SMOKES, SPARKS OR MAKES ANY UNEXPECTED NOISE OR EMISSION AND REMOVE COMPONENTS TO A SAFE OUTDOOR LOCATION UNTIL COOL.
 
D)  When charging is complete, unplug your battery from all connections and unplug your charger and/or the power supply connected to your charger.
 
UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED
 
 
 

13.1.2.1.7. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - No No's & Must Do's
Do NOT OPERATE NEAR FLAMMABLE MATERIALS.  Do not operate near flammable liquids or gases, on or near a carpet or any flammable surface.

Do NOT OPERATE inside an automobile or other vehicle. If using a cigarette lighter adapter or connecting to automobile power ensure that the cord is long enough to connect to the battery located outside and away from the vehicle.

Do NOT OPERATE WHEN BATTERY IS HOT. Vmax Lithium Ion batteries use A123 Nanophosphate cells. These cells heat up much less under high current loads that Lithium Polymer batteries. Vmax Lithium Ion batteries will feel warm when providing high current but should not become so hot that you cannot tough them. If the becomes too hot to comfortably touch, understand why it is hot. Check your connections. If the battery and anything it is connected to appears to be functioning properly the battery may be overloaded by devices to which it is connected. Reduce the load.
 
Do NOT MODIFY WIRING OR CONNECTORS. If your battery was supplied with factory installed connectors we strongly suggest using these connectors. If a battery connector is not compatible with the device to which you intend on connecting the battery, use an adapter rather than changing connectors on the device or the battery.

CONNECT TO DEVICES HAVING COMPATIBLE VOLTAGE & CURRENT REQUIREMENTS. Ensure that the output voltage and current of your battery is compatible with the device you intend connecting it to. Ensure that external devices do not overload the battery with more current than it can supply.

DO NOT OPERATE in a WET ENVIRONMENT. This battery is NOT intended for operation in a wet environment. It is NOT water or weather proof. Keep the battery dry and clean at all times.  
 
CHARGE CORRECTLY.  Review the voltage, charging current limit and balancing voltage stated on the battery label. Review the charging guidelines provided elsewhere in this document. Review the instructions that came with your charger and ensure that you know how to connect to and control the output from your charger.

ALWAYS UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED. Do not leave your battery connected to anything when unattended. Nothing!

 

13.1.2.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.1.2.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.1.2.1.9. Warranty

This product is warrantied to the original buyer to be free of manufacturing defects for a period of 6 months from date of purchase.

Problems caused by alteration, normal wear and tear, physical damage, abuse, improper use, failure to comply with the setup and operating instructions, customer disassembly, changes to the wiring or connectors or damage caused by incorrect charging or damage caused by the use of other accessories or products to which the battery was connected are not covered by this warranty.

All warranty returns MUST be accompanied by an RMA number and a dated sales receipt from an authorized VMAX re-seller and the original VMAX packaging along with all of the adapters and connectors supplied with this product.

All returns must be SHIPPED PREPAID to the VMAX Service Center in your market area.
 
See "Support" for information about Warranty Claims.
 
13.1.2.1.10. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.1.2.2. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below. 

13.1.2.3. VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
13.1.2.3.1. Pictures - VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate
13.1.2.3.1.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VMAX Lithium Ion - A123 Nanophosphate
13.2. Battery Chargers
13.2.1. VME-LPBC10 & VME-LPBC10S VMAX Battery Charger for 2-3 Cell LiPO Battery Packs
Please note that #VME-LPBC10 is the VMAX Battery Charger itself with the DC input cord (with alligator clips). In some markets the #VME-LPBC10 VMAX Battery Charger is sold only in this format.
 
#VME-LPBC10S is the VMAX Battery Charger "S"et and consists of the VMAX Battery Charger (#VME-LPBC10) plus "XH" style output adapters to connect with 2 and 3 cell LIPO packs having 5 slot balance connectors (very common) and the READ ME FIRST Operations Manual in a bundle complete with display packaging.
 
Users of #VME-LPBC10 VMAX Battery Charger may benefit from some of the additional information found in the READ ME FIRST Operations Manual bundled with #VME-LPBC10S VMAX Battery Charger Set.
 
13.2.1.1. VME-LPBC10S VMAX Battery Charger for 2-3 Cell LiPO Battery Packs - READ ME FIRST Operations Manual

The READ ME FIRST Operations Manual is available here as a pdf:  

13.2.1.2. VME-LPBC10 & VME-LPBC10S VMAX Battery Charger for 2-3 Cell LiPO Battery Packs - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
13.2.1.2.1. Pictures VME-LPBC10 VMAX for 2-3 Cell LiPO Battery Packs
13.2.1.2.1.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) VME-LPBC10 VMAX for 2-3 Cell LiPO Battery Packs
13.3. Motors - Brushless - Electric
13.3.1. VMM-111B18VM VMAX 11.1 Volt Motor - Brushless - 15A 130W Max
13.3.1.1. Mounting Screws - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What do I need in the way of mounting screws?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on what you have in mind:
a) VMAX VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motors that are supplied with VMAX Power Modules and VMAX Power Packs come pre-mounted with the appropriate screws for the motor.
 
b) The threads are 3mm and generally four 3mm x 6-12 mm machine hex head screws with washers will work.
 
c) We sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MS) consisting of four 3mm x 10mm hex head screws. Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
d) We also sell a Mounting Screw Set (#VMM-111B18MT) consisting of 16 mounting screws. Four screws in each of four different sizes/styles.
  • 3 x 10 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (like VMM-111B18MS)
  • 3 x 16 mm Hex head machine screws (4) (longer version of above)
  • 3 x   6 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting)
  • 3 x 10 mm Phillips countersink head screws (4) (for flush fitting) 
The four different sizes/styles allow for thicker firewalls, multi-layer firewalls where the screw heads must be countersunk between the layers, etc.
 
This set provides for a very wide range of different mounting methods.
 
Hex head screws should be used with flat washers under the heads.
 
CAUTION: When mounting motors using any method, ensure all fasteners are tightened securely. Check for vibration free operation of the motor. If not vibration free, reseat and retighten all fasteners and ancilliary components such as props and gears. Tighten fasteners firmly but don't strip the threads. Use medium strength thread locker on all metal to metal fasteners.

 

13.3.1.2. Propeller Adapter - What to use on VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor

Question: I have a VMAX #VMM-111B18VM VMAX Brushless Motor. What prop adapter works on this motor?

Answer: There are a several options for this depending on the prop that you are using.

Please note that the motor comes with a long threaded shaft that is .118 in. (3 mm) in diameter. We sell a prop nuts and washer set (#VMM-111B18PN) that contains an assortment of nuts, safety nuts and washers suitable for mounting most suitable props on this shaft. Please note that if you bought a VMAR Power Module or Power Pack for your model the appropriate nuts, safety nuts and washers and prop are already included. Method A, B and C described below utilize the prop nuts and washer set #VMM-111B18PN.
 
Method A: This is applicable to the older version of Master Airscrew #MAS-0850NE prop that has a recessed hex shaped hole in the back of the prop. No collets come with this older version of the 0850NE prop to adapt the prop to fit different shaft sizes.
 
For installation of this older style of  #MAS-0850NE prop, we recommend the following order of components working from the motor out towards the tip of  the shaft : Motor > Nut > Washer > Nut > Nut > Prop > Washer > Safety Nut. The idea here is that the pair of two hex nuts (Nut > Nut) insert themselves into the recess in the back of the prop.
 
Method B: This is similar to Method A but uses a Safety Nut instead of the pair of two hex nuts. Working from the motor out towards the tip of the shaft install the following components: Motor > Nut > Washer > Safety Nut (hex end towards prop) > Prop > Washer > Safety Nut. The idea here is that the hex end of the first Safety Nut inserts itself into the recess in the back of the prop.
 
Method C: This is applicable to the newer version of Master Airscrew #MAS-0850NE prop that has a recessed hole in the back of the prop that works with a collet suitable for the motor shaft size. A selection of collets with different internal hole diameters is provided with the prop. Working from the motor out towards the tip of the shaft install the following components:
Motor > Nut > Washer > Collett and Prop > Washer > Safety Nut. The idea here is that the Collett and Prop are cinched between the two washers.  
 
Method D: Use a conventional squish type 3 or 4 segment prop adapter suitable for the motor shaft size referenced above.
 To use such an adapter measure the motor shaft length that you require for your application (i.e. it must fit in your model and clear the front of the model and/or cowl) and then cut off the excess shaft length. In general you use the fasteners that come with the segmented prop adapter.

 
CAUTION: When mounting props using any method, ensure all hardware and fasteners are tightened securely. Check for wobble free rotation of the prop and motor. If not wobble free, loosen the prop, reseat it and tighten securely. Tighten the nuts firmly but don't strip the threads.

 

13.4. Power Module Set (Electric) - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall
VMAR Power Module Sets for VMAR Electric ARF models contain the motor and speed control components related to the electric power (propulsion) system and can be easily mounted on the customized Power Module Firewall engineered to fit the particular model and supplied with the model.
13.4.1. Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAR Power Module Sets are intended for modelers who already have their own Li Po Battery, Servos, Props and wiring systems but who wish to purchase an easy to install power system including the firewall(s), motor(s) and speed control(s) that have been factory designed for and tested with their VMAR model.
 
13.4.2. Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAR Power Module Sets are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the firewall(s), electric motor(s) and electronic speed controls(s) (ESC) for the applicable model.

A VMAX Power Module Set typically consists of the following components: 

  • Laser cut wood power module firewall.
    • This may also be supplied with the model (in a parts bag)
  • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • With four (4) 3mm socket head bolts and 4 flat washers fitted for shipping.
  • Propellor Mounting Hardware.
    • One (1) 3mm security lock nut is fitted on the threaded motor shaft for shipping.
    • Three (3) 3mm nuts and two (2) #6 flat washers are supplied in a parts bag.
  • Electronic Speed Control ("ESC") (#VMC-120B15VC).
    • Red, White & Black three (3) wire lead set attached to ESC for connection to Brushless Motor.
    • Red (+), Black (-) two (2) wire lead set attached to ESC for DC power input.
      • Two (1 Red, 1 Blue) crimp on female bullet connectors for power battery leads.
    • RC servo plug on Red, White, Black three (3) wire set for connection to RC receiver throttle channel.
    • Four zip straps.
  • READ ME FIRST documentation.

Power Module Sets for Multi-Motor Models:  

  • Power Module Sets for multi-motor models will contain multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model.
  • For each ESC in the Power Module Set we also include 1 Red and 1 Blue female crimp on bullet connector for use with user supplied power leads.
  • For each motor in the Power Module Set we also include propeller mounting hardware.
VMAR Power Module Sets do NOT include:
  • Wiring or connectors other than the leads attached to motor and attached to the electronic speed control and the red and black female bullet connectors noted above.
  • Propeller
  • Li Po Battery Pack 
  • Servos
These components are NOT included in the Power Module Set and will be needed to complete your model. If you do not already have these items, they will need to be obtained separately. 
 
13.4.3. Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Propeller Mounting
VMAR Power Module Sets come with propeller mounting hardware that works with the propeller we recommend AND can be adapted to work with most other propellers.
 
a) We include the following: Three (3) 3 mm plain nuts, One (1) 3 mm security nut with fiber insert, Two (2) flat washers.
 
b) For propellers without a collet set and having a round hole in the back of the propeller hub that is bigger than the motor shaft or having a 3mm hexagonal recess in the back of the propeller hub: First thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer followed by two of the 3 mm plain nuts (tighten snugly), then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the two plain nuts are inserted into the recess in the back of the propeller hub and the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut >  flat washer > two (2) 3 mm nuts > propeller >  flat washer > security nut.
  
c) For propellers with a collet set and having a larger recessed round hole in the back or front of the propeller hub that will accomodate a collet: Select a collet that has a center hole 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) in diameter. Insert the collet into the hole in the propeller hub. From this point on treat the propeller and collet as one unit i.e. the "propeller". Next thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the propeller hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
d) For propellers having a 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) round hole that runs completely through the propeller hub with no other hole or recess in the back or front of the hub: Thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer, then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
e) For other propellers: We suggest obtaining a "squish" or "cinch" type propeller adapter suitable for 3mm shafts. You may wish to cut the motor shaft to a shorter length. Measure and test carefully before shortening the motor shaft with due consideration for any cowl and/or propeller clearance.
 
13.4.4. Power Module Set - For VMA-B210X Bird Dog - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall

20200428... Please review the information included below. 

Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAR Power Module Sets are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the firewall(s), electric motor(s) and electronic speed controls(s) (ESC) for the applicable model.

A VMAX Power Module Set typically consists of the following components: 

  • Laser cut wood power module firewall.
    • This may also be supplied with the model (in a parts bag)
  • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • With four (4) 3mm socket head bolts and 4 flat washers fitted for shipping.
  • Propellor Mounting Hardware.
    • One (1) 3mm security lock nut is fitted on the threaded motor shaft for shipping.
    • Three (3) 3mm nuts and two (2) #6 flat washers are supplied in a parts bag.
  • Electronic Speed Control ("ESC") (#VMC-120B15VC).
    • Red, White & Black three (3) wire lead set attached to ESC for connection to Brushless Motor.
    • Red (+), Black (-) two (2) wire lead set attached to ESC for DC power input.
      • Two (1 Red, 1 Blue) crimp on female bullet connectors for power battery leads.
    • RC servo plug on Red, White, Black three (3) wire set for connection to RC receiver throttle channel.
    • Four zip straps.
  • READ ME FIRST documentation.

Power Module Sets for Multi-Motor Models:  

  • Power Module Sets for multi-motor models will contain multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model.
  • For each ESC in the Power Module Set we also include 1 Red and 1 Blue female crimp on bullet connector for use with user supplied power leads.
  • For each motor in the Power Module Set we also include propeller mounting hardware.
VMAR Power Module Sets do NOT include:
  • Wiring or connectors other than the leads attached to motor and attached to the electronic speed control and the red and black female bullet connectors noted above.
  • Propeller
  • Li Po Battery Pack 
  • Servos
These components are NOT included in the Power Module Set and will be needed to complete your model. If you do not already have these items, they will need to be obtained separately. 
 
More Information about Power Modules

Links to More Information:

13.4.5. Power Module - For VMA-C210X Cub & L4 - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall

This Power Module (VMM-C210XPM1) includes the components listed below. 

  • (The laser cut wood power firewall is part #VMA-C210XPMV.)
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAR Power Module Sets are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the firewall(s), electric motor(s) and electronic speed controls(s) (ESC) for the applicable model.

A VMAX Power Module Set typically consists of the following components: 

  • Laser cut wood power module firewall.
    • This may also be supplied with the model (in a parts bag)
  • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • With four (4) 3mm socket head bolts and 4 flat washers fitted for shipping.
  • Propellor Mounting Hardware.
    • One (1) 3mm security lock nut is fitted on the threaded motor shaft for shipping.
    • Three (3) 3mm nuts and two (2) #6 flat washers are supplied in a parts bag.
  • Electronic Speed Control ("ESC") (#VMC-120B15VC).
    • Red, White & Black three (3) wire lead set attached to ESC for connection to Brushless Motor.
    • Red (+), Black (-) two (2) wire lead set attached to ESC for DC power input.
      • Two (1 Red, 1 Blue) crimp on female bullet connectors for power battery leads.
    • RC servo plug on Red, White, Black three (3) wire set for connection to RC receiver throttle channel.
    • Four zip straps.
  • READ ME FIRST documentation.

Power Module Sets for Multi-Motor Models:  

  • Power Module Sets for multi-motor models will contain multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model.
  • For each ESC in the Power Module Set we also include 1 Red and 1 Blue female crimp on bullet connector for use with user supplied power leads.
  • For each motor in the Power Module Set we also include propeller mounting hardware.
VMAR Power Module Sets do NOT include:
  • Wiring or connectors other than the leads attached to motor and attached to the electronic speed control and the red and black female bullet connectors noted above.
  • Propeller
  • Li Po Battery Pack 
  • Servos
These components are NOT included in the Power Module Set and will be needed to complete your model. If you do not already have these items, they will need to be obtained separately. 
 
More Information about Power Modules

Links to More Information:

13.4.6. Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall

 

VMM-D210XPM1 POWER MODULE SET

 

13.4.6.1. Power Module Set - #VMM-D210XPM1 For VMA-D210X DO27 - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

 

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT 

 

 

 

 

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.4.6.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.4.6.1.2. Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.4.6.1.3. Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAR Power Module Sets are intended for modelers who already have their own Li Po Battery, Servos, Props and wiring systems but who wish to purchase an easy to install power system including the firewall(s), motor(s) and speed control(s) that have been factory designed for and tested with their VMAR model.
 
13.4.6.1.4. Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Contents
This Power Module Set (#VMM-D210PM1) includes the components listed below. 
  • (The laser cut wood firewall is part #VMA-D210XPMV) 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAR Power Module Sets are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the firewall(s), electric motor(s) and electronic speed controls(s) (ESC) for the applicable model.

A VMAX Power Module Set typically consists of the following components: 

  • Laser cut wood power module firewall.
    • This may also be supplied with the model (in a parts bag)
  • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • With four (4) 3mm socket head bolts and 4 flat washers fitted for shipping.
  • Propellor Mounting Hardware.
    • One (1) 3mm security lock nut is fitted on the threaded motor shaft for shipping.
    • Three (3) 3mm nuts and two (2) #6 flat washers are supplied in a parts bag.
  • Electronic Speed Control ("ESC") (#VMC-120B15VC).
    • Red, White & Black three (3) wire lead set attached to ESC for connection to Brushless Motor.
    • Red (+), Black (-) two (2) wire lead set attached to ESC for DC power input.
      • Two (1 Red, 1 Blue) crimp on female bullet connectors for power battery leads.
    • RC servo plug on Red, White, Black three (3) wire set for connection to RC receiver throttle channel.
    • Four zip straps.
  • READ ME FIRST documentation.

Power Module Sets for Multi-Motor Models:  

  • Power Module Sets for multi-motor models will contain multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model.
  • For each ESC in the Power Module Set we also include 1 Red and 1 Blue female crimp on bullet connector for use with user supplied power leads.
  • For each motor in the Power Module Set we also include propeller mounting hardware.
VMAR Power Module Sets do NOT include:
  • Wiring or connectors other than the leads attached to motor and attached to the electronic speed control and the red and black female bullet connectors noted above.
  • Propeller
  • Li Po Battery Pack 
  • Servos
These components are NOT included in the Power Module Set and will be needed to complete your model. If you do not already have these items, they will need to be obtained separately. 
 
13.4.6.1.5. Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
13.4.6.1.5.1. Power Module Set for VMA-D210X DO27 - Installation Procedure
 a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
b) In the Operations Manual please turn to Page 7, Stage 11.

c) Review (but do not action) all Steps 11A through 11L inclusive.

d) Review Figure 11F showing the wiring between the motor and the electronic speed control ("ESC"). Make sure you plug the wires together as follows:
Motor Red Wire to ESC Red Wire
Motor Black Wire to ESC WHITE Wire
Motor WHITE Wire to ESC Black Wire 

If you do not connect the wires between the motor and the ESC as described above you can damage the motor &/or ESC or the motor may turn backwards.

e) Review the supplementary information provided below regarding step 11K

f) After reviewing the steps and the wiring of figure 11F and the supplementary information provided below, proceed carefully with steps 11A through 11L to assemble your power module.

The following depiction illustrates the Fuselage and the assembled Power Module and how it is wired to the Fuse Assembly and Battery Pack:

 

13.4.6.1.6. Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Module as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.4.6.1.6.1. Propellers - Power Module Operations - VMA-D210X DO27
 
a) See the Warning label on the firewall. Do NOT exceed the maximum propeller size noted.
 
b) With power disconnected, double check the propeller to make sure it is not damaged or nicked in any way and that it is securely and safely mounted. Check before and after each flight.
 
c) Ensure the propeller turns true (no wobble) and that it is balanced and that all propeller fasteners are tight. 
 
USING THE WRONG PROPELLER &/or OPERATING WITH EXCESSIVE VIBRATION WILL DESTROY THE MOTOR.
 
d) Ensure that your propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind (looking forward as if you were in the cockpit) and that the prop is blowing air from the front of the model to the back.
 
f) If the propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind but air is flowing from the back to the front of the model, the propeller is mounted on the motor backwards. Check and reinstall the propeller correctly. In general the brand logo and other writing on propellers should face forwards.
 
g) If the propeller is rotating backwards, reverse the black and white wire connections between the motor and the electronic speed control.
 
13.4.6.1.6.2. On the Ground - Power Module Operations - For VMA-D210X DO27
Operating the brushless motor on the ground or in a static mode whereby the aircraft cannot move, puts peak loads on the motor while not providing adequate cooling normally generated in flight. Peak loads coupled with inadequate air flow leads to very rapid heat buildup within the brushless motor that can damage or destroy the motor very quickly.
 
ENSURE ADEQUATE COOLING. DO NOT OPERATE AT HIGH THROTTLE ON THE GROUND FOR LONGER THAN 10 SECONDS.
13.4.6.1.6.3. Powering Up - Power Module Operations - VMA-D210X DO27
 
a) Move your throttle stick all the way down to 0 (no power).
 
b) Turn on your transmitter
 
c) Turn on your receiver.
 
d) Ensure the model is held securely in order to test the motor system. Tie it down or hold the fuselage at the back.
 
STAY WELL CLEAR OF THE PROPELLER AND PLUG IN YOUR BATTERY.
 
e) Advance the throttle on your transmitter
 
f) The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) will apply power to the motor and the prop will begin to rotate. Very briefly advance the power to full throttle to ensure the motor spools up to full power. Do this for no more than 2-3 seconds at a time.
 
g) If the ESC beeps rather than makes the motor turn it is because the ESC is being powered up with the throttle stick at a non-zero position. This is a safety feature to prevent rotation of the prop unless you begin from a zero throttle position after each power up.
 
13.4.6.1.6.4. Motor Power Auto-Cutoff - Power Module Operations - VMA-D210X DO27
The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) has an embedded "auto-cutoff" controller that will reduce battery power supplied to the motor as the battery reserve begins to run out. This auto-cutoff controller ensures that the battery retains sufficient energy to power the receiver and servos. As the energy reserve in the battery approaches "empty", the auto-cutoff begin to reduce power available for the motor while allocating the remaining energy to provide power for the receiver and servos so that you can maintain flight control using the remaining energy.
 
Land immediately when you detect that the motor power is beginning to fade. Once the power begins to fade, you have a very short time remaining before the ESC will auto-cutoff power to the motor.
 
13.4.6.1.7. Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - No No's & Must Do's
Motors - No No's - That can Destroy Your Motor

Question: Are there any No No's that I should be careful to stay clear of when running my Brushless Motor?

Answer: We have sold many many brushless motors.  From the questions and service requests we get we can pretty well sum up the No No's and Must Do's as follows:

a) Read Everything First! Every instruction! Every Warning Label! Browse our Knowledge Base while you are at it. About 90% of problems can be avoided by Reading First.

b) Do NOT screw up the electrical connections! Polarity is important. If you are not sure, figure it out first... trial and error testing can get expensive!

c) Do NOT exceed the maximum electrical specifications!  Pay attention to the maximum allowable Voltage, Current and Wattage (Volts x Amps).

d) Do NOT use a propeller that is bigger in diameter and/or bigger in pitch than the specifications provided! Use the recommended propeller.
 
e) Do NOT overheat. Ensure adequate cooling by exposing the motor and entire ESC to moving air.

f) Do NOT operate the motor if the prop appears to wobble when you turn it by hand! Look at the back of the hub as you rotate the propeller over by hand. The back of the hub should remain in one plane throughout the rotation, not wobble.

g) Do NOT operate if the motor appears to vibrate! Look at the prop shaft when it first gets going. If it looks blurry to the eyes or sounds strange it is vibrating. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor and possibly hurt your servos as well. Stop and check all bolts for tightness and make sure the prop is turning true (no wobble) and that the prop is balanced.

h) Do NOT operate with loose fasteners! Check bolts, nuts, screws etc for snug tightness. Do not over tighten but keep them snug. Check periodically, particularly after the first few times you use the motor. Use blue thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help keep fasteners from loosening up. If you find that fasteners are continously loosening up even after the motor has been used many times, you have a vibration issue. Check for sources of vibration. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor.

i) Do NOT operate at High Throttle on the ground or test bench for longer than 10 seconds! High Throttle static operation such as this where the airplane is not moving, induces maximum load on the motor while not providing proper air flow to help cool it. Heat will build up quickly, particularly if the motor is cowled. Heat is bad news. Heat can melt the windings down and quickly destroy the motor.

j) Do NOT operate without a safety fuse system!

k) Do NOT assume an electric motor is the same as a glow or gas engine! An electric motor is very different. Electric motors will attempt to overcome any load they encounter, even to the point of destroying themselves.

l) Do NOT use your plumbing tools or hammer! A brushless motor is not a farm tractor. Small hand tools only. Snugly tight does not mean you tighten things to the point they strip.

m) Do NOT get dirt, water or metal objects into the motor! If you drop a small screw or nut when working on your model, find it first before turning on your motor. Electric motors have strong magnets. Chances are that if you drop something small and metal into your model and can't find it... that it will be inside the motor. Turn the motor over by hand and pay attention to any unusual resistance, grinding or other odd sounds or feel. Find the missing metal item before operating your motor!
 
 
13.4.6.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.4.6.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.4.6.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.4.6.2. Power Module - #VMM-D210XPM1 For VMA-D210X DO27 - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Propeller Mounting
VMAR Power Module Sets come with propeller mounting hardware that works with the propeller we recommend AND can be adapted to work with most other propellers.
 
a) We include the following: Three (3) 3 mm plain nuts, One (1) 3 mm security nut with fiber insert, Two (2) flat washers.
 
b) For propellers without a collet set and having a round hole in the back of the propeller hub that is bigger than the motor shaft or having a 3mm hexagonal recess in the back of the propeller hub: First thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer followed by two of the 3 mm plain nuts (tighten snugly), then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the two plain nuts are inserted into the recess in the back of the propeller hub and the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut >  flat washer > two (2) 3 mm nuts > propeller >  flat washer > security nut.
  
c) For propellers with a collet set and having a larger recessed round hole in the back or front of the propeller hub that will accomodate a collet: Select a collet that has a center hole 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) in diameter. Insert the collet into the hole in the propeller hub. From this point on treat the propeller and collet as one unit i.e. the "propeller". Next thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the propeller hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
d) For propellers having a 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) round hole that runs completely through the propeller hub with no other hole or recess in the back or front of the hub: Thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer, then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
e) For other propellers: We suggest obtaining a "squish" or "cinch" type propeller adapter suitable for 3mm shafts. You may wish to cut the motor shaft to a shorter length. Measure and test carefully before shortening the motor shaft with due consideration for any cowl and/or propeller clearance.
 
13.4.7. Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall
13.4.7.1. Power Module - #VMM-J210XPM1 For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.4.7.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.4.7.1.2. Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.4.7.1.3. Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAR Power Module Sets are intended for modelers who already have their own Li Po Battery, Servos, Props and wiring systems but who wish to purchase an easy to install power system including the firewall(s), motor(s) and speed control(s) that have been factory designed for and tested with their VMAR model.
 
13.4.7.1.4. Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Contents
This VMAX Power Module (#VMM-J210PM1) contains the following
  • One (1) power pylon for the fuselage, consisting of:
    • Laser cut wood fuselage power module firewall assembly (a component of #VMA-J210XPMV),
    • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM),
    • Pre-installed motor mounting fasteners,
    • Propellor mounting hardware,
    • Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC),
    • Wiring between the Motor and the ESC,
    • Wiring leads from the ESC to provide Positive (+) power, Negative (-) power and throttle control
  • Two (2) power assemblies for the wings, each consisting of:
    • Laser cut wood motor mounting plate (a component of #VMA-J210XPMV),
    • Brushless motor (#VMM-111B18VM),
    • Semi-installed motor mounting fasteners,  
    • Propellor mounting hardware,
    • Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC) with mounting block secured by a zip strap,
    • Wire extension set (3 wires) for each motor to provide electrical power between each wing motor and it's respective ESC,
    • Wiring leads from the ESC to provide Positive (+) power, Negative (-) power and throttle control
    • Crimp on bullet connectors (female) for the ESC power feeds  (3 Red, 3 Black),
  • All components have been factory connected & tested.
  • Documentation
 
 
 
 
13.4.7.1.5. Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.4.7.1.5.1. Stage 1 - Install Power Pylons - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Not Applicable
 
c)  Complete Stage 1 from the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
d) Complete Stage 2 from the Assembly & Operations Manual. Note that in some markets the power pylons have been pre-attached to the wing by the factory.
 
e) Once you completed Stage 2 from the Assembly & Operations Manual you will have an assembled wing with power pylons attached to the wing.
 
f) Complete Stages 3 to 8 from the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
g) Review Stage 9 of the Assembly & Operations Manual. Skip step 9.1 and replace steps 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 with the following procedure.  
 
h) Look carefully at the wing power assemblies provided with this Power Module set. Consult figures 9C, 9E and 9F in the Assembly and Operations Manual provided with your model.
 
For each wing motor in turn,
 
i) Remove the four loosely fitted nut, bolt and washer sets from the wood motor mounting plate.
 
j) Remove the long black tapered head screws from the back of the wood motor mounting plate.
 
k) Fit the motor mounting plate (with motor) to the power pylon using the two long black taper head screws as shown in Figure 9E of the Assembly and Operations Manual. Leave slightly loose for now. Orient the mounting plate so that the motor wires will pass through the slot in the power pylon as shown in figure 9B, 9F and 9G of the Assembly and Operations Manual.
 
l) Insert the four nut, bolt and washer sets through the wood motor mounting plate and through the power pylon as depicted in Figure 9F of the Assembly and Operations Manual. We suggest having the nuts at the back of the pylon (opposite to that shown in Figure 9F).
 
m) Tighten the two long black taper head screws and the four nut and bolt sets and ensure the motor mounting plate is securely attached to the power pylon.
 
n) Apply medium strength (blue) thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to the nuts to prevent them from vibrating loose.
 
o) Repeat steps i) through n) for the second wing motor.
 
p) Install three (3) motor extension wires for each wing motor per Figures 9G and 9H of the Assembly and Operations Manual. Note that although the wires may appear to be the same color, there are labels near the female (motor) ends of each wire that direct which wire is to be attached to the red, black and white ESC wires respectively. WORK WITH ONE WIRE AT A TIME. Feed each wire separately from the motor pylon access holes in the upper surface of the wing. Feed the male end of each wire down through the access hole and into the wire guide tube until it exits the tube and enters the large access cavity at the center of the wing. Connect each motor extension wire to the appropriate speed control wire for each wing motor per Figure 9I of the Assembly and Operations Manual and per the label attached to the motor end of each extension wire. It is important to work with one wire at a time and to follow the intent of the labels. 
 
In summary:
  • The red ESC wire connects to the red motor wire.
  • The black ESC wire connects to the white motor wire.
  • The white ESC wire connects to the black motor wire.
 
r) Review Stage 9, Figures 9K, 9L and 9M and then secure the pre-assembled fuselage engine pylon to the fuselage.  
13.4.7.1.5.2. Stage 2 - Install Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Not Applicable
 
c)  Complete Stage 1 from the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
d) Complete Stage 2 from the Assembly & Operations Manual. Note that in some markets the power pylons have been pre-attached to the wing by the factory.
 
e) Once you completed Stage 2 from the Assembly & Operations Manual you will have an assembled wing with power pylons attached to the wing.
 
f) Complete Stages 3 to 8 from the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
g) Review Stage 9 of the Assembly & Operations Manual. In particular consult figure 9I of Assembly and Operations Manual. We suggest that in lieu of Figure 9I that you instead arrange the two wing ESC's as follows:
 
h) See Figure 2A. Note the orientation and position of the two speed controls. In particular note that the ends of the ESC with the motor power wires are partially positioned into the wing bay cavity adjacent to the large open cavity at the center of the wing.
 
 
i) You will find a wooden block with a slot, zip strapped to each wing ESC. AFTER installing all wiring and before flying your model, use ZAP-A-GAP or ZEPOXY to attach the blocks to the floor of the large cavity at the center of the wing, oriented and positioned as shown in Figure 2A. If you need to remove the ESC's at a later date you can cut the zip strap to remove the ESC and then re-install the ESC using a new zip strap.
 
13.4.7.1.5.3. Stage 3 - Power Module Wiring - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Continue with the assembly procedures provided therein.
 
b) When you are ready to complete Stage 9 of the Assembly and Operations Manual pause and review Figure 9N and these notes carefully.
 
c) Stage 9 of the Assembly and Operations Manual covers the installation of the electric motors and speed controls. In effect by purchasing a VMAX Power Module you have avoided much of this work and in earlier stages of these instructions pertaining to this VMAX Power Module you have installed the factory assembled power pylons to the wing and the fuselage and extended the wiring from the wing motors to their respective speed controls in the center section of the wing.
 
d) You will need to complete the wiring.
  • If you have purchased the VMAR Wiring Harness Set for this model (VMA-J210XWHS) please see the detailed wiring instructions provided therein.
  • If you do NOT have the VMAR Wiring Harness Set for this model you will need to use your own wiring setup. Make sure whatever you do is compatible with your radio system, your servos, your battery and the speed controls.
    • Note: Modelers who are not experienced with multi-motor electric flight systems are strongly encouraged to use the VMAR Wiring Harness Set applicable to their VMAR multi-motor model. Scratch building and installing a reliable wiring harness set for a multi-motor electric model requires approximately 8 hours of work & considerable knowledge and experience.    
  • Figure 9N of the Assembly and Operations Manual shows a generic wiring schematic that may be helpful. Be particularly careful with the thin red wires coming from the Electronic Speed Controls (ESC).  Figure 9M shows only the Negative (-) and Signal  wires from each speed control connecting to the throttle channel of the receiver. This may or MAY not be suitable for your receiver. You will need to nail this down before connecting anything. The most common setup today is to NOT hook the thin red wires from the ESC to themselves or anything else. Just work with the Negative (-) and Signal wires from the ESC's all the way to the throttle channel on your receiver.
  • To add some complexity to the ESC wiring, there is no standard color schema used by all radio manufacturers. Caution is a must. To help you design and connect your wiring please see the generic wiring information provided in the Read Me First information that came with your model and reprinted below for your convenience. This should be considered a guideline only.
    • Note: There are some risks here and if you are not electronically inclined you should get help and consider purchasing the VMAR Wiring Harness Set for this model.  
 
 
VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS - Electric Power - Wiring
Question: My VMAR VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor 64in ARF ECS uses three electric motors. How should I wire these up so that I can control them from the single throttle channel on my receiver?
 
Answer: The simplest solution is to use our VMAX Power Pack which comes with brushless motors, electronic speed controls (ESC), battery pack, propellors etc and includes a custom made Wiring Harness Set for the power and control system. The Power Pack for the VMAR JU52 Trimotor is #VMM-J210XPP1.
 
If you have your own motors, servos, speed controls etc that you intend on using in the VMAR JU52 Trimotor, the manufacturer of these electric components is your best bet for advice on operating in a Triple Power configuration. The Wiring Harness Set for the VMAR JU52 Trimotor (#VMA-J210XWHS) is available as an aftermarket accessory and in most installations will make it much easier to work with the VMAX Power Module, third party motors, speed controls and servos.
 
If you have purchased the VMAX Power Pack for the JU52 Trimotor (#VMM-J210XPP1) please follow the installation instructions that come with the Power Pack. The VMAX Power Pack will save you hours and hours of time and greatly reduce the chances of making an expensive mistake.
 
If you are using third party power components, follow their instructions. In the absence of specific information from the manufacturer here are some general tips that may assist you. Remember, without specific information from the supplier of your Motors and ESC, you run the risk of doing something wrong and such booboos are usually expensive. Use our tips with this in mind. We can't verify that these tips will work with third party equipment and strongly encourage you to obtain information from the manufacturer of your Motors and ESC.
 
a) Use three idential Brushless Motors and three identical Electronic Speed Controls (ESC). Each motor should have its own speed control. (see footnote below)
 
b) Connect each ESC to a Brushless Motor using the color coded wire as a guide. Test and ensure that the motor turns in the direction expected and that thrust is aft of the motor.
 
c) Make a power Y3-connector to feed power from your LiPo battery to the power input leads on both of your ESC's. 
 
d) Use the power Y3-connector to connect the power input to the ESC's to a common (1) LiPO battery source.
 
e) Make a throttle Y3-connector (you can serially gang up two Y connectors). This is necessary for Triple ESC operation which assumes that you are using three motors and three ESC's.
 
For TRIPLE ESC operation use ONLY the NEGATIVE (-) Power (usually black or brown) & SIGNAL lines
(see table below) between the receiver throttle channel and the ESC's.
 
Do NOT use the POSITIVE (+) Power (usually Red) wires.  
The following table serves as a guide to common radio systems and their wiring schema and color usage. Use this table with caution. If in doubt, please defer to information provided by your radio supplier.  
 
RADIO BRAND NEGATIVE (-) SIGNAL
VRS & Futaba Black White
Airtronics Z Black Blue
JR Brown Orange
HiTec Black Yellow
f) Plug the ESC throttle control wires into the ends of the throttle Y3-connector
 
g) Plug the remaining single end of the throttle Y3 connector into your receiver throttle channel.  
 
h) Use the airborne battery pack from your radio system to power your receiver. Do NOT attempt to use power from either BEC to power your receiver. You may wish to consider using a stand alone BEC such as that from Western Robotics to power your radio system but do NOT use the BEC's that are a part of many ESC's. They will not work in a triple power configuration.
 
i) Select suitable propellers for your motors and your speed controllers. The three props should be identical. Prop selection is vital with brushless motors. Overloading the motors and ESC by using the wrong prop can get very very expensive in a big hurry.
 
j) Verify that you can control the RPM of the motors via the receiver and that they produce similar RPM and thrust throughout the throttle range.  
 
Footnote: There may be some triple ESC's that enable you to control three Brushless motors from one ESC. These eliminates the need for a second and third ESC and may make the installation of third party components simpler. If you are using a triple ESC, ensure that you follow the manufacturers instructions regarding wiring and operations.
 
 
 
13.4.7.1.6. Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Module as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.4.7.1.6.1. Propellers - Power Module Operations - VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) See the Warning label on the firewall and/or attached to the motor shaft at time of shipping. Do NOT exceed the maximum propeller size noted.
 
b) With power disconnected, double check the propeller to make sure it is not damaged or nicked in any way and that it is securely and safely mounted. Check before and after each flight.
 
c) Ensure the propeller turns true (no wobble) and that it is balanced and that all propeller fasteners are tight.

USING THE WRONG PROPELLER &/or OPERATING WITH EXCESSIVE VIBRATION WILL DESTROY THE MOTOR.

d) Ensure that your propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind (looking forward as if you were in the cockpit) and that the prop is blowing air from the front of the model to the back.
 
f) If the propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind but air is flowing from the back to the front of the model, the propeller is mounted on the motor backwards. Check and reinstall the propeller correctly. In general the brand logo and other writing on propellers should face forwards.
 
g) If the propeller is rotating backwards, reverse the black and white wire connections between the motor and the electronic speed control.
 
13.4.7.1.6.2. On the Ground - Power Module Operations - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
Operating the brushless motor on the ground or in a static mode whereby the aircraft cannot move, puts peak loads on the motor while not providing adequate cooling normally generated in flight. Peak loads coupled with inadequate air flow leads to very rapid heat buildup within the brushless motor that can damage or destroy the motor very quickly.
 
ENSURE ADEQUATE COOLING. DO NOT OPERATE AT HIGH THROTTLE ON THE GROUND FOR LONGER THAN 10 SECONDS.
 
 
13.4.7.1.6.3. Powering Up - Power Module Operations - VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Move your throttle stick all the way down to 0 (no power).
 
b) Turn on your transmitter
 
c) Turn on your receiver.
 
d) Ensure the model is held securely in order to test the motor system. Tie it down or hold the fuselage at the back.
 
STAY WELL CLEAR OF THE PROPELLER AND PLUG IN YOUR BATTERY.
 
e) Advance the throttle on your transmitter
 
f) The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) will apply power to the motor and the prop will begin to rotate. Very briefly advance the power to full throttle to ensure the motor spools up to full power. Do this for no more than 2-3 seconds at a time.
 
g) If the ESC beeps rather than makes the motor turn it is because the ESC is being powered up with the throttle stick at a non-zero position. This is a safety feature to prevent rotation of the prop unless you begin from a zero throttle position after each power up.
 
13.4.7.1.6.4. Motor Power Auto-Cutoff - Power Module Operations - VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) has an embedded "auto-cutoff" controller that will reduce battery power supplied to the motor as the battery reserve begins to run out. This auto-cutoff controller ensures that the battery retains sufficient energy to power the receiver and servos. As the energy reserve in the battery approaches "empty", the auto-cutoff begins to reduce power available for the motor while allocating the remaining energy to provide power for the receiver and servos so that you can maintain flight control using the remaining energy.
 
Land immediately when you detect that the motor power is beginning to fade. Once the power begins to fade, you have a very short time remaining before the ESC will auto-cutoff power to the motor.
 
13.4.7.1.7. Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - No No's & Must Do's
Motors - No No's - That can Destroy Your Motor

Question: Are there any No No's that I should be careful to stay clear of when running my Brushless Motor?

Answer: We have sold many many brushless motors.  From the questions and service requests we get we can pretty well sum up the No No's and Must Do's as follows:

a) Read Everything First! Every instruction! Every Warning Label! Browse our Knowledge Base while you are at it. About 90% of problems can be avoided by Reading First.

b) Do NOT screw up the electrical connections! Polarity is important. If you are not sure, figure it out first... trial and error testing can get expensive!

c) Do NOT exceed the maximum electrical specifications!  Pay attention to the maximum allowable Voltage, Current and Wattage (Volts x Amps).

d) Do NOT use a propeller that is bigger in diameter and/or bigger in pitch than the specifications provided! Use the recommended propeller.
 
e) Do NOT overheat. Ensure adequate cooling by exposing the motor and entire ESC to moving air.

f) Do NOT operate the motor if the prop appears to wobble when you turn it by hand! Look at the back of the hub as you rotate the propeller over by hand. The back of the hub should remain in one plane throughout the rotation, not wobble.

g) Do NOT operate if the motor appears to vibrate! Look at the prop shaft when it first gets going. If it looks blurry to the eyes or sounds strange it is vibrating. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor and possibly hurt your servos as well. Stop and check all bolts for tightness and make sure the prop is turning true (no wobble) and that the prop is balanced.

h) Do NOT operate with loose fasteners! Check bolts, nuts, screws etc for snug tightness. Do not over tighten but keep them snug. Check periodically, particularly after the first few times you use the motor. Use blue thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help keep fasteners from loosening up. If you find that fasteners are continously loosening up even after the motor has been used many times, you have a vibration issue. Check for sources of vibration. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor.

i) Do NOT operate at High Throttle on the ground or test bench for longer than 10 seconds! High Throttle static operation such as this where the airplane is not moving, induces maximum load on the motor while not providing proper air flow to help cool it. Heat will build up quickly, particularly if the motor is cowled. Heat is bad news. Heat can melt the windings down and quickly destroy the motor.

j) Do NOT operate without a safety fuse system!

k) Do NOT assume an electric motor is the same as a glow or gas engine! An electric motor is very different. Electric motors will attempt to overcome any load they encounter, even to the point of destroying themselves.

l) Do NOT use your plumbing tools or hammer! A brushless motor is not a farm tractor. Small hand tools only. Snugly tight does not mean you tighten things to the point they strip.

m) Do NOT get dirt, water or metal objects into the motor! If you drop a small screw or nut when working on your model, find it first before turning on your motor. Electric motors have strong magnets. Chances are that if you drop something small and metal into your model and can't find it... that it will be inside the motor. Turn the motor over by hand and pay attention to any unusual resistance, grinding or other odd sounds or feel. Find the missing metal item before operating your motor!
 
 
13.4.7.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.4.7.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.4.7.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.4.7.2. Power Module - #VMM-J210XPM1 For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.4.8. Power Module Set - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall

 

VMM-N210XPM1 POWER MODULE SET  


13.4.8.1. Power Module Set - #VMM-N210XPM1 For VMA-N210X Nouvo - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 

 


 

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.4.8.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.4.8.1.2. Power Module Set - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.4.8.1.3. Power Module Set - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAR Power Module Sets are intended for modelers who already have their own Li Po Battery, Servos, Props and wiring systems but who wish to purchase an easy to install power system including the firewall(s), motor(s) and speed control(s) that have been factory designed for and tested with their VMAR model.
 
13.4.8.1.4. Power Module Set - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Contents
This Power Module Set (#VMM-N210XPM1) consists of the following components: 
  • (The laser cut wood power module firewall is part# VMA-N210XPMV)
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAR Power Module Sets are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the firewall(s), electric motor(s) and electronic speed controls(s) (ESC) for the applicable model.

A VMAX Power Module Set typically consists of the following components: 

  • Laser cut wood power module firewall.
    • This may also be supplied with the model (in a parts bag)
  • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • With four (4) 3mm socket head bolts and 4 flat washers fitted for shipping.
  • Propellor Mounting Hardware.
    • One (1) 3mm security lock nut is fitted on the threaded motor shaft for shipping.
    • Three (3) 3mm nuts and two (2) #6 flat washers are supplied in a parts bag.
  • Electronic Speed Control ("ESC") (#VMC-120B15VC).
    • Red, White & Black three (3) wire lead set attached to ESC for connection to Brushless Motor.
    • Red (+), Black (-) two (2) wire lead set attached to ESC for DC power input.
      • Two (1 Red, 1 Blue) crimp on female bullet connectors for power battery leads.
    • RC servo plug on Red, White, Black three (3) wire set for connection to RC receiver throttle channel.
    • Four zip straps.
  • READ ME FIRST documentation.

Power Module Sets for Multi-Motor Models:  

  • Power Module Sets for multi-motor models will contain multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model.
  • For each ESC in the Power Module Set we also include 1 Red and 1 Blue female crimp on bullet connector for use with user supplied power leads.
  • For each motor in the Power Module Set we also include propeller mounting hardware.
VMAR Power Module Sets do NOT include:
  • Wiring or connectors other than the leads attached to motor and attached to the electronic speed control and the red and black female bullet connectors noted above.
  • Propeller
  • Li Po Battery Pack 
  • Servos
These components are NOT included in the Power Module Set and will be needed to complete your model. If you do not already have these items, they will need to be obtained separately. 
 
13.4.8.1.5. Power Module Set - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
13.4.8.1.5.1. Power Module Set for VMA-N210X Nouvo - Installation Procedure
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) In the Operations Manual please turn to Page 7, Stage 11.
 
c) Review (but do not action) all Steps 11A through 11L inclusive. 
 
d) Review Figure 11F showing the wiring between the motor and the electronic speed control ("ESC"). Make sure you plug the wires together as follows:
  • Motor Red Wire to ESC Red Wire
  • Motor Black Wire to ESC WHITE Wire
  • Motor WHITE Wire to ESC Black Wire 

If you do not connect the wires between the motor and the ESC as described above you can damage the motor &/or ESC or the motor may turn backwards.  

e) Review the supplementary information provided below regarding step 11K 

f) After reviewing the steps and the wiring of figure 11F and the supplementary information provided below, proceed carefully with steps 11A through 11L to assemble your power module. 

The following depiction illustrates the Fuselage and the assembled Power Module and how it is wired to the Fuse Assembly and Battery Pack: 


VMA-N210X Nouvo 1300 EP 51 in. Electric ARF - Firewall (Power Module) Spacing - Page 7, Figure 11K

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20070418 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 7, Figure 11K.

Figure 11K illustrates the spacing between the fixed firewall in the front of the fuselage and the power module firewall to which is attached the motor and speed control.

The picture is correct. However the red type annotated distance shown in Figure 11K of the 20070418 version of the manual is incorrect. The distance should be .39 in. (10 mm).

The actual distance is not particularly critital. What is important is that: 

  • The spacing is equal at all four bolt locations.
  • The cowl can be pushed over the motor and power module firewall and back onto the fuselage with an overlap of 1/8 in. (3 mm)
  • The cowl does not touch the motor itself.

 

13.4.8.1.6. Power Module - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Module set as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.4.8.1.6.1. Propellers - Power Module Operations - VMA-N210X Nouvo
 
a) See the Warning label on the firewall. Do NOT exceed the maximum propeller size noted.
 
b) With power disconnected, double check the propeller to make sure it is not damaged or nicked in any way and that it is securely and safely mounted. Check before and after each flight.
 
c) Ensure the propeller turns true (no wobble) and that it is balanced and that all propeller fasteners are tight. 
 
USING THE WRONG PROPELLER &/or OPERATING WITH EXCESSIVE VIBRATION WILL DESTROY THE MOTOR.
 
d) Ensure that your propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind (looking forward as if you were in the cockpit) and that the prop is blowing air from the front of the model to the back.
 
f) If the propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind but air is flowing from the back to the front of the model, the propeller is mounted on the motor backwards. Check and reinstall the propeller correctly. In general the brand logo and other writing on propellers should face forwards.
 
g) If the propeller is rotating backwards, reverse the black and white wire connections between the motor and the electronic speed control.
 
13.4.8.1.6.2. On the Ground - Power Module Operations - For VMA-N210X Nouvo
Operating the brushless motor on the ground or in a static mode whereby the aircraft cannot move, puts peak loads on the motor while not providing adequate cooling normally generated in flight. Peak loads coupled with inadequate air flow leads to very rapid heat buildup within the brushless motor that can damage or destroy the motor very quickly.
 
ENSURE ADEQUATE COOLING. DO NOT OPERATE AT HIGH THROTTLE ON THE GROUND FOR LONGER THAN 10 SECONDS.
13.4.8.1.6.3. Powering Up - Power Module Operations - VMA-N210X Nouvo
 
a) Move your throttle stick all the way down to 0 (no power).
 
b) Turn on your transmitter
 
c) Turn on your receiver.
 
d) Ensure the model is held securely in order to test the motor system. Tie it down or hold the fuselage at the back.
 
STAY WELL CLEAR OF THE PROPELLER AND PLUG IN YOUR BATTERY.
 
e) Advance the throttle on your transmitter
 
f) The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) will apply power to the motor and the prop will begin to rotate. Very briefly advance the power to full throttle to ensure the motor spools up to full power. Do this for no more than 2-3 seconds at a time.
 
g) If the ESC beeps rather than makes the motor turn it is because the ESC is being powered up with the throttle stick at a non-zero position. This is a safety feature to prevent rotation of the prop unless you begin from a zero throttle position after each power up.
 
13.4.8.1.6.4. Motor Power Auto-Cutoff - Power Module Operations - VMA-N210X Nouvo
The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) has an embedded "auto-cutoff" controller that will reduce battery power supplied to the motor as the battery reserve begins to run out. This auto-cutoff controller ensures that the battery retains sufficient energy to power the receiver and servos. As the energy reserve in the battery approaches "empty", the auto-cutoff begin to reduce power available for the motor while allocating the remaining energy to provide power for the receiver and servos so that you can maintain flight control using the remaining energy.
 
Land immediately when you detect that the motor power is beginning to fade. Once the power begins to fade, you have a very short time remaining before the ESC will auto-cutoff power to the motor.
 
13.4.8.1.7. Power Module - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - No No's & Must Do's
Motors - No No's - That can Destroy Your Motor

Question: Are there any No No's that I should be careful to stay clear of when running my Brushless Motor?

Answer: We have sold many many brushless motors.  From the questions and service requests we get we can pretty well sum up the No No's and Must Do's as follows:

a) Read Everything First! Every instruction! Every Warning Label! Browse our Knowledge Base while you are at it. About 90% of problems can be avoided by Reading First.

b) Do NOT screw up the electrical connections! Polarity is important. If you are not sure, figure it out first... trial and error testing can get expensive!

c) Do NOT exceed the maximum electrical specifications!  Pay attention to the maximum allowable Voltage, Current and Wattage (Volts x Amps).

d) Do NOT use a propeller that is bigger in diameter and/or bigger in pitch than the specifications provided! Use the recommended propeller.
 
e) Do NOT overheat. Ensure adequate cooling by exposing the motor and entire ESC to moving air.

f) Do NOT operate the motor if the prop appears to wobble when you turn it by hand! Look at the back of the hub as you rotate the propeller over by hand. The back of the hub should remain in one plane throughout the rotation, not wobble.

g) Do NOT operate if the motor appears to vibrate! Look at the prop shaft when it first gets going. If it looks blurry to the eyes or sounds strange it is vibrating. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor and possibly hurt your servos as well. Stop and check all bolts for tightness and make sure the prop is turning true (no wobble) and that the prop is balanced.

h) Do NOT operate with loose fasteners! Check bolts, nuts, screws etc for snug tightness. Do not over tighten but keep them snug. Check periodically, particularly after the first few times you use the motor. Use blue thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help keep fasteners from loosening up. If you find that fasteners are continously loosening up even after the motor has been used many times, you have a vibration issue. Check for sources of vibration. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor.

i) Do NOT operate at High Throttle on the ground or test bench for longer than 10 seconds! High Throttle static operation such as this where the airplane is not moving, induces maximum load on the motor while not providing proper air flow to help cool it. Heat will build up quickly, particularly if the motor is cowled. Heat is bad news. Heat can melt the windings down and quickly destroy the motor.

j) Do NOT operate without a safety fuse system!

k) Do NOT assume an electric motor is the same as a glow or gas engine! An electric motor is very different. Electric motors will attempt to overcome any load they encounter, even to the point of destroying themselves.

l) Do NOT use your plumbing tools or hammer! A brushless motor is not a farm tractor. Small hand tools only. Snugly tight does not mean you tighten things to the point they strip.

m) Do NOT get dirt, water or metal objects into the motor! If you drop a small screw or nut when working on your model, find it first before turning on your motor. Electric motors have strong magnets. Chances are that if you drop something small and metal into your model and can't find it... that it will be inside the motor. Turn the motor over by hand and pay attention to any unusual resistance, grinding or other odd sounds or feel. Find the missing metal item before operating your motor!
 
 
13.4.8.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.4.8.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.4.8.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.4.8.2. Power Module Set - #VMM-N210XPM1 For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Propeller Mounting
VMAR Power Module Sets come with propeller mounting hardware that works with the propeller we recommend AND can be adapted to work with most other propellers.
 
a) We include the following: Three (3) 3 mm plain nuts, One (1) 3 mm security nut with fiber insert, Two (2) flat washers.
 
b) For propellers without a collet set and having a round hole in the back of the propeller hub that is bigger than the motor shaft or having a 3mm hexagonal recess in the back of the propeller hub: First thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer followed by two of the 3 mm plain nuts (tighten snugly), then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the two plain nuts are inserted into the recess in the back of the propeller hub and the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut >  flat washer > two (2) 3 mm nuts > propeller >  flat washer > security nut.
  
c) For propellers with a collet set and having a larger recessed round hole in the back or front of the propeller hub that will accomodate a collet: Select a collet that has a center hole 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) in diameter. Insert the collet into the hole in the propeller hub. From this point on treat the propeller and collet as one unit i.e. the "propeller". Next thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the propeller hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
d) For propellers having a 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) round hole that runs completely through the propeller hub with no other hole or recess in the back or front of the hub: Thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer, then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
e) For other propellers: We suggest obtaining a "squish" or "cinch" type propeller adapter suitable for 3mm shafts. You may wish to cut the motor shaft to a shorter length. Measure and test carefully before shortening the motor shaft with due consideration for any cowl and/or propeller clearance.
 
13.4.9. Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall

 

VMM-P210XPM1 POWER MODULE SET

 

13.4.9.1. Power Module Set - #VMM-P210XPM1 For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - READ ME FIRST
PLEASE READ ME FIRST

 

          
BEFORE PROCEEDING
TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 

 

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.4.9.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.4.9.1.2. Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - General Information
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.4.9.1.3. Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAR Power Module Sets are intended for modelers who already have their own Li Po Battery, Servos, Props and wiring systems but who wish to purchase an easy to install power system including the firewall(s), motor(s) and speed control(s) that have been factory designed for and tested with their VMAR model.
 
13.4.9.1.4. Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Contents
This VMAX Power Module Set (#VMM-P210XPM1) consists of the following components:
  • (The laser cut wood power module firewall is part# VMA-P210XPMV)
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAR Power Module Sets are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the firewall(s), electric motor(s) and electronic speed controls(s) (ESC) for the applicable model.

A VMAX Power Module Set typically consists of the following components: 

  • Laser cut wood power module firewall.
    • This may also be supplied with the model (in a parts bag)
  • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • With four (4) 3mm socket head bolts and 4 flat washers fitted for shipping.
  • Propellor Mounting Hardware.
    • One (1) 3mm security lock nut is fitted on the threaded motor shaft for shipping.
    • Three (3) 3mm nuts and two (2) #6 flat washers are supplied in a parts bag.
  • Electronic Speed Control ("ESC") (#VMC-120B15VC).
    • Red, White & Black three (3) wire lead set attached to ESC for connection to Brushless Motor.
    • Red (+), Black (-) two (2) wire lead set attached to ESC for DC power input.
      • Two (1 Red, 1 Blue) crimp on female bullet connectors for power battery leads.
    • RC servo plug on Red, White, Black three (3) wire set for connection to RC receiver throttle channel.
    • Four zip straps.
  • READ ME FIRST documentation.

Power Module Sets for Multi-Motor Models:  

  • Power Module Sets for multi-motor models will contain multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model.
  • For each ESC in the Power Module Set we also include 1 Red and 1 Blue female crimp on bullet connector for use with user supplied power leads.
  • For each motor in the Power Module Set we also include propeller mounting hardware.
VMAR Power Module Sets do NOT include:
  • Wiring or connectors other than the leads attached to motor and attached to the electronic speed control and the red and black female bullet connectors noted above.
  • Propeller
  • Li Po Battery Pack 
  • Servos
These components are NOT included in the Power Module Set and will be needed to complete your model. If you do not already have these items, they will need to be obtained separately. 
 
13.4.9.1.5. Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Installation Instructions
  
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
13.4.9.1.5.1. Power Module Set for VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Installation Procedure
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.

b) In the Operations Manual please turn to Page 7, Stage 11.

c) Review (but do not action) all Steps 11A through 11L inclusive.

d) Review Figure 11F showing the wiring between the motor and the electronic speed control ("ESC"). Make sure you plug the wires together as follows:

Motor Red Wire to ESC Red Wire
Motor Black Wire to ESC White Wire
Motor White Wire to ESC Black Wire
If you do not connect the wires between the motor and the ESC as described above you can damage the motor &/or ESC or the motor may turn backwards.

e) Review the supplementary information provided below regarding step 11K

f) After reviewing the steps and the wiring of figure 11F and the supplementary information provided below, proceed carefully with steps 11A through 11L to assemble your power module.

The following depiction illustrates the Fuselage and the assembled Power Module and how it is wired to the Fuse Assembly and Battery Pack:


 
VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II 06-12 ARF - Firewall (Power Module) Spacing - Page 7, Figure 11K

This supplementary information applies to manuals with a copyright date of 20070418 (see back cover). Manuals having later copyright dates may already reflect this supplementary information.

Please see Page 7, Figure 11K.

Figure 11K illustrates the spacing between the fixed firewall in the front of the fuselage and the power module firewall to which is attached the motor and speed control.

The picture is correct. However the black type annotated distance shown in Figure 11K of the 20060314 version of the manual is incorrect. The distance should be .5 in. (12.5 mm).

The actual distance is not particularly critital. What is important is that: 

  • The spacing is equal at all four bolt locations.
  • The cowl can be pushed over the motor and power module firewall and back onto the fuselage with an overlap of 1/8 in. (3 mm)
  • The cowl does not touch the motor itself.

 

13.4.9.1.6. Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Operating
  
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Module as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.4.9.1.6.1. Propellers - Power Module Operations - VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
 
a) See the Warning label on the firewall. Do NOT exceed the maximum propeller size noted.
 
b) With power disconnected, double check the propeller to make sure it is not damaged or nicked in any way and that it is securely and safely mounted. Check before and after each flight.
 
c) Ensure the propeller turns true (no wobble) and that it is balanced and that all propeller fasteners are tight.

USING THE WRONG PROPELLER &/or OPERATING WITH EXCESSIVE VIBRATION WILL DESTROY THE MOTOR.
 
d) Ensure that your propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind (looking forward as if you were in the cockpit) and that the prop is blowing air from the front of the model to the back.
 
f) If the propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind but air is flowing from the back to the front of the model, the propeller is mounted on the motor backwards. Check and reinstall the propeller correctly. In general the brand logo and other writing on propellers should face forwards.
 
g) If the propeller is rotating backwards, reverse the black and white wire connections between the motor and the electronic speed control.
 
13.4.9.1.6.2. On the Ground - Power Module Operations - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
Operating the brushless motor on the ground or in a static mode whereby the aircraft cannot move, puts peak loads on the motor while not providing adequate cooling normally generated in flight. Peak loads coupled with inadequate air flow leads to very rapid heat buildup within the brushless motor that can damage or destroy the motor very quickly.
 
ENSURE ADEQUATE COOLING. DO NOT OPERATE AT HIGH THROTTLE ON THE GROUND FOR LONGER THAN 10 SECONDS.
13.4.9.1.6.3. Powering Up - Power Module Operations - VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
 
a) Move your throttle stick all the way down to 0 (no power).
 
b) Turn on your transmitter
 
c) Turn on your receiver.
 
d) Ensure the model is held securely in order to test the motor system. Tie it down or hold the fuselage at the back.
 
STAY WELL CLEAR OF THE PROPELLER AND PLUG IN YOUR BATTERY.
 
e) Advance the throttle on your transmitter
 
f) The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) will apply power to the motor and the prop will begin to rotate. Very briefly advance the power to full throttle to ensure the motor spools up to full power. Do this for no more than 2-3 seconds at a time.
 
g) If the ESC beeps rather than makes the motor turn it is because the ESC is being powered up with the throttle stick at a non-zero position. This is a safety feature to prevent rotation of the prop unless you begin from a zero throttle position after each power up.
 
13.4.9.1.6.4. Motor Power Auto-Cutoff - Power Module Operations - VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) has an embedded "auto-cutoff" controller that will reduce battery power supplied to the motor as the battery reserve begins to run out. This auto-cutoff controller ensures that the battery retains sufficient energy to power the receiver and servos. As the energy reserve in the battery approaches "empty", the auto-cutoff begin to reduce power available for the motor while allocating the remaining energy to provide power for the receiver and servos so that you can maintain flight control using the remaining energy.
 
Land immediately when you detect that the motor power is beginning to fade. Once the power begins to fade, you have a very short time remaining before the ESC will auto-cutoff power to the motor.
 
13.4.9.1.7. Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - No No's & Must Do's
Motors - No No's - That can Destroy Your Motor

Question: Are there any No No's that I should be careful to stay clear of when running my Brushless Motor?

Answer: We have sold many many brushless motors.  From the questions and service requests we get we can pretty well sum up the No No's and Must Do's as follows:

a) Read Everything First! Every instruction! Every Warning Label! Browse our Knowledge Base while you are at it. About 90% of problems can be avoided by Reading First.

b) Do NOT screw up the electrical connections! Polarity is important. If you are not sure, figure it out first... trial and error testing can get expensive!

c) Do NOT exceed the maximum electrical specifications!  Pay attention to the maximum allowable Voltage, Current and Wattage (Volts x Amps).

d) Do NOT use a propeller that is bigger in diameter and/or bigger in pitch than the specifications provided! Use the recommended propeller.
 
e) Do NOT overheat. Ensure adequate cooling by exposing the motor and entire ESC to moving air.

f) Do NOT operate the motor if the prop appears to wobble when you turn it by hand! Look at the back of the hub as you rotate the propeller over by hand. The back of the hub should remain in one plane throughout the rotation, not wobble.

g) Do NOT operate if the motor appears to vibrate! Look at the prop shaft when it first gets going. If it looks blurry to the eyes or sounds strange it is vibrating. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor and possibly hurt your servos as well. Stop and check all bolts for tightness and make sure the prop is turning true (no wobble) and that the prop is balanced.

h) Do NOT operate with loose fasteners! Check bolts, nuts, screws etc for snug tightness. Do not over tighten but keep them snug. Check periodically, particularly after the first few times you use the motor. Use blue thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help keep fasteners from loosening up. If you find that fasteners are continously loosening up even after the motor has been used many times, you have a vibration issue. Check for sources of vibration. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor.

i) Do NOT operate at High Throttle on the ground or test bench for longer than 10 seconds! High Throttle static operation such as this where the airplane is not moving, induces maximum load on the motor while not providing proper air flow to help cool it. Heat will build up quickly, particularly if the motor is cowled. Heat is bad news. Heat can melt the windings down and quickly destroy the motor.

j) Do NOT operate without a safety fuse system!

k) Do NOT assume an electric motor is the same as a glow or gas engine! An electric motor is very different. Electric motors will attempt to overcome any load they encounter, even to the point of destroying themselves.

l) Do NOT use your plumbing tools or hammer! A brushless motor is not a farm tractor. Small hand tools only. Snugly tight does not mean you tighten things to the point they strip.

m) Do NOT get dirt, water or metal objects into the motor! If you drop a small screw or nut when working on your model, find it first before turning on your motor. Electric motors have strong magnets. Chances are that if you drop something small and metal into your model and can't find it... that it will be inside the motor. Turn the motor over by hand and pay attention to any unusual resistance, grinding or other odd sounds or feel. Find the missing metal item before operating your motor!
 
 
13.4.9.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.4.9.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.4.9.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.4.9.2. Power Module Set - #VMM-P210XPM1 For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Propeller Mounting
VMAR Power Module Sets come with propeller mounting hardware that works with the propeller we recommend AND can be adapted to work with most other propellers.
 
a) We include the following: Three (3) 3 mm plain nuts, One (1) 3 mm security nut with fiber insert, Two (2) flat washers.
 
b) For propellers without a collet set and having a round hole in the back of the propeller hub that is bigger than the motor shaft or having a 3mm hexagonal recess in the back of the propeller hub: First thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer followed by two of the 3 mm plain nuts (tighten snugly), then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the two plain nuts are inserted into the recess in the back of the propeller hub and the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut >  flat washer > two (2) 3 mm nuts > propeller >  flat washer > security nut.
  
c) For propellers with a collet set and having a larger recessed round hole in the back or front of the propeller hub that will accomodate a collet: Select a collet that has a center hole 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) in diameter. Insert the collet into the hole in the propeller hub. From this point on treat the propeller and collet as one unit i.e. the "propeller". Next thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3 mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the propeller hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3 mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3 mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
d) For propellers having a 3 mm (approx 1/8 in.) round hole that runs completely through the propeller hub with no other hole or recess in the back or front of the hub: Thread one of the 3 mm plain nuts onto the shaft and position it about 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the open end of the shaft. Then install one flat washer, then the prop, then a second flat washer and finally one of the 3mm security nuts. Push the propeller towards the motor so that the back of the hub is against the adjacent flat washer. Tighten the 3mm security nut so that the second flat washer is firmly in contact with the front of the propeller hub. In summary, the components are arranged as follows: Motor > 3mm nut > flat washer > propeller > flat washer > security nut.
 
e) For other propellers: We suggest obtaining a "squish" or "cinch" type propeller adapter suitable for 3mm shafts. You may wish to cut the motor shaft to a shorter length. Measure and test carefully before shortening the motor shaft with due consideration for any cowl and/or propeller clearance.
 
13.4.10. Power Module - For VMA-S210X Aero Subaru - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall

This VMAX Power Module (VMM-111EMAV3) consists of the following components: 

  • (The Laser cut wood power module firewall  is part # VMA-S210XPMV)
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAR Power Module Sets are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the firewall(s), electric motor(s) and electronic speed controls(s) (ESC) for the applicable model.

A VMAX Power Module Set typically consists of the following components: 

  • Laser cut wood power module firewall.
    • This may also be supplied with the model (in a parts bag)
  • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • With four (4) 3mm socket head bolts and 4 flat washers fitted for shipping.
  • Propellor Mounting Hardware.
    • One (1) 3mm security lock nut is fitted on the threaded motor shaft for shipping.
    • Three (3) 3mm nuts and two (2) #6 flat washers are supplied in a parts bag.
  • Electronic Speed Control ("ESC") (#VMC-120B15VC).
    • Red, White & Black three (3) wire lead set attached to ESC for connection to Brushless Motor.
    • Red (+), Black (-) two (2) wire lead set attached to ESC for DC power input.
      • Two (1 Red, 1 Blue) crimp on female bullet connectors for power battery leads.
    • RC servo plug on Red, White, Black three (3) wire set for connection to RC receiver throttle channel.
    • Four zip straps.
  • READ ME FIRST documentation.

Power Module Sets for Multi-Motor Models:  

  • Power Module Sets for multi-motor models will contain multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model.
  • For each ESC in the Power Module Set we also include 1 Red and 1 Blue female crimp on bullet connector for use with user supplied power leads.
  • For each motor in the Power Module Set we also include propeller mounting hardware.
VMAR Power Module Sets do NOT include:
  • Wiring or connectors other than the leads attached to motor and attached to the electronic speed control and the red and black female bullet connectors noted above.
  • Propeller
  • Li Po Battery Pack 
  • Servos
These components are NOT included in the Power Module Set and will be needed to complete your model. If you do not already have these items, they will need to be obtained separately. 
 
More Information about Power Modules

Links to More Information:

13.4.11. Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Brushless Motor, ESC & Firewall
13.4.11.1. Power Module - #VMM-T210XPM1 For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.4.11.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.4.11.1.2. Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.4.11.1.3. Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Module Set - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAR Power Module Sets are intended for modelers who already have their own Li Po Battery, Servos, Props and wiring systems but who wish to purchase an easy to install power system including the firewall(s), motor(s) and speed control(s) that have been factory designed for and tested with their VMAR model.
 
13.4.11.1.4. Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Contents
This VMAX Power Module (#VMM-T210PM1) contains the following
  • Two power pylons, each consisting of:
    • Laser cut wood power module firewall assembly (#VMA-T210XPMV)
    • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • Propellor mounting hardware
    • Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC)
    • Wiring between the Motor and the ESC
    • Wiring leads from the ESC to provide Positive (+) power, Negative (-) power and throttle control
    • All components have been factory installed, connected & tested.
  • Crimp on bullet connectors (female) for the ESC power feeds  (2 Red, 2 Black)
  • Documentation
 
 
 
 
13.4.11.1.5. Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.4.11.1.5.1. Stage 1 - Install Power Pylons - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Complete Stage 0 from the Read Me First document.
 
c) Complete Stage 1 from the Assembly & Operations Manual, substituting the two assembled power pylons that came with your Power Module in lieu of the "Engine Mount"s illustrated in 1A, 1D & 1G of the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
d) Once completed you will have assembled the wing and attached the power pylons.  
 
13.4.11.1.5.2. Stage 2 - Power Module Wiring - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Continue with the assembly procedures provided therein.
 
b) When you are ready to begin Stage 9 of the Assembly and Operations Manual pause and review Stage 9 and these notes carefully.
 
c) Stage 9 of the Assembly and Operations Manual covers the installation of the electric motors and speed controls. In effect by purchasing a VMAX Power Module you have avoided much of this work. Consult the illustrations 9A through 9F for reference purposes but you can skip the work itself.
 
d) You will need to do the wiring.
  • If you have purchased the VMAR Wiring Harness Set for this model (VMA-T210XWHS) please see the detailed wiring instructions provided therein.
  • If you do NOT have the VMAR Wiring Harness Set for this model you will need to use your own wiring setup. Make sure whatever you do is compatible with your radio system, your servos, your battery and the speed controls.
    • Note: Modelers who are not experienced with multi-motor electric flight systems are strongly encouraged to use the VMAR Wiring Harness Set applicable to their VMAR multi-motor model. Scratch building and installing a reliable wiring harness set for a multi-motor electric model requires approximately 8 hours of work & considerable knowledge and experience.    
  • Figure 9M of the Assembly and Operations Manual shows a generic wiring schematic that may be helpful. Be particularly careful with the thin red wires coming from the Electronic Speed Controls (ESC).  Figure 9M shows these joined together between the ESC's while only the Negative (-) and Signal  wires run to the throttle channel of the receiver. This may or MAY not be suitable for your receiver. You will need to nail this down before connecting anything. The most common setup today is to NOT hook the red wires from the ESC to themselves or anything else. Just work with the Negative (-) and Signal wires from the ESC's all the way to the throttle channel on your receiver.
  • To add some complexity to the ESC wiring, there is no standard color schema used by all radio manufacturers. Caution is a must. To help you design and connect your wiring please see the generic wiring information provided in the Read Me First information that came with your model and reprinted below for your convenience. This should be considered a guideline only.
    • Note: There are some risks here and if you are not electronically inclined you should get help and consider purchasing the VMAR Wiring Harness Set for this model.  
 
 
VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF - Electric Power - Wiring
Question: My VMAR VMA-T210X Twin Otter 09-15 ARF uses two motors. How should I wire these up so that I can control them from the single throttle channel on my receiver?
 
Answer: The simplest solution is to use our VMAX Power Pack which comes with brushless motors, electronic speed controls (ESC), battery pack, propellors etc and includes a custom made Wiring Harness Set for the Twin Otter power and control system. The Power Pack for the Twin Otter is #VMM-T210XPP1.
 
If you have your own motors, servos, speed controls etc that you intend on using in the VMAR Twin Otter the manufacturer of these electric components is your best bet for advice on operating in a Twin Power configuration. The Wiring Harness Set for the Twin Otter (#VMA-T210XWHS) is available as an aftermarket accessory and in most installations will make it much easier to work with the VMAX Power Module, third party motors, speed controls and servos.
 
If you have purchased the VMAX Power Pack for the Twin Otter (#VMM-T210XPP1) please follow the installation instructions that come with the Power Pack. The VMAX Power Pack will save you hours and hours of time and greatly reduce the chances of making an expensive mistake.
 
If you are using third party power components, follow their instructions. In the absence of specific information from the manufacturer here are some general tips that may assist you. Remember, without specific information from the supplier of your Motors and ESC, you run the risk of doing something wrong and such booboos are usually expensive. Use our tips with this in mind. We can't verify that these tips will work with third party equipment and strongly encourage you to obtain information from the manufacturer of your Motors and ESC.
 
a) Use two idential Brushless Motors and two identical Electronic Speed Controls (ESC). Each motor should have its own speed control. (see footnote below)
 
b) Connect each ESC to a Brushless Motor using the color coded wire as a guide. Test and ensure that the motor turns in the direction expected and that thrust is aft of the motor.
 
c) Make a power Y-connector to feed power from your LiPo battery to the power input leads on both of your ESC's. 
 
d) Use the power Y-connector to connect the power input to the ESC's to a common (1) LiPO battery source.
 
e) Make a throttle Y-connector. This is necessary for DUAL ESC operation which assumes that you are using two motors and two ESC's.
 
For DUAL ESC operation use ONLY the NEGATIVE (-) Power (usually black or brown) & SIGNAL lines
(see table below) between the receiver throttle channel and the ESC's.
 
Do NOT use the POSITIVE (+) Power (usually Red) wires.  
The following table serves as a guide to common radio systems and their wiring schema and color usage. Use this table with caution. If in doubt, please defer to information provided by your radio supplier.  
 
RADIO BRAND NEGATIVE (-) SIGNAL
VRS & Futaba Black White
Airtronics Z Black Blue
JR Brown Orange
HiTec Black Yellow
f) Plug the ESC throttle control wires into the ends of the throttle Y-connector
 
g) Plug the remaining single end of the throttle Y connector into your receiver throttle channel.  
 
h) Use the airborne battery pack from your radio system to power your receiver. Do NOT attempt to use power from either BEC to power your receiver. You may wish to consider using a stand alone BEC such as that from Western Robotics to power your radio system but do NOT use the BEC's that are a part of many ESC's. They will not work in a twin power configuration.
 
i) Select suitable propellers for your motors and your speed controllers. The two props should be identical. Prop selection is vital with brushless motors. Overloading the motors and ESC by using the wrong prop can get very very expensive in a big hurry.
 
j) Verify that you can control the RPM of the motors via the receiver and that they produce similar RPM and thrust throughout the throttle range.  
 
Footnote: There are some dual ESC's that enable you to control two Brushless motors from one ESC. These eliminates the need for a second ESC and may make the installation of third party components simpler. If you are using a dual ESC, ensure that you follow the manufacturers instructions regarding wiring and operations.
 
 
 
13.4.11.1.6. Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Module as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.4.11.1.6.1. Propellers - Power Module Operations - VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) See the Warning label on the firewall. Do NOT exceed the maximum propeller size noted.
 
b) With power disconnected, double check the propeller to make sure it is not damaged or nicked in any way and that it is securely and safely mounted. Check before and after each flight.
 
c) Ensure the propeller turns true (no wobble) and that it is balanced and that all propeller fasteners are tight.

USING THE WRONG PROPELLER &/or OPERATING WITH EXCESSIVE VIBRATION WILL DESTROY THE MOTOR.

d) Ensure that your propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind (looking forward as if you were in the cockpit) and that the prop is blowing air from the front of the model to the back.
 
f) If the propeller is rotating clockwise when viewed from behind but air is flowing from the back to the front of the model, the propeller is mounted on the motor backwards. Check and reinstall the propeller correctly. In general the brand logo and other writing on propellers should face forwards.
 
g) If the propeller is rotating backwards, reverse the black and white wire connections between the motor and the electronic speed control.
 
13.4.11.1.6.2. On the Ground - Power Module Operations - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
Operating the brushless motor on the ground or in a static mode whereby the aircraft cannot move, puts peak loads on the motor while not providing adequate cooling normally generated in flight. Peak loads coupled with inadequate air flow leads to very rapid heat buildup within the brushless motor that can damage or destroy the motor very quickly.
 
ENSURE ADEQUATE COOLING. DO NOT OPERATE AT HIGH THROTTLE ON THE GROUND FOR LONGER THAN 10 SECONDS.
 
 
13.4.11.1.6.3. Powering Up - Power Module Operations - VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Move your throttle stick all the way down to 0 (no power).
 
b) Turn on your transmitter
 
c) Turn on your receiver.
 
d) Ensure the model is held securely in order to test the motor system. Tie it down or hold the fuselage at the back.
 
STAY WELL CLEAR OF THE PROPELLER AND PLUG IN YOUR BATTERY.
 
e) Advance the throttle on your transmitter
 
f) The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) will apply power to the motor and the prop will begin to rotate. Very briefly advance the power to full throttle to ensure the motor spools up to full power. Do this for no more than 2-3 seconds at a time.
 
g) If the ESC beeps rather than makes the motor turn it is because the ESC is being powered up with the throttle stick at a non-zero position. This is a safety feature to prevent rotation of the prop unless you begin from a zero throttle position after each power up.
 
13.4.11.1.6.4. Motor Power Auto-Cutoff - Power Module Operations - VMA-T210X Twin Otter
The Electronic Speed Control (ESC) has an embedded "auto-cutoff" controller that will reduce battery power supplied to the motor as the battery reserve begins to run out. This auto-cutoff controller ensures that the battery retains sufficient energy to power the receiver and servos. As the energy reserve in the battery approaches "empty", the auto-cutoff begin to reduce power available for the motor while allocating the remaining energy to provide power for the receiver and servos so that you can maintain flight control using the remaining energy.
 
Land immediately when you detect that the motor power is beginning to fade. Once the power begins to fade, you have a very short time remaining before the ESC will auto-cutoff power to the motor.
 
13.4.11.1.7. Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - No No's & Must Do's
Motors - No No's - That can Destroy Your Motor

Question: Are there any No No's that I should be careful to stay clear of when running my Brushless Motor?

Answer: We have sold many many brushless motors.  From the questions and service requests we get we can pretty well sum up the No No's and Must Do's as follows:

a) Read Everything First! Every instruction! Every Warning Label! Browse our Knowledge Base while you are at it. About 90% of problems can be avoided by Reading First.

b) Do NOT screw up the electrical connections! Polarity is important. If you are not sure, figure it out first... trial and error testing can get expensive!

c) Do NOT exceed the maximum electrical specifications!  Pay attention to the maximum allowable Voltage, Current and Wattage (Volts x Amps).

d) Do NOT use a propeller that is bigger in diameter and/or bigger in pitch than the specifications provided! Use the recommended propeller.
 
e) Do NOT overheat. Ensure adequate cooling by exposing the motor and entire ESC to moving air.

f) Do NOT operate the motor if the prop appears to wobble when you turn it by hand! Look at the back of the hub as you rotate the propeller over by hand. The back of the hub should remain in one plane throughout the rotation, not wobble.

g) Do NOT operate if the motor appears to vibrate! Look at the prop shaft when it first gets going. If it looks blurry to the eyes or sounds strange it is vibrating. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor and possibly hurt your servos as well. Stop and check all bolts for tightness and make sure the prop is turning true (no wobble) and that the prop is balanced.

h) Do NOT operate with loose fasteners! Check bolts, nuts, screws etc for snug tightness. Do not over tighten but keep them snug. Check periodically, particularly after the first few times you use the motor. Use blue thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help keep fasteners from loosening up. If you find that fasteners are continously loosening up even after the motor has been used many times, you have a vibration issue. Check for sources of vibration. Excessive vibration will destroy your motor.

i) Do NOT operate at High Throttle on the ground or test bench for longer than 10 seconds! High Throttle static operation such as this where the airplane is not moving, induces maximum load on the motor while not providing proper air flow to help cool it. Heat will build up quickly, particularly if the motor is cowled. Heat is bad news. Heat can melt the windings down and quickly destroy the motor.

j) Do NOT operate without a safety fuse system!

k) Do NOT assume an electric motor is the same as a glow or gas engine! An electric motor is very different. Electric motors will attempt to overcome any load they encounter, even to the point of destroying themselves.

l) Do NOT use your plumbing tools or hammer! A brushless motor is not a farm tractor. Small hand tools only. Snugly tight does not mean you tighten things to the point they strip.

m) Do NOT get dirt, water or metal objects into the motor! If you drop a small screw or nut when working on your model, find it first before turning on your motor. Electric motors have strong magnets. Chances are that if you drop something small and metal into your model and can't find it... that it will be inside the motor. Turn the motor over by hand and pay attention to any unusual resistance, grinding or other odd sounds or feel. Find the missing metal item before operating your motor!
 
 
13.4.11.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.4.11.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.4.11.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.4.11.2. Power Module - #VMM-T210XPM1 For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.4.12. More Information about Power Modules

Links to More Information:

13.4.13. Tools for Power Modules & Power Packs
A screw driver and a pair of pliers is about all you need to install most VMAX Power Modules & VMAX Power Packs.

For those looking to make things go a bit faster and a bit easier here are some tools that help with the installation:
  • Medium Phillips (cross head) screw driver. Regular Length. A short stubby length may also come in handy
  • A 7/32 in. "deep" socket for the 3mm nuts on the 4 mounting bolts. The 3mm nuts are used for most of our smaller electric ARF's.
  • If you need to ream out (drill) any mounting bolt holes in the power module firewalls, a 9/64" drill bit works well. This allows slightly easier installation of the power module firewall onto the fuselage 3mm stud bolts and/or the slightly easier installation of the motor mount bolts (usually factory installed so not likely necessary in the field).
 
 
13.5. Power Packs (Electric) - Brushless Motor, ESC, Firewall, LiPo Battery, Prop & Connectors
VMAR Power Packs for VMAR Electric ARF models contain all of the items related to the electric power (propulsion) system  including wiring harnesses and servo extension wires.
 
20200428... please note that we are no longer supplying Power Packs. If you wish to purchase a Motor and ESC for your VMAR model, check out our Power Modules. 
13.5.1. Power Packs - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAX Power Packs are intended for modelers who want to purchase a factory designed power system specifically engineered for their VMAR Electric ARF. VMAX Power Packs come complete with Power Module Firewalls, Brushless Motors, Electronic Speed Controls, Li Po Batteries, Propellers and Wiring Harness Sets necessary to get your model in the air with the least amount of mucking around and the maximum amount of performance value. 
 
VMAX Power Packs are perfect for the entire gamut of the modeler spectrum ranging from novices who would rather fly than integrate third party electronics to prosumer RC experts who are short on time and long on experience. For your next VMAR Electric ARF, ask for a VMAX Power Pack to help get you in the air and keep you there!
 
13.5.2. Power Packs - For VMAR Electric Models - Typical Contents
VMAX Power Packs are factory designed for each VMAR Electric Model and contain the Power Module (with firewalls, electric motors and electronic speed controls (ESC)), wiring with connectors or wiring harness set,  battery pack and propellor(s). (Note:  Power Packs for multi-motor models include the Power Module for that model including multiple firewalls, motors and speed controls as required to power the model)
 
VMAX Power Packs do NOT include:
  • Radio equipment other than servo extension wires or other radio components specifically stated. 
  • Battery Charger
These components are NOT included in the Power Pack and will be needed to complete and operate your model. If you do not already have these items, they are available separately.  
 
13.5.3. Power Pack - For VMA-S210X Aero Subaru

The Power Pack for the Aero Subaru consists of a Brushless Motor, Electronic Speed Control (ESC), pre-drilled Firewall, LiPo Battery Pack, Prop & Connectors.

More Information about Power Packs

Links to More Information:

13.5.4. Power Pack - For VMA-B210X Bird Dog

The Power Pack for the Bird Dog consists of a Brushless Motor, Electronic Speed Control (ESC), pre-drilled Firewall, LiPo Battery Pack, Prop & Connectors.

More Information about Power Packs

Links to More Information:

13.5.5. Power Pack - For VMA-C210X J3 Cub & L4 Grasshopper

The Power Pack for the J3 Cub and L4 Grasshopper consists of a Brushless Motor, Electronic Speed Control (ESC), pre-drilled Firewall, LiPo Battery Pack, Prop & Connectors.

More Information about Power Packs

Links to More Information:

13.5.6. Power Pack - For VMA-D210X DO27
13.5.6.1. Power Pack - #VMM-D210XPP1 For VMA-D210X DO27 - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.5.6.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.5.6.1.2. Power Pack - For VMA-D210X DO27 - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.5.6.1.3. Power Pack - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Packs - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAX Power Packs are intended for modelers who want to purchase a factory designed power system specifically engineered for their VMAR Electric ARF. VMAX Power Packs come complete with Power Module Firewalls, Brushless Motors, Electronic Speed Controls, Li Po Batteries, Propellers and Wiring Harness Sets necessary to get your model in the air with the least amount of mucking around and the maximum amount of performance value. 
 
VMAX Power Packs are perfect for the entire gamut of the modeler spectrum ranging from novices who would rather fly than integrate third party electronics to prosumer RC experts who are short on time and long on experience. For your next VMAR Electric ARF, ask for a VMAX Power Pack to help get you in the air and keep you there!
 
13.5.6.1.4. Power Pack - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Contents
This VMAX Power Pack (#VMM-D210XPP1) contains the following:
  • Power Module for VMA-D210X DO27 (#VMM-D210XPM1)
    • Contents listed below.
  • Battery Pack POLYPRO LiPo11.1V 1800mAh 20C W/APP &  VPORT 217g (#PPR-3X180PYF)
  • Adapter #VMW-302PY1VF. Mates Powerpole connectors on Battery Pack to Male Bullet Connectors on ESC
  • One (1) Master Airscrew Propellor - 8 x 5 Electric - 2 Blade (#MAS-0850NE)
  • Documentation
Power Module Set - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Contents
This Power Module Set (#VMM-D210PM1) includes the components listed below. 
  • (The laser cut wood firewall is part #VMA-D210XPMV) 
13.5.6.1.5. Power Pack - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.5.6.1.5.1. Stage 1 - Install Power Module - For VMA-D210X DO27
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.  
 
b) Install the Power Module following the Read Me First instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
13.5.6.1.5.2. Stage 2 - Install Wiring - For VMA-D210X DO27
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Consult the following illustration.
 
13.5.6.1.5.3. Stage 3 - Install Propeller & Battery - For VMA-D210X DO27
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Propeller and Battery Pack following the instructions provided in the Read Me First documention and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
13.5.6.1.6. Power Pack - For VMA-D210X DO27 - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Pack as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.5.6.1.6.1. Motors - Power Pack Operations - VMA-D210X DO27
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First "Operating" Instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
 
13.5.6.1.6.2. Battery - Power Pack Operations - For VMA-D210X DO27
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First Instructions provided with the Battery.  
 
 
13.5.6.1.7. Power Pack - For VMA-D210X DO27 - No No's & Must Do's
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model. Take careful note of all cautions and warnings related to the safe and reliable operation of your model.
 
b) Review the Read Me First "No No's & Must Do's" provided with the Power Module.
 
c) Review the Read Me First information provided with the Battery. Pay particular attention to safety considerations related to transporting and charging your battery. We must again emphasize the importance of disconnecting your battery whenever you are transporting it, storing it, not using it or if you suspect any problems with your battery, motor or radio.   
 
13.5.6.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.5.6.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.5.6.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.5.6.2. Power Pack - #VMM-D210XPP1 For VMA-D210X DO27 - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.5.7. Power Pack - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
13.5.7.1. Power Pack - #VMM-J210XPP1 For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.5.7.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.5.7.1.2. Power Pack - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.5.7.1.3. Power Pack - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Packs - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAX Power Packs are intended for modelers who want to purchase a factory designed power system specifically engineered for their VMAR Electric ARF. VMAX Power Packs come complete with Power Module Firewalls, Brushless Motors, Electronic Speed Controls, Li Po Batteries, Propellers and Wiring Harness Sets necessary to get your model in the air with the least amount of mucking around and the maximum amount of performance value. 
 
VMAX Power Packs are perfect for the entire gamut of the modeler spectrum ranging from novices who would rather fly than integrate third party electronics to prosumer RC experts who are short on time and long on experience. For your next VMAR Electric ARF, ask for a VMAX Power Pack to help get you in the air and keep you there!
 
13.5.7.1.4. Power Pack - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Contents

This VMAX Power Pack (#VMM-J210XPP1) contains the following:

  • Wiring Harness Set for VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor (#VMA-J210XWHS)
    • Contents listed below.
  • Power Module (set) for VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor (#VMM-J210XPM1)
    • Contents listed below.
  • Battery Pack POLYPRO LiPo11.1V 2500mAh 20C W/APP &  VPORT 217g (#PPR-3X250PYF)
  • Three (3) VMAX Propellor - 8 x 6 Electric - 3 Blade (#VMM-0860ET)
  • Documentation

 

Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Contents
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set (WHS) contains the following
  • Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) to connect the two aileron servos in the wings to the aileron channel of the receiver in the fuselage.  Total Length = approx 32 in. (813 mm). Length from aileron channel connector to Y = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
    • (Note: The aileron wiring harness does NOT provide for flaperon operation using a computer radio and two discrete receiver channels. VMAR models utilizing two aileron servos will usually support computer radio flaperon functionality in conjunction with the aileron wiring harness if additional aileron extensions are purchased in addition to the aileron wiring harness included with the wiring harness set).
  • Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) to connect three Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) to the throttle channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 12.5 in. (318 mm). Length from throttle channel connector to Y = approx 6 in. (152 mm)
  • Power Wiring Harness (WHP) to provide Positive (+) and Negative (-) power to three motors from a single battery (fused in line). Total Length = approx 14 in. (355 mm). Length from battery connector to quick disconnect joint = approx 5.0 in. (127 mm)
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set also contains:
  • Flap Wiring Harness (FHE) to connect the flap servos located in the wing (inboard locations) to the flap channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 22.5 in. (571 mm). Length from flap channel connector to junction = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
  • End User Wiring Labels

 

Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Contents
This VMAX Power Module (#VMM-J210PM1) contains the following
  • One (1) power pylon for the fuselage, consisting of:
    • Laser cut wood fuselage power module firewall assembly (a component of #VMA-J210XPMV),
    • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM),
    • Pre-installed motor mounting fasteners,
    • Propellor mounting hardware,
    • Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC),
    • Wiring between the Motor and the ESC,
    • Wiring leads from the ESC to provide Positive (+) power, Negative (-) power and throttle control
  • Two (2) power assemblies for the wings, each consisting of:
    • Laser cut wood motor mounting plate (a component of #VMA-J210XPMV),
    • Brushless motor (#VMM-111B18VM),
    • Semi-installed motor mounting fasteners,  
    • Propellor mounting hardware,
    • Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC) with mounting block secured by a zip strap,
    • Wire extension set (3 wires) for each motor to provide electrical power between each wing motor and it's respective ESC,
    • Wiring leads from the ESC to provide Positive (+) power, Negative (-) power and throttle control
    • Crimp on bullet connectors (female) for the ESC power feeds  (3 Red, 3 Black),
  • All components have been factory connected & tested.
  • Documentation
 
 
 
 
13.5.7.1.5. Power Pack - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.5.7.1.5.1. Stage 1 - Install Power Module - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Power Module (both pylons) following the Read Me First instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
13.5.7.1.5.2. Stage 2 - Install Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Wiring Harness Set following the Read Me First instructions provided with the Wiring Harness Set.
 
13.5.7.1.5.3. Stage 3 - Install Props, Battery etc - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Propellers and Battery Pack following the instructions provided in the Read Me First documention and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
13.5.7.1.6. Power Pack - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Pack as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.5.7.1.6.1. Motors - Power Pack Operations - VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First "Operating" Instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
 
13.5.7.1.6.2. Battery - Power Pack Operations - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First Instructions provided with the Battery.  
 
 
13.5.7.1.7. Power Pack - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - No No's & Must Do's
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model. Take careful note of all cautions and warnings related to the safe and reliable operation of your model.
b) Review the Read Me First "No No's & Must Do's" provided with the Power Module.
 
c) Review the Read Me First information provided with the Battery. Pay particular attention to safety considerations related to transporting and charging your battery. We must again emphasize the importance of disconnecting your battery whenever you are transporting it, storing it, not using it or if you suspect any problems with your battery, motor or radio.   
13.5.7.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.5.7.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.5.7.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.5.7.2. Power Pack - #VMM-J210XPP1 For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.5.8. Power Pack - For VMA-N210X Nouvo
13.5.8.1. Power Pack - #VMM-N210XPP1 For VMA-N210X Nouvo - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.5.8.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.5.8.1.2. Power Pack - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.5.8.1.3. Power Pack - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Packs - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAX Power Packs are intended for modelers who want to purchase a factory designed power system specifically engineered for their VMAR Electric ARF. VMAX Power Packs come complete with Power Module Firewalls, Brushless Motors, Electronic Speed Controls, Li Po Batteries, Propellers and Wiring Harness Sets necessary to get your model in the air with the least amount of mucking around and the maximum amount of performance value. 
 
VMAX Power Packs are perfect for the entire gamut of the modeler spectrum ranging from novices who would rather fly than integrate third party electronics to prosumer RC experts who are short on time and long on experience. For your next VMAR Electric ARF, ask for a VMAX Power Pack to help get you in the air and keep you there!
 
13.5.8.1.4. Power Pack - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Contents
This VMAX Power Pack (#VMM-N210XPP1) contains the following:
  • Power Module for VMA-N210X Nouvo (#VMM-N210XPM1)
    • Contents listed below.
  • Battery Pack POLYPRO LiPo11.1V 1800mAh 20C W/APP &  VPORT 217g (#PPR-3X180PYF)
  • Adapter #VMW-302PY1VF. Mates Powerpole connectors on Battery Pack to Male Bullet Connectors on ESC
  • One (1) Master Airscrew Propellor - 8 x 5 Electric - 2 Blade (#MAS-0850NE)
  • Documentation
Power Module Set - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Contents
This Power Module Set (#VMM-N210XPM1) consists of the following components: 
  • (The laser cut wood power module firewall is part# VMA-N210XPMV)
13.5.8.1.5. Power Pack - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.5.8.1.5.1. Stage 1 - Install Power Module - For VMA-N210X Nouvo
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.  
 
b) Install the Power Module following the Read Me First instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
13.5.8.1.5.2. Stage 2 - Install Wiring - For VMA-N210X Nouvo
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Consult the following illustration.
 
13.5.8.1.5.3. Stage 3 - Install Propeller & Battery - For VMA-N210X Nouvo
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Propeller and Battery Pack following the instructions provided in the Read Me First documention and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
13.5.8.1.6. Power Pack - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Pack as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.5.8.1.6.1. Motors - Power Pack Operations - VMA-N210X Nouvo
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First "Operating" Instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
 
13.5.8.1.6.2. Battery - Power Pack Operations - For VMA-N210X Nouvo
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First Instructions provided with the Battery.  
 
 
13.5.8.1.7. Power Pack - For VMA-N210X Nouvo - No No's & Must Do's
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model. Take careful note of all cautions and warnings related to the safe and reliable operation of your model.
 
b) Review the Read Me First "No No's & Must Do's" provided with the Power Module.
 
c) Review the Read Me First information provided with the Battery. Pay particular attention to safety considerations related to transporting and charging your battery. We must again emphasize the importance of disconnecting your battery whenever you are transporting it, storing it, not using it or if you suspect any problems with your battery, motor or radio.   
 
13.5.8.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.5.8.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.5.8.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.5.8.2. Power Pack - #VMM-N210XPP1 For VMA-N210X Nouvo - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.5.9. Power Pack - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
13.5.9.1. Power Pack - #VMM-P210XPP1 For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.5.9.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.5.9.1.2. Power Pack - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.5.9.1.3. Power Pack - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Packs - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAX Power Packs are intended for modelers who want to purchase a factory designed power system specifically engineered for their VMAR Electric ARF. VMAX Power Packs come complete with Power Module Firewalls, Brushless Motors, Electronic Speed Controls, Li Po Batteries, Propellers and Wiring Harness Sets necessary to get your model in the air with the least amount of mucking around and the maximum amount of performance value. 
 
VMAX Power Packs are perfect for the entire gamut of the modeler spectrum ranging from novices who would rather fly than integrate third party electronics to prosumer RC experts who are short on time and long on experience. For your next VMAR Electric ARF, ask for a VMAX Power Pack to help get you in the air and keep you there!
 
13.5.9.1.4. Power Pack - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Contents
This VMAX Power Pack (#VMM-P210XPP1) contains the following:
  • Power Module For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II (#VMM-P210XPM1)
    • Contents listed below.
  • Battery Pack POLYPRO LiPo11.1V 1800mAh 20C W/APP &  VPORT 217g (#PPR-3X180PYF)
  • Adapter #VMW-302PY1VF. Mates Powerpole connectors on Battery Pack to Male Bullet Connectors on ESC
  • One (1) Master Airscrew Propellor - 8 x 5 Electric - 2 Blade (#MAS-0850NE)
  • Documentation
Power Module Set - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Contents
This VMAX Power Module Set (#VMM-P210XPM1) consists of the following components:
  • (The laser cut wood power module firewall is part# VMA-P210XPMV)
13.5.9.1.5. Power Pack - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.5.9.1.5.1. Stage 1 - Install Power Module - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.  
 
b) Install the Power Module following the Read Me First instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
13.5.9.1.5.2. Stage 2 - Install Wiring - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Consult the following illustration.
 
13.5.9.1.5.3. Stage 3 - Install Propeller & Battery - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Propeller and Battery Pack following the instructions provided in the Read Me First documention and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
13.5.9.1.6. Power Pack - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Pack as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.5.9.1.6.1. Motors - Power Pack Operations - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First "Operating" Instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
 
13.5.9.1.6.2. Battery - Power Pack Operations - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First Instructions provided with the Battery.  
 
 
13.5.9.1.7. Power Pack - For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - No No's & Must Do's
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model. Take careful note of all cautions and warnings related to the safe and reliable operation of your model.
 
b) Review the Read Me First "No No's & Must Do's" provided with the Power Module.
 
c) Review the Read Me First information provided with the Battery. Pay particular attention to safety considerations related to transporting and charging your battery. We must again emphasize the importance of disconnecting your battery whenever you are transporting it, storing it, not using it or if you suspect any problems with your battery, motor or radio.   
 
13.5.9.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.5.9.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.5.9.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.5.9.2. Power Pack - #VMM-P210XPP1 For VMA-P210X PC9 & Texan II - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.5.10. Power Pack - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
13.5.10.1. Power Pack - #VMM-T210XPP1 For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.5.10.1.1. Think Safety
When working with Batteries, Electric Models, Motors & Propellers, Chargers & Electrical Devices
 

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY 

or other electrical power source from any motor, device or charger when transporting, storing, not using or when you are not in attendance.
 
Keep hands, tools, clothing and all foreign objects well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Take particular care to safeguard and protect your eyes and fingers and the eyes and fingers of other persons who may be nearby.
 
STAY CLEAR OF PROPELLER. PROTECT YOURSELF & OTHERS AT ALL TIMES
 
Use only a good quality propeller that has no cracks or flaws. Ensure propellers are securely attached. Stay clear of the propeller and stay clear of the plane of rotation defined by the propeller prior to connecting your battery to any motor or power system.
 
 
13.5.10.1.2. Power Pack - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - General Information
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.5.10.1.3. Power Pack - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Power Packs - For VMAR Electric Models - Overview
VMAX Power Packs are intended for modelers who want to purchase a factory designed power system specifically engineered for their VMAR Electric ARF. VMAX Power Packs come complete with Power Module Firewalls, Brushless Motors, Electronic Speed Controls, Li Po Batteries, Propellers and Wiring Harness Sets necessary to get your model in the air with the least amount of mucking around and the maximum amount of performance value. 
 
VMAX Power Packs are perfect for the entire gamut of the modeler spectrum ranging from novices who would rather fly than integrate third party electronics to prosumer RC experts who are short on time and long on experience. For your next VMAR Electric ARF, ask for a VMAX Power Pack to help get you in the air and keep you there!
 
13.5.10.1.4. Power Pack - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Contents
This VMAX Power Pack (#VMM-T210XPP1) contains the following:
  • Wiring Harness Set for VMA-T210X Twin Otter (#VMA-T210XWHS)
    • Contents listed below.
  • Power Module (set) for VMA-T210X Twin Otter (#VMM-T210XPM1)
    • Contents listed below.
  • Battery Pack POLYPRO LiPo11.1V 2500mAh 20C W/APP &  VPORT 217g (#PPR-3X250PYF)
  • Two (2) VMAX Propellor - 8 x 6 Electric - 3 Blade (#VMM-0860ET)
  • Documentation

 

Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Contents
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set (WHS) contains the following
  • Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) to connect the two aileron servos in the wings to the aileron channel of the receiver in the fuselage.  Total Length = approx 32 in. (813 mm). Length from aileron channel connector to Y = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
    • (Note: The aileron wiring harness does NOT provide for flaperon operation using a computer radio and two discrete receiver channels. VMAR models utilizing two aileron servos will usually support computer radio flaperon functionality in conjunction with the aileron wiring harness if additional aileron extensions are purchased in addition to the aileron wiring harness included with the wiring harness set).
  • Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) to connect three Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) to the throttle channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 12.5 in. (318 mm). Length from throttle channel connector to Y = approx 6 in. (152 mm)
  • Power Wiring Harness (WHP) to provide Positive (+) and Negative (-) power to three motors from a single battery (fused in line). Total Length = approx 14 in. (355 mm). Length from battery connector to quick disconnect joint = approx 5.0 in. (127 mm)
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set also contains:
  • Flap Wiring Harness (FHE) to connect the flap servos located in the wing (inboard locations) to the flap channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 22.5 in. (571 mm). Length from flap channel connector to junction = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
  • End User Wiring Labels

 

Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Contents
This VMAX Power Module (#VMM-T210PM1) contains the following
  • Two power pylons, each consisting of:
    • Laser cut wood power module firewall assembly (#VMA-T210XPMV)
    • Brushless Motor (#VMM-111B18VM)
    • Propellor mounting hardware
    • Electronic Speed Control (ESC) (#VMC-120B15VC)
    • Wiring between the Motor and the ESC
    • Wiring leads from the ESC to provide Positive (+) power, Negative (-) power and throttle control
    • All components have been factory installed, connected & tested.
  • Crimp on bullet connectors (female) for the ESC power feeds  (2 Red, 2 Black)
  • Documentation
 
 
 
 
13.5.10.1.5. Power Pack - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.5.10.1.5.1. Stage 1 - Install Power Module - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Power Module (both pylons) following the Read Me First instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
13.5.10.1.5.2. Stage 2 - Install Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Wiring Harness Set following the Read Me First instructions provided with the Wiring Harness Set.
 
13.5.10.1.5.3. Stage 3 - Install Props, Battery & Nose Gear Servo - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Install the Propellers, Battery Pack and Nose Gear Servo following the instructions provided in the Read Me First documention and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
13.5.10.1.6. Power Pack - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Operating
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the operating limits will help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
We developed this Power Pack as a "system" suitable for your model. We strongly advise against changing any component within this system. If a component requires replacement, ensure you replace it with a new but identical component to that which is being swapped out.
 
 
13.5.10.1.6.1. Motors - Power Pack Operations - VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First "Operating" Instructions provided with the Power Module.
 
 
13.5.10.1.6.2. Battery - Power Pack Operations - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model.
 
b) Follow the Read Me First Instructions provided with the Battery.  
 
 
13.5.10.1.7. Power Pack - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - No No's & Must Do's
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly & Operations Manual that came with your model. Take careful note of all cautions and warnings related to the safe and reliable operation of your model.
b) Review the Read Me First "No No's & Must Do's" provided with the Power Module.
 
c) Review the Read Me First information provided with the Battery. Pay particular attention to safety considerations related to transporting and charging your battery. We must again emphasize the importance of disconnecting your battery whenever you are transporting it, storing it, not using it or if you suspect any problems with your battery, motor or radio.   
13.5.10.1.8. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.5.10.1.8.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.5.10.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.5.10.2. Power Pack - #VMM-T210XPP1 For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.5.11. More Information about Power Packs

Links to More Information:

13.6. Power Supplies
Although there are a wide variety of different power supplies, in our applications, power supplies typically convert alternating current (AC) power (from the "wall") to direct current (DC) power that is in turn then used by a device such as a battery charger.
 
The output voltage and output current is important when selecting a power supply. If your battery charger (or other device) requires 12 Volts of Direct Current (VDC) as an input then you must choose a power supply that provides 12 VDC output. The output current rating of the power supply is also important. If your battery charger (or other device) requires 12 VDC at 2 Amps you must choose a 12 VDC power supply that is rated at (can supply) 2 Amps or more.
 
A power supply must be capable of providing the correct voltage for your device and it must be capable of providing at least the current that the device requires. A battery charger that requires 12 VDC at 2 Amps will work fine with a power supply rated for 12 VDC at 5 Amps but will not work with a 12 VDC power supply that is rated capable of providing 1 Amp of current.
 
Never overload a power supply or under power a device. You run the risk of damaging the power supply and the device.
 
13.6.1. Power Supply - VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR - Output 12 VDC 6 Amps
The VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR power supply accepts 110-240VAC input and provides 12 VDC output and is rated at up to 6 Amps.
 
This output rating of 12 VDC at 6 Amps is ideal for many Li PO battery chargers such as the VME-LPBC10 and the VME-MFBC808B.
 
Please consult the READ ME FIRST document and Operations Manual of your battery charger or device to ensure that it is compatible with the #VME-TH12V6AR power supply.  
 
 
 
13.6.1.1. Power Supply - #VME-TH12V6AR - Output 12 VDC 6 Amps - READ ME FIRST
 
BEFORE PROCEEDING
TO ASSEMBLE OR
OPERATE THIS PRODUCT
 
PLEASE
READ ME FIRST
          
PLEASE
READ ME FIRST
 
BEFORE PROCEEDING
TO ASSEMBLE OR
OPERATE THIS PRODUCT
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
13.6.1.1.1. Think Safety
Power supplies, battery chargers, batteries, motors and related accessories, tools and equipment can be hazardous if improperly used. Be cautious and follow all safety recommendations when using this product. Keep hands, tools, clothing, liquids and all foreign objects and flammables well clear of equipment prior to and during operations. Check and double check all electrical connections before operating.  
 
WARNING - FIRE RISK
 
If this product or any wire, cable, adapter or other device to which it is connected Overheats, Smokes, Smells or Swells then IMMEDIATELY UNPLUG all connections & MOVE ALL COMPONENTS to a Safe Outdoor Location.
 
Do NOT Overload, Short Circuit, Drop, Mechanically Damage or Immerse 

Do NOT connect or operate Near Flammable Materials.

Do NOT operate inside an Automobile or other Vehicle.

Do NOT operate when Hot.

Do NOT operate outdoors or in a wet environment.
 
Ensure that devices to which this product is connected have compatible voltage and current requirements.   
 
UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13.6.1.1.2. Power Supply - VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR - Introduction
Before proceeding please read the Overview and check off the components provided against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their packaging for now. Do not remove a component from it's packaging until it is needed.  
 
Power Supplies
Although there are a wide variety of different power supplies, in our applications, power supplies typically convert alternating current (AC) power (from the "wall") to direct current (DC) power that is in turn then used by a device such as a battery charger.
 
The output voltage and output current is important when selecting a power supply. If your battery charger (or other device) requires 12 Volts of Direct Current (VDC) as an input then you must choose a power supply that provides 12 VDC output. The output current rating of the power supply is also important. If your battery charger (or other device) requires 12 VDC at 2 Amps you must choose a 12 VDC power supply that is rated at (can supply) 2 Amps or more.
 
A power supply must be capable of providing the correct voltage for your device and it must be capable of providing at least the current that the device requires. A battery charger that requires 12 VDC at 2 Amps will work fine with a power supply rated for 12 VDC at 5 Amps but will not work with a 12 VDC power supply that is rated capable of providing 1 Amp of current.
 
Never overload a power supply or under power a device. You run the risk of damaging the power supply and the device.
 
Power Supply - VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR - Output 12 VDC 6 Amps
The VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR power supply accepts 110-240VAC input and provides 12 VDC output and is rated at up to 6 Amps.
 
This output rating of 12 VDC at 6 Amps is ideal for many Li PO battery chargers such as the VME-LPBC10 and the VME-MFBC808B.
 
Please consult the READ ME FIRST document and Operations Manual of your battery charger or device to ensure that it is compatible with the #VME-TH12V6AR power supply.  
 
 
 
13.6.1.1.3. Power Supply - VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR - Contents
This VMAX Power Supply  (#VME-TH12V6AR) consists of the following:
  • The power supply itself.
  • Detachable AC input cord. This is supplied with a wall plug for North American style 110 VAC service.
    • For areas outside North America, please see your local supplier for a compatible AC input cord and plug.
  • Permanently attached output cord with DC output barrel connector.  
    • The barrel connector is compatible with VMAX battery chargers including #VME-LPBC10 and #VME-MFBC808B.
  • Documentation.

 

13.6.1.1.4. Power Supply - VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR - Installation Instructions
Consult any labels carefully, particularly any WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
Plug the AC input cord into the power supply.
 
 
13.6.1.1.5. Power Supply - VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR - Operating

Powering Up - Turning On

A) Consult any labels carefully, particularly any WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Paying attention to the labels will help prevent accidents and damage to your equipment.

B) Consult the documentation that came with your battery charger or device. Ensure you know how to turn it on and off and what to watch for in the way of indicator lights etc.

C) Plug the AC input cord into your AC supply (wall) outlet. 

  • A small green light on the front face of the power supply will light up in a few seconds.

D) Connect the DC output cord to your battery charger or device.

E) Turn on the device.

STAY ALERT FOR OVERHEATING, SMELLS, SMOKE OR OTHER SIGNS OF TROUBLE. UNPLUG ALL CONNECTIONS IMMEDIATELY IF THE POWER SUPPLY OR ANY CORD OR DEVICE OVERHEATS, SMELLS, SMOKES, SPARKS OR MAKES ANY UNEXPECTED NOISE OR EMISSION.
 
 
Powering Down - Turning Off.

UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED.
A) Unplug any downstream devices such as a battery charger first.

B) Unplug the AC input cord last.

C) The small green light on the front face of the power supply may stay lighted for up to 1 minute.

 
 
 
 
 
 

13.6.1.1.6. Power Supply - VMAX #VME-TH12V6AR - No No's & Must Do's
Do NOT OPERATE NEAR FLAMMABLE MATERIALS.  Do not operate near flammable liquids or gases, on or near a carpet or any flammable surface.

Do NOT OPERATE inside an automobile or other vehicle. If using a cigarette lighter adapter or connecting to automobile power ensure that the cord is long enough to connect to the power supply located outside and away from the vehicle.

Do NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SUPPLY IS HOT. If the power supply is hot to the touch, understand why it’s hot. Check your connections. If the power supply and anything it is connected to appears to be functioning properly the power supply may be overloaded by devices to which it is connected. Reduce the load.

CONNECT TO DEVICES HAVING COMPATIBLE VOLTAGE & CURRENT REQUIREMENTS. Ensure that the input and output voltage of your power supply is compatible with the line supply and connected devices. Ensure that external devices do not overload the power supply with more current than it can supply.

DO NOT OPERATE OUTDOORS or in a WET ENVIRONMENT. This power supply is intended for indoor operation only. It is not water or weather proof.

ALWAYS UNPLUG WHEN UNATTENDED. Do not leave your power supply connected to anything when unattended. Nothing!

 

13.6.1.1.7. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.6.1.1.7.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.6.1.1.8. Warranty

This product is warrantied to the original buyer to be free of manufacturing defects for a period of 6 months from date of purchase.

Problems caused by alteration, normal wear and tear, physical damage, abuse, improper use, failure to comply with the setup and operating instructions, customer disassembly or damage caused by defective batteries or damage caused by the use of other accessories are not covered by this warranty.

All warranty returns MUST be accompanied by an RMA number and a dated sales receipt from an authorized VMAX re-seller and the original VMAX packaging along with all of the adapters and connectors supplied with this product.

All returns must be SHIPPED PREPAID to the VMAX Service Center in your market area.
 
See "Support" for information about Warranty Claims.
 
13.6.1.1.9. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.6.1.2. Power Supply - #VME-TH12V6AR - Pictures, Graphics & Artwork
13.6.1.2.1. Pictures - Power Supply - #VME-TH12V6AR
13.6.1.2.1.1. Pictures (CMYK_TIF) Power Supply - #VME-TH12V6AR
13.7. Wiring Harness Sets - For VMAX Power Packs
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets for VMAX Power Packs contain all of the wiring and connectors to install and operate the components of multi-motor VMAX Power Packs and any servos included with the power pack. (Note: Single motor power systems include discrete wiring components and do not use a wiring harness "set" per se.)
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are factory designed to fit into the applicable VMAR model with its applicable VMAX power system and any included servos. All of the connectors have been factory installed. 
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are:
  • Included with VMAX Power Packs for the applicable model.
  • Available as a stand alone accessory for use with VMAX Power Modules for the applicable model.
  • Provide for fast and reliable installation of VMAX Power Packs and Power Modules into VMAR multi-motor electric models. 
    • Note: Modelers who are not experienced with multi-motor electric flight systems are strongly encouraged to use the VMAR Wiring Harness Set applicable to their VMAR multi-motor model. Scratch building and installing a reliable wiring harness set for a multi-motor electric model requires approximately 8 hours of work & considerable knowledge and experience.
  • May be suitable for use with some third party power systems and servos supplied by end users.
 
A typical VMAR Wiring Harness Set (WHS) for a multi-motor model contains the following:
  • Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) to connect two aileron servos in the wings to the aileron channel of the receiver in the fuselage. 
    • (Note: The aileron wiring harness does NOT provide for flaperon operation using a computer radio and two discrete receiver channels. VMAR models utilizing two aileron servos will usually support flaperon functionality in conjunction with the aileron wiring harness if additional aileron extensions are purchased in addition to the aileron wiring harness included with the wiring harness set).
  • Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) to connect multiple Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) to the throttle channel of the receiver in the fuselage.
  • Power Wiring Harness (WHP) to provide Positive (+) and Negative (-) power to multiple motors from a single battery (fused in line).
Depending on the model itself the VMAR Wiring Harness Set may also contain:
  • Elevator Wiring Harness (WHE) to connect one or more elevator servos located near the tail to the elevator channel of the receiver in the fuselage.
    • (Note: In some models the elevator servo is located in a servo tray near the receiver itself and a long control rod connects the servo to the elevator... this arrangement does not require an elevator wiring harness.)
  • Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness (WHR) to connect one or more rudder servos located near the tail and a ground steering servo to the rudder channel of the receiver in the fuselage.
    • (Note: In some models the rudder servo is located in a servo tray near the receiver itself and a long control rod connects the servo to the rudder... this arrangement does not require an rudder wiring harness. Other models may not offer ground steering via a servo dedicated to controlling a nose or tail wheel and the wiring harness will not provide for such)
  • Other wiring harnesses applicable to the particular VMAR model.
 
13.7.1. Wiring Harness Sets - For VMAR Power Packs - Overview
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets for VMAR Power Packs contain all of the wiring and connectors to install and operate the components of multi-motor VMAR Power Packs and any servos included with the power pack. (Note: Single motor power systems include discrete wiring components and do not use a wiring harness "set" per se.)
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are factory designed to fit into the applicable VMAR model with its applicable VMAR power system and any included servos. All of the connectors have been factory installed. 
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are:
  • Included with VMAR Power Packs for the applicable model.
  • Available as a stand alone accessory for use with VMAR Power Modules for the applicable model.
  • Provide for fast and reliable installation of VMAR Power Packs and Power Modules into VMAR multi-motor electric models. 
    • Note: Modelers who are not experienced with multi-motor electric flight systems are strongly encouraged to use the VMAR Wiring Harness Set applicable to their VMAR multi-motor model. Scratch building and installing a reliable wiring harness set for a multi-motor electric model requires approximately 8 hours of work & considerable knowledge and experience.
  • May be suitable for use with some third party power systems and servos supplied by end users.
 
13.7.2. Wiring Harness Sets - For VMAR Power Packs - Typical Contents
A typical VMAR Wiring Harness Set (WHS) for a multi-motor model contains the following:
  • Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) to connect two aileron servos in the wings to the aileron channel of the receiver in the fuselage. 
    • (Note: The aileron wiring harness does NOT provide for flaperon operation using a computer radio and two discrete receiver channels. VMAR models utilizing two aileron servos will usually support computer radio flaperon functionality in conjunction with the aileron wiring harness if additional aileron extensions are purchased in addition to the aileron wiring harness included with the wiring harness set).
  • Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) to connect multiple Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) to the throttle channel of the receiver in the fuselage.
  • Power Wiring Harness (WHP) to provide Positive (+) and Negative (-) power to multiple motors from a single battery (fused in line).
Depending on the model itself the VMAR Wiring Harness Set may also contain:
  • Elevator Wiring Harness (WHE) to connect one or more elevator servos located near the tail to the elevator channel of the receiver in the fuselage.
    • (Note: In some models the elevator servo is located in a servo tray near the receiver itself and a long control rod connects the servo to the elevator... this arrangement does not require an elevator wiring harness.)
  • Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness (WHR) to connect one or more rudder servos located near the tail and a ground steering servo to the rudder channel of the receiver in the fuselage.
    • (Note: In some models the rudder servo is located in a servo tray near the receiver itself and a long control rod connects the servo to the rudder... this arrangement does not require an rudder wiring harness. Other models may not offer ground steering via a servo dedicated to controlling a nose or tail wheel and the wiring harness will not provide for such)
  • Other wiring harnesses applicable to the particular VMAR model.
 
13.7.3. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
13.7.3.1. Wiring Harness Set - #VMA-J210XWHS For VMA-J210X Trimotor - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.7.3.1.1. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - General Information
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.7.3.1.2. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Wiring Harness Sets - For VMAR Power Packs - Overview
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets for VMAR Power Packs contain all of the wiring and connectors to install and operate the components of multi-motor VMAR Power Packs and any servos included with the power pack. (Note: Single motor power systems include discrete wiring components and do not use a wiring harness "set" per se.)
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are factory designed to fit into the applicable VMAR model with its applicable VMAR power system and any included servos. All of the connectors have been factory installed. 
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are:
  • Included with VMAR Power Packs for the applicable model.
  • Available as a stand alone accessory for use with VMAR Power Modules for the applicable model.
  • Provide for fast and reliable installation of VMAR Power Packs and Power Modules into VMAR multi-motor electric models. 
    • Note: Modelers who are not experienced with multi-motor electric flight systems are strongly encouraged to use the VMAR Wiring Harness Set applicable to their VMAR multi-motor model. Scratch building and installing a reliable wiring harness set for a multi-motor electric model requires approximately 8 hours of work & considerable knowledge and experience.
  • May be suitable for use with some third party power systems and servos supplied by end users.
 
13.7.3.1.3. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Contents
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set (WHS) contains the following
  • Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) to connect the two aileron servos in the wings to the aileron channel of the receiver in the fuselage.  Total Length = approx 32 in. (813 mm). Length from aileron channel connector to Y = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
    • (Note: The aileron wiring harness does NOT provide for flaperon operation using a computer radio and two discrete receiver channels. VMAR models utilizing two aileron servos will usually support computer radio flaperon functionality in conjunction with the aileron wiring harness if additional aileron extensions are purchased in addition to the aileron wiring harness included with the wiring harness set).
  • Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) to connect three Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) to the throttle channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 12.5 in. (318 mm). Length from throttle channel connector to Y = approx 6 in. (152 mm)
  • Power Wiring Harness (WHP) to provide Positive (+) and Negative (-) power to three motors from a single battery (fused in line). Total Length = approx 14 in. (355 mm). Length from battery connector to quick disconnect joint = approx 5.0 in. (127 mm)
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set also contains:
  • Flap Wiring Harness (FHE) to connect the flap servos located in the wing (inboard locations) to the flap channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 22.5 in. (571 mm). Length from flap channel connector to junction = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
  • End User Wiring Labels

 

13.7.3.1.4. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.7.3.1.4.1. Stage 1 - Install Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 1 and Stage 2 from the Assembly and Operations Manual. Once completed you will have assembled the wing.
 
b) Review Stage 3 from the Assembly and Operations Manual. Locate the Aileron Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness. 
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Aileron Wiring Harness. Pay particular attention to the larger warning label and note the color conventions used for different manufacturers. This will be important when you plug in your servos and when you plug into your receiver. See Figure 1A and the green "path" as a reference to guide you as you proceed with the installation.
 

1A - Aileron Wiring Harness Installed - Viewed from Top Side of Wing

 
d) Turn the wing upright so that you can see the large access cavity near the center of the wing. Support the wing with a sheet of foam rubber or folded up fluffy towel.
 
e) Position the wing so that the trailing edge (thin) is closer to you and the leading edge (thick) is further away. When oriented in this manner, the wing panel on your left will be the left wing panel in flight and the wing panel on your right will be the right wing panel in flight. This consistent definition of left and right makes it much easier to install the aileron servos and aileron wiring harness properly.
 
f) Thread the end of the wire marked "Aileron Left" through the left side of the large access cavity near the center of the wing and through the internal wiring access tube to the left aileron servo cavity located about 17 in. (432 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Pull the loose end of the wire out of the tube so that it exits the bottom of the wing through the left aileron servo cavity. Connect the left aileron servo to this wire. Use the supplied "Aileron Left" sticker to wrap the connection securely. Gently pull the wire back from the source and install the left aileron servo into position as shown in Stage 3 of the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
g) Repeat this process for the wire marked "Aileron Right", working with the right side of the large access cavity near the center of the wing and the internal wiring access tube that runs to the right aileron servo cavity. Connect the right aileron servo to this wire. Use the supplied "Aileron Right" sticker to wrap the connection securely. Gently pull the wire back from the source and install the right aileron servo into position as shown in Stage 3 of the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
h) Once completed, both aileron servos will be installed into the wing and the end of the Aileron Wiring Harness that is labeled "Aileron Channel ==> ==>" will be hanging loose near the center of the wing ready to be plugged into the aileron channel of your receiver.
 
13.7.3.1.4.2. Stage 2 - Install Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 9 from the Assembly and Operations Manual using either a  VMAX Power Module set, a VMAX Power Pack or third party motors and speed controllers. 
 
b) After installation of your motors and speed controllers you may install the Throttle Warning Harness.  Locate the Throttle Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness.
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Throttle Wiring Harness. Pay particular attention to the larger warning label and note the color conventions used for different manufacturers. This will be important when you plug in your ESC and when you plug into your receiver.See Figure 2A and the green "path" as a reference to guide you as you proceed with the installation.
 

2A - Throttle Wiring Harness Installed - Viewed from Top Side of Wing

 
 
d) Turn the wing upright on its back so that you can see your ESC's located in the large access cavity near the center of the wing. Support the wing with a sheet of foam rubber or folded up fluffy towel.
 
e) Position the wing so that the trailing edge (thin) is closer to you and the leading edge (thick) is further away. When oriented in this manner, the wing panel on your left will be the left wing panel in flight and the wing panel on your right will be the right wing panel in flight. This consistent definition of left and right makes it much easier to install the Throttle Wiring Harness properly.
 
f) Thread the red, white and black wire lead from the left speed control into the power access cavity located on the top surface of the left wing about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Continue feeding the red, white and black wire from the cavity into and though the internal wiring access tube that runs to the large access cavity in the center of the wing. Gently pull the wire so that it protrudes into the large access cavity. Connect this protruding wire to the end of the Throttle Wire Harness marked "Throttle Control Left". Use the supplied "Throttle Left" sticker to wrap the connection securely.
 
g) Repeat this process for the right wing. Thread the red, white and black wire lead from the right speed control into the power access cavity located on the top surface of the right wing about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Continue feeding the red, white and black wire from the cavity into and through the internal wiring access tube that runs to the large access cavity in the center of the wing. Gently pull the wire so that it protrudes into the large access cavity. Connect this protruding wire to the end of the Throttle Wire Harness marked "Throttle Control Right". Use the supplied "Throttle Right" sticker to wrap the connection securely.
 
h) Once completed, both electronic speed controls for the wing motors will be connected to the Throttle Wiring Harness and the end of the Throttle Wiring Harness that is labeled "Throttle Channel ==> ==>" will be hanging loose near the center of the wing ready to be plugged into the throttle channel of your receiver.  
 
i) Connect the wire marked "Throttle Control Fuselage" to the ESC lead for the fuselage motor when mating the wing to the fuselage. You will unplug this connection when removing the wing from the fuselage.
 
 
13.7.3.1.4.3. Stage 3 - Install Power Wiring Harness (WHP) - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 9 from the Assembly and Operations Manual using either a  VMAX Power Module set, a VMAX Power Pack or third party motors and speed controllers. 
 
b) After installation of your motors and speed controllers you may install the Power Wiring Harness.  Locate the Power Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness.
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Power Wiring Harness. See Figure 3A and the green "path" as a reference to guide you as you proceed with the installation.
 

3A - Power Wiring Harness Installed - Viewed from Top Side of Wing

 
d) Turn the wing upright so that you can see the large access cavity in the center of the wing where you have installed your ESC's. Support the wing with a sheet of foam rubber or folded up fluffy towel.
 
e) Position the wing so that the trailing edge (thin) is closer to you and the leading edge (thick) is further away. When oriented in this manner, the wing panel on your left will be the left wing panel in flight and the wing panel on your right will be the right wing panel in flight. This consistent definition of left and right makes it much easier to install the Power Wiring Harness properly.
 
f) Connect the end of the red Power Wiring Harness marked "+ Power + Positive Left" to the left wing speed control Red (+) power lead. 
 
g) Connect the end of the black Power Wiring Harness marked "- Power - Negative Left" to the left wing speed control Black (-) power lead. 
 
h) This completes the wiring of power to the left wing speed control. Now follow a similar process for the right wing speed control. 
 
f) Connect the end of the red Power Wiring Harness marked "+ Power + Positive Right" to the right wing speed control Red (+) power lead. 
 
g) Connect the end of the black Power Wiring Harness marked "- Power - Negative Right" to the right wing speed control Black (-) power lead. 
 
h) This completes the wiring of power to the right wing and left wing speed controls. Now connect the wiring for the fuselage speed control.
 
i) Connect the end of the red Power Wiring Harness marked "+ Power + Positive Fuselage" to the fuselage speed control Red (+) lead. 
 
j) Connect the end of the black Power Wiring Harness marked "- Power - Negative Fuselage" to the fuselage speed control Black (-) power lead. 
  
k) Once completed, the left and right speed control and motor assemblies and the fuselage speed control and motor will be connected to the Power Wiring Harness. Separate the quick connect joint (located between the two white zip straps) so that the wing wiring and harness can be removed from the fuselage with the wing.
 
l) Do NOT plug in your battery pack until you are ready to fly or test your equipment. The battery pack should NOT be plugged in when the model is unattended and should NOT be plugged in when transporting your model in a vehicle.
13.7.3.1.4.4. Stage 4 - Install Flap Wiring Harness (WHF) - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 1 and Stage 2 from the Assembly and Operations Manual. Once completed you will have assembled the wing.
 
b) Review Stage 13 from the Assembly and Operations Manual. Pay particular attention to the larger warning label and note the color conventions used for different manufacturers. This will be important when you plug in your servos and when you plug into your receiver. Locate the Flap Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness. 
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Flap Wiring Harness. See Figure 4A and the green "path" as a reference to guide you as you proceed with the installation.
 

4A - Flap Wiring Harness Installed - Viewed from Top Side of Wing

 
d) Turn the wing upright so that you can see the large access cavity near the center of the wing. Support the wing with a sheet of foam rubber or folded up fluffy towel.
 
e) Position the wing so that the trailing edge (thin) is closer to you and the leading edge (thick) is further away. When oriented in this manner, the wing panel on your left will be the left wing panel in flight and the wing panel on your right will be the right wing panel in flight. This consistent definition of left and right makes it much easier to install the flap servos and flap wiring harness properly.
 
f) Thread the end of the wire marked "Flap Servo Left" through the left side of the large access cavity near the center of the wing and through the internal wiring access tube to the left flap servo cavity located about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Pull the loose end of the wire out of the tube so that it exits the downward facing bottom surface of the wing through the left flap servo cavity. Connect the left flap servo to this wire. Use the supplied "Flap Left" sticker to wrap the connection securely. Gently pull the wire back from the source and install the left flap servo into position as shown in Stage 13 of the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
g) Repeat this process for the wire marked "Flap Servo Right", working from the right side of the large access cavity near the center of the wing and the internal wiring access tube that runs to the right servo cavity. Connect the right flap servo to this wire. Use the supplied "Flap Right" sticker to wrap the connection securely. Gently pull the wire back from the source and install the right flap servo into position as shown in Stage 13 of the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
h) Once completed, both flap servos will be installed into the bottom of the wing and the end of the Flap Wiring Harness that is labeled "Flap Channel ==> ==>" will be hanging loose near the center of the wing ready to be plugged into the flap channel of your receiver.
 
 
 
 
13.7.3.1.5. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.7.3.1.5.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.7.3.1.6. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.7.3.2. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-J210X JU52 Trimotor - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
13.7.4. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
13.7.4.1. Wiring Harness Set - #VMA-T210XWHS For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - READ ME FIRST

PLEASE READ ME FIRST

BEFORE PROCEEDING TO ASSEMBLE OR OPERATE THIS PRODUCT

 
 
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER & COPYRIGHT NOTICE

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

The authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product expressly disclaim any warranties or representations, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness, accuracy, timeliness or applicability of the information and/or product provided here. In no event will the authors and/or suppliers and/or disseminaters of this information and/or product have any obligation arising from contract or tort, for loss of revenue or profit, or for indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages of any sort arising from this information and/or product. In using this information and/or product, the user accepts all responsibility for and all liability associated with such use.

PROCEEDING WITH THE USE OF THIS INFORMATION AND/OR PRODUCT INDICATES AGREEMENT WITH AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.
 
Please Note the following Caution

CAUTION

A Remote Control (RC) model aircraft is not a toy. It is a flying model that functions much like a full size airplane. If you do not assemble and operate model aircraft properly you can cause injury to yourself and others and damage property. DO NOT FLY a model aircraft unless you are qualified.

You are ultimately responsible for the mechanical, aeronautical and electrical integrity of any model you fly and all of the components that make up the model including but not limited to the airframe itself, control surfaces, hinges, linkages, covering, engine, motor, radio, servos, switches, wiring, battery and parts. Check all components before and after each flight. It is essential that you act with the clear understanding that you are solely responsible for all aspects of the model at all times. DO NOT FLY until it is right.  

 

13.7.4.1.1. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - General Information
 
COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
Tips for Avoiding Common Problems

We have supplied thousands and thousands and thousands of model aircraft in the past 20 plus years. We're not bragging! We tell you this to give some credibility to our suggested list of tips that follow. In talking to modelers around the world, here is what we have found is the key to... 

AVOIDING 90% of PROBLEMS that can arise:  

  1. READ THE CAUTION ABOVE & READ THE LIABILITY DISCLAIMER.You are responsible for all aspects of any model you fly. You're It!
  2. READ ALL DOCUMENTATION before doing anything else! 
  3. INSPECT CAREFULLY immediately upon arrival!.
  4. RETAIN ALL PACKAGING until the checkout is complete! If you need to return anything you must have all of the original packaging.
  5. READ & LOOK! At everything! Do it once & then do it again.
  6. REMEMBER WHAT "ARF" STANDS FOR. ARF means ALMOST Ready to Fly with an emphasis on ALMOST! Some assembly and modeling skills are required.
  7. ALLOW ENOUGH TIME to enjoy the assembly process! Rushing into a 6 hour job with 3 hours to spare simply will not work. This is a Hobby... take your time.
  8. DRY FIT & TEST ASSEMBLE EVERYTHING before you glue anything!
  9. USE 30 MINUTE EPOXY when joining wings & installing stabilizers and other structural components but only after you have dry fitted and test assembled the components without glue! Once parts are glued together they cannot be unglued and they cannot be returned or replaced without charge.
  10. PLAN AHEAD! BE CAREFUL! If you get into trouble, DON'T PANIC. Review everything again, talk it over with an experienced modeler and if still in difficulty consult our Support Services.
  11. TEST TEST!!! TUG TUG TUG!!! EVERYTHING... BEFORE & AFTER EACH FLIGHT! Your model may have been largely pre-constructed and may have pre-installed control rods, hinges, control surfaces and many other essential components. Hinges may have been pinned after they have been installed. However, you must double check every control surface and component before and after each flight. You and only you are responsible for the integrity of all components and the integrity of the model itself. Check everything before and after each flight. Tug on control surfaces, control rods, mounting bolts, T-nuts, mounting plates... tug on everything!
  12. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN WING BOLTS or other fasteners. You want bolts and nuts snugly tight and if metal you can use a medium grade thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to help them stay tight. Fasteners must be snug and secure. However a model airplane is not a farm tractor or a garbage compactor. You do not need a pipe wrench or an electric drill to tighten up wing bolts or any other fastener. Leave your plumbing and power tools at home.. hand tools only and go easy on the torque... snug and secure... not stripped or torqued until they squeak or break.  Wing bolts can take tremendous torque before breaking... but when you over tighten them or use an electric screw driver on a set of wing bolts, long before the bolts break you can fracture the fuselage, crack the mounting blocks or pull the heads of the bolts through the wing... these problems have a nasty habit of revealing themselves when you least expect the wing to fall off!
  13. DO NOT OVERPOWER ANY MODEL! Stay within the recommended power range for the model. If you overpower the model you run a high risk of structural failure that will lead to loss of control and a subsequent crash that will destroy the model and may cause injury and/or property damage.
  14. ASSUME NOTHING! Remember the old yarn about what happens when you ASS-U-ME something. Check everything repeatedly and frequently and DO NOT FLY any model unless you are satisfied that everything is in good working order.

 

13.7.4.1.2. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Introduction
 
 
Before beginning the Installation Instructions please read the Overview and check off the components provided. Each component is in a labelled parts bag. Please check off the components against the Contents list below. Leave the components in their parts bags for now. Do not remove the components from their parts bags until each is needed during the installation process. 
 
Wiring Harness Sets - For VMAR Power Packs - Overview
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets for VMAR Power Packs contain all of the wiring and connectors to install and operate the components of multi-motor VMAR Power Packs and any servos included with the power pack. (Note: Single motor power systems include discrete wiring components and do not use a wiring harness "set" per se.)
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are factory designed to fit into the applicable VMAR model with its applicable VMAR power system and any included servos. All of the connectors have been factory installed. 
 
VMAR Wiring Harness Sets are:
  • Included with VMAR Power Packs for the applicable model.
  • Available as a stand alone accessory for use with VMAR Power Modules for the applicable model.
  • Provide for fast and reliable installation of VMAR Power Packs and Power Modules into VMAR multi-motor electric models. 
    • Note: Modelers who are not experienced with multi-motor electric flight systems are strongly encouraged to use the VMAR Wiring Harness Set applicable to their VMAR multi-motor model. Scratch building and installing a reliable wiring harness set for a multi-motor electric model requires approximately 8 hours of work & considerable knowledge and experience.
  • May be suitable for use with some third party power systems and servos supplied by end users.
 
13.7.4.1.3. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Contents
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set (WHS) contains the following
  • Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) to connect the two aileron servos in the wings to the aileron channel of the receiver in the fuselage.  Total Length = approx 15 in. (380mm). Length from aileron channel connector to Y = approx 4 in. (102 mm)
    • (Note: The aileron wiring harness does NOT provide for flaperon operation using a computer radio and two discrete receiver channels. VMAR models utilizing two aileron servos will usually support computer radio flaperon functionality in conjunction with the aileron wiring harness if additional aileron extensions are purchased in addition to the aileron wiring harness included with the wiring harness set).
  • Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) to connect two Electronic Speed Controls (ESC) to the throttle channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 13 in. (330mm). Length from throttle channel connector to Y = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
  • Power Wiring Harness (WHP) to provide Positive (+) and Negative (-) power to two motors from a single battery (fused in line). Total Length = approx 22.5 in. (570mm). Length from battery connector to Y = approx 9.25 in. (235 mm)
This VMAR Wiring Harness Set also contains:
  • Elevator Wiring Harness (WHE) to connect the elevator servo located near the tail to the elevator channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 23.5 in. (597 mm). Length from elevator channel connector to junction = approx 7 in. (178 mm)
  • Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness (WHR) to connect the rudder servo located near the tail and the nose wheel steering servo to the rudder channel of the receiver in the fuselage. Total Length = approx 23.5 in. (597 mm). Length from rudder channel connector to Y = approx 7 in. (178 mm).
  • End User Wiring Labels

 

13.7.4.1.4. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Installation Instructions
 
 
Consult any labels carefully, particularly the larger WARNING labels. The labels are largely self explanatory. Reading the labels will save you a great deal of time and help prevent damage to your equipment.
 
 
13.7.4.1.4.1. Stage 1 - Install Aileron Wiring Harness (WHA) - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 0 from the Read Me First document and Stage 1 from the Assembly and Operations Manual. Once completed you will have assembled the wing.
 
b) After assembly of the wing you may install the Aileron Wiring Harness.  Locate the Aileron Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness.
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Aileron Wiring Harness. Use 1A and the green "path" as a reference to guide you as you proceed with the installation.
 

1A - Aileron Wiring Harness Installed - Viewed from Bottom Side of Wing

 
d) Turn the wing on its back so that you can see the two square access holes near the center of the wing. Support the center of the underside of the wing with a sheet of foam rubber or folded up fluffy towel.
 
e) Position the inverted wing so that the leading edge (thick) is closer to you and the trailing edge (thin) is further away. When oriented in this manner, the inverted wing panel on your left will be the left wing panel in flight and the inverted wing panel on your right will be the right wing panel in flight. This consistent definition of left and right makes it much easier to install the aileron servos and aileron wiring harness properly.
 
f) Thread the end of the wire marked "Aileron Servo Left" through the left square access hole near the center of the wing and through the internal wiring access tube to the left aileron servo cavity located about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Pull the loose end of the wire out of the tube so that it exits the upward facing bottom surface of the wing through the left servo cavity. Connect the left aileron servo to this wire. Use the supplied "Aileron Left" sticker to wrap the connection securely. Gently pull the wire back from the source and install the left aileron servo into position as shown in Stage 2 of the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
g) Repeat this process for the wire marked "Aileron Servo Right", working with the right square access hole near the center of the wing and the internal wiring access tube that runs to the right servo cavity. Connect the right aileron servo to this wire. Use the supplied "Aileron Right" sticker to wrap the connection securely. Gently pull the wire back from the source and install the right aileron servo into position as shown in Stage 2 of the Assembly & Operations Manual.
 
h) Once completed, both aileron servos will be installed into the bottom of the wing and the end of the Aileron Wiring Harness that is labeled "Aileron Channel ==> ==>" will be hanging loose near the center of the wing ready to be plugged into the aileron channel of your receiver.
 
13.7.4.1.4.2. Stage 2 - Install Throttle Wiring Harness (WHT) - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 9 from the Assembly and Operations Manual using either a  VMAX Power Module set, a VMAX Power Pack or third party motors and speed controllers. 
 
b) After installation of your motors and speed controllers you may install the Throttle Warning Harness.  Locate the Throttle Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness.
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Throttle Wiring Harness. Use 2A and the green "path" as a reference to guide you as you proceed with the installation.
 

2A - Throttle Wiring Harness Installed - Viewed from Top Side of Wing

 
 
d) Turn the wing on its back so that you can see the two square access holes near the center of the wing. Support the center of the underside of the wing with a sheet of foam rubber or folded up fluffy towel.
 
e) Position the inverted wing so that the leading edge (thick) is closer to you and the trailing edge (thin) is further away. When oriented in this manner, the inverted wing panel on your left will be the left wing panel in flight and the inverted wing panel on your right will be the right wing panel in flight. This consistent definition of left and right makes it much easier to install the Throttle Wiring Harness properly.
 
f) Thread the red, white and black wire lead from the left speed control into the power access cavity located on the downward facing surface of the left wing about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Continue feeding the red, white and black wire from the cavity into and though the internal wiring access tube that runs to the left square access hole in the center of the wing. Gently pull the wire so that it protrudes from the left square access hole. Connect this protruding wire to the end of the Throttle Wire Harness marked "Throttle Control Left". Use the supplied "Throttle Left" sticker to wrap the connection securely.
 
g) Repeat this process for the right wing. Thread the red, white and black wire lead from the right speed control into the power access cavity located on the downward facing surface of the right wing about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Continue feeding the red, white and black wire from the cavity into and though the internal wiring access tube that runs to the right square access hole in the center of the wing. Gently pull the wire so that it protrudes from the right square access hole. Connect this protruding wire to the end of the Throttle Wire Harness marked "Throttle Control Right". Use the supplied "Throttle Right" sticker to wrap the connection securely.
 
h) Once completed, both electronic speed controls will be connected to the Throttle Wiring Harness and the end of the Throttle Wiring Harness that is labeled "Throttle Channel ==> ==>" will be hanging loose near the center of the wing ready to be plugged into the throttle channel of your receiver.  
 
 
13.7.4.1.4.3. Stage 3 - Install Power Wiring Harness (WHP) - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter
 
a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 9 from the Assembly and Operations Manual using either a  VMAX Power Module set, a VMAX Power Pack or third party motors and speed controllers. 
 
b) After installation of your motors and speed controllers you may install the Power Wiring Harness.  Locate the Power Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness.
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Power Wiring Harness. Use 3A and the green "path" as a reference to guide you as you proceed with the installation.
 

3A - Power Wiring Harness Installed - Viewed from Top Side of Wing

 
d) Turn the wing on its back so that you can see the two square access holes near the center of the wing. Support the center of the underside of the wing with a sheet of foam rubber or folded up fluffy towel.
 
e) Position the inverted wing so that the leading edge (thick) is closer to you and the trailing edge (thin) is further away. When oriented in this manner, the inverted wing panel on your left will be the left wing panel in flight and the inverted wing panel on your right will be the right wing panel in flight. This consistent definition of left and right makes it much easier to install the Power Wiring Harness properly.
 
f) Thread the end of the wire marked "+ Power + Positive Left" through the left square access hole near the center of the wing and through the internal wiring access tube to the left power access cavity located about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Pull the loose end of the wire out of the tube so that it exits the downward facing surface of the wing through the left power access cavity. Connect the left speed control Red (+) lead to this wire. Gently pull the wire back from the source while routing the connected Red wire so that it lies neatly from the speed control and into the left power access cavity.
 
g) Repeat this process for the negative power connection to the left speed control.  Thread the end of the wire marked "- Power - Negative Left" through the left square access hole near the center of the wing and through the internal wiring access tube to the left power access cavity located about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Pull the loose end of the wire out of the tube so that it exits the downward facing surface of the wing through the left power access cavity. Connect the left speed control Black (-) lead to this wire. Gently pull the wire back from the source while routing the connected Black wire so that it lies neatly from the speed control and into the left power access cavity.
 
h) This completes the wiring of power to the left speed control.
 
i) Now follow a similar process for the right speed control. Thread the end of the wire marked "+ Power + Positive Right" through the right square access hole near the center of the wing and through the internal wiring access tube to the right power access cavity located about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Pull the loose end of the wire out of the tube so that it exits the downward facing surface of the wing through the right power access cavity. Connect the right speed control Red (+) lead to this wire. Gently pull the wire back from the source while routing the connected Red wire so that it lies neatly from the speed control and into the right power access cavity.
 
j) Repeat this process for the negative power connection to the right speed control.  Thread the end of the wire marked "- Power -Negative Right" through the right square access hole near the center of the wing and through the internal wiring access tube to the right power access cavity located about 8.5 in. (215 mm) outboard from the center of the wing. Pull the loose end of the wire out of the tube so that it exits the downward facing surface of the wing through the right power access cavity. Connect the right speed control Black (-) lead to this wire. Gently pull the wire back from the source while routing the connected Black wire so that it lies neatly from the speed control and into the right power access cavity.
 
k) Once completed, the left and right speed control and motor assemblies will be connected to the Power Wiring Harness and the end of Power Wiring Harness with the square-like Black and Red connector will be hanging loose near the center of the wing ready to be plugged into your LiPo battery pack.
 
 
13.7.4.1.4.4. Stage 4 - Install Elevator Wiring Harness (WHE) - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter

a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 12 from the Assembly and Operations Manual up to the point where your elevator servo is ready to install into the fuselage as illustrated in 12D.
 
b) Locate the Elevator Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness.
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Elevator Wiring Harness.

d) Remove the top hatch from the fuselage. Working from within the fuselage, pass the end of the wire labeled "Elevator Servo ==> ==>" back into the tail section of the fuselage and out through the elevator servo cavity on the right side of the fuselage near the tail.
 
e) Gently pull the wire so that it protrudes from the elevator servo cavity. Connect this protruding wire to the elevator servo. Use the supplied "Elevator" sticker to wrap the connection securely.
 
f) Working from within the fuselage gently pull the Elevator Wiring Harness forward  toward the front of the fuselage and install the elevator servo into position as illustrated in picture 12E of the Assembly and Operations Manual.  
 
g) Once completed, the elevator servo will be connected to the Elevator Wiring Harness and the end of the Elevator Wiring Harness that is labeled "Elevator Channel ==> ==>" will be hanging loose near the center of the fuselage ready to be plugged into the elevator channel of your receiver.  
 
13.7.4.1.4.5. Stage 5 - Install Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness (WHR) - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter

a) Review the Read Me First documentation and the Assembly and Operations Manual that came with your model. Complete Stage 12 from the Assembly and Operations Manual up to the point where your rudder servo is ready to install (but not yet installed) into the fuselage as illustrated in 12F.
 
b) Locate the Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness parts bag and remove the harness.
 
c) Read all labels attached to the Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness.

d) Remove the top hatch from the fuselage. Working from within the fuselage, pass the end of the wire labeled "Rudder Servo ==> ==>" back into the tail section of the fuselage and out through the rudder servo cavity on the left side of the fuselage near the tail.
 
e) Gently pull the wire so that it protrudes from the rudder servo cavity. Connect this protruding wire to the rudder servo. Use the supplied "Rudder" sticker to wrap the connection securely.
 
f) Working from within the fuselage gently pull the Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness forward  toward the front of the fuselage and install the rudder servo into position as illustrated in picture 12F of the Assembly and Operations Manual.  
 
g) Working from within the fuselage connect the wire "Nose Servo ==> ==>" to the nose gear steering servo as illustrated in pictures 20B, 20C and 21.2 of the Assembly and Operations Manual. Use the supplied "Steering" sticker to wrap the connection securely.
 
h) Once completed, the rudder servo and the nose gear servo will be connected to the Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness and the end of the Rudder & Steering Wiring Harness that is labeled "Rudder Channel ==> ==>" will be hanging loose near the center of the fuselage ready to be plugged into the rudder channel of your receiver. 
 
13.7.4.1.5. Support

On Line, eMail, Fax, Phone, Mail

We offer the Best in Support Services.
We back up our products and our customers with the best support services available. From our industry leading Knowledge Base to information about your Shipment, we've got you covered!
 
To access our Support Services please:
Your Choice of Support Services that Work for You: 
13.7.4.1.5.1. Contact Us

For Sales and other Inquiries  

Support - Contact Us - Reach our Sales Department by eMail, Fax, Phone or Mail

Technical Inquiries:

Please review the information provided in our Knowledge Base. After checking our Knowledge Base, if you need further assistance please use our Submit A Question service to get a response within 2 Business Days.

 

Sales Inquiries: 

Please note that our Sales Department personnel are trained and dedicated to:

  • Helping you with non-technical pre-purchase questions,
  • Helping you place your order,
  • Pointing out any sales, combos or specials that you may wish to consider,
  • Inputting your order to our computer system so that it ships out as accurately and quickly as possible... usually the same day,  
  • Resolving any invoicing problems, and
  • Helping to sort out any missing shipment or shipment damage issues.
Their depth of technical knowledge is about on par with what is shown in our printed sales literature. In most cases, they are working from the same printed advertisements or content from our web site that you are. Asking sales personnel to confirm the size, color and availability of a product is well within their capabilities. However, asking detailed questions about technical issues is not.

 

Buy our Products: 
  • From a Retailer
    • Please support your local retailer.    
  • On Line 24x7x365... if your favorite Retailer does not have what you are looking for, please visit one of our On-Line Stores. 
      • For Radio Control,
      • For ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue & epoxies
    • www.supplystore.com
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacyrlates, superglue, epoxies, related accessories and more to End Users & Consumers in the Building Construction, Repair & Maintenance Trades. Also Fine Woodworkers, Stagecraft Artisans, Professional Detailers, Sportsmen & Scale Model Builders.
    • www.zapglue.ca
      • Supplying ZAP Brand CA, cyanoacrylates, superglue, epoxies and related accessories to End Users & Consumers in the Industrial, Manufacturing, Assembly and Laboratory sectors.
  • Order By Fax 24x7x365
    • 604-940-1063
  • Order By Phone M-F 11am-4pm Pacific Time
    • Order Desk 604-940-1066    

 

For All Other Inquiries... please consult the following resources:

  • After reviewing our On Line resources, if you require additional assistance please contact us by eMail, fax, phone or mail as follows:

    • Ask a Question
    • eMail 
    • Fax
      • 604-940-1063
    • Phone
      • 604-940-1066
    • Mail
      • Richmond RC Supply Ltd, #114 - 7350 72nd Street, Delta, BC, V4G-1H9
        • Mail & printed correspondence only.                
        • We are not able to accomodate personal site visits or drop-offs/pick-ups at this location.
        • Please note that all inbound Shipments require pre-Authorization in advance.
        • Unauthorized inbound shipments will be refused.        

 
13.7.4.1.6. Keep Up to Date

Check Frequently for Updates

Support - Stay Current - Check Frequently for Updated &/or Additional Information
This information is subject to change without notice. When viewing this information in a printed form the printing date will be visible in the lower right corner. Check frequently for updates &/or Additional Information.at www.richmondrc.com, > Enter the Site, > Support Services, follow the links to our Knowledge Base. Review the Table of Contents and search for the name and/or part number of this product.
 
For automated notification of changes to information contained in our Knowledge Base please register as a Priority Response member and subscribe to our Priority Response Notification Service.
13.7.4.2. Wiring Harness Set - For VMA-T210X Twin Otter - Additional Information

In general "Additional" Information is:

  • In addition to that found in other documentation related to this product,
  • Often reflects feedback &/or questions from users of the product.

Subject to the Conditions of Use, please review the attachments and related articles listed below.

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Richmond RC Supply Ltd. All rights reserved.
 
14. Technical Information - VMAX Engines (Glow) - General

 

14.1. VMAX Engines - Documents - Common to Many Engines
These documents are common to many or all VMAX Engines and are in addition to other information that may be specific to a particular engine.
14.2. Engine Bearings - Replacement Worthwhile? Cost vs Effort vs Results.

Question: I think the bearings in my engine are worn out or damaged? Are they worth replacing?

Answer: Yes and No. Sounds like we are waffling around on this one doesn't it? Well it comes down to HOW you replace them.

Consider this:

1) KNOWLEDGE and TOOLS. To actually replace the bearings in your existing crankcase you have to take them out. We recommend replacing front and rear bearings at the same time because it would be unusual to find one worn out and the other in good shape. To get them out you have to know what you are doing and most importantly to put new bearings in you have to be careful not to damage them during installation. Removing and installing bearings requires some knowledge and a few small special tools to do the job right. In our experience most modelers have some difficulty with this and often damage the new bearings.

2) WORK/EFFORT/TIME. Do you have the time? It takes about 30-60 minutes to do a good job IF you have the tools and knowledge to change bearings effectively.

3) COSTS. The cost of two bearings can vary widely from engine to engine and source to source. The price for a front/rear set of bearings for the VMAX 46PRO and 52PRO is about $20 as of 20050228. This may have increased since then. You may be able to run around town and find them cheaper at a bearing house if you can get the size you need but with gas and automobile depreciation the way it is today you can't drive far even to get bearings for free!

Question: So what to do when you have neither the knowledge, the tools, the time or money to burn? Is there another way short of dumping the engine?

Answer: Yes there is! Swap out the crankcase complete with bearings. Once you've got the engine taken apart to the point where you can actually remove the bearings you are way ahead of the game if you just replace the entire crankcase and bearing set with brand new components. As of 20050228, the price for the crankcase with bearings already installed for the VMAX 46PRO and 52PRO was just $5 more than  the cost of the bearings by themselves. So for a few bucks more you can do less work, have a much better chance of a satisfactory outcome and get the job done quickly so you can get back to flying!

Conclusion: On a VMAX engine we recommend changing the crankcase and bearings for a few dollars more than just changing the bearings themselves.

 

 

14.3. Engine Piston & Sleeve - Replacement Worthwhile? Cost vs Effort vs Results

Question: I think the piston and sleeve in my engine is worn out or damaged. Are they worth replacing?

Answer: Well it comes down to cost and HOW you replace them.

Consider this:

1) KNOWLEDGE and TOOLS. To actually replace the piston and sleeve you have to disassemble your engine in order to take them out. We recommend replacing the piston and sleeve together in any ABC engine and in many cases it is prudent to so in a ringed engine as well. The conrod and wrist pin and wrist pin retainer should also be replaced at the same time. To get these parts out of your crankcase you have to know what you are doing and most importantly to put the new components in you have to be careful not to damage them during installation and you must align the ports correctly. Removing and installing pistons and sleeves requires some knowledge and a few small special tools to do the job right. In our experience most modelers have some difficulty with this and may damage the sleeve and/or conrod bottom end.

2) WORK/EFFORT/TIME. Do you have the time? It takes about 30-60 minutes to do a good job IF you have the tools and knowledge to change these components effectively.

3) COSTS. The cost of a piston, sleeve, conrod, wrist pin and retainer can vary widely from engine to engine and source to source. They are the most precise parts in the engine and in no case are they cheap. The price for a piston, sleeve, conrod and wrist pin set for the VMAX 46PRO and 52PRO is about $40 as of 20050228. This may have increased since then.

Question: So what to do when you have neither the knowledge, the tools, the time or money to burn? Is there another way short of dumping the engine?

Answer: Yes there is! If your carburetor and muffler are working well... ask us for a "short block". A short block is the entire engine ready to go except for carburetor, carburetor cinch bolt,  muffler, muffler screws, prop nut and washer.  Just remove your prop nut, washer, carb, muffler and retaining bolts for both, re-install them on the short block and you are ready to go with just about an entirely brand new engine! As of 20050228, the price for a short block for the VMAX 46PRO and 52PRO was just $5-10 more than  the cost of the piston, sleeve, conrod, wrist pin and retainer set. So for a few bucks more you can do less work, have a much better chance of a satisfactory outcome and get the job done quickly so you can get back to flying!

Conclusion: On a VMAX engine we recommend going with a short block replacement rather than changing the piston and sleeve. It will cost just a few dollars more than the parts but has an almost 100% chance of producing a satisfactory outcome with much much less work.

14.4. After Run Oil - Why use it? - What good does it do?

Question: What is After Run Oil and Why Use It?

Answer: After Run Oil helps to prevent rust from forming in your engine. Rust is a major cause of engine and bearing failure.

Better Answer: Section 7 of the Owners Manual for VMAX Engines outlines the correct procedure for Care and Maintenance of Your Engine and the use of After Run oil. If you have misplaced the Owners Manual it can be downloaded from our support section at www.richmondrc.com/vma/supportdir.htm

Please review the following information about Rust:

 

Rust - Why is it Bad? How to Prevent it?

Question: Why is Rust a problem in Glow Engines: How can it be prevented?

Answer: Rust reduces the power and life of your engine. To inhibit the formation of rust remove all methanol from your engine and use After Run Oil after each day of flying.

Better Answer: Glow fuel consists primarily of methanol, lubricant and nitromethane. Methanol attracts water vapour. This water vapour condenses into water  inside your engine which in turn will cause rust to form on the steel parts of your engine such as the crankshaft and bearings.

Rust does two things, it erodes and pits the smooth surfaces of the crankshaft and bearings and it flakes off as a gritty abrasive when the engine is operated next. The erosion of the surfaces reduces RPM and increases heat and load on the surfaces. The loose rust that flakes off as a gritty abrasive induces wear on all the moving parts including the piston and sleeve. The end result is that RUST reduces performance (RPM and power) and reduces the life of the engine and leads to premature component failure. Bearings are particularly susceptible to failure caused by Rust. Crankshaft front bearing leakage and in particular crankshaft to conrod pin failure are also common problems caused by rust.

There are two simple things you can do to inhibit the formation of rust in your engine:

1) Avoid leaving methanol in your engine.

When you stop using your VMAX engine for the day, run the engine dry by pinching the fuel line feeding the carburetor and let the engine run out of fuel. This will burn up most of the methanol in your engine.

2) Use After Run Oil in your engine after each day of use.

Remove the glow plug and carefully put 6-10 drops of Afterrun Oil (Pacer After Run recommended) into the combustion chamber and another 6-10 drops into the carburetor inlet. Turn the engine over by hand 10 times. Reinstall the glow plug, close the carb and insert a small plug of wadded paper towel into the carburetor intake.

If you are not planning on using your engine for a while please see following information about storage of your engine:

 

14.5. Engine Carburetor - Spray Bar - Alignment - Do the holes have to line up with something?

Question: The spray bar in my carburetor appears to rotate when I rotate the throttle barrel or needle valve. Does this matter? I also notice that the spray bar has a groove with some holes in the groove. The groove itself appears to line up with the bottom of the fuel inlet nipple. Do the holes in the groove have to line up with the bottom of the fuel inlet nipple or anything else?

Answer: Rotation of the Spray bar is fine. The holes in the groove do not need to line up with anything. Fuel flows from your tank into the fuel inlet nipple, down the nipple into the carb where it flows into the groove and from there the fuel flows through the holes in the groove and into the spray bar inlet. The groove and two holes in the groove ensures that fuel can flow into the spray bar inlet regardless of orientation of the holes relative to the fuel nipple and allows the throttle barrel to rotate and thereby expanding or restricting the volume of air into the engine.

The needle valve controls the amount of fuel that flows from the exit end of the spray bar into the carburetor throat. It is the mixing ratio of fuel to air that determines how lean or rich the engine runs. When the needle valve is turned in (clockwise) the needle restricts the fuel flowing out of the end of the spray bar and the engine runs lean (less fuel relative to the volume of air). When the needle valve is turned out more (counterclockwise) the fuel flows more plentifully and the engine runs richer (more fuel relative to the volume of air).

14.6. Engine Carburetor - Rotor Difficult to Rotate or Feels Rough when Rotating

Question: The carburetor rotor (barrel with a large hole in it, visible by looking down into the throat of the carburetor) is difficult to rotate and feels rough when I do get it to move. What is causing this and is there anything that I can do about this?

Answer: In the vast majority of cases this is caused by a bit of dirt or debris having worked it's way into the carburetor and lodging between the rotor and the carburetor body OR the idle stop screw and a piece of grit acting to bind the rotor. The solution is in flushing away the grit so nothing can act to bind the rotor from rotating OR the idle stop screw not seating properly in the rotor slot.

Procedure:

1) Please consult your owners manual Pages 6 and 7. You must be able to consult the owners manual to carry out this procedure. If you have misplaced your owners manual, you may download a copy of the manual from www.richmondrc.com/support.htm > VMAX Information.

2) Review the engine 3-View illustration on Page 6. Remove the carburetor from your engine by loosening the nut on the end of 2090 and gently rotating the carburetor to and from while pulling  the carburetor gently upwards and out of the engine.

3) Review the exploded carburetor 3-View illustration at the bottom of Page 6. Carefully remove 3080 (Idle stop screw) and then remove the entire assembly consisting of 3060, 3050, 3040. Then remove 3030 (spring). Flush the carburetor with clean fuel several times ensuring that you flush down through the hole vacated by 3080 and flush the area vacated by 3040. Lubricate the hole for 3080 and lubricate the area vacated by 3040 with After Run Oil.

4) Reassemble the carburetor carefully. First install 3030 (spring) noting that the wider end of the spring goes into the carburetor first. Then install the entire assembly consisting of 3060, 3050, 3040. Rotate this assembly so that the slot in 3040 aligns with the hole for 3080. Install 3080 (Idle stop screw) and tighten it so that it is snug on the washer. Do NOT overtighten 3080... this is not a farm tractor... it's a precision fitted model airplane engine. Snug is good enough... leave your pipe wrench in the garage! If you find that the head and washer of 3080 will not seat against the carburetor body, back off 3080 and realign 3040 slightly and try again. 3080 must engage in the slot of 3040.

5) You should now be able to rotate the carburetor rotor freely. If you find that the carburetor will not rotate or remains tight and rough, you will need a new carburetor assembly #463000.

 

 

 

14.7. Engine Carburetor - Low Speed Mixture - How to Set for reliable idle and transition to higher RPM?

Question: How do I set the low speed mixture of my carburetor?

Answer: Generally you should not adjust the factory settings until the engine has been run for 4-6 tanks of fuel at least AND you should only adjust the factory settings if the engine does not idle well or does not transition to higher RPR well.

All engines idle poorly and transition poorly on the first tank of fuel, a bit better on the 2nd, 3rd and 4th tanks and progress to normal operational reliability by about the 6th tank of fuel.

If you find that after this breakin period, your engine dies at idle or dies when trying to increase the RPM from idle, you may need to adjust the idle mixture. Before attempting to adjust the idle mixture, make sure that the problem is not with your glow plug, fuel tank or tubing etc. Then gently turn the idle screw all the way in (clockwise) while counting how many turns or fractions of turns the factory setting is from fully closed. This turn count will enable you to go back to the factory setting at any time. Do so now... turn the idle screw back out (counter clockwise) to the factory setting.

The low speed mixture screw works the same way as the main needle valve... turning it IN (clockwise rotation) makes the engine run leaner (less fuel,  lower ratio of fuel to air) and turning it OUT (counter clockwise rotation) makes the engine run richer (more fuel, higher ratio of fuel to air).

To make adjustments to the low speed mixture, we recommend the following procedure. Review the instruction manual first. All of it! Then read it again for good measure.

Now put your engine on an engine test stand and set the center line of the test stand fuel tank about 1/4" below the needle valve. Check your tubing for leaks and secure attachment. Fill the tank with good quality fuel as described in the instruction manual. 10% nitro maximum. 18% oil minimum with Oil being a mix of synthetic and castor.

Start the engine, reduce the speed to idle. Let it idle (even if rough running) for about 30 seconds. Then suddenly open the throttle fully for maxium RPM and listen carefully to your engine. If your engine gurgles and sputters as you open the throttle with lots of grayish smoke and oil coming out of the muffler, then your idle mixture is too rich. Lean out the setting by turning the mixture adjustment screen IN (clockwish) by 1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. Then try again and see if the engine transitions to high RPM any better. If it is better you are going in the right direction. If it is worse (even more oil and smoke). If at some point your engine goes from idle directly to a high RPM and then dies without notice thereafter, your low speed mixture is too lean... back the idle mixture screw out (counter clockwise) about 1/8 of a turn and try again. The ideal settting is one where the engine does not sputter and gurgle when trying to rev up but also does not stall after reving up!

Once you have this working well on an engine test stand, move the engine to your model and check out the low speed mixture again. You may need a further slight adjustment depending on the height of the models fuel tank relative to the needle valve.

14.8. Engine Carburetor - Will not shut off. How to resolve.

Question: My engine will not shut off. What do I do?

Answer: Generally you should not adjust the factory settings until the engine has been run for 4-6 tanks of fuel at least AND you should only adjust the factory settings if the engine does not idle well or does not transition to higher RPM well.

All engines idle poorly and transition poorly on the first tank of fuel, a bit better on the 2nd, 3rd and 4th tanks and progress to normal operational reliability by about the 6th tank of fuel.

If you find that after this breakin period, your engine will not shut off  review the documentation first. All of it! Then read it again for good measure.

Now put your engine on an engine test stand and set the center line of the test stand fuel tank about 1/4" below the needle valve. Check your tubing for leaks and secure attachment. Fill the tank with good quality fuel as described in the instruction manual. 10% nitro maximum. 18% oil minimum with Oil being a mix of synthetic and castor.

Do not start your engine yet.

Look into the carburetor throat and ensure that the carb barrel can rotate fully so that there is no opening remaining. If you find a small opening remaining, adjust the idle stop screw (not the mixture... the stop screw) so that you can rotate the throttle to fully closed.

Loosen the carburetor cinch bar by backing off the retaining nut a turn or so. Gently wiggle the carburetor and pull it out of the engine. Inspect the O-ring around the flange of the carburetor to ensure that the O-ring is not damaged or nicked. Carefully reinsert the carburetor back into the engine and tighten the cinch bar nut securely while pressing the carburetor firmly into the engine. It is important to have a tight seal between the carburetor and the engine... the O-ring provides this seal provided it is firmly seated and is not damaged.

Now start your engine. Provided that the engine has at least 6 tanks of fuel through it and it is mounted on a test stand with the fuel tank set up properly, you should be able to close down the throttle barrel and the engine should stop in 5-10 seconds or sooner. If your engine continues to run for longer than that, the engine is drawing air from somewhere such as:  

  1. From the fuel feed (air in the lines caused by a leak or foaming fuel due to vibration), or
  2. Through a poor seal around the carburetor flange, or
  3. Around a poor fitting carburetor barrel due to wear, or
  4. Through the front bearing due to an alignment problem usually caused by the crankshaft being bent after a crash or drop.

To resolve which is which:

  1. Check the fuel system again. Change the tank and the tubing. Cushion the tank on foam sheeting and ensure the fuel is not foaming.
  2. Check the O-ring seal again.
  3. Very very carefully, plug the inlet to the carburetor throat while the engine is idling.  If the engine stops the carb barrel is leaking. You will need a new carb barrel and body or more likely it would be best to install a new carburetor.  
  4. Remove the prop and thrust washer. Cut a very thin sheet of gasket paper or laminated playing card material and insert it as a gasket around the crankshaft between the crankcase and the thrust washer. Reapply the thrust washer, prop, prop washer and prop nut. Tighten securely. The idea here is to create a temporary gasket across the face of the front bearing to restrict any suction induced air flow. Start the engine, idle down. If the engine will stop with the gasket in place, air is being sucked into the engine from the front of the engine when the gasket is not present. This will require a new crankshaft or possibly a new crankcase or both. It may be more cost effective to purchase a new short block. Professional service is recommended. 
14.9. Engine Cleaning - How to Do It? After a crash etc.

Question: I have had a crash into dirt, sand, grass or other loose material and some of this debris is all over my engine and may have worked its way inside the engine. How to do I clean the debris off and out of my engine?

Answer: Wear eye protection and rubber gloves. Work outdoors. Invert the engine. Carefully rotate the throttle so that the carburetor barrel is closed. Plug the carb inlet with a wad of paper towel soaked in Oil. Clean away all of the debris from outside the engine using a tooth brush and Fantastic diluted 50/50 with water. Remove the muffler, the glow plug, the back plate, the prop nut, the prop washer, the thrust washer, and the carburetor. Flush the crankcase with Pacer Degreaser while holding the engine slightly nose high. Flush the cylinder via the Glow Plug hole while holding the engine with the exhaust outlet facing downwards. Flush the Front Bearing while holding the engine nose down. Flush the carburetor with Pacer Degreaser. Let the engine dry. Lubricate the crankcase and rear bearing with Pacer After Run Oil. Lubricate the crankshaft with Pacer After Run oil via the carburetor inlet in the crankcase. Lubricate the carb barrel with Pacer After Run Oil.

Turn the engine over several times by hand. Flush all parts again with Pacer Degreaser. Let dry and reapply After Run oil liberally to all internal components. Re-install the crankcase back plate and the carburetor. Reinstall the thrust washer, prop washer, prop nut and glow plug.

14.10. Engine Dimensions (Sizes) - with 3 Views

Question: Do you have 3 views that show dimensions of VMAX Engines?

Answer: Yes we do. They are included in the Owners (Instruction) Manuals. Check out the last few pages.

If you do not yet have your VMAX Engine or have misplaced the manuals, links to various manuals have been included here.

 

46PRO & 52PRO - Documentation

Please see the attached PDF documents related to this engine. File names indicate the nature of the document.

VMAX 61PRO - Documentation
Please see the attached PDF documents related to this engine. File names indicate the nature of the document.
14.11. Engine Head Bolts - How Tight and How to Tighten?

Question: How should I tighten the head bolts on my engine? How tight is tight enough? Can I over do it?

Answer: The head bolts should be snugly tightened by hand using the small allen wrench supplied. Work in stages back and forth across the head. Do not unevenly or overtighten the bolts or you will warp the crankcase, or the head or strip or break the bolts.

Better Answer: There is a strong bias amongst modelers to overtighten head bolts and engine bolts in general. As the Operators Manual points out your engine is a precisely made piece of machinery... you are not working on a tractor here... leave your hammer, vice grips and power tools in the drawer. All you need is the allen key provided and a delicate, firm touch.

Install the head gaskets and head on to the engine. Insert the head bolts loosely into their mounting holes and screw then down so that they are loosely retaining the head. Now work in a criss cross pattern and in phases. Do not tighten any one bolt all the way down. Tighten one bolt so that it in contact with the head, now tighten the bolt across from the first on the other side of the head. Now come back and move over to the next loose bolt... go back and forth and around the head like this until all head bolts are just tight enough to touch the top of the head. Now begin again, tighten say 1/2 a turn and then jump across the head and do the say thing... criss cross and move around the head until all bolts are at the same tightness. Now go in 1/4 turn increments back and forth and around the head until you the bolts feel snug but not squeekly tight when using the allen key attached. That's it you are done! Do not overtighten the bolts!

 

14.12. Engine - Inverted Operations - Improving Reliability at low-mid RPM

Question: My engine is mounted inverted and I find that it bogs down and sometimes stops below mid throttle. Can anything be done about this?

Answer: Inverted engines need a few additional considerations as follows:  
 
1) Be very careful when fueling an engine when inverted. There is a tendency for fuel to siphon from the tank into the muffler via the pressure feed line and subsequently drain from the muffler back into the cylinder via the exhaust port. If this occurs and you then hit the engine with an electric starter you end up with a hydraulic lock which will bend the rod, snap the piston pin and/or dish the top of the piston. All of these are fatal and pretty much total the reciprocating components. A very effective but really dumb way to muck up an engine.
 
Always turn an engine over by hand before connecting the glow plug ignitor and electric starter. If you can't rotate the engine by hand, do NOT try to rotate it with the electric starter.
 
2) Try to avoid a 180 degree inverted orientation. If possible go with 150 or 210 degrees. The idea here is to avoid putting the glow plug at the absoluted "bottom" of the cylinder. At low RPM, oil residue and excess fuel tends to collect as in a sump and snuff the plug.
 
3) Set the low end mixture a bit leaner than you would with an upright engine. If your carburetor has a mid range mixture control (most do not), lean that a bit also.
 
4) Avoid prolonged periods of idleing or operation at low RPM.
 
5) Switch to a hotter plug. 
 
6) Use the maximum nitro content specified for your engine. This is usually stated in the operations manual that comes with your engine. Many modern engines specifiy 10% or less so don't go to 15-25% if the max is stated to be 10%.
 
7) Use an onboard glow driver that automatically increases the energy flowing to the plug when the plug cools (changes resistance) as it gets swamped with more liquid fuel and oil. In some cases this is the only way to keep an inverted engine running reliably below mid throttle.
 
8) Carefully balance your prop and spinner. This is not directly related to inverted engine operations but if you find that your inverted engine runs fine on the ground or bench but fails in flight, the mixture settings you are so carefully setting up on the ground are changing in the air due to vibration inducing more air into the mix. Balanced props and spinners vibrate less and your mixture setting will be more stable.
 
9) Carefully check the airflow around your spinner, across the cowl and over the inlet into the carburetor. In some cases when an engine is inverted it is nicely "hidden" and at some air speeds you end up with a laminar airflow that in effect chokes off input of air to the carb. This can usually be fixed by putting a small deflector around the carb neck either ahead of or behind the carb intake. The idea here is to "roughen" up the air flow around the carb to make sure there is no tendency to have a vacuum develop.
 
 
 
 
14.13. Engine runs OK on the Ground but bogs down or stops in flight.

Question: What is wrong when an engine runs well on the ground or when I hold it firmly before flight but the engine bogs down or stops shortly after becoming airborne?

Answer: The best way to sort this out is to use a test stand. Set up the test stand fuel tank and fuel lines properly. Get the engine running and satisfy yourself that the engine runs well on the test stand.

Now put the engine back in the model. Start the engine and set the mixture with the model on the ground. With the engine at high RPM, pick the model up and holding it nose high, gently hold it between your finger tips. Emphasis on gently! Don't drop it but try to barely hold it. Be careful. The idea is let the model be lightly held nose high but be safe while you are at it. Wait about 30 seconds with the nose high and the model held loosely.

If the engine bogs down after a period of time when it is held lightly in a nose high attitude, the mixture is too lean. Try a richer mix (generally by rotating 1/8 of a turn out on the needle valve) and do the test again. Normally you will get to a point when the mixture is about right but if you find that you cannot get a reliable setting check the following:

- the glow plug (change to be sure)

- the fuel (10% max for VMAX engines) with at least 18% blended oil (castor & synthetic). Do NOT use more than 10%. Your engine has been designed to work best with up to10% nitro.

- the plumbing (tubes tight etc)

- muffler pressure (gasket in, bolts snug, tubing securely attached)

- the prop (back off a bit on pitch and/or diameter)

If you still encounter problems when held lightly in a nose high attitude, pay attention to your finger tips where they contact the model... is the airframe vibrating? Do you feel a bit of a tingle in the tips of your fingers?

Vibration is the hidden boogy man in some of these cases. Here is what happens... on the ground or when tightly held the model does not vibrate as much. When loosely held in a nose high attitude or in flight... high frequency vibration is able to make the fuel foam or ingest air bubbles. This leans the mixture and bogs the engine down (overheats). To reduce vibration you MUST MUST MUST balance the prop AND the spinner. Then make sure the fuel tank is mounted with the rubber gasket in place and the tank cradled by foam or the dowels on the power module. If you are using a non-wood prop and after balancing the problem persists, change to a balanced WOOD prop and try again. Remember non wood props flex and change pitch a bit with RPM and this induces some vibration. Wood props hold their pitch better and vibrate less once properly balanced.

In conclusion: If the engine runs on a test stand it is something about the model or engine prop/spinner that is the cause of your problems. If the engine runs in the model when level on the ground, you are likely going lean in the air. Examine for the causes of the engine going lean in the air... what is reducing fuel flow or increasing air flow into the carburetor? Remember that vibration is much more of a problem than many people realize... balance the prop AND the spinner. Try a balanced wood prop.  

14.14. Engine Power - What is Appropriate? How Much is Too Much?

Question: How much engine power is appropriate? Many models give a range of engine sizes... should I use an engine that is at the bottom of the range or go for broke and use the biggest engine recommended?

Answer: If in doubt go with something that is more or less in the middle of the range unless the distributor or your dealer have some specific recommendations.

DO NOT use an engine larger than the maximum size recommended by the model manufacturer. You run the risk of overstressing the airframe which can lead to sudden breakup of the model in the air and may injure someone.

Better Answer: Generally manufacturers specify a range of engine sizes for a model. An engine in the middle usually works well but you might want to consider going with the higher end of the range if you are going to be flying at altitudes above 2000 feet or in very hot weather or flying off of floats. Naturally if you are doing all of these, flying at high altitudes from a lake on a hot day... the bigger engine is the better choice. You might also want to ask around in your area to see what other RC flyers are doing. Be a bit cautious of the "power at all costs" type of recommendations but listen carefully when you get advice from those who have thought it through and tried it out.

 

14.15. Engine Prop Size - What is Appropriate?

Question: What size propeller should I use on my VMAX Engine?

Answer: Please see the documentation that came with your VMAX Engine. There is a propeller chart that will help you with choosing an appropriate propeller. This chart  is usually located towards the back of the manual, often it is on or near Page 8.

Please note that although prop size is related to the engine size, there are many other factors to consider. Altitude, temperature and aircraft type all are important factors that affect the prop selection. Air at higher altitudes and/or warmer temperatures is thinner and produces less thrust than lower altitude and/or colder air. Fuel type, nitro content and glow plug type can also play a role. A good idea is to talk to some of the flyers at your club. They will be familiar with the altitude and climate in your area and have a good idea of what props work best on what size engines.

We have included below, a manual from VMAX that has a propeller chart for use as a reference. This is a good guideline and works as a starting point for VMAX and most 2 stroke engines.  

VMAX 61PRO - Documentation
Please see the attached PDF documents related to this engine. File names indicate the nature of the document.
14.16. Engine (ABC type) - How to Remove the Cylinder (Sleeve)

Question: I need to change the cylinder on my VMAX ABC type engine. How do I remove the Cylinder without damaging anything?

Answer: Install a propeller and tighten it securely. Remove the glow plug and brass glow plug washer. Remove the head. Rotate the propeller until the piston is at the bottom of the large exhaust port. Position the brass glow plug washer on top of the piston so that about 10-15% of  the brass glow washer protrudes into the exhaust port but not beyond the outside diameter of the cylinder. Hold the engine level and rotate the prop so as to raise the piston. The brass glow plug washer will catch on the side of the exhaust port and you can then use the leverage of the propeller to literally lift the cylinder out of the crankcase.

Note that in nearly 100% of cases, when replacing the cylinder in an ABC engine, the piston should be replaced also. They are generally sold as a set.

Better Answer: The trick to this is NOT to use vice grips, pliers or other tools on the cylinder itself. Follow the procedure outlined in the Answer above. The brass washer is softer than the plated cylinder and the piston so that it will not mark either when used as a lifting wedge. The propeller provides plenty of convenient leverage to literally lift the cylinder right out of the crankcase.

If the cylinder will not move using this technique try the following: Install the engine in a test stand or clamp GENTLY in a vice (emphasis on GENTLY!). Keep uplifting pressure on the brass washer and cylinder via the propellor. Heat the crankcase top section around the cylinder with a heat gun. This will expand the crankcase somewhat allowing the cylinder to move more easily. Increase the pressure on the prop and the cylinder will move upwards and out of the crankcase.

If the cylinder will still not move after heating the crankcase try the following next: Leave the engine clamped down. Get a can of Pacer Degreaser. Use eye protection and rubber gloves. Move outside. We are not going to use the Degreaser as degreaser per se. It has another quality that we need. It has a very high evaporation rate and cools whatever it is sprayed on. So we are going to use it to cool the cylinder liner after heating the crankcase. The heat will expand the crankcase and the degreaser cooling will contract the cylinder allowing the cylinder to be removed from the crankcase. It is important to DO THIS OUTSIDE. Do NOT USE your heat gun and your degreaser at the same time. Keep uplifing pressure on the brass washer and cylinder via the propellor. Heat the crankcase top section around the cylinder with a heat gun. Don't go overboard. Just get it nice and warm. TURN OFF THE HEAT GUN and set it aside at a safe distance. Now take the degreaser and spray a good blast into the cylinder on top of the piston. This will cool the cylinder quickly. Now increase the pressure on the prop and the cooler contracted cylinder will move upwards and out of the heated expanded crankcase.

14.17. Engine (ABC type) - How to Remove the Crankshaft

Question: I need to change the Crankshaft in my VMAX ABC type engine. How do I remove the Crankshaft without damaging anything?

Answer: First of all you need to remove the cylinder (sleeve) and then the piston. Please see the How to Remove the Cylinder (Sleeve) and the How to Remove the Piston procedures below.

Once the cylinder and piston have both been removed. With the crankcase backing plate off remove the thrust washer, propeller, prop washer and prop nut. Carefully thread the prop nut back on to the crankshaft so that one thread remains unengaged. The end of the crankshaft should be just inside the prop nut.

Turn the engine so that it is pointing with the prop nut up. Rest the back of the bottom of the crankcase on a solid surface. Using a hammer tap sharply on the prop nut driving the crankshaft down and into the engine. Remove the prop nut and withdraw the crankshaft back and out of the back of the crankcase.

Engine (ABC type) - How to Remove the Cylinder (Sleeve)

Question: I need to change the cylinder on my VMAX ABC type engine. How do I remove the Cylinder without damaging anything?

Answer: Install a propeller and tighten it securely. Remove the glow plug and brass glow plug washer. Remove the head. Rotate the propeller until the piston is at the bottom of the large exhaust port. Position the brass glow plug washer on top of the piston so that about 10-15% of  the brass glow washer protrudes into the exhaust port but not beyond the outside diameter of the cylinder. Hold the engine level and rotate the prop so as to raise the piston. The brass glow plug washer will catch on the side of the exhaust port and you can then use the leverage of the propeller to literally lift the cylinder out of the crankcase.

Note that in nearly 100% of cases, when replacing the cylinder in an ABC engine, the piston should be replaced also. They are generally sold as a set.

Better Answer: The trick to this is NOT to use vice grips, pliers or other tools on the cylinder itself. Follow the procedure outlined in the Answer above. The brass washer is softer than the plated cylinder and the piston so that it will not mark either when used as a lifting wedge. The propeller provides plenty of convenient leverage to literally lift the cylinder right out of the crankcase.

If the cylinder will not move using this technique try the following: Install the engine in a test stand or clamp GENTLY in a vice (emphasis on GENTLY!). Keep uplifting pressure on the brass washer and cylinder via the propellor. Heat the crankcase top section around the cylinder with a heat gun. This will expand the crankcase somewhat allowing the cylinder to move more easily. Increase the pressure on the prop and the cylinder will move upwards and out of the crankcase.

If the cylinder will still not move after heating the crankcase try the following next: Leave the engine clamped down. Get a can of Pacer Degreaser. Use eye protection and rubber gloves. Move outside. We are not going to use the Degreaser as degreaser per se. It has another quality that we need. It has a very high evaporation rate and cools whatever it is sprayed on. So we are going to use it to cool the cylinder liner after heating the crankcase. The heat will expand the crankcase and the degreaser cooling will contract the cylinder allowing the cylinder to be removed from the crankcase. It is important to DO THIS OUTSIDE. Do NOT USE your heat gun and your degreaser at the same time. Keep uplifing pressure on the brass washer and cylinder via the propellor. Heat the crankcase top section around the cylinder with a heat gun. Don't go overboard. Just get it nice and warm. TURN OFF THE HEAT GUN and set it aside at a safe distance. Now take the degreaser and spray a good blast into the cylinder on top of the piston. This will cool the cylinder quickly. Now increase the pressure on the prop and the cooler contracted cylinder will move upwards and out of the heated expanded crankcase.

Engine (ABC type) - How to Remove the Piston

Question: I need to change the Piston in my VMAX ABC type engine. How do I remove the Piston without damaging anything?

Answer: First of all you need to remove the cylinder (sleeve). Please see the How to Remove the Cylinder (Sleeve) procedure below.

Note that in nearly 100% of cases, when replacing the piston in an ABC engine, the cylinder should be replaced also. They are generally sold as a set.

Once the cylinder has been removed you can remove the piston complete with connecting rod and wrist pin. There is a trick to this. Please put away your hammer, vice grips, pliers and cutting torch and obtain a carriage bolt that is about 3/16" in diameter and about 3" long. Carriage bolts have a rounded dome like head and are available in pretty much any hardware store.

Securely tighten the prop nut and prop which will serve to pull the crankshaft as far forward in the crankcase as possible. Remove the crankcase backing plate. Lubricate the bottom of the connecting rod where it attaches to the crankshaft pin. Use Pacer After Run Oil or other lubricant. Remembering that there is no cylinder in the crankcase, carefully and slowly rotate the engine 2-3 times by hand and stop with the piston at top dead center (highest point) in the crankcase.

Carefully insert the head end of your carriage bolt into the bottom of the crankcase so that the domed head is centered on the back of the crankshaft and the edge of the domed head is under the bottom edge of the connecting rod. Now use the carriage bolt like a pry bar, to pull the connecting rod back and off the crankshaft pin. There may be some resistance just as it is about to come off. Apply a bit more lubricant and using a bit more pressure on the carriage bolt, rotate the prop about 10-15 degrees and the connecting rod will come off the crankshaft pin.

Flush out any small filings of brass or aluminum using Pacer Degreaser. These small pieces won't be missed by the connecting rod but you don't want them getting into the engine or bearings later on.

 

14.18. Engine (ABC type) - How to Remove the Piston

Question: I need to change the Piston in my VMAX ABC type engine. How do I remove the Piston without damaging anything?

Answer: First of all you need to remove the cylinder (sleeve). Please see the How to Remove the Cylinder (Sleeve) procedure below.

Note that in nearly 100% of cases, when replacing the piston in an ABC engine, the cylinder should be replaced also. They are generally sold as a set.

Once the cylinder has been removed you can remove the piston complete with connecting rod and wrist pin. There is a trick to this. Please put away your hammer, vice grips, pliers and cutting torch and obtain a carriage bolt that is about 3/16" in diameter and about 3" long. Carriage bolts have a rounded dome like head and are available in pretty much any hardware store.

Securely tighten the prop nut and prop which will serve to pull the crankshaft as far forward in the crankcase as possible. Remove the crankcase backing plate. Lubricate the bottom of the connecting rod where it attaches to the crankshaft pin. Use Pacer After Run Oil or other lubricant. Remembering that there is no cylinder in the crankcase, carefully and slowly rotate the engine 2-3 times by hand and stop with the piston at top dead center (highest point) in the crankcase.

Carefully insert the head end of your carriage bolt into the bottom of the crankcase so that the domed head is centered on the back of the crankshaft and the edge of the domed head is under the bottom edge of the connecting rod. Now use the carriage bolt like a pry bar, to pull the connecting rod back and off the crankshaft pin. There may be some resistance just as it is about to come off. Apply a bit more lubricant and using a bit more pressure on the carriage bolt, rotate the prop about 10-15 degrees and the connecting rod will come off the crankshaft pin.

Flush out any small filings of brass or aluminum using Pacer Degreaser. These small pieces won't be missed by the connecting rod but you don't want them getting into the engine or bearings later on.

 

Engine (ABC type) - How to Remove the Cylinder (Sleeve)

Question: I need to change the cylinder on my VMAX ABC type engine. How do I remove the Cylinder without damaging anything?

Answer: Install a propeller and tighten it securely. Remove the glow plug and brass glow plug washer. Remove the head. Rotate the propeller until the piston is at the bottom of the large exhaust port. Position the brass glow plug washer on top of the piston so that about 10-15% of  the brass glow washer protrudes into the exhaust port but not beyond the outside diameter of the cylinder. Hold the engine level and rotate the prop so as to raise the piston. The brass glow plug washer will catch on the side of the exhaust port and you can then use the leverage of the propeller to literally lift the cylinder out of the crankcase.

Note that in nearly 100% of cases, when replacing the cylinder in an ABC engine, the piston should be replaced also. They are generally sold as a set.

Better Answer: The trick to this is NOT to use vice grips, pliers or other tools on the cylinder itself. Follow the procedure outlined in the Answer above. The brass washer is softer than the plated cylinder and the piston so that it will not mark either when used as a lifting wedge. The propeller provides plenty of convenient leverage to literally lift the cylinder right out of the crankcase.

If the cylinder will not move using this technique try the following: Install the engine in a test stand or clamp GENTLY in a vice (emphasis on GENTLY!). Keep uplifting pressure on the brass washer and cylinder via the propellor. Heat the crankcase top section around the cylinder with a heat gun. This will expand the crankcase somewhat allowing the cylinder to move more easily. Increase the pressure on the prop and the cylinder will move upwards and out of the crankcase.

If the cylinder will still not move after heating the crankcase try the following next: Leave the engine clamped down. Get a can of Pacer Degreaser. Use eye protection and rubber gloves. Move outside. We are not going to use the Degreaser as degreaser per se. It has another quality that we need. It has a very high evaporation rate and cools whatever it is sprayed on. So we are going to use it to cool the cylinder liner after heating the crankcase. The heat will expand the crankcase and the degreaser cooling will contract the cylinder allowing the cylinder to be removed from the crankcase. It is important to DO THIS OUTSIDE. Do NOT USE your heat gun and your degreaser at the same time. Keep uplifing pressure on the brass washer and cylinder via the propellor. Heat the crankcase top section around the cylinder with a heat gun. Don't go overboard. Just get it nice and warm. TURN OFF THE HEAT GUN and set it aside at a safe distance. Now take the degreaser and spray a good blast into the cylinder on top of the piston. This will cool the cylinder quickly. Now increase the pressure on the prop and the cooler contracted cylinder will move upwards and out of the heated expanded crankcase.

14.19. Engine (ABC type) is Tight at Top Dead Center - Is something wrong? What should I do?

Question: My VMAX 46 or 52 or other VMAX ABC type engine is very tight at top dead center particularly just out of the box. It is so tight that I hear a clicking noise at the top of the piston travel and it is very difficult to turn it over by hand. Is something wrong? What should I do?

Answer: No nothing is wrong. Please review your instruction manual and in particular the BREAK IN section.

Better Answer: ABC engines have a tapered sleeve which creates a tight fit around the piston at top dead center. The tightness is quite pronounced when the engine is new and cold. As the engine warms up, the sleeve expands and the fit is not quite so tight. The top of the sleeve gets much warmer than the bottom and hence it has been made narrower to allow for more expansion while retaining compression.

Your instruction manual contains specific information related to your engine. The BREAK IN section is very important. The VMAX 46 and 52 engine manual has a note that is boxed to draw attention to it. This note is located on page 3 of the manual in the top left corner and deals specifically with the question of tight fit at top dead center. The note reads as follows:

THIS IS AN ABC ENGINE. IT WILL BE VERY TIGHT AT TOP DEAD CENTER. THIS IS NORMAL. AFTER THE FIRST FEW RUNS IT WILL LOOSEN UP SOMEWHAT BUT REMAIN TIGHTER AT THE TOP WHEN COLD THROUGH ITS LIFE.

We cannot overstate the importance of reading the entire manual before attempting to operate your engine.

 

 

14.20. Engine Storage - Preparation - Strongly Recommended

Question: I am not planning on using my engine for a period of time. What should I do before stroring it?

Answer: Remove all methanol from the Engine. Apply a generous amount of After Run oil. Turn the engine over by hand to ensure the After Run Oil works its way to all components. Seal the engine in a plastic bag.

Better Answer: Remove the glow plug and carefully put 6-10 drops of Afterrun Oil (Pacer After Run recommended) into the combustion chamber and another 6-10 drops into the carburetor inlet. Turn the engine over by hand 10 times. Do this a second time...  apply another 6-10 drops of After Run Oil into the carb inlet and combustion chamber... turn the engine over by hand 10 more times. Finally put the engine into a plastic bag, squeeze the air out of the bag and seal it.

 

14.21. Engine Types and Power Considerations - 2 Stroke, 4 Stroke & Glow vs Gas vs Electric

Question: What gives with Model Airplanes Engines? What's a 2 stroke? What's a 4 Stroke? What do you mean by Glow as compared to Gas? Now there are electric motors being adapted to replace engines... how the heck do I choose what is right for my model?

Answer: Well, answers to this can take a bit of explaining. Here is an overview.

2 Stroke (sometimes called 2 cycle)

  • Is what the majority of current modelers mean when they say "Model Airplane" or "Glow" Engine
  • Noisy screaming type of sound that must be carefully muffled and never sounds like the real thing.
  • Uses Model Airplane Fuel (alcohol, oil, nitromethane and additives)
  • Uses a Glow Plug hence the term "Glow" Engine.
  • Generally the cheapest, lightest, most powerful engine for the money.
  • Referred to by displacment in hundreds of cubic inches (or in cubic centimeters = cc)
  • Imperial measure is cubic inches and a slang has developed
    • .40 cubic inches is referred to as "a 40"
    • .90 cubic inches is referred to as "a 90"
    • 1.20 cubic inches is referred to as "a 120"
  • Generally range in size from .049 to 1.80 although some smaller and bigger engines exist.

4 Stroke (sometimes called 4 cycle)

  • Has become more popular since the 90's with those wanting quieter more realistic engine sound for use in semi-scale or scale models.
  • Quieter more familiar engine sound when in the air. Much more realistic for scale flying models. Sounds much more like the real thing.
  • Uses Model Airplane Fuel (alcohol, oil, nitromethane and additives) although special blends with more or less oil and more or less nitro may be required for some engines.
  • Uses a Glow Plug hence the term "Glow" Engine can be used for either 2 stroke or 4 stroke engines
  • Generally costs more, weighs more and gives less power for more money than a 2 stroke engine of similar size.
  • Referred to by displacment in hundreds of cubic inches (or in cubic centimeters = cc)
  • Imperial measure is cubic inches and a slang has developed
    • .52 cubic inches is referred to as "a 52"
    • .91 cubic inches is referred to as "a 91"
  • Generally range in size from .25 to 2.50 although some smaller and bigger engines exist.
  • To get the same power as a 2 stroke, add on about 30-50% in size. This is a very rough rule and does not consider weight and torque issues but it is a good guide.
    • A model calling for a 2 stroke .46 would require roughly a 4 stroke of size .60-.70
    • A model calling for a 2 stroke .61 would require roughly a 4 stroke of size .80-.90

Gas (sometimes called Ignition Engine)

  • Has become more popular for use with big models.
  • Quieter more familiar engine sound when in the air. Much more realistic for scale flying models. Sounds like the real thing  because it pretty well is the real thing!
  • Uses Gasoline. Special oil or additives may be added to the gas in some cases. Gas is 25-50% cheaper than Model Airplane Fuel.
  • Uses a Spark Plug hence the term "Ignition".
  • Often adapted by the manufacturer from some other purpose such as a weed eater, leave blower etc. Although the engines end up quite different with regards to fuel supply, ignition, prop adapter and flywheel etc, they usually started with an existing product and adapted from there.
  • Seldom used on smaller models and nearly always used on big models due to the higher weight of the engine and ignition system.
  • Generally costs more, weighs more and gives less power for more money that a 2 stroke engine of similar size. May cost and weigh more than a 4 cycle Glow engine.
  • Referred to by displacement in cubic centimeters (cc) (or in cubic inches but almost universally now in cc)
  • Metric measure is cubic centimeters (cc) and the cc is nearly always noted in referring to these engines
    • for example "30 cc"
  • Generally range in size from 20cc to about 65cc although some smaller and considerable numbers of bigger engines exist.

Electric Motors (both brush type and brushless type)

  • Have become more popular since 2000. Increasing in popularity
  • Just as a combustion  Engine needs and is succesful depending on the type of fuel it burns, an electric Motor needs batteries.
  • As battery technology put more and more power (run time) into batteries of a certain weight (we call this energy density) electric powered flight is starting to take off (literally)
  • Generally brushless motors are taking over. They can be very expensive when coupled to a suitable electronic speed control and a good set of NiMh or LiPo batteries.
  • Main advantage is quieter and no mess. No fuel to buy.
  • Main disadvantage is price and flight time per charge.
  • They will continue to improve and be more popular in time.
  • The rating system is not yet standardized so it is hard to compare apples with applies. Generally if a model calls for a .40 two stroke engine, modelers need to select an electric motor that can provide similar power in order to have similar flight characteristics. This can vary widely by motor type (brushless is better), battery type, speed control and wiring.

Please note that to this point this article makes no attempt to advise on if a particular model can be adapted to accomodate a different type of power system. For some considerations related to fitting 4 stroke engines into a model please search on "Four Stroke" for further assistance.

Using 4 Stroke Engines on VMAR Models

Question: Can I use a 4 Stroke engine on my VMAR ARF model?

Answer: In most cases, Yes.

Better Answer: There are some things to consider here. First of all if the model has a cowl it will usually have a power module consisting of a removeable forward firewall and a set of engine mounts. These engine mounts can be oriented in many different ways so you can select the orientation and separation of the mounts to suit your engine. It is also very easy to work on with this setup because the forward firewall is completely removeable from the model. So... VMAR models with a cowl and power module probably will be able to accomodate a 4 stroke engine. Conversely... models without a cowl and power module usually have a factory installed engine mount and a fixed firewall only and may be more problematic when trying to fit them out with a 4 stroke engine. It is safe to say that if the model does not have a cowl and power module there may be significant work and mucking around in order to install a 4 stroke engine.

4 stroke engines are not as standardized as most 2 stroke engines... some have the carburetors at the front, some at the back. Some have valve pushrods running up the front of the crankcase... some up the back. As a consequence, 4 stroke engines vary quite a bit in length (i.e. the distance from the prop shaft to the back of the engine) within a particular size. Although for example a 2 stroke .46 from one supplier will be very similar in external size to that of a 2 stroke .46 from another supplier... it is not necessarily the case when comparing 4 strokes. A .52 four stroke from one manufacturer can be quite different from a .52 four stroke from another manufacturer. There is no way we can be aware of all the different sizes and shapes of four stroke engines in the market and modelers should be checking with the engine manufacturer for sizes before assuming that the engine will fit into any particular model. Once you know the length of the four stroke engine that you are considering, place the cowl on your model. Then measure from where the back plate of the spinner will be to the front face of the removeable power module firewall. Subtract about 1.25" from this distance and then compare the result with the length of your four stroke engine. Engines that exceed this length will significantly protrude from the front of the cowl and should be trial fitted carefully before purchase.

In some cases, we are pre-cutting cowls to make installation of our recommended 2 stroke engine go as quickly and easily as possible. We do stock blank (not cut) cowls for those who wish to use a differnet 2 stroke engine size (for example a .61 instead of a .46) or a 4 stroke instead of a 2 stroke or want to go with an inverted installation or other orientation when we may have assumed a 90 orientation when pre-cutting the factory cowl.

Lastly, we have some models that do not use a cowl per-se and do not have a power module but may look like they do. For example the F4U Phantom and Skyhawk and Arrow Tiger have a shaped and fitted nose section but not a cowl and we have not recommended 4 stroke engines for these models at all. Again, if we do not use a cowl and power module on a model... we may be significant work and mucking around in order to install a 4 stroke engine.

Please note that to this point this article makes no attempt to explain the differences between the different types of engine systems. For some of the pro's and con's of 2 stroke and 4 stroke engines please the article included below:

14.22. Rust - How to Remove It from Inside your Engine?

Question: I have pulled the back plate from my engine and I can see rust on the back of the crankshaft and on the rear bearing. Is it OK to run the engine like this? If not, how can I remove the rust?

Answer: It is not a good idea to run the engine until the rust has been removed. The rust is very difficult to completely remove without disassembling the engine but you can do a reasonable job with Pacer After Run Oil and Pacer Degreaser. Commercial rust removers have been used but can cause problems with gaskets, O-Rings and aluminum so we do not recommend commercial rust removers unless you completely disassemble the engine.

Better Answer: Rust does two things, it erodes and pits the smooth surfaces of the crankshaft and bearings and rust flakes off as a gritty abrasive when the engine is operated next. Once the rust has formed there is nothing much you can do about the damage that has already been done to the surfaces. However, the damage may not be critical if caught early. The important thing is to remove what rust you can before it flakes off and works its way through the engine as an abrasive.

Remove the prop nut, prop washer and thrust washer so you can see the front bearing. Use Pacer Degreaser to clean out the engine. Read the cautions on the can. Work outdoors and wear eye protection and gloves. Spray the degreaser inside the crankcase first while holding the engine slightly nose high so that as you spray the back of the crankshaft and the rear bearing, the excess degreaser washes back and flows out the back of the engine.  This will knock loose and carry away some of the rust. Then hold the engine nose down and spray the front bearing. Let the engine dry.

Once the engine has dried off, thoroughly douse the rear bearing, front bearing and crankshaft with After Run oil. Drip after run oil into the rear bearing from the back of the crankcase, into the crankshaft area through the carb inlet and into the front bearing from the front of the engine. Rotate the engine by hand 2 times and then flush all of the oil away using the Degreaser again. Flush thoroughly and let dry.

Repeat this process three times, each time rotating the engine by hand for a greater number of rotations. What you are doing here is using lots of lubricant as you rotate the engine and flake off rust. The loose rust ends up in the lubricant and then carried away as you flush with degreaser.

Lubricate the engine again with plenty of After Run oil. Let it sit a day or so before operating. Rotate the engine by hand 10-15 times and then flush one more time with Degreaser and let dry. Apply plenty of After Run oil, reinstall the back plate, thrust washer, prop washer and nut. Rotate the engine 2-3 times by hand.

You can now run the engine. This process won't undo any damage that the rust has already done but it will help to reduce the amount of rust in the engine and the abrasive action of the rust as it flakes off.

From this point on, make sure you use After Run Oil after each day of operation. See your Owners Manual for maintenance and cleaning information and review our Rust Prevention tips and our tips for long term storage of your engine.  

14.23. Rust - Why is it Bad? How to Prevent it?

Question: Why is Rust a problem in Glow Engines: How can it be prevented?

Answer: Rust reduces the power and life of your engine. To inhibit the formation of rust remove all methanol from your engine and use After Run Oil after each day of flying.

Better Answer: Glow fuel consists primarily of methanol, lubricant and nitromethane. Methanol attracts water vapour. This water vapour condenses into water  inside your engine which in turn will cause rust to form on the steel parts of your engine such as the crankshaft and bearings.

Rust does two things, it erodes and pits the smooth surfaces of the crankshaft and bearings and it flakes off as a gritty abrasive when the engine is operated next. The erosion of the surfaces reduces RPM and increases heat and load on the surfaces. The loose rust that flakes off as a gritty abrasive induces wear on all the moving parts including the piston and sleeve. The end result is that RUST reduces performance (RPM and power) and reduces the life of the engine and leads to premature component failure. Bearings are particularly susceptible to failure caused by Rust. Crankshaft front bearing leakage and in particular crankshaft to conrod pin failure are also common problems caused by rust.

There are two simple things you can do to inhibit the formation of rust in your engine:

1) Avoid leaving methanol in your engine.

When you stop using your VMAX engine for the day, run the engine dry by pinching the fuel line feeding the carburetor and let the engine run out of fuel. This will burn up most of the methanol in your engine.

2) Use After Run Oil in your engine after each day of use.

Remove the glow plug and carefully put 6-10 drops of Afterrun Oil (Pacer After Run recommended) into the combustion chamber and another 6-10 drops into the carburetor inlet. Turn the engine over by hand 10 times. Reinstall the glow plug, close the carb and insert a small plug of wadded paper towel into the carburetor intake.

If you are not planning on using your engine for a while please see following information about storage of your engine:

 

Engine Storage - Preparation - Strongly Recommended

Question: I am not planning on using my engine for a period of time. What should I do before stroring it?

Answer: Remove all methanol from the Engine. Apply a generous amount of After Run oil. Turn the engine over by hand to ensure the After Run Oil works its way to all components. Seal the engine in a plastic bag.

Better Answer: Remove the glow plug and carefully put 6-10 drops of Afterrun Oil (Pacer After Run recommended) into the combustion chamber and another 6-10 drops into the carburetor inlet. Turn the engine over by hand 10 times. Do this a second time...  apply another 6-10 drops of After Run Oil into the carb inlet and combustion chamber... turn the engine over by hand 10 more times. Finally put the engine into a plastic bag, squeeze the air out of the bag and seal it.

 

15. Technical Information - VMAX Engines (Glow) - Product by Product
15.1. VMX-46PRO & VMX 52PRO ABC Engines w/Ball Bearings
15.1.1. 46PRO & 52PRO - Documentation

Please see the attached PDF documents related to this engine. File names indicate the nature of the document.

VMAX Engines - Documents - Common to Many Engines
These documents are common to many or all VMAX Engines and are in addition to other information that may be specific to a particular engine.
15.1.2. 46PRO - Crankshaft Type - Differences in Production of VMX-46PRO

The VMX-46PRO Engine was first produced in September of 2002 and released to the North and South American markets in November. Some engines may have been introduced in Australia beginning in October 2002.

The engine remains largely unchanged as of May 2004 with production changes limited primarily to the crankshaft, front bearing and drive washer system.

There have been three different crankshafts used in the VMX-46PRO since inception.

All three crankshafts have the same 1/4 x 28 NF thread and use the same prop nut and prop washer. The drive washer (behind the prop) is different in some cases and so is the front bearing. The following information helps to identify the crankshaft type and the drive washer and front bearing that matches each of the different types of crankshafts. The most easily identifiable feature of each crankshaft is shown below in italic type.

Type A Crankshaft - Part #VXR-462050A
-  Used in production until approximately Sept-Oct 2003.
- Has a 7mm outside diameter (OD) where it passes through the front bearing.
- Is silver  in color on the back face and the back face has notches that run through the entire back disc.

Type B Crankshaft - Part #VXR-462050B
- Used in production from Sept-Oct 2003 through approximately Nov-Dec 2003
- Has a 8mm outside diameter (OD) where it passes through the front bearing
- Is black in color on the back face and the back face has notches that run only partially through the back disc

Type C Crankshaft - Part #VXR-462050C
- Use in production beginning in Dec 2003
- Has a 8mm outside diameter (OD) where it passes through the front bearing
-
Has two flat shoulders  just ahead of the front bearing to engage with the thrust washer
- Is black or silver in color on the back face and the back face has notches that run through the entire back disc

The differences in Crankshafts also are matched with some changes to the front bearing and drive washer.

Type A CrankShaft with OD 7mm - #VXR-462050A
- requires Type A Front Bearing with inside diameter (ID) 7mm - #VXR-462055A
- requires Type A Drive Washer (cone shape inside) - #VXR-462070A

Type B Crankshaft OD 8mm - #VXR-462050B
- requires Type B Front Bearing with ID 8mm - #VXR-462055B
- requires Type B Drive Washer (cone shape inside) - #VXR-462070B

Type C Crankshaft OD 8mm with shoulders - #VXR-462050C
- requires Type B Front Bearing with ID 8mm - #VXR-462055B
- requires Type C Drive Washer with flats to engage with shaft shoulders - VXR-462070C 

15.1.3. 52PRO - Crankshaft Type - Differences in Production of VMX-52PRO

The VMX-52PRO Engine was first produced in September of 2003 and released to the North and South American markets in November 2003. Some engines may have been introduced in Australia beginning in October 2003.

The engine remains largely unchanged as of June 2004 with production changes limited primarily to the crankshaft, front bearing and drive washer system.

There have been three different crankshafts used in the VMX-52PRO since inception.

All three crankshafts have the same 1/4 x 28 NF thread and use the same prop nut and prop washer. The drive washer (behind the prop) is different in some cases and so is the front bearing. The following information helps to identify the crankshaft type and the drive washer and front bearing that matches each of the different types of crankshafts. The most easily identifiable feature of each crankshaft is shown below in italic type.

Type A Crankshaft - Part #VXR-462050A
 -  Used in first production lot until approximately Oct-Nov 2003.
- Has a 7mm outside diameter (OD) where it passes through the front bearing.
- Is silver  in color on the back face and the back face has notches that run through the entire back disc.

Type B Crankshaft - Part #VXR-462050B
- Used in production from Oct-Nov 2003 through approximately Feb-March 2004
- Has a 8mm outside diameter (OD) where it passes through the front bearing
- Is black in color on the back face and the back face has notches that run only partially through the back disc

Type C Crankshaft - Part #VXR-462050C
- Use in production beginning in March 2004
- Has a 8mm outside diameter (OD) where it passes through the front bearing
-
Has two flat shoulders  just ahead of the front bearing to engage with the thrust washer
- Is black or silver in color on the back face and the back face has notches that run through the entire back disc

The differences in Crankshafts also are matched with some changes to the front bearing and drive washer.

Type A CrankShaft with OD 7mm - #VXR-462050A
- requires Type A Front Bearing with inside diameter (ID) 7mm - #VXR-462055A
- requires Type A Drive Washer (cone shape inside) - #VXR-462070A

Type B Crankshaft OD 8mm - #VXR-462050B
- requires Type B Front Bearing with ID 8mm - #VXR-462055B
- requires Type B Drive Washer (cone shape inside) - #VXR-462070B

Type C Crankshaft OD 8mm with shoulders - #VXR-462050C
- requires Type B Front Bearing with ID 8mm - #VXR-462055B
- requires Type C Drive Washer with flats to engage with shaft shoulders - VXR-462070C 

15.1.4. 46PRO & 52PRO - Carb Barrel Jammed or Stiff when trying to change throttle position.

Question: When I try to change the throttle setting I find that the throttle barrel is very stiff or jammed in position. What is causing this and how do I resolve it?

Answer: This does not occur often but can occur when any sort of debris gets into the carb and lodges between the rotating barrel and the carb body or in the slot that is located in the rotating barrel into which the idle stop screw engages. It can also occur when debris scores the barrel or carb body or the edges of the idle stop screw slot.

It most cases it is resolveable while in some cases it requires parts replacement.

Procedure:

First of all make sure that the servo and control linkage between the servo and the carburetor are moving fully and freely.

Secondly make sure the prop is balanced and that you do not have a vibration problem. We have seen out of balance props cause extreme vibration that will cause the carburetor rotating barrel to oscillate rapidly and jam the barrel.

If these preliminary checks do not solve your problem you will need to inspect your carburetor more carefully as follows:

Please read these instructions from beginning to end twice before taking any action.

a) Consult the Owners Manual and Read Me First sheet which came with your engine. If you have misplaced these documents you can download a copy of the manual from the support section at www.richmondrc.com. See the VMAX section of our Knowledge Base.

b) Consult the exploded 3 Views in the Owners Manual (usually found on Page 6).

c) Loosen the cinch bolt nut (see 2090) and remove the carburetor.

d) Apply oil or after run oil to the carb rotating barrel.

e) Remove the idle stop screw (see 3080). Examine the end of the screw carefully. It should not have any burrs or nicks. If the end of the screw is irregular in shape or damaged in any way the screw will need to be replaced.

f) Carefully remove the carburetor rotating barrel complete with throttle arm. (see 3040). Watch for and retain the spring (see 3030). Take note of which way the spring is tapered and how it is positioned.

g) Carefully examine the rotating barrel and the carburetor body. Remove any debris. If the carb body or rotating barrel or the slot in the barrel for the idle stop screw are scored or have damage to their surfaces the carb and/or barrel will need to be replaced.

h) Flush the hole where the idle stop screw goes. Make sure no debris remains.

i) Reassemble the carburetor after applying Pacer After Run oil or other thin oil to the parts. Make sure the spring (3030) is inserted correctly.

j) Carefully screw in the idle stop screw.

k) Test for easy rotation via the throttle arm.

If after cleaning out any debris and carefully reassembling the carburetor, the problem persists, the carburetor or at least the parts noted above, will need to be replaced.

15.1.5. 46PRO & 52PRO - Glow Plug - Type and Length

Question: What type and length glow plug should I use in my VMAX 46PRO or 52PRO?

Answer: The 46PRO and 52PRO require a good quality RC Long glow plug. By "RC" we mean intended for use with a carburetor that provides for remote control and variable throttle settings ranging from idle to 100% power. Most RC plugs have an idle bar to prevent fuel from splashing on the glow plug coil at low RPM when idling.
 
15.1.6. 46PRO & 52PRO - Idle Stop Screw Threads - Appear Stripped on End

Question: The Idle Stop screw (#VXR-463080 which is #3080 in the exploded 3 view in the Owners Manual) appears to have stripped threads at the non-head end of the screw. Is this normal?

Answer: Yes

Better Answer: The screw is threaded first and then turned down (made thinner) on the non-head end to engage smoothly in the slot in the throttle barrel. The turned down portion is narrower than the threaded portion. Some appearance of threads may remain after the screw has been turned down. This is normal and does not indicate stripped threads.

15.1.7. 46PRO & 52PRO - Low Speed Mix Factory Setting for adjustment Screw.

Question: I have inadvertently adjusted the low speed mixture to the point that I am not happy with where I ended up. I want to return to the original factory setting and then work from there but I forgot to take note of the original setting. Can you tell me the original factory setting for the low speed mixture screw on a VMAX 52PRO?

Answer: Yes. Here are some tips to help with this.

a) Please review carefully the owners manual that came with your engine. Look for the section related to adjusting the low speed mixture. As of  20020719 this was sections 6.9 and 6.10. Read these sections over carefully and them read them again. Do not proceed until you have read these sections AND have met the conditions stated therein. In particular note that you should not be mucking with the low speed mixture screw until you have broken in the engine to the degree specified in the owners manual. Mucking with the low speed mixture screw too early is a waste of time and will cause you a bunch of grief and aggravation for nothing.

b) After reading the sections of the owners manual related to adjusting the low speed mixture, if you want to return the low speed mixture adjustment screw to its original factory location, please do the following:

  • Rotate the screw clockwise so that it moves into the carburetor while counting the rotations until the screw becomes tight to turn. Do NOT OVER TIGHTEN... once the screw is snug and does not want to turn, STOP. This is not a tractor and there are no points given for brawn here... stop turning when the screw starts to get snug.
  • Now turn the screw counter-clockwise so that it starts to back out of the carburetor.
    • Rotate the screw and count four (4) full turns for a 46PRO, or
    • Rotate the screw and count three (3) full turns for a 52PRO

Thats it. You are more or less back to the original factory setting.

15.1.8. 46PRO & 52PRO - Muffler Bolts Hard to Tighten - Threads Rough

Question: The muffler bolts in my engine are hard to turn. I have been careful not to cross thread the bolts where they engage with the muffler. The threads on the bolts appear to be incompatible with the threads in the muffler. What is going on here?

Answer: There may be a bit of residual finishing residue in the muffler threads. The threads in the muffler holes and on the bolts are correct. Remove the residue and the bolts will work fine.

Better Answer: The muffler front section is a cast component. After the two muffler bolt holes are drilled and the threads tapped, the front section is sand blasted and treated during a finishing process. Some residue from the finishing process may be in the muffler bolt hole threads. To remove this residue simply quirt a bit of oil into the muffler holes and apply a bit of oil to one of the muffler bolts. Screw the bolt into the muffler hole about 1-2 turns and then back it out. Clean off the oil from the bolt with a paper towel and then apply a bit more clean oil. Screw the bolt back into the muffler, this time about 3-4 turns. Back it out. Clean it off, reapply oil and screw it back in about 5-6 turns. Repeat this process until you have cleared the residue from the muffler bolt holes.

15.1.9. 46PRO & 52PRO - Muffler Center Bolt - How do I keep this Tight?

Question: The muffler on the VMAX 46PRO and 52PRO has a long bolt that runs through the muffler from end to end. It has a nut on each end. This sometimes loosens up. How do I keep this bolt tight?

Answer: Install a lock washer and thread locker such as Pacer Z42 to each end of the muffler bolt and re-tighten the retaining nuts.

Better Answer: 2 Stroke engines vibrate by nature of their compression cycle and unbalanced reciprocating mass. If you have an unbalanced prop and/or spinner the vibration is even worse. This vibration is accentuated in the muffler due to it's low mass and the extended offset distance from the source of the vibration. Nuts and bolts in mufflers may loosen due to this high level of vibration. To prevent the nuts and bolts from loosening, balance your prop and spinner, install lock washers on the bolts and use Pacer Z42 thread locker on the nuts and bolts. Check frequently for tightness.

15.1.10. 46PRO & 52PRO - Muffler Distance from Engine - How to Increase It?
Question: My aircraft has a tapered nose the flairs out quite broadly around and aft of the firewall. When I try to install my muffler on the engine the exhaust nozzle end of the muffler contacts the fuselage and I cannot tighten the muffler firmly to the engine. What can I do about this?
 
Answer: The easiest solution to try first is to install a spacer between the engine exhaust stack and the intake of the muffler. We offer a 10mm spacer specifically for the VMAX 46PRO & 52PRO. This is part number VXR-46400010. We recommend only using one such spacer. Ganging spacers up will increase the space but runs the risk of inducing vibration and extra torque on the engine exhaust stack which can damage the engine crankcase.
15.1.11. 46PRO & 52PRO - Muffler Front Portion Only - Is it Available as a Part?

Question: I need the front portion of the Muffler only. All the rest of the muffler is fine... I just need the front portion. The 3 view diagram and parts list show the muffler itself and the rear portion but do not show the front portion. Is the front portion available as a part?

Answer: Yes it is part #VXR-464020F

Better Answer: Yes it is available as part #VXR-464020F. This does not include the muffler bolts, the long "hold it together" bolt, fuel nipple or muffler to manifold gasket or the muffler extension. These parts from the original muffler can all be transferred over to a new front portion.  

15.1.12. 46PRO & 52PRO - Muffler Gasket Only - Is it Available as a Part?

Question: I need the gasket that goes between the muffler and the crankcase exhaust manifold. This came with my engine originally and I have damaged it. It appeared to be made from thin aluminum. The 3 view diagram and parts list do not show this gasket.  Is the muffler to crankcase gasket available as a part?

Answer: Yes it is part #VXR-464000G

Better Answer: Yes it is available as part #VXR-464000G. It is stamped from thin aluminum and like most gaskets it must be handled carefully when installing.

15.1.13. 46PRO & 52PRO - Muffler Loose on Engine - How to Tighten it up?

Question: I am not using the muffler extension that came with my engine. I have installed the muffler directly to the engine crankcase exhaust manifold but I am having trouble getting the muffler to fit tightly. What can I do about this?

Answer: Place two washers under each muffler bolt and retighten the bolts.

Better Answer: When you are using the muffler without the extension, the bolt holes in some of the mufflers may not be quite deep enough to accomodate the full length of the threaded bolt. This is not common but has been found in some mufflers. The fix is easy. Simply install two small washers beneath the head of the muffler bolts to reduce the effective length of the muffler bolt. Re-install the muffler bolts and tighten snugly. Do not overtighten the muffler bolts or you will strip the muffler holes or the bolts themselves.

15.1.14. 46PRO & 52PRO - Needle Valve - Does it have a Hole in the Knurled End with a Set Screw in the side?

Question: Does the needle value in the VMAX 46PRO and 52PRO support the fitting of an extension rod to allow remote adjusting of the needle valve from a distance or from outside a cowl?

Answer: Yes it does. There is a hole in the big knurled end that accomodate a piece of piano wire or other stiff rod and a hex head set screw in the side of the needle valve to retain the rod.

15.1.15. 46PRO & 52PRO - Nitro Concentration - What is the max % I should use.

Question: How much Nitro can I use in my VMAX 46PRO or 52PRO?

Answer: The 46PRO and 52PRO run well on 5% Nitro. The maximum recommended is 10%.

Better Answer: Using more than 10% nitro in the 46PRO or 52PRO is not recommended. Please review the instructions. Using more than 10% nitro will generate less power than 10% and generate more heat and lead to premature wear and engine failure. The VMAX 46PRO and 52PRO has been designed to give maximum power and longevity using 10% nitro or less.

15.1.16. 46PRO & 52PRO - Oil Concentration - What is the min % & type I should use.

Question: How much oil and what type of oil should  I use in my VMAX 46PRO or 52PRO?

Answer: The 46PRO and 52PRO should use fuel having no less than 18% total oil and the oil should be blend of synthetic and castor oil.

Better Answer: Using less than 18% oil in fuel supplied to a VMAX 46PRO or 52PRO will result in overheating, premature wear and engine failure. Using pure castor oil is OK. Using pure synthetic oil is NOT OK. The best oil mix is 19-20% total oil and the oil should be a blend of synthetic and castor oil.

Use commercial brand name fuel. Stay AWAY from home brew, old or brands of fuel that are not common in the marketplace. If facing a choice between a fuel that has a bit more oil and costs a bit more... go with the richer oil package for a buck or two more. A gallon of fuel lasts a long time and it is simply not worth risking what you are putting in the air to save a few bucks. Skip one burger a month and use the extra cash for good fuel!

15.1.17. 46PRO & 52PRO - Power - How Much?

Question: How much power do the VMAX 46PRO and VMAX 52PRO put out?

Answer: The approximate power output rating of the VMAX 46PRO and VMAX 52PRO are as follows:

  • 46PRO 1.46HP @ 16000
  • 52PRO 1.65HP @ 16000

 

15.1.18. 46PRO & 52PRO - Weights & Sizes - Is the 52PRO Heavier and Bigger?

Question: How much does the 46PRO weigh? Is the 52PRO heavier? Is the 52PRO bigger? What are the dimensions of each?

Answer: The 46PRO and 52PRO are the same size and they both weigh as follows:

  • Engine without muffler 13.6 oz (386 grams)
  • Muffler 4oz (114 grams)
  • Engine with Muffler 17.6 oz (500 grams)

These weights are accurate to within +- 5%.

Better Answer: The 52PRO is based on the 46PRO. It uses the same crankcase. They are the same size physically and are bolt compatible. If a 46PRO fits, so will the 52PRO. The crankcase of the 52PRO has been bored out. The cylinder and piston of the 52PRO are slightly larger in diameter. The result is that the two engines are exactly the same physical size and weigh practically the same with the 52PRO weighing 1-2 grams less.

For people who like to buy in big volume... a case of 24 engines weighs approximately 39 lbs (18 kg) and measures 20.5x15x15in. (807x381x381mm). Case volume is 2.67 cubic feet (.1171 cbm).

The Operating Manual that comes with the each engine includes an Exploded 3-View and a case dimensions chart for reference. This manual can also be downloaded from http://www.richmondrc.com/vma/vmax.htm.

 

 

15.2. VMX-61PRO ABC Engine w/Ball Bearings
15.2.1. VMAX 61PRO - Documentation
Please see the attached PDF documents related to this engine. File names indicate the nature of the document.
VMAX Engines - Documents - Common to Many Engines
These documents are common to many or all VMAX Engines and are in addition to other information that may be specific to a particular engine.
15.2.2. 61PRO - Low Speed Mix Factory Setting for adjustment Screw.

Question: I have inadvertently adjusted the low speed mixture to the point that I am not happy with where I ended up. I want to return to the original factory setting and then work from there but I forgot to take note of the original setting. Can you tell me the original factory setting for the low speed mixture screw on a VMAX 61PRO?

Answer: Yes. Here are some tips to help with this.

a) Please review carefully the owners manual that came with your engine. Look for the section related to adjusting the low speed mixture. As of  20071201 this was sections 6.9 and 6.10. Read these sections over carefully and them read them again. Do not proceed until you have read these sections AND have met the conditions stated therein. In particular note that you should not be mucking with the low speed mixture screw until you have broken in the engine to the degree specified in the owners manual. Mucking with the low speed mixture screw too early is a waste of time and will cause you a bunch of grief and aggravation for nothing.

b) After reading the sections of the owners manual related to adjusting the low speed mixture, if you want to return the low speed mixture adjustment screw to its original factory location, please do the following:

  • Rotate the screw clockwise so that it moves into the carburetor while counting the rotations until the screw becomes tight to turn. Do NOT OVER TIGHTEN... once the screw is snug and does not want to turn, STOP. This is not a tractor and there are no points given for brawn here... stop turning when the screw starts to get snug.
  • Now turn the screw counter-clockwise so that it starts to back out of the carburetor.
    • Rotate the screw and count one and a quarter (1-1/4) full turns for a 61PRO

Thats it. You are more or less back to the original factory setting.

15.3. VMX-91PRO ABC Engine w/Ball Bearings
15.3.1. VMAX 91PRO - Documentation
Please see the attached PDF documents related to this engine. File names indicate the nature of the document.
VMAX Engines - Documents - Common to Many Engines
These documents are common to many or all VMAX Engines and are in addition to other information that may be specific to a particular engine.
15.4. VMAX Pitts Style Mufflers - Information, Dimensions etc
15.4.1. Pitts Style Mufflers - Dimensions

Question: What are the dimensions of the VMAR Pitts Style Mufflers?

Answer: Please see the attached PDF's of the labels from the packaging. These labels contain a diagram and the specifications for each muffler. The MF126 is the 45 size muffler... the MF6090 is the 60-90 size muffler.

15.4.2. Pitts Style Mufflers - Do They Fit all .46-.52 Size Engines?

Question: Do the VMA Pitts Style Mufflers fit all .46-.52 Engines?

Answer: No

Better Answer: The VMA Pitts Style Mufflers fit the VMAX .46PRO and the VMAX .52 PRO engines and most popular engines of this size. They do not fit some of the off brand engines that do not have a standard exhaust manifold.

 

Pitts Style Mufflers - Dimensions

Question: What are the dimensions of the VMAR Pitts Style Mufflers?

Answer: Please see the attached PDF's of the labels from the packaging. These labels contain a diagram and the specifications for each muffler. The MF126 is the 45 size muffler... the MF6090 is the 60-90 size muffler.

15.4.3. Pitts Style Mufflers - Upgraded Fit & Finish - Silver Color

Question: Has the VMAX Pitts Style Muffler been upgraded? If so, what changed and how can I tell an upgraded muffler from earlier production?

Answer: Yes in mid 2004 the VMAX Pitts Style Muffler was upgraded. These are sold as stand alone mufflers to fit most popular 46-52 and 61 size engines AND provided at no charge per various special offers.

Here is what changed: 

  • The fit and finish was greatly improved.
  • The production of the crankcase mounting flange was moved to an automated process to improve the consistency of flatness, fit, spacing between mounting holes and the bolt hole threads.
  • A new high temperature plating process was implemented.
  • The exterior color was changed from black to silver.
  • In early 2005 a logo was impressed into the product.